PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT

MBA (FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT)

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
KARAIKUDI – 630 003
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT

MBA FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

a) PROGRAMME MISSION AND OBJECTIVES

Business Studies have fascinated humans for two reasons, namely generating interest and
augmenting essentials of running a firm effectively. That is why their study is enchanting and
glorifying. The primary objective of this programme is to provide ample exposure to subjects
from the fields of business legacy and accountancy, equip the Students for entry level jobs in
industry and to contribute to the economic development of the country.

b) RELEVANCE OF THE PROGRAMME WITH HEI’S MISSION AND GOALS:

The Alagappa University is functioning with following Vision and Mission:

Mission: Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular emphasis on

‘‘PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and Learning

Vision: Affording High Quality Higher Education to the learners so that they are transformed
into intellectually competent human resources that will help in the uplift of the nation to
Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence.

Therefore, the introduction of MBA FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT programme in the

Directorate of Distance Education will contribute substantially in fulfilling the mission of
Alagappa University. Such a higher education in subject with appropriate Practical Exposer
will enrich the human resources for the uplift of the Nation to Educational, Social,
Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence (ESTEEM).

c) NATURE OF PROSPECTIVE TARGET GROUP OF LEARNERS

• Working Professionals
• Entrepreneurs
• Service Personnel
• Academic Faculty
• Government Officials
• Researchers
• Home makers
• Unemployed Graduates
d) APPROPRIATENESS OF PROGRAMME

To Attain Leadership in spearheading qualitative and responsible academic programs relevant

to the society through cost effective off-campus distance mode of education. knowledge and
understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes in the following areas:

• The fundamental concepts of Management

• The higher-level taxonomy and diversity of Business Studies.
• How principles of Business can be applied to problems
• Internship training in Industry
• Undertake Inter tasks and techniques.
• Inter-disciplinary knowledge like statistics, Mathematics, Computer and E-Banking.
• Using the SPSS package for the analysis of data
• It also improves the Intellectual skills of the students.
• In nutshell, these skills will improve the performance of the students parameters.
E) INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN
MBA FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

M.B.AG Title CIA ESE TOT C

Max. Max. Max.
I Semester
35711 Management – Principles and Practices 25 75 100 4
35712 Organizational Behaviour 25 75 100 4
35713 Managerial Economics 25 75 100 4
35714 Quantitative Techniques 25 75 100 4
35715 Financial and Management Accounting 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
II Semester
35721 Research Methods 25 75 100 4
35722 Business Environment 25 75 100 4
35723 Business Laws 25 75 100 4
35724 Management Information System 25 75 100 4
35725 Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20

III Semester
35731 Marketing Management 25 75 100 4
35732 Financial Management 25 75 100 4
35733 Management Fund 25 75 100 4
35734 Investment Analysis and Portfolio 25 75 100 4
Management
35735 Financial Services and Institutions 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
IV Semester
35741 Foreign Exchange Management 25 75 100 4
35742 Multinational Financial Management 25 75 100 4
35743 Project Finance 25 75 100 4
35744 Investment and Derivatives Market 25 75 100 4
35745 Growth Management 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
Grand Total 2000 80
Course Code Legend:
3 5 7 Y Z

357- M.B.A Programme

Y -Semester Number
Z- Course Number in the Semester

CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total, C:
Credit Points, Max.: Maximum

No. of Credits per Course (Theory) - 5 Total No. of Credits per Semester- 20
Total Credits for the Programme- 20 X 4 = 80
 35711- MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES

Objectives:
• To introduce the basic concepts of Management functions and principles
• To learn the scientific decision making and modern trend in the management process
• To understand the contemporary practices and issues in management

UNIT 1 Management: Definition – Nature, Scope and Functions – Evolution of

Management – Management thought in modern trend – Patterns of the
management analysis – Management Vs. Administration - Management and
Society: The external Environment, Social Responsibility and Ethics.

UNIT 2 Management Science and Theories : Contributions of FW Taylor, Henri Fayol,

Elton Mayo, Roethilisberger, H.A.Simon and P.F Drucker - Universality of
Management - Relevance of management to different types of organization.

UNIT 3 Planning: Nature and Purpose – Principles and planning premises –

Components of planning as Vision, Mission, Objectives, Managing By
Objective (MBO) Strategies, Types and Policies -Planning and Decision
Making: Planning process.

UNIT 4 Decision making: Meanings and Types – Decision-making Process under

Conditions of Certainty and Uncertainty – Rational Decision Making
Strategies, Procedures, Methods, Rules, Projects and Budgets.

UNIT 5 Organizing: Nature, Importance, Principles, purpose and Scope - Organizing

functions of management – Classifications of organization – Principles and
theories of organization – Effective Organizing – Organizational Culture and
Global Organizing.

UNIT 6 Organizational Structure – Departmentalization – Span of control – Line and

staff functions – Formal and Informal Groups in Organizations - Authority and
responsibility - Centralization and decentralization – Delegation of authority –
Committees – Informal organization.

UNIT 7 Staffing: General Principles of Staffing- Importance, techniques, Staff

authority and Empowerment in the organization – Selection and Recruitment -
Orientation - Career Development - Career stages – Training – Performance
Appraisal.

UNIT 8 Creativity and Innovation – Motivation - Meaning – Importance – Human

factors of Motivation – Motivation Theories: Maslow, Herzberg, Mc Gregor
(X&Y), Ouchi (Z) ,Vroom, Porter-Lawler, McClelland and Adam –
Physiological and psychological aspects of motivation .

UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:

Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,
Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.
 Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics and
Ethics. Leader Vs. Manager.

UNIT 10 Communications: Meaning – Types – Process – Communication in the

decision making – Global Leading - Effective communication in the levels of
management. – Uses of Communication to Planning, Organizing, coordinating
and controlling.

UNIT 11 Co-ordination: Concept; Meaning, Characteristics, Importance in the

organization, Co-ordination process and principles - Techniques of Effective
co-ordination in the organization - Understanding and managing the group
process.

UNIT 12 Business ethics: Relevance of values in Management; Holistic approach for

managers indecision-making; Ethical Management: Role of organizational
culture in ethics – Ethics Committee in the organization.

UNIT 13 Controlling: Objectives and Process of control Devices of control – Integrated

control – Special control techniques- Contemporary - Perspectives in Device
of Controls

UNIT 14 New Perspectives in Management - Strategic alliances – Core competence –

Business process reengineering – Total quality management – Six Sigma-
Benchmarking- Balanced Score-card.

REFERENCES

1. Stoner, et-al, Management, Prentice Hall, 1989.

2. Koontz and O’Donnell, Management: A Systems Approach, McGraw Hill, 1990
3. Weihrich and Koontz,Management: A Global Perspective, McGraw Hill, 1988
4. Peter F. Drucker, Management, 2008.
5. Gene Burton and Manab Thakur, Management Today: Principles and Practice, Tata
McGraw Hill.
6. Ricky W. Griffin, Management, South-WesternCollege Publications, 2010
7. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, Management, 9th Edition, 2006.
8. Kaplan and Norton, The Strategy-Focused Organization: How Balanced Scorecard
Companies Thrive in the New Business Environment, HBP, 2000.
 35712 - ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Objectives:
• To understand the personality trades and influence on the organization.
• To imbibe the necessary conceptual understanding of behaviour related people
• To learn the modern trends, theories and changes in organizational Behaviour.

UNIT 1 Organizational Behaviour: History – Meaning Elements – Evolution,

Challenges and opportunities – Trends – disciplines – Approaches – Models –
Management functions relevance to organizational Behaviour – Global
Emergence of OB as a discipline.

UNIT 2 Personality – Determinants, Structure, Behaviour, Assessment, Individual

Behaviour: Personality & Attitudes- Development of personality – Nature and
dimensions of attitude – Trait Theory – Organizational fit – Organizational
Commitment

UNIT 3 Emotions – Emotional Intelligence – Implications of Emotional Intelligence on

Managers – EI as Managerial tool – EI performance in the organization –
Attitudes: Definitions – Meaning – Attitude relationship with behaviour –
Types – Consistency

UNIT 4 Individual Behaviour and process of the organization: Learning, Emotions,

Attitudes, Perception, Motivation, Ability, Job satisfaction, Personality, Stress
and its Management – Problem solving and Decision making – Interpersonal
Communication - Relevance to organizational behaviour.

UNIT 5 Group Behaviour: Group Dynamics - Theories of Group Formation - Formal

and Informal Groups in organization and their interaction - Group norms –
Group cohesiveness – Team: Importance and Objectives - Formation of teams
– Team Work- Group dynamics – Issues - Their relevance to organizational
behaviour.

UNIT 6 Organizational Power: Organizational Power: Definition, Nature,

Characteristics - Types of powers - Sources of Power - Effective use of power
– Limitations of Power – Power centre in Organization.

UNIT 7 Organizational Politics: Definition – Political behaviour in organization -

Factors creating political behaviour – Personality and Political Behaviour -
Techniques of managing politics in organization – Impact of organizational
politics.

UNIT 8 Organizational Conflict Management: Stress Management: Meaning – Types –

Sources and strategies resolve conflict – Consequences – Organizational
conflict: Constructive and Destructive conflicts - Conflict Process - Strategies
for encouraging constructive conflict - Strategies for resolving destructive
conflict.
 UNIT 9 Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Dynamics – Organizational
Efficiency, Effectiveness and Excellence: Meaning and Approaches – Factors
affecting the organizational Climate.

UNIT 10 Organizational Culture: Meaning, significance – Theories – Organizational

Climate – Creation, Maintenance and Change of Organizational Culture –
Impact of organizational culture on strategies – Issues in Organizational
Culture.

UNIT 11 Inter personal Communication: Essentials, Networks, Communication

technologies – Non-Verbal communications Barriers – Strategies to overcome
the barriers. Behavioral Communication in organization - Uses to Business

UNIT 12 Organizational Change: Meaning, Nature and Causes of organizational change

Organizational Change –Importance – Stability Vs Change – Proactive Vs.
Reaction change – the change process – Resistance to change – Managing
change.

UNIT 13 Organizational Behaviour responses to Global and Cultural diversity,

challenges at international level, Homogeneity and heterogeneity of National
cultures, Differences between countries.

UNIT 14 Organizational Development: Meaning, Nature and scope – Features of OD –

OD Interventions- Role of OD – Problems and Process of OD – process OD
and Process of Intervention - Challenges to OD- Learning Organizations -
Organizational effectiveness Developing Gender sensitive workplace

REFERENCES

1. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2006.

2. Stephen P. Robbins, Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall; 2010
3. Keith Davis, Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work, McGraw Hill, 2010
4. Griffin and Moorhead, Organizational Behavior: Managing People and Organizations,
2006.
5. Judith R. Gordon, Organizational Behavior: A Diagnostic, Prentice Hall, 2001.
6. K. Aswathappa, Organizational Behaviour, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai, 2010
7. Judith R. Gordon, A Diagnostic Approach to Organizational Behaviour, Allyn &
Bacon, 1993.
 35713 - MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
Objectives:
• To understand the economic principles and its applications in business
• To develop economics based analytic skills for business
• To make the learners to strong in economical approach

UNIT 1 Economics: Introduction – Meaning, nature and scope of Managerial

Economics – General Foundations of managerial Economics – Economic
Approach – Working of Economic system - Circular flow activities -
Economics & Business Decisions - Relationship between Economic theory
and Managerial Economics.

UNIT 2 Business Decisions: Role of managerial Economics in Decision making –

Decision making under Risk and Uncertainty - Concepts of Opportunity cost, -
Production possibility curve – Incremental Concepts - Cardinal and Ordinal
approaches to consumer Behaviour Time Value of Money –

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour: Marginalism – Equilibrium and Equi-marginalism and

their role in business decision making. – Equi-Marginal principles – Utility
analysis – Total and Marginal Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility –
Marshallian approach and Indifference curve analysis.

UNIT 4 Demand analysis: Meaning, Functions - Determinants of demand-Law of

Demand – Demand Estimation and Forecasting - Applications of demand in
analysis - Elasticity of Demand: Types, Measures and Role in Business
Decisions.

UNIT 5 Supply Analysis: Determinants of supply- Elasticity of Supply- Measures and

Significance - Derivations of market demand – Demand Estimation and Fore
casting- Demand and Supply equilibrium – Giffen Paradox

UNIT 6 Production Functions: Managerial uses of production function - Cobb-Douglas

and other production functions - Isoquants – Short run and long run
production function – Theory of production – Empirical estimations of
production functions.

UNIT 7 Forms of Markets: Meaning and Characteristics - Market Equilibrium:

Practical Importance, Market Equilibrium and Changes in Market Equilibrium.
Pricing Functions: Market Structures - Pricing and output decisions under
different competitive conditions: Monopoly Monopolistic completion and
Oligopoly

UNIT 8 Strategic Behaviour of the firms and Game Theory - Nash Equilibrium:
Implications – Prisoner’s Dilemma: Types of strategy – Price and Non price
competition – Relation to the firm behaviour.

UNIT 9 Cost and Return: Cost function and cost output relationship – Economics and
Diseconomies of scale - Cost control and cost reduction- Cost Behaviour and
Business Decision- Relevant costs for decision-making- Traditional and
Modern theory of Cost.
 UNIT 10 New Product Penetrative Decision and Skimming the cream Pricing-
Government control over pricing - Concept of Profit- Types and Theories of
Profit by Knight (Uncertainty), Schumpeter (Innovation), Clark (Dynamic)
and Hawley (Risk) - Profit maximization – Cost volume profit analysis – Risk
and Return Relationship.

UNIT 11 Profit and Investment Analysis: Meaning – Measurement of profit – Theories

of Pricing- Profit planning and forecasting- Profit and Wealth maximization –
Cost volume profit analysis – Investment analysis and Evaluation: IRR, NPV
and APV techniques.

UNIT 12 Macro-economic Factors: Nature, Importance ; Economic Growth and

Development - Business cycle – Phases and Business Decision- Inflation -
Factors causing Inflation and Deflation - Control measures – Balance of
payment Trend and its implications in managerial decision.

UNIT 13 National Income: Introduction Meaning – Theories – Methods of

Measurement - Sectoral and Population distributions – Per capita Income:
Definition – Calculations – Uses – Limitations – GDP – GNP - Recent
developments in Indian Economy.

UNIT 14 Economic Regulations of Business: Introduction – Antitrust theory and

Regulations – The structure – Conduct – Performance paradigm –
Concentration: Overview – Measuring concentration – Regulation of
Externalities.

REFERENCES
1. Dominick Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy,OxfordUniversity
Press, 2011.
2. Ivan Png and Dale Lehman, Managerial Economics, Wiley-Blackwell, 2007.
3. Truett Lila J., Truett, Dale B. and Truett J. Lila (2006), Managerial Economics:
Analysis Problems, Cases, 8th Editon, John Wiley & Sons.
4. Atmanand (2008), Managerial Economics, 2nd Edition, Excel Books.
5. Christopher R Thomas & S Charles Maurice (2008), Managerial Economics, 9th
edition, McGraw Hill Co.
6. Petersen, H. C., Cris, L W and Jain, S.K. (2008), Managerial Economics, 1st edition
Pearson
7. Gupta G S, Managerial Economics, Tata McGraw-Hill.
8. Varshney and Maheswari, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
9. Mehta P L, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
10. Joel Dean, Managerial Economics, Prentice-Hall.
 35714 - QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES
Objectives:
• To help develop analytical skills based on problem solving approach
• To learn quadrature problems solving of business issues.
• To acquire the knowledge in statistics and their use in business decision making.

UNIT 1 Basic Quantitative Concepts: Place of quantitative analysis in the practice of

management – Problem definition: Models and their development. Variables
notion of Mathematical models – concept of trade off – Notion of constants –
concept of Interest.

UNIT 2 Basic Concept of differentiation – integration – Optimization concepts – use of

differentiation for optimization of business problem Optimization Statistics:
Meaning and Applications of Statistics in business decision making and
research - Collection, Tabulation and presentation of data - Measures of central
tendency: Mean, Median and Mode. Measures of dispersion

UNIT 3 Variables and function: Linear and Non-linear –Graphical representation of

functions and their applications in cost and revenue behavior. Slope and its
relevance –Use of functional relationships to understand elasticity of demands,
Relationship between costs and level of activity, Decisions on Minimizing
Costs and Maximizing output/profits.
UNIT 4 Linear Programming: Introduction to the linear programming – Concepts of
optimization- Formulation of different types of linear programming –Standard
from of LP problems - Importance and practical implementation in Industry
UNIT 5 Simple regression and Correlation analysis: Introduction, Correlation,
Correlation analysis, linear regression analysis and Co-efficient. Duality and
sensitivity analysis for decision-making- Solving LP using graphical and
simplex method (only simple problems) – Interpreting the solution for
decision-making

UNIT 6 Special Algorithms of LPP: Transportation Algorithm - Balanced and

Unbalanced Problem Formulation and solving methods: North West Corner,
Vogel’s Approximation-MODI method- Assignment and Travelling Executive
Algorithms
UNIT 7 Theory of Probability: Introduction to the Concept – Development of
probability – Areas and Utilisation of probability theories in the Business –
Sample space – terminology – Types of probability.

UNIT 8 Theoretical Probability Distributions: Introduction - Concept of events –

Probability of events – Joint, conditional and marginal probabilities
Probability distributions: Binomial, Poisson and Normal – Features and
Applications – Use of Normal Tables.

UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background and

Developments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –
Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations of
Quantitative methods.
 UNIT 10 Sequencing /Scheduling Methods : Concepts – terminology – Notations –
Assumption for scheduling models – Job sequencing priorities – Processing
the job and Mass production system.

UNIT 11 Simulation Techniques: Introduction to simulation as an aid to decision-

making- Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Applications of
simulations models – Types: Inventory, Cash, and Project – Random Numbers.

UNIT 12 Queuing Theory: Introduction – Definition – Queue priorities Product

launching problems using Monte Carlo simulation- Queuing Theory: M/M/1
queuing model and applications.

UNIT 13 Decision Analysis: Concepts – Definition – Decision Tables Pay-off and Loss
tables – Expected value of pay-off – Expected value of Perfect Formation –
decision making process

UNIT 14 Decision Tree Analysis: Decision making environments – Concept of

Posterior probabilities Decision Tree approach to choose optimal course of
action Criteria for decision – Mini-max, Maxi-max, Minimizing Maximal
Regret and their applications.

REFERENCES

1. David R. Anderson, et al, An Introduction to Management Science: Quantitative

Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning, 2008.
2. Lucey, Quantitative Techniques Cengage Learning Business Press, 2002
3. Sharma, Operations Research: Theory and Applications.
4. Richard I Levin, & C. Atkinson Kirkpatrick, Quantitative Approaches to Management,
McGraw-Hill.
5. K. Gupta and D.S. Hira, Operations Research.
6. Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma, Quantitative Techniques for Managerial Decision-
making, New Age International, 2006.
7. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
8. V.K. Kapoor, Operations Research.
9. Dharani Venkatakrishnan, Operations Research: Principles and Problems.
10. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 2002.
 35715 - FINANCIAL AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Objectives:
• To enable the students to learn basic accounting principles, concepts.
• To practice Financial and Management accounting applications
• To make the learners familiarize in managerial decision making.

UNIT 1 Accounting: Definition – Accounting for historical function and managerial

function - Types of Accounting- Management, Management and Cost
accounting – Scope for Accounting-Managerial Uses of Management
accounting and Financial Accounting.

UNIT 2 Accounting Concepts and Conventions – Accounting standards - Financial

Accounting Definitions – Principles – Accounting standards - Double entry
system of accounting: Accounting books – Preparation of journal and ledger,
subsidiary books.

UNIT 3 Preparation of Trial Balance – Errors and rectification – Classifications of

capital and Revenue – Fixed Assets and Depreciation accounting – Preparation
of Manufacturing accounting- Preparation of Final Accounts - Accounting
from incomplete records – Statements of affairs methods

UNIT 4 Conversion methods – Preparation of Trading, Profit & Loss Account and
Balance Sheet from incomplete records – Depreciation methods - Straight line
method, Written down value method, Sinking fund method.

UNIT 5 Financial Statement Analysis - Objectives - Reorganizing the Financial

Statement information -Techniques of Financial Statement Analysis:
Comparative Statements, Common – Size statement, Trend Percentage -

UNIT 6 Management Statement Analysis: Management statements – Nature of

management statements – Limitations of management statements – Analysis
of interpretation -Types of analysis- Tools of analysis: Trend analysis,
Common size statements and Comparative statements;

UNIT 7 Accounting Ratios: Construction of balance sheet using ratios (problems) –

Financial ratios – Types: Profitability ratios – Turnover ratios – Liquidity
ratios – Proprietary ratios – Market earnings ratios- Uses and limitations of
ratios - Dupont analysis.

UNIT 8 Fund Flow Analysis: Need and meaning – Preparation of schedule of changes
in working capital and the fund flow statement – Workings for
Computation of various sources and uses - Preparation of Fund Flow
Statement

UNIT 9 Cash flow Analysis: Meaning and importance Managerial uses of cash flow
statement – Differences between fund flow and cash flow analysis - Uses and
limitation of fund flow statement- Preparation of cash flow statement
 UNIT 10 Cost Accounting: Cost Accounting - Meaning - Distinction between Financial
Accounting and Cost Accounting - Cost Terminology: Cost, Cost Centre, Cost
Unit - Elements of Cost - Cost Sheet – Problems - Overhead Cost Allocations:
Over and under Absorption. Job and Contract Costing,

UNIT 11 Operating Costing: Material Cost Accounting, Perpetual Inventory Control,

Inventory Valuation, EOQ, ABC Analysis, Setting of Reorder Level,
Maximum Level, Minimum Level, Labour Cost Accounting, Remuneration
and Incentive Schemes- Reconciliation of Financial and Cost Accounting

UNIT 12 Marginal Costing: Definition – Difference between marginal costing and

absorption costing – Break- even point Analysis - Contribution, p/v Ratio,
margin of safety - Decision making under marginal costing system-key factor
analysis, make or buy decisions, export decision, sales mix decision-Problems

UNIT 13 Budgeting and Budgetary Control: Concept and Need for Budgeting-
Classification of budgets – Preparation of Sales, Production, Material,
Purchase and Cash Budgets –Budgetary control system – Mechanism – Master
budget.

UNIT 14 Capital Budgeting System: Importance – Methods of capital expenditure

appraisal – Payback period method – ARR method – DCF methods – NPV and
IRR methods – Their rationale – Capital rationing.

REFERENCES
1. Arulanandam& K.S. Raman,Advanced Accounting, Himalaya Publishing House.
2. Gupta &Radhasamy,Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons.
3. Shukla & T.S. Grewal,Advanced Accounting, S.Chand&Company.
4. Jain &Narang,Advanced Cost Accounting, Kalyani. Publications.
5. Ravi M. Kishore, Cost Management, Taxman Publications
6. S.N. Maheswari, Management Accounting &Management Accounting, Vikas
Publishers.
7. Manmohan & Goyal, Principles of Management Accounting, Shakithabhavan
Publication.
8. N. K. Prasad,Advanced Cost Accounting, Book Syndicate Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta.
9. Andrew A Haried, Advanced Accounting, Atlantic Publishers.
10. Hoyle,Advanced Accounting, McGraw Hill.
 35721 - RESEARCH METHODS
Objectives:
• To Understand the basic principles of research and design
• To practice the research process, tools and techniques
• To facilitate managerial decision making

UNIT 1 Research Bases: Definition and applications of business research; Types of

research –descriptive, exploratory, correlational, explanatory, quantitative,
qualitative; Steps in the research process; establishing operational definitions

UNIT 2 Research scope - Recent advancements in research. Distinction between Pure

& Applied, Historical & Futuristic, Analytical & Synthetic, Descriptive &
Prescriptive, Survey & Experimental and Case & Generic Researches

UNIT 3 Planning of Research: Research problem – Identification, selection and

formulation of research problem – Review of literature in the field of business
- Identifying objectives of the research.

UNIT 4 Economic management: Use in identifying Research Gaps and Techniques –

Hypothesis – Meaning – Sources and Types of Hypothesis – Hypothesis
Formulation for testing – Research design – Factors affecting research design
– Evaluation of research design

UNIT 5 Variables construction for Hypothesis: Identifying variables - Constructing

hypotheses – functions, characteristics, types of hypotheses - Significance of
research in social sciences – Induction and deduction.

UNIT 6 Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation –
Principle of sampling – Essentials of a good sampling – sampling frame;
Methods of sampling: Probability, non-probability, mixed sampling designs;

UNIT 7 Construction of sampling for Finite and Infinite populations – Sample size
determination– Calculations - Factors affecting the size of the sample – Biased
sample – Sampling and non-sampling errors.

UNIT 8 Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data – Primary and secondary data
– Modes of data collection – Observation: Types and Techniques –Interview:
Types and conduct – Preparation for an interview – Effective interview
techniques – Limitations of interview

UNIT 9 Schedule: Meaning and kinds – Essentials of a good schedule – Procedure for
the formulation of a schedule – Questionnaire: Meaning and types – Format of
a good questionnaire– Schedules Vs. Questionnaires

UNIT 10 Scaling techniques: Meaning, Importance, Types of measurement scales –

Nominal, Ordinal, Interval, Ratio; Methods of their construction of
Questionnaires or Schedules – Pre-testing of Data Collection Tools- Validity
and Reliability – Methods.
 UNIT 11 Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning – Importance – Process of data
analysis – Editing – Coding – Tabulation – Diagrams – Univariate, Bivariate
and Multi-variant analysis

UNIT 12 Test of Significance: Fundamentals on Test Procedure- Testing for

significance of Mean/Proportion and difference between Means/Proportions- F
Test for Means and Chi-square test Contingency Table - Parametric Test: T
test, F Test and Z test

UNIT 13 Non-parametric Test: Concept and Types: Mann Whitney Test- Test, Kruskal
Wallis, sign test. Multivariate analysis-factor, cluster, MDS, Discriminant
analysis - The process of interpretation of Test Results– Guidelines for making
valid interpretation

UNIT 14 Report Writing : Role and types of reports – Contents of research report –
Steps involved in drafting reports – Principles of good report writing –
Grammatical Quality – Language flow- Data Support- Diagrammatic
Elucidation- References and Annotations – Clarity and Brevity of
expressions- Features of a good Report- Criteria for evaluating research
reports/ research findings.

REFERENCES

1. John W Best & James V. Kahn Research in Education, Allyn and Bacon, 2009
2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley, New Delhi, 1989.
3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw Hill,
1981.
4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003, HPH.
5. Earl R. BabbieRobert, ThePractice of Social Research, Cengage Learning, 2010.
6. B. Burns & A. Burns, Business Research Methods and Statistics Using SPSS, Sage
Publications, 2008.
7. Krishnaswami and Ranganatham, Research Methodology in social Sciences, HPH,
Mumbai
8. Bryman & Bell: Business Research Methods, OUP.
9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall, (Digitalized)
2007.
10. C.R.Kothari, Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, 2009
 35722 - BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Objectives:
• To understand the concepts and constituents of Business environment
• To know the environmental issues in the business context
• To analyze the changes in the global environmental relating to business

UNIT 1 Business Environment: Introduction: Concepts – Significance - Dynamic

factors of environment – Importance of scanning the environment – Macro and
Micro Environment – Micro and Macro Economics to the business –
Constituents of Business environment

UNIT 2 Fundamental issues captured in PESTLE– Political, Economic, Socio-cultural,

Technological, Legal and Ecological environment- Opportunities and Threats
as environmental issues to address by Businesses.

UNIT 3 Political Environment: Government and Business – Political Systems, Political

Stability and Political Maturity as conditions of business growth - Role of
Government in Business: Entrepreneurial, Catalytic, Competitive, Supportive,
Regulative and Control functions

UNIT 4 Government and Economic planning: Industrial policies and promotion

schemes – Government policy and SSI – Interface between Government and
public sector - Guidelines to the Industries – Industrial Development
strategies; salient features, Role of public and private sectors, Comparative
cost dynamics.

UNIT 5 Economic Environment: Phase of Economic Development and its impact-

GDP Trend and distribution and Business Opportunities – capacity utilisation
– Regional disparities and evaluation - Global Trade and investment
environment.

UNIT 6 Financial System and Business capital: Monetary and Fiscal policies -
Financial Market structure – Money and Capital markets – Stock Exchanges
and Its regulations – Industrial Finance - Types, Risk - Cost-Role of Banks;
Industrial Financial Institutions - Role of Management Institutions

UNIT 7 Role of Central Bank- Fiscal System: Government Budget and Taxation
Measures- Fiscal Deficits and Inflation- FDI and collaboration –Foreign
Capital tapping by businesses- Export-Import policy – Foreign Exchange and
Business Development.

UNIT 8 Labour Environment: Labour Legislation – Labour and social securities –

Industrial Relations – Trade Unions – Workers participation in management –
Exit Policy – Quality Circles.

UNIT 9 Social and Technological Environment: Societal Structure and Features-

Entrepreneurial Society and its implications for business – Social and cultural
factors and their implications for business- Technology Development Phase in
the Economy as conditioner of Business Opportunities
 UNIT 10 Technology Environment: Technology Policy- Technology Trade and transfer-
Technology Trends in India- Role of Information Technology – Clean
Technology. – Time lag in technology – Appropriate technology and
Technology adoption- Impact of technology on globalization.

UNIT 11 Legal and Ecological Environment: Legal Environment as the all-enveloping

factor from inception, location, incorporation, conduct, expansion and closure
of businesses – IDRA and Industrial licensing – Public, Private, Joint and
Cooperative Sectors.

UNIT 12 Legal Aspects of Entering Primary and Secondary Capital Markets- Law on
Patents- Law on Consumer Protection- Law on Environmental Protection-
Need for Clean energy and Reduction of Carbon footprint.

UNIT 13 New Economic Policy Environment in India: Liberalization, Privatization and

Globalization (LPG): Efficiency Drive through Competition- Facets of
Liberalization and impact on business growth

UNIT 14 Aspects of Privatization and impact on business development– Globalization

and Enhanced Opportunities and Threats – Extended competition in Input and
Output Markets Role of WTO, IMF and World Bank in global economic
development.

REFERENCES

1. Brooks, Weatherston, Wilkinson, International Business Environment, Pearson, 2010.

2. Steiner & Steiner, Business, Government and Society: A Managerial Perspective,
McGraw-Hill, 2008.
3. Mohinder Kumar Sharma, Business Environment in India, South Asia Books.
4. Adhikary M, Economic Environment of Business, Sultan Chand & Sons.
5. Amarchand D, Government and Business, TMH.
6. Francis Cherunilam, Business Environment and Development, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2008.
7. Maheswari & Gupta, Government, Business and Society.
 35723 - BUSINESS LAWS
Objectives:
• To understand the legal structure and provision for running a business
• To learn various acts, enactments and amendments of mercantile law
• To know the various aspects of Business law for legal process.

UNIT 1 Indian Contract Act 1872: Contract – Meaning – Essential elements – Nature
and formation of contract: Nature, elements, Classifications of Contracts on
the basis of Validity, Formation and Performance– offer and acceptance

UNIT 2 Offer and Acceptance: Introduction – Proposal – acceptance –

Communications of offer, Acceptance and Revocations – Offer and acceptance
by Post.

UNIT 3 Consideration: Definitions, Types of consideration – essentials of

Consideration – Privity of Contracts: Exceptions – Capacity: Consent –
Legality of object – Quasi contract Discharge of contract - Remedies for
breach of contract – Quasi contracts.

UNIT 4 Special Contracts: Contract of Indemnity and Guarantee – Bailment and

Pledge – Law of Agency-Definition – Rights of Surety -Discharge of Surety –
Bailment and Pledge: Introduction, Classifications, Duties and Rights of Bailer
and Bailee – termination of Bailment -

UNIT 5 Formation of contract under Sale of Goods Act, 1930: Contract of sale -
Conditions and Warranties - Transfer of property - Performance of the
contract: Essentials of valid tender performance, Performance reciprocal
promise- Rights of an unpaid seller.

UNIT 6 Laws on Carriage of Goods: Duties, Rights and Liabilities of Common

Carriers under: (i) The Carriers Act, 1865. (ii) The Railways Act, 1989, (iii)
The Carriage of Goods by Sea Act, 1925, (iv) The Carriage by Air Act, 1972
and (v) The Carriage By Road Act, 2007

UNIT 7 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881: Negotiable Instruments: Features – Types-

Parties – Material alteration – Parties to negotiable instruments – Presentations
of negotiable instrument.

UNIT 8 Insurance: Definition and sources of Law – Judicial set up in India ––

Insurance as a contract -History of Insurance Legislation in India - Legal
principles - Fundamental Principles of Life Insurance Fire Insurance and
Marine Insurance.

UNIT 9 Indian Partnership Act, 1932: Meaning and test of partnership – registration of
firms Life Insurance Corporation Act 1956 – General Insurance Business
Nationalization Act 1973.

UNIT 10 Partners Relations: Introduction – Eligibility to be a partner – Registration of

change in partner – Limited Liabilities of partnership - Dissolution of firms -
 Characteristics – Kinds – Incorporation of Companies – Memorandum of
Association – Articles of Association

UNIT 11 Companies Act 1956: Nature and kinds of companies – Prospectus –

Disclosure Needs - Management and Administration – Director –
Appointment, Powers and Duties

UNIT 12 Formation of a Company : Introduction – process - Minutes and Resolutions –

E-Filling of documents under Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) 21-
Management of companies –Meetings- Types- Requirements -AGM and EGM
– Board Meeting

UNIT 13 Law of Information Technology: Introduction – Rationale behind IT act 2000

– Information technology Act 2000: Scheme of the IT Act 2000: Digital
signature: attribution; Acknowledgement and dispatch of Electronics Record –
Regulation certifying authorities.

UNIT 14 Protection of minority interest: Introduction - Methods of Winding-up - The

Right to Information Act, 2005 Right to know, Salient features of the Act,
obligation of public Authority, Designation of Public Information officer,
Request for obtaining information,

REFERENCES

1. M.S.Pandit and ShobhaPandit, Business Law, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai,

2010.
2. Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, TMH, 2009.
3. N.D. Kapoor, Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
4. M.C. Shukla, Mercantile Law, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
5. Relevant Bare Acts.
6. Balachandran and Thothadri, business Law, TMH, 2010
 35724 - MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

Objectives:
• To learn the principles of Management Information System for organizations
• To understand the uses , function of application MIS in organization
• To analyze the scope of MIS for business organizations

UNIT 1 Foundations of Information System: Information system: Meaning, Role –

System concepts – Organization as a system – Components of Information
system – Various activities of IS and Types of IS

UNIT 2 Information System: Concepts of Information System and Management

information systems design and development-Implementation testing and
conversion- Evolution and element of MIS

UNIT 3 MIS : Definition – Characteristics and basic requirements of MIS – Structure

of MIS- Approaches to MIS development- Computerized MIS- Pre-requisites
of an effective MIS- Limitations of MIS.

UNIT 4 MIS and Decision support System (DSS): MIS Vs. data processing – MIS and
decision support system – MIS and information resource management – DSS
and AI – Overview of AI - DSS models and software.

UNIT 5 MIS and Operations Research- Executive information and Decision support
systems – Artificial intelligence and expert system – Merits and De Merits –
Pitfalls in MIS.

UNIT 6 MIS in Indian organizations – Recent developments in information technology

- Installation of Management Information & Control System in Indian
organization

UNIT 7 Computers and Communication: Information technology and Global

integration –On-line information services – Electronic bulletin board systems –
The internet, electronic mail, interactive video

UNIT 8 Communication Channels: Advantages disadvantages – Communication

networks – Local area networks – Wide area networks – Video conferencing-
Relevance to MIS- Usage in Business process.

UNIT 9 Functional Information systems: MIS for Research Production - MIS for
Marketing - MIS for Personnel - MIS for Finance - MIS for Inventory- MIS
for Logistics- MIS for Product Development- MIS for Market Development.

UNIT 10 Client/ Server Computing: Communication servers – Digital networks –

Electronic data interchange and its applications - Enterprise resource planning
systems (ERP Systems) – Inter-organizational information systems – Value
added networks – Networking.
 UNIT 11 Electronic Commerce and Internet: E-Commerce bases – E-Commerce and
Internet – M-Commerce- Electronic Data Inter-change (EDI) - Applications of
internet and website management - Types of Social Media - uses of social
media in business organization

UNIT 12 Computer System and Resources: Computers systems: Types and Types of
computer system processing - Secondary storage media and devices – Input
and output devices – Hardware standards – Other acquisition issues.

UNIT 13 Managing Information Technology: Managing Information Resources and

technologies – IS architecture and management - Centralized, Decentralized
and Distributed - EDI, Supply chain management & Global Information
technology Management.

UNIT 14 Security and Ethical Challenges: IS controls - facility control and procedural
control - Risks to online operations - Denial of service, spoofing - Ethics for IS
professional - Societal challenges of Information technology

REFERENCES

1. James O'Brien & George Marakas, Management Information Systems, McGraw Hill,
2011.
2. Kenneth Laudon & Jane Laudon, Essentials of MIS, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Lisa Miller, MIS Cases: Decision Making with Application Software, Prentice Hall,
2008.
4. David M. Kroenke, Experiencing MIS, Prentice Hall, 2011.
5. Kenneth C. Laudon, MIS: Managing the Digital Firm, Prentice Hall, 2005.
6. Sadogopan S, Management Information Systems, 2001PHI.
7. Murdie and Ross, Management Information Systems, Prentice Hall.
8. Henri C. Lucas, Information Systems Concepts for Management, McGraw Hill, 1994.
9. Stephen Haag, Management Information Systems, 2008.
 35725 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Objective:

• To understand the concepts and methods and techniques of Human Resource Management
• To know the Human resource management theories and real time practices
• To identify the contemporary issues in human resource management

UNIT 1 Introduction to Human Resource Management: Concept, Definition, Objectives,

Nature and Scope of HRM - Functions of HRM – Evolution of human resource
management - Role and structure of Human Resource Function in organizations-
Challenges in Human Resource Management

UNIT 2 Human Resource Management Approaches: Phases of human resource

Management- The importance of the human factor – Competitive challenges of
HRM – HRM Models – Roles and responsibilities of HR department.

UNIT 3 Human Resource Planning: Personnel Policy - Characteristics - Role of human

resource manager – Human resource policies – Need, Scope and Process – Job
analysis – Job description – Job specification- Succession Planning.

UNIT 4 Recruitment and Selection Process: Employment planning and fore casting
Sources of recruitment- internal Vs. External; Domestic Vs. Global sources-
Selection process Building employee commitment : Promotion from within -
Sources, Developing and Using application forms – IT and recruiting on the
internet.

UNIT 5 Employee Testing & selection : Selection process, basic testing concepts, types of
test, work samples & simulation, selection techniques, interview, common
interviewing mistakes, Designing & conducting the effective interview, small
business applications, computer aided interview.

UNIT 6 Training and Development: Orientation & Training: Orienting the employees,
the training process, need analysis, Training techniques, special purpose training,
Training via the internet. - Need Assessment - Training methods for
Operatives and Supervisors

UNIT 7 Executive Development: Need and Programs - Computer applications in human

resource management – Human resource accounting and audit. On-the - job and
off-the-job Development techniques using HR to build a responsive organization

UNIT 8 Employee Compensation : Wages and Salary Administration – Bonus –

Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems - and Employee Benefits, Health and
Social Security Measures,
 UNIT 9 Employee Retention: Need and Problems of Employees – various retention
methods– Implication of job change. The control process – Importance – Methods
– Employment retention strategies for production and services industry

UNIT 10 Appraising and Improving Performance: Performance Appraisal Programs,

Processes and Methods, Job Evaluation, Managing Compensation, Incentives
Performance appraisal: Methods - Problem and solutions - MBO approach - The
appraisal interviews - Performance appraisal in practice.

UNIT 11 Managing careers: Career planning and development - Managing promotions and
transfers - Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems – Promotion – Demotions –
Transfers- Labour Attrition: Causes and Consequences

UNIT 12 Employee Welfare, Separation: Welfare and safety – Accident prevention –

Employee Grievances and their Redressal – Industrial Relations - Statutory
benefits - non-statutory (voluntary) benefits – Insurance benefits - retirement
benefits and other welfare measures to build employee commitment

UNIT 13 Industrial relations and collective bargaining: Trade unions – Collective

bargaining - future of trade unionism - Discipline administration - grievances
handling - managing dismissals and workers Participation in Management-
Separation: Need and Methods.

UNIT 14 Human Resource Information System- Personnel Records/ Reports- e-Record on

Employees – Personnel research and personnel audit – Objectives – Scope and
importance.

REFERENCES

1. Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management,South-WesternCollege, 2004.

2. Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-WesternCollege, 2007.
3. R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management,Prentice Hall, 2011.
4. Venkataraman& Srivastava, Personnel Management & Human Resources
5. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations
6. Yodder&Standohar, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
7. Edwin B. Flippo, Personnel Management , McGraw-Hill, 1984
8. Pigors and Myers, Personnel Administration
9. R.S. Dwivedi, Manpower Management
10. Lynton &Pareek, Training and Development, Vistaar Publications, 1990.
 35731 - MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
• To help the learners understand markets, consumers and marketing principles.
• To understand the buyer behaviour and influencing factors
• To learn marketing plan, pricing, promotion and distribution in global context

UNIT 1 Introduction to Marketing: Meaning and Scope of Marketing; Marketing

Philosophies; Marketing Management Process-an overview; Modern Marketing
Concept: Social marketing concept – Approaches to the study of marketing.

UNIT 2 Marketing segmentation: Meaning – Bases for segmentation, benefits – Systems

approach - Four Ps of Product and Seven Ps Service marketing mix and
Extensions- Targeting and Positioning - meaning and importance.

UNIT 3 Marketing Environment: Internal and External and Demographic factors –

Adopting marketing to new liberalized and globalized economy – Digitalization –
Customization and E business settings.

UNIT 4 Consumer Behaviour : Meaning and importance – Consumer buying process –

Determinants and Theories of consumer behaviour – Psychological, sociological
determinants – Theories and their relevance to marketing-

UNIT 5 Marketing Research: Procedure. Meaning – Objectives – Process- Demand

Forecasting- Marketing Information System – Strategic marketing plan and
organization – Changing marketing practices.

UNIT 6 Product Mix Management: Product planning and development – Meaning and
process – Test marketing – Product failures – Product line management: Practices
– Implications and Strategies for current market condition.

UNIT 7 Product life cycles: Meaning and Stages – Strategies – Managing PLC- Product-
Market Integration: Strategies – Product positioning – Diversification – Product
line simplification – Planned obsolescence – Branding Policies and Strategies –
Packing.

UNIT 8 Price Mix Management: Pricing and pricing policies – Objectives – Procedures –
Bases for and Methods of price fixing. Cases for Free Pricing, Administered and
Regulated pricing – Pricing and product life cycle

UNIT 9 Physical Distribution Mix: Types of physical Distribution - Importance of

Physical Distribution- Distribution channel policy – Logistics Decisions –
Methods – Strategic alliance for Logistic cost reduction.
 UNIT 10 Marketing Channel system: Marketing channel decisions: Choice considerations–
Managing Conflict and Cooperation in channels – Middlemen functions- Modern
Trends in Retailing- Malls and Online.

UNIT 11 Promotional Mix: Personal selling Vs. impersonal selling – Personal selling –
Process – Steps in selling – Management of sales force – Recruitment and
selection – Training – Compensation plans – Evaluation of performance

UNIT 12 Integrated marketing communication Process: Advertising and sales promotion –

Online Sales promotional activities – Public relationships – Direct marketing:
Meaning, Nature, Growth and Channels.

UNIT 13 Advertising: Importance – Objectives – Media planning and selection – Factors

influencing selection – Advertisement copy – Layout – Evaluation of advertising
– Advertising budget – Sales promotion – Methods and practices.

UNIT 14 Competitor analyses: Identifying and analyzing the competitors – Types of

Competitors – Competitive strategies framing for leaders, challengers, followers
and nichers. Customer relationship marketing: Customer data base, Data ware
housing and data mining

REFERENCES

1. Etzel, Walker and Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill, 2004

2. Philip Kotler & Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Jerome Mccarthy, Basic Marketing, Richard D. Irwin.
4. Cundiff, Still &Govani, Fundamentals of Modern Marketing, Prentice Hall.
5. Memoria & Joshi, Fundamental of Marketing.
6. Paul Peter and James Donnelly Jr, Marketing Management, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
7. William O. Bearden, Marketing: Principles & Perspectives, McGraw-Hill, 2006.
8. William Arens, et al, Contemporary Advertising, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
9. Perreault and McGarthy - Basic Marketing - Tata McGraw Hill, 2002\

10. Michael J Etzel, Bruce J Walker, William J Stanton and Ajay Pandit, Marketing concepts
and cases - TMH 13th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
 35732 - FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Objectives:
• To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management
• To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital management.
• To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications

UNIT 1 Introduction: Financial management: objectives - Concept, nature, evaluation and

significance – Finance Functions: Managerial and operative – Role of Financial
management in the organization – Indian Financial system.

UNIT 2 Financial System: Legal and Regulatory frame work – Financial Functions:
Meaning and scope – Finance and Tax Management Nexus- Tax Avoidance and
Tax evasion- Tax incentive and business decisions.

UNIT 3 Investment Function: Meaning and scope - Time value of Money concepts and
applications –Risk return relationship - Dividend function – Risk return trade off –
Management planning- Global management environment

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity share, preference
shares – types of preference share - debentures – types - sources of long-term
capital.

UNIT 5 Capital Issues: Meaning, Nature, Purpose – Roles and Guidelines of SEBI in
capital issues- Bridge finance, loan syndication, Book building – Borrowings from
the term lending institutions and International capital market- Tax considerations
in financing decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital : Concept of cost of capital- Cost of debt, equity, preference share
capital, retaining earning - Weighted average cost: EBIT –EPS Analysis- Tax,
Capital structure and Value nexus - Computation of overall cost of capital – Tax
and cost of capital.

UNIT 7 Capital structure: Determinates - Concept and Types- Optimum capital structure –
Theories of capital structure – Net income and net operative income approach –
M.M. Approach – Traditional theory – Their assumptions – Significance and
limitations – Management leverage operating leverage – Combined leverage.

UNIT 8 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital Investment- Methods of
appraisal under certainty conditions: PBP, ARR, IRR and NPV techniques - Basic
and International capital budgeting.
 UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis- Decision
tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures- Tax
considerations in Investment Decisions Cost of capital and Investment Decisions.
UNIT 10 Working Capital Management: Definitions and Objectives - Concept and types –
Determinants – Financing approaches – Conservative approaches - Sources of
working capital finance Factors affecting working capital requirements- Working
capital financing by commercial banks – Types of assistance

UNIT 11 Inventories and receivables Management under conditions of certainty and

uncertainty – Operating cycle – Planning of funds through the management of
assets – Various techniques used.

UNIT 12 Cash and liquidity management: Credit Management and evaluation alternative
credit variables Methods and Functions- Tax considerations in Remittances and
Purchases.

UNIT 13 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories – Dividend
irrelevance under M.M. Theory – Assumptions – Limitations - Implications and
contributions of theories in financial decision making process.

UNIT 14 Dividend Policy: Types – Share valuation practices – Factors affecting dividend
decision – Tax considerations in dividend decision when tax is levied at the hands
of companies and recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Thomson ONE, 2010
2. Brigham and Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson ONE, 2009.
3. Van Horne: Fundamentals of Financial Management, Prentice Hall, 2008
4. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management,South-WesternCollege Pub., 2010
5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, McGraw Hill, 2008.
6. Khan and Jain, Financial Management ,Tata McGrawHill,2009
7. Pandey I M, Financial Management, Vikas Publishers,2009
8. Sheeba Kapil(2010), Financial Management, Pearson Education.
9. B J Camsey, Engene F.Brigham, “Introduction to Financial Management”, The Gryden Press
 35733 - MANAGEMENT OF FUNDS

Objectives:
• To know about business capitalization
• To identify the techniques in Fund management
UNIT 1 Meaning and importance of funds: Concept of funds- Types and features of funds-
Sources of Funds: Short term finance, Medium term finance and Long term
finance.

UNIT 2 Effective Mobilization and allocation of funds - Consequences of mal-

mobilization and misallocation of funds – Organizing for funds management –
Relationship with other function.

UNIT 3 Role of financial systems in Mobilization and Allocation of funds – Barometer of

business conditions – Causes and Consequences.

UNIT 4 Considerations in Fund Allocation: Allocation of funds to most profitable

opportunity – Development of profitable opportunity and evaluation – Methods of
evaluation.

UNIT 5 Business Capitalization- Assessment of funds for fixed assets – ROI, PBP, ARR,
IRR considerations- considerations of risks and uncertainty – Management of
risks.

UNIT 6 Capital rationing and its impact on financial planning-Treatment of inflation in

capital budgeting – Tools for capital budgeting.

UNIT 7 Considerations in fund Mobilization: Capital Market conditions- Interest rate

scenario- Global financial contours- Variety of Instruments: Shares, Bonds and
Debentures - Cost of floatation.

UNIT 8 Cost of Capital- Meaning and Definition -Agency and Bankruptcy costs- Explicit
and Implicit costs- Tax treatment - Relationship with financial Institutions.

UNIT 9 Capital structure Decisions: Types of capital structures – Capital structure and
Asset structure match - Liquidity, Solvency, Flexibility, Value impact and Risk
considerations.

UNIT 10 Interest coverage, debt capacity and Debt service coverage considerations–
Leverage aspects- Acquisition for specific allocation- Optimum capital structure.
UNIT 11 Leasing: Need for Lease - Types of Leasing- Operating and financial lease,
Domestic Lease and International Lease, Open ended lease and close ended lease
- Capital Leases - Evaluation of cash flows of leasing and buying alternatives.

UNIT 12 Venture capital: Meaning, Venture financing options- Pros and cons – Venture
capital industry in India – Origin and Growth.

UNIT 13 International financing and investment: International Financing Equity and Debt
instruments: GDRs, ADRs, ECBs, FCCBs, Syndicated Loans- Finance from
Multilateral financing institutions.

UNIT 14 Financing via MNCs- Domestic sources vis-à-vis international sources- Investing
abroad: Opportunities- Considerations- Risk-Return – Foreign currency risk
management.

REFERENCES

1. Eugene F. Brigham, Financial Management: Theory and Practice (Harcourt) 2005.

2. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management, South-WesternCollege Pub., 2010.
3. F. Brigham and Joel F. Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson, 2009.
4. Alan C. Shapiro, Multinational Financial Management, Wiley, 2008.
5. Kuchal, S.C, Financial Management, Chaitanya, Allahabad, 1992.
6. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, 2007.
 35734 - INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT
Objective:
• To expose students in investment analysis concept
• To know the various approaches in portfolio management

UNIT 1 Investment: Investment Concepts and Goals – Types of investment – Financial –

Real, business, Personal and Institutional investments.

UNIT 2 Comparison of investments, speculation, gambling – Hedging – Concepts of

portfolio and portfolio management – Goals – Risk and return trade off.

UNIT 3 Financial investment avenues – Fixed income Securities– Varying income

securities – Derivative Instruments: Options, Swaps, Forward, Futures.

UNIT 4 Investment Analysis: Aspects of Analysis – Return analysis – Concepts,

measures and computation of return of individual security and portfolio.

UNIT 5 Risk analysis: Concepts, types, measure, computation of risk of individual

security and portfolio – Valuation analysis – Share valuation – Bond value – Price
earnings analysis.

UNIT 6 Approaches to Investment Analysis: Fundamental analysis – Concept and

components – Tools of economy analysis.
UNIT 7 Industry and company analysis - I – Technical analysis – Concept and tools –
Assumption – Theories – Dow theory – Contrary opinion.

UNIT 8 Industry and company analysis – II: The confidence index, breadth of market and
strength analysis – Moving average analysis – Chart patterns.

UNIT 9 Portfolio Construction and Choice: Markowtz diversification – Efficient frontier –

Risk-return indifferent curves.
UNIT 10 Portfolio choice – Sharpe’s Single and two factorial models – Lagrange multiplier
method.

UNIT 11 Capital Asset Pricing Model: Assumptions and application – Capital market line
and security market line

UNIT 12 Efficient market hypotheses - The weakly efficient, semi strongly efficient and
strongly efficient market forms – Random-Walk theory.

UNIT 13 Portfolio Performance: Measures: Sharpe, Treynor and Jenson.

UNIT 14 Portfolio audit and Portfolio revision – Need and methods – Formula plans.
REFERENCES
1. Jack Clark Francis, Management of Investments, McGraw Hill, 1993
2. Frank J. Fabozzi and Harry M. Markowitz, Theory and Practice of Investment Management,
Wiley, 2011.
3. Frank K. Reilly and Keith C. Brown, Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management,
Thomson, 2008.
4. Preeti Singh, Investment Management, HPH, 2006.
 35735 - FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSTITUTIONS
Objective:
• To identify the various concepts of financial services
• To know the function of financial institutions
UNIT 1 Financial Services: Concept, Functions, Characteristics and scope of financial
services – Functions of Indian financial system – Financial Instruments – Types –
Pros and Cons

UNIT 2 Merchant Banking: Meaning – Importance and Need - Functions concerning

public and private placement of capital issues.
UNIT 3 SEBI regulations regarding lead managers and merchant banking functionaries –
Inspection by SEBI.

UNIT 4 Mutual Fund Services – Definition – Features, need and scope – MFs in India:
Types of scheme: Features, Merits and Demerits – Performance Evaluation of
Mutual Fund.

UNIT 5 History of Indian Mutual Fund Industry and Recent Developments – Regulations
regarding mutual funds in India.

UNIT 6 Credit Rating: Objectives, Importance of Credit rating – Institutions: CRISIL –

ICRA - CARE – Rating Process.

UNIT 7 Factors contributing to the success of the rating system - Debt and deposit rating
equity rating procedures

UNIT 8 Reading different grades of rating – International credit rating institutions –

Functions of rating agencies.

UNIT 9 Role of UTI and LIC as investment institutions – Portfolio management services

UNIT 10 Concept and need – Services of NBFC to investors.

UNIT 11 Development Financial Institution – Role, functions of IDBI, IFC, ICICI and
IRBI.
UNIT 12 RBI – Functions, role and management of gilt securities market – Regulatory
measures.

UNIT 13 Stock Exchanges: Role and organizations of BSE and NSE – OTCEI – SEBI and
stock exchange – Investor information and education.

UNIT 14 Role of SEBI – Role of investor association and investment consultancies –

Indian and Global Scenario.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Raghunathan V, Stock Exchanges and Investments

2. Avadhani V, Security Market
3. Varma, Merchant Banking
 35741 - FOREIGN EXCHANGE MANAGEMENT

Objective:
To understand the concept related to foreign exchange management
To analysis the foreign exchange risk management

UNIT 1 Foreign Exchange: Concept and Significance – Foreign change Rate: Direct and
indirect quotations – Inter-bank and Merchant rates.

UNIT 2 Spot rates and forward rates – T.T. rates – Cross rates; Computation – Foreign
exchange markets – Organisation of forex market

UNIT 3 Determination of Exchange Rate: Purchasing Power Parity theory – Interest rate
parity theory – Flow model – Asset market model.

UNIT 4 Forecasting of exchange rates – Concepts of Nominal Effective Exchange Rate

and Real effective Exchange rate.

UNIT 5 Forward exchange contracts: Types – Forward exchange rate computation –

Factors affecting forward rates - Extension and cancellation of forward contracts.

UNIT 6 Options: Meaning, Features –Types: Put option, Call option – Mechanism –
Merits and Demerits.

UNIT 7 Foreign exchange risk management: Transaction exposure risk: Internal

Strategies – Risk shifting, Risk sharing – Exposure netting and offsetting.

UNIT 8 External Strategies: Foreign currency options – Forward and money market
hedge – Currency Swaps – Interest Rate Swaps.

UNIT 9 Economic Exposure risk – Inflation and exchange risk– Factors influence
exchange risk.
UNIT 10 Economic consequences of Exchange rate changes – managing economic
exposure risk.

UNIT 11 Exchange management in India: Fixed and fling rates – Rupee convertibility –
NOSTRO, VOSTRO and LORO Accounts.

UNIT 12 Exchange control measures: Need, Forms and relevance.

UNIT 13 Foreign Exchange Reserves of India: Trend, composition and management.

UNIT 14 Impact on exchange Rate – Monetary and fiscal policy initiatives for exchange
rate management.
REFERENCES:
1. Multinational Financial Management : Alan C Shapiro
2. ABC of Foreign Exchange : Clare G. Gump
3. Guide to Foreign Exchange Regulations : Krishnamoorthy.S
4. Principles of Foreign Exchange : Chatterjee.A.K.
5. Foreign Exchange – Practice, Concepts and control : Jeevanadam.N.S.
6. Foreign Exchange Management : Rajwadi
7. Rupee Convertibility : BibekDebroi
 35742 - MULTINATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Objective:
• To discuss the economic and political factor of multinational financial management.
• To understand the exchange safe system.

UNIT 1 Concept of multinational financial management – Functions – Risk - Return

trade off

UNIT 2 Aspects of multinational financial environment and system – Global financial

markets.

UNIT 3 Foreign Direct Investment by MNCs – Need, strategy and opportunities.

UNIT 4 Economic and political risk – Planning – operating policies to deal with risk.

UNIT 5 Capital budgeting: Basics – NPV – IRR – Increment Cash flows – Parent Vs
Project Cash flows.

UNIT 6 Taxes – Exchange rate changes and inflation – Transfer Pricing – APV and
CAPM.

UNIT 7 Working Capital Management of MNCs – International Cash management:

Objectives – Functions – Techniques: Netting – Leading and Lagging.

UNIT 8 Intercompany loans – Transfer pricing – Cash Planning and budgeting –

Management of Short term investment Portfolio.

UNIT 9 Receivables Management: Credit policy variables: Standards – period – Discount

– Collection effort.

UNIT 10 Credit extension – Exchange rate implications – Inventory management –

Concepts and tools.

UNIT 11 Risk and Uncertainty Models – Off shore production Vs Local Purchase.

UNIT 12 International financing: Long Term Financing: Equity Instruments: International

Depository Receipts and Direct equity participation.
UNIT 13 Debt Instruments: Bonds Notes and Syndicated loans. Short term financing:
Sources – Euro notes and Euro commercial paper – Inter firm financing methods.

UNIT 14 Cost of Capital: Cost of equity – Cost of debt – Cost of back – to - back financing
Overall cost of Capital structure of MNC: Theory, Practice and determinants –
Debt Vs Equity Flow analysis.

REFERENCES:
1. Multinational Financial Management: Shapiro.A.C.
2. International financial Management : Rodrigule and Carter
3. International Business Finance : Wood.D, Byrne.J
4. International Capital Markets : Watson, Marwell
 35743 - PROJECT FINANCE
Objective:
• To understand the process of project finance
• To give knowledge about project appraisal
• To evaluate the financial aspect in project finance

UNIT 1 Project – Meaning and Definition - Stages in a project cycle: Project

identification, formulation, evaluation and implementation

UNIT 2 Project Consultants: Meaning - Role of consultants in project management –

Functions of Project Consultant

UNIT 3 Sources of finance for a project - I: Public issue of shares, debentures, public
deposits, leasing, internal generation of funds, commercial papers.

UNIT 4 Sources of finance for a project – II: Global depository receipts, borrowings from
banks and FIs – Venture capital – Innovative instruments in the capital market.

UNIT 5 Project financing – Estimating the total capital requirements – Factors

determining the fixed capital and working capital – Judicious financing plan.

UNIT 6 Capital gearing – Matching of requirements with available financial assistance

from various sources.

UNIT 7 Process of lending for a project – Pre-sanction appraisal and procedures.

UNIT 8 Appraisal of managerial and technical aspects: Evaluation of managerial skills,

past records, Management and working of other group companies evaluation of
appropriative technology, availability or raw materials and utilities and safeguards
against pollution, effluent disposal/treatment.

UNIT 9 Project appraisal – Evaluation of commercial aspects: Estimation of demand

supply gap, distribution channels and selling arrangements.

UNIT 10 Evaluation of financial aspects - I: Debt equity ratio, current ratio, debt service
coverage ratio, return on investment.

UNIT 11 Evaluation of financial aspects - II: Security margin, internal rate of return and
breakeven analysis.

UNIT 12 Project appraisal – Economic analysis: Economies of scale, employment

generation, social cost benefit analysis, contribution to government revenue.
UNIT 13 Political stability, priority and evaluation of international competitiveness. Project
monitoring – Post sanction supervision and follow up – Steps to improve
recovery.

UNIT 14 Industrial sickness: Warning signals and causes - Rehabilitation of a sick

industrial unit– Role of the board for industrial and financial reconstruction
(BIFR).

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. B.B. Goel, Project Management: A Development Perspective, Deep and Deep Publications,
New Delhi
2. A.K. Sengupta, Bank Credit to Industry, Skylark Publications, New Delhi.
3. Prasanna Chandra, Projects Preparations, Appraisal, Budgeting and Implementation, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
 35744 - INVESTMENT AND DERIVATIVES MARKET
Objective:
• To make the students competent in market investment
• To know about funds and options aspects in derivatives market

UNIT 1 Debt Market: Meaning and Definition - Debt instruments – Nature and varieties–
Distinction between debt and equity market.

UNIT 2 Debt market features in India – Debt pricing theorems - Significance of Debt
pricing theorems.

UNIT 3 Convexity: Meaning – Convexity and Duration – Risk and return structure – Risk
return relationship.

UNIT 4 Debt Portfolio Management: Concept and importance – Passive immunization -

Active management – Horizon analysis.

UNIT 5 Swaps: Types, Features, Merits – Bond Basics – Bond Risks - Bond swaps.

UNIT 6 Equity Market: Equity investment – Nature and features – Factors governing
equity market growth.

UNIT 7 Equity Valuation Models: Dividend model – Zero growth models – Constant
growth model – Multiple growth models

UNIT 8 Models based on P.E. ratios – Earnings based models – Features and applications.

UNIT 9 Options Market: Concept – Types of options – Value of options.

UNIT 10 Valuation at expiration – Profit and losses on calls and puts – Profits and losses of
some option strategies.

UNIT 11 Factors affecting the value of Call option and Put option – Index options Meaning
and Features.

UNIT 12 Future Market: Concept and significance – Futures contract – Basis - Futures
market – Selection of Index for the futures – Benefits of the Index based Futures.

UNIT 13 Returns on futures: Measurement and evaluation – Futures Vs Options.

UNIT 14 Government Securities Market: Meaning and Features - Instruments – Operations

– Significance.
REFERENCES :

1. Bhalla R K, Investment Management.

2. Preethi Singh, Investment Management.
3. Dr.PunithavathiPandian, Investment Management.
4. Gordon E &Natarajan K, Financial Market and Services.
 35745 - GROWTH MANAGEMENT

Objective:
• To understand the concept and techniques of growth management
• To analysis the growth management models

UNIT 1 Sinews of Growth: Defining Growth and Growth Management- Overview of

Growth Management ‘SIX-S’ Process: Sinews, Strategy, Staging, Synchronizing,
Securing and Sustenance- Sinews: Identifying Growth Opportunities.

UNIT 2 Entry Enticements and Barriers- Competition and Cooperation- Creativity and
Engagement- Prioritizing Growth- Developing a Growth Proposition and Plan-
Building up the Growth sinews: Fine-Ware, Soft-Ware and Hard-Ware- Growth
propellers and escalators- Reinventing the Future.

UNIT 3 Strategizing Growth- Strategic thrusts for Growth- Improvement Strategies

(Synergy and Value chain based): Vertical growth, Horizontal growth (related
growth and unrelated growth), Evolutionary growth and Continuous growth.

UNIT 4 Organic growth- Venture Strategies: Disruptive Ventures and Innovation

Strategies: Revolutionary growth, Discontinuous growth, and Acquired growth-
Blue Ocean Strategy- Ansoff’s model.

UNIT 5 McKinsey model- SWOT/TOWS model- 3 Levels ofEnterprise Strategies for

growth- Porters Generic Competitive Strategies- Choosing the strategic growth
choice: Considerations of Internal and External Factors.

UNIT 6 Staging Growth: Organizing for Growth- Inertia Escape- Activation of growth-
Well thought out implementation plan- Competitive compensation programs-
Supportive organization culture.

UNIT 7 Strategic core competencies in place- Frequent, two-way communications-

Strategic staffing plan- Efficient decision-making process- Full delegation and
accountability- Team based environment- Performance management program-
Change management tools in place- Supportive systems and processes.

UNIT 8 Employee development plans- Succession plan – Warding off Organization from
signs of Slowing and Losing- Resources for Growth- Mentor for Growth (M4G)-
Getting focus and balance- Monitoring growth.

UNIT 9 Synchronizing for Growth: Synchronized Efforts - Directing the Growth Resource
mix – Greiner’s model of Crises Induced Growth.
UNIT 10 Managing Growth fatigue: Concept and Overcoming the same - Managing the
momentum of growth: Steady and Speed – Alert and Advancing- High Growth
Road Map.

UNIT 11 Securing Growth in every domain: Product & Brand domain, Market &
Competition domain, Assets & Capacity domain, Finance & Profitability domain.

UNIT 12 Networks & Relationship domain, Geography & Spread domain and People &
Organizational domain- Handling un-sought consequences of growth- Turning
Risks into Opportunities.

UNIT 13 Sustaining Growth: Efficiency Improvement- Effectiveness - Enhancement-

Excellence Management- Continuous Innovation.

UNIT 14 Kaizen and Radical Innovation- Harnessing Diversity- Rapid Growth Strategies-
Managing Rapid Growth- Passion for Growth.

REFERENCES

1. Christopher Meyer, Relentless Growth, Free Press, 1997.

2. Robert Slater, Jack Welch and the GE Way: Management Insights and Leadership, 1999.
3. Richard Leifer, et al, Radical Innovation,HBP, 2000.
4. Peter S Pande, 6 Sigma Way, McGraw Hill, 2000.
5. B Tucker & B Tucker, Driving Growth Through Innovation, Berrett-Koehler, 2002.
6. Jack Trout & Steve Rivkin, Differentiate or Die, John Wiley and Sons, 2008
7. Ram Charan and Noel. M. Tich, Every Business is a Growth Business, Three Rivers
Press, 2000.
8. Jennings & Haughton, It's not BIG and eats SMALL... it's FAST that eats SLOW,
Harper, 2002.
9. Andrew Lester, Growth Management:Two Hats Are Better Than One, MacMillan, 2009
10. Feigenbaum, A V; Feigenbaum, D. S, The power of management innovation : McGraw-
Hill, 2009
11. Timothy George Kotnour, Transforming Organizations,CRC Press 2009.
12. Rodolphe Durand, Organizational evolution and strategic management, Sage, 2006
3. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The course shall consist of two academic years divided into four semesters

4. Faculty and Support Staff Requirements

This programme requires the following faculty and supporting staffs

Staff Category Required

Core Faculty * 3

Faculty for Specialization* 2

Clerical Assistant 1

*At least Assistant Professor Level (Either permanent or part time)

5. Instructional Delivery Mechanism

Each semester there will be one contact programme of 80 hours duration in theory. The SLM
(Self Learning Material) will be supplied to the students in print form as well as in CD form. The
face to face contact sessions of the programme for theory courses will be held at the head quarter
/ learning centres. The conduct of end semester examinations, evaluation and issuance of
certificates will be done by office of the Controller of examinations, Alagappa University,
Karaikudi.

F) PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION, CURRICULUM TRANSACTION, AND

EVALUATION

Procedure of Admission
A candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University in the Pattern of
10+2+3 shall be permitted to appear and qualify for the programme.

Curriculum Transactions:

The class room teaching would be through conventional lecture, use of OHP, power point
presentation and novel innovative teaching ideas like television and computer aided instruction.
Student seminars would be arranged to improve their awareness and communicative skill.
Face to face contact session will be conducted as given in below table.

Course Type Face to Face Contact

Session/semester (in Hours)

5 Theory courses with 4 credits 80

Total 80

Evaluation
The examinations shall be conducted for theory to assess the knowledge acquired during
the study. There shall be two systems of examinations viz., internal and external examinations. In
the case of theory courses, the internal evaluation shall be conducted as Continuous Internal
Assessment via. Student assignments preparation. The internal assessment shall comprise of
maximum 25 marks for each course. The end semester examination shall be of three hours
duration to each course at the end of each semester. The end semester examinations shall
comprise of maximum of 75 marks for each course. The candidate failing in any course(s) will
be permitted to appear for each failed course(s) in the subsequent examination.
f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments:
The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory courses

Component Marks

Assignments(2) 25
(12.5+12.5)
Total 25

Question paper pattern (Theory)

• The question paper carries a maximum of 75 marks.

• The question paper consists of three sections namely Part-A, Part-B and Part-C.
• Part-A consists of 10 questions of 2 marks each (10 x 2 = 20 marks) with no choice. The
candidate should answer all questions.
 • Part-B consists of 5 either or choice questions. Each question carries 5 marks (5 x 5=25
marks).
• Part-C consists of 5 questions. Each question carries 10 marks. The candidate should
Answer any three questions (10 x 3 = 30 marks).

Passing minimum

• There shall be no Passing Minimum for Internal.

• For External Examination, Passing Minimum shall be of 50% (Fifty Percentage) of the
maximum marks (75) prescribed for the paper.
• In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of 50 Mark for each
Paper
• Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (internal + external).

Candidate who does not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass in a course shall be
required to appear and pass the same at a subsequent appearance.

Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and classification to indicate the
performance of the candidate.

Range of Marks Grade Points Letter Grade Description

90-100 9.0-10.0 O Outstanding

80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent
75-79 7.5-7.9 D Distinction
70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good
60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good
50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average
00-49 0.0 U Re-appear
ABSENT 0.0 AAA ABSENT

Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semester

Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester.
n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited
For a semester;

Grade Point Average [GPA] = ∑iCiGi/ ∑iCi

Grade Point Average = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the courses

Sum of the credits of the courses in a semester

For the entire programme;

Cumulative Grade Point Average [CGPA] = ∑n ∑iCniGni/ ∑n ∑iCni

CGPA = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the entire programme

Sum of the credits of the courses for the entire programme

CGPA Grad Classification of Final

Result

9.5-10.0 O+ First Class- Exemplary*

9.0 and above but below 9.5 O

8.5 and above but below 9.0 D++ First Class with
8.0 and above but below 8.5 D+ Distinction*

7.5 and above but below 8.0 D

7.0 and above but below 7.5 A++ First Class

6.5 and above but below 7.0 A+
6.0 and above but below 6.5 A

5.5 and above but below 6.0 B+ Second Class

5.0 and above but below 5.5 B

0.0 and above but below 5.0 U Re-appear

*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the prescribed semester of
the PG Programme are eligible.
Maximum duration for completion of the course

The maximum duration for the programme shall not exceed five years after the completion of
the minimum duration of the programme.

Commencement of this regulation

These regulations shall come into effect from the academic year 2018-19 for students who are
admitted to the first year of the course during the academic year 2018-19.

Fee structure

Sl. No. Fees Detail Amount in Rs.

First Year Second Year

1 Admission Processing Fees 300.00 -

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

3 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00

G) REQUIREMENT OF THE LIBRARY RESOURCES:

LIBRARY RESOURCES
The Central Library is one of the important central facilities of Alagappa University. It has text
book, reference books, conference proceedings, back volumes, standards, and non-book material
such as CD-ROMs and audios. The central Library procured several e-books in different areas.
The library also subscribes to about 250 current periodicals. The Directorate of Distance
Education of Alagappa University has adequate number of copies of books related to
Management Programme.
COST ESTIMATE OF THE PROGRAMME AND THE PROVISIONS:

Sl. No. Nature of Expenditure Amount in Rs.

(Approx.)

1 Programme Development 10,00,000/-

2 Programme Delivery 20,00,000/-

3 Programme Maintenance 3,00,000/-

i) QUALITY ASSURANCE MECHANISM AND EXPECTED PROGRAMME

OUTCOMES

• The feedback from students on teaching will be collected every semester using standard
formats.
• Feedback on the curriculum will also be collected from the experiences of the students
which help teachers in fine tuning of deliverables in the classroom.
• It helps in improving the standard of teaching as expected by the students.
• Exit survey feedback on various parameters to improve and quality of the programme and
support services like course material, library and infrastructure.
• It helps to Strengthen the contents of the program to meet the requirements of the
employment market and keep the curriculum as a treasure of knowledge.
• This programme provides Opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate
knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes.

****
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT

MBA FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
KARAIKUDI – 630 003
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT

MBA FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED

a) PROGRAMME MISSION AND OBJECTIVES

Business Studies have fascinated humans for two reasons, namely generating interest and
augmenting essentials of running a firm effectively. That is why their study is enchanting and
glorifying. The primary objective of this programme is to provide ample exposure to subjects
from the fields of business legacy and accountancy

, equip the Students for entry level jobs in industry and to contribute to the economic
development of the country.

b) RELEVANCE OF THE PROGRAMME WITH HEI’S MISSION AND GOALS:

The Alagappa University is functioning with following Vision and Mission:

Mission: Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular emphasis on

‘PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and Learning

Vision: Affording High Quality Higher Education to the learners so that they are transformed
into intellectually competent human resources that will help in the uplift of the nation to
Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence.

Therefore, the introduction of MBA FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED programme in the

Directorate of Distance Education will contribute substantially in fulfilling the mission of
Alagappa University. Such a higher education in subject with appropriate Practical Exposer
will enrich the human resources for the uplift of the Nation to Educational, Social,
Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence (ESTEEM).
c) NATURE OF PROSPECTIVE TARGET GROUP OF LEARNERS

• Working Professionals
• Entrepreneurs
• Service Personnel
• Academic Faculty
• Government Officials
• Researchers
• Home makers
• Unemployed Graduates

d) APPROPRIATENESS OF PROGRAMME

To Attain Leadership in spearheading qualitative and responsible academic programs relevant

to the society through cost effective off-campus distance mode of education. knowledge and
understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes in the following areas:

• The fundamental concepts of Management

• The higher-level taxonomy and diversity of Business Studies.
• How principles of Business can be applied to problems
• Internship training in Industry
• Undertake Inter tasks and techniques.
• Inter-disciplinary knowledge like statistics, Mathematics, Computer and E-Banking.
• Using the SPSS package for the analysis of data
• It also improves the Intellectual skills of the students.
• In nutshell, these skills will improve the performance of the students parameters
E) INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN
MBA FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED

I YEAR
Course Title CIA ESE TOT
Code Max Max. Max. C
I Semester
34711 Part I: Tamil Paper I/ Communication 25 75 100 4
Skills - I
34712 Part II: English Paper I 25 75 100 4
34713 Principles of Economics 25 75 100 4
34714 Financial Accounting 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
II Semester
34721 Part I: Tamil Paper II / Communication 25 75 100 4
Skills - II
34722 Part II: English Paper II 25 75 100 4
34723 Principles of Management 25 75 100 4
34724 Cost Accounting 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
II YEAR
III Semester
34731 Organizational Behaviour 25 75 100 4
34732 Business Statistics 25 75 100 4
34733 Banking Theory 25 75 100 4
34734 Banking Law and Practice-I 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
IV Semester
34741 Elements of Marketing 25 75 100 4
34742 Banking Law and Practice-II 25 75 100 4
34743 Research Methods 25 75 100 4
34744 Computer and Banking 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16

III YEAR
Course Title CIA ESE TOT C
Code Max. Max Max.
V Semester
34751 Rural Banking 25 75 100 4
34752 Management Accounting 25 75 100 4
34753 Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4
34754 Tourism Entrepreneurship 25 75 100 4
 Total 100 300 400 16

VI Semester
34761 Quantitative Techniques 25 75 100 4
34762 Research Methods 25 75 100 4
34763 Business Environment 25 75 100 4
34764 Business Law 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
IV YEAR
VII Semester
34771 Managerial Economics 25 75 100 4
34772 Entrepreneurship 25 75 100 4
34773 Foreign Exchange Management 25 75 100 4
34774 E-Banking 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
VIII Semester
34781 Financial Management 25 75 100 4
34782 Marketing Management 25 75 100 4
34783 Management Information System 25 75 100 4
34784 Production and Operations 25 75 100 4
Management
Total 100 300 400 16

V YEAR
CIA ESE TOT C
Max. Max. Max.
IX Semester
34791 International economics 25 75 100 4
34792 Project finance 25 75 100 4
34793 Quality Management 25 75 100 4
34794 Growth Management 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
X Semester
Group A: Marketing
34710A1 Product Management 25 75 100 4
34710A2 Promotional Management 25 75 100 4
34710A3 Marketing of Services 25 75 100 4
34710A4 International Marketing 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
Group B: Finance
34710B1 Management of Funds and assets 25 75 100 4
34710B2 Investment Analysis and Portfolio 25 75 100 4
Management
34710B3 Financial Service Institutions 25 75 100 4
34710B4 International Finance 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
Group C: Personnel
34710C1 Labour Legislations 25 75 100 4
34710C2 Human Resource Development 25 75 100 4
34710C3 Industrial Relations 25 75 100 4
34710C4 Global Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
Group D: Systems

No. of Credits per Course (Theory) - 4 Total No. of Credits per Semester- 16
Total Credits for the Programme- 16 X 10 = 160
34710D1 Office Automation 25 75 100 4
34710D2 Internet Programming and Web Design 25 75 100 4
34710D3 Multimedia Applications 25 75 100 4
34710D4 Visual Programming 25 75 100 4
Total 100 300 400 16
34710 Project Work 25 75 100 4
Grand Total 8000 160

Course Code Legend:

3 4 7 Y Z

347- M.B.A 5 YEAR INTEGREATED Programme

Y -Semester Number
Z- Course Number in the Semester
CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total,
C: Credit Points, Max.: Maximum
DETAILED SYLLABI

Course Code Title of the Course

34711 PART-I : TAMILPAPER - I
Nehf;fk; : nkhop mwpT> ,yf;fz mwpit tsh;j;jy;
$W 1
1. fz;zjhrd; - = fpUz fhdk;
1. Gy;yhq;Foy; nfhLj;j
2. FUthA+Uf;F thUq;fs;
$W 2
1. NfhFyj;J gRf;fs;;
2. NfhFyj;jpy; xU ehs; uhij
3. Mah;ghb khspifapy;
$W 3
gl;Lf;Nfhl;il fy;ahz Re;juk;
1. neQ;rpy; FbapUf;Fk;
2. nra;Ak; njhopNy nja;tk;
$W 4
1. ghujpahh;
fz;zd; vd; tpisahl;Lg;gps;is
ghuj khjh jpUg;gs;sp vOr;rp
$W 5
1. ghujpjhrd; - cyfg;gd; ghl;L (5)
2. ehkf;fy; ftpQh; - Nehaw;w tho;T 7 ghl;L
3. ng.J}ud; - epyh gpQ;R

$W 6
1. ty;ypf; fz;zd; - ntWk; Gfo;
2. F.g.,uh[Nfhghyd; - vjw;fhf?
3. kPuh - gjpide;J
$W 7
1. rpw;gp - rh;g;g ahfk;
2. Qhdf;$j;jd; - Njhoh; NkhrpfPudhh;
$W 8
1. mg;Jy; uFkhd; - fz;Zk; vONjk;
2. rz;Kf Rg;igah- tapW
$W 9
1. rpyg;gjpfhuk; - tof;Fiu fhij
2. fk;guhkhazk; - mNahj;jpah fhz;lk;
$W 10
1. rPwhg;Guhzk; - <j;jq;Fiy tutioj;j glyk; (1)
$W 11
Njk;ghtzp - fhl;rpg;glyk;
ghly; vz; (xt;nthU ghlypd; Kjy;thp);
1. ,d;dthapy;
2. nfhOe;JWk;
3. gQ;(r) muq;fpy;
$W 12
Njk;ghtzp - fhl;rpg;glyk;
ghly; vz; (xt;nthU ghlypd; Kjy;thp);
4. vz;ZNs
5. xz;jyq;fs;
6. ,utpNae;j fQ;rf;
$W 13
Njk;ghtzp - fhl;rpg;glyk;
ghly; vz; (xt;nthU ghlypd; Kjy;thp);
7. fd;dpahajhAk;
8. Ve;jp Xq;F csj;J
9. Mt NjKdh;
10. nfhy;Yk; NtnyhLk;
$W 14
Njk;ghtzp - fhl;rpg;glyk;
ghly; vz; (xt;nthU ghlypd; Kjy;thp);
11. vd;w thrfk;
12. mk;gpdhy;
13. Ntz;Lk; Xh; tpid
 Course Code Title of the Course
34711 Part-I: Communication Skills - I

Objectives:
On completion of the course the students will be able to
• Understand the basic skills of Communication.
• Acquaint the students with important features and applications in of Communication.
Unit 1 Communication - Meaning - Types- Importance.

Unit 2 Barriers to Effective Communication - Principles - Principles of Effective

Communication.

Unit 3 Oral Communication - Meaning - Importance - Forms of Oral Communication.

Unit 4 Intonation - Meaning - Function - Types Preparation of Speech- Steps

Involved.

Unit 5 Principles of Effective Oral Communication.

Unit 6 Written Communication - Meaning - Steps - Importance - Advantages - Use of

words and Phrases.

Unit 7 Sentence - Meaning - Sentence formation - Characteristics of an Effective

Sentence.

Unit 8 Paragraph Writing - Essay Writing - Steps Involved - Outline-Layout -

Contents -Drafting-Correction - Final Draft.

Unit 9 Application for Employment and Curriculum Vitae - Steps involved.

Unit 10 Non-Verbal Communication - Meaning - Types - Body Language - Postures -

Gestures- Facial Expressions - Eye Contact.

Unit 11 Report Writing - Report - Types of Reports - Format of a Report.

Unit 12 Essentials of a Good Report - Preparation of Report - Procedure Involved.

Unit 13 Meetings - Purpose of the Meeting - Procedure.

Unit 14 Group Discussion - Quality of Content - Participation - Logical Presentation -
Behavioural Skills.

References:
1. Krishna Mohan & Meera Banerjee, Developing Communication Skills, 2005.
2. Geetha Nagaraj, Write to Communicate, 2004.
3. Wren & Martin, English Grammar and Composition, 2002.
4. Dale Carnegie, How to Win Friends and Influence People, 1981.
5. Dale R Jordan, Language Skills and Use.
6. Gartside L. Bahld, Nagammiah and McComas, Satterwhite, Modern Business
Correspondence.
7. Rajendra Pal and Kortahalli J S, Essentials of Business Communication.
8. Wallace, Michael J, Study Skills in English.
9. Editors of Readers Digest, Super Word Power.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34712 PART-II : ENGLISH PAPER - I

Learning objective:
• To understand the topics of Prose, Grammar and Composition etc.
• To know the importance of writing skills.

Prose
Unit – I Water-the Elixir of life - C.V. Raman
Unit – II Mrs. Packletide’s Tiger - SAKI
Unit – III A Deed of Bravery - Jim Carbett
Unit – IV The Cat - Catharine M.Willson
Unit – V On Letter Writing - Alpha of the Plough
Unit – VI Our Ancestors - Carl Sagan
Unit – VII Our Civilization - C.E.Foad
Unit – VIII A Hero on Probation - B.R. Nanda
Unit – IX Dangers of Drug Abuse - Hardin B. Fones
Unit – X Food - J.B.S. Haldane
Grammar

Unit – XI - Articles-Gerunds-Participles-Infinitives-Modals-Proposition –Tenses.

Unit – XII - Direct and Indirect Speech-Transformation of sentences- Active and

passive voice.

Composition

Unit – XIII - Letter writing - Precis writing - Developing hints.

Unit – XIV - Dialogue writing - Paragraph writing.

References:
1. Sebastian D K, Prose for the Young Reader, Macmillan.
2. Active English Grammar, Ed. by the Board of Editors, Macmillan.
3. Modern English – A Book of Grammar Usage and Composition by N.Krishnaswamy,
Macmillan Publishers.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34713 PRINCIPLES OF ECONOMICS

Objectives:
• To understand the basic concepts and principles of Economics
• To analyze the theories, price determination and market discrimination

UNIT 1 Exploring the subject matter of economics-Why study economics? Scope and
Method of Economics; The Economic Problem: Scarcity and Choice. Reading
and working with Graphs.
UNIT 2 Introduction to Managerial Economics- Nature, Scope, Definitions of.
Managerial Economics, Application of Managerial Economics to Business,
Micro Vs. Macro Economics, opportunity costs, Time Value of Money,
Marginalism, Incrementalism, Market Forces and Equilibrium.

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour-Cardinal Utility Approach: Diminishing Marginal

Utility, Law of Equi-Marginal Utility, Ordinal Utility Approach: Indifference
Curves, Marginal Rate of Substitution, Budget Line and Consumer
Equilibrium.
UNIT 4 Demand Analysis- Theory of Demand, Law of Demand, Movement along vs.
Shift in Demand Curve, Concept of Measurement of Elasticity of Demand,
Factors Affecting Elasticity of Demand, Income Elasticity of Demand, Cross
Elasticity of Demand.
.UNIT 5 Theory of Production- Meaning and concept of Production, Factors of
Production and Production Function, Fixed and Variable Factors, Law of
Variable Proportion (Short Run Production Analysis), Law of Returns to a
Scale (Long Analysis),
UNIT 6 Cost - Concept of Cost, Cost Function, Short Run Cost, Long Run Cost,
Economics and Diseconomies of Scale, Explicit cost and Implicit Cost, Private
and Social Cost.

UNIT 7 Marginal revenue and Marginal cost Meaning- – Optimum firm and
Representative firm. Nature of costs in economics – Opportunity cost Vs
Real cost

UNIT 8 Fixed costs Vs Variable costs – Notion of marginal cost – Equilibrium of

industry – Conditions of competitive equilibrium.
UNIT 9 Interest – Interest as reward for waiting – Liquidity preference theory.Profit –
Risk and uncertainty – Normal profits – Marginal productivity and profits.
UNIT 10 Markets – Nature of competition-Meaning- Importance – Implication – Types
of competition: Monopoly

UNIT 11 Firm’s Behaviour- Pricing Under Perfect Competition, Monopoly,

Monopolistic Competition, Oligopoly, Duopoly, Bilateral monopoly,
Monopolistic competition.Price theory and practices: Price discrimination
under perfect competition

UNIT 12 Distribution: Wages – Marginal productivity–Theory of wages-Collective

bargaining – Wage differentials – Wages and productivity Wage regulation.
UNIT 13 Rent – Scarcity Vs Differential rents – Quasi rent– Rent as surplus over
transfer earnings – Rent as economic surplus.

UNIT 14 Macro Economic Analysis- Theory of income and employment, Classical,

Modern (Keynesian), Approach. Macro-Economic Variables, Circular flow of
income, National Income Concepts, definition and its measurement.

REFERENCE BOOKS :

1. Stonier &Hage, Economic Theory

2. Samuelson Paul A, Economics
3. Edward Nevin, Text book of Economic analysis
4. Mehta P L, Managerial Economics.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34714 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

Objectives:
• To understand the basic rules of accounting methods.
• To know in detail about Final account, partnership accounts and company accounts

UNIT 1 Meaning and Scope of Accounting: Need for Accounting, Development of

Accounting, Definition and Functions of Accounting, Limitation of
Accounting, Book Keeping and Accounting, Is Accounting Science or Art?,
End User of Accounting Information, Accounting and other Disciplines, Role
of Accountant, Branches of Accounting, Difference between Management
Accounting and Financial Accounting, Objectives of Accounting, Accounting
Equation
UNIT 2 Accounting Principles and Standards: Meaning of Accounting Principles,
Accounting Concepts, Accounting Conventions, Systems of Book Keeping,
Systems of Accounting, Introduction to Accounting Standards Issued by ICAI.
UNIT 3 Journalising Transactions: Journal, Rules of Debit and Credit, Compound
Journal Entry, Opening Entry- Sub Division of Journal: Cash Journal, Petty
Cash Book, Purchase Journal, Sales Journal, Sales Return Journal, Voucher
System.
UNIT 4 Ledger Posting and Trial Balance: Ledger, Posting, Relationship between
Journal and Ledger, Rules Regarding Posting, Trial Balance, Final Accounts
of Sole Proprietorship and Firms.
UNIT 5 Bank Reconciliation Statement-Bills of Exchange and the treatment thereof -
Account Current – Average Due date -Consignment and Joint Venture
Accounts.
UNIT 6 Accounts of Non-Trading Concerns-Receipts and Payment Accounts - Income
and Expenditure Accounts and Balance Sheet.
UNIT 7 Partnership: Fixed and Fluctuating Capitals – Current and Drawing Accounts
– Interest on Capital and Drawings and Salary and Commission
UNIT 8 Revaluation of Assets Meaning- Importance – Implication – Treatment of
Goodwill – Admission – Retirement – Death of a Partner
UNIT 9 Dissolution Excluding Garner Vs Murrey Decision and Meaning- Importance
– Implication Sale to a Company – final Accounts.(Simple Problems Only)
UNIT 11 Company Accounts: Issue of Shares and Debentures at Par- Premium and
Discount
UNIT 12 Forfeiture of Shares and Re-Issue of forfeited Shares Meaning – Simple Cases
of Final Accounts.
UNIT 13 Final Accounts of Banking Companies – Prudential Accounting
UNIT 14 Norms: Capital, Adequacy, Income Recognition- Asset Classification and
Provisioning.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Gupta R L, Advanced Accounting

2. Arulanandam M A, Raman K S, Advanced Accounting
3. Shukla M C & Grewal T S, Advanced Accounting
 Course Code Title of the Course
34721 TAMIL
Nehf;fk; : nkhop mwpT> ,yf;fz mwpit tsh;j;jy;
$W 1
Njk;;ghtzp - fhl;rpg;glyk;
ghly; vz; (xt;nthU ghlypd; Kjy;thp);
14. nrhy; jtph;e;j
15. md;id
16. mQ;Rthh;
17. nrhy;yf; Nfl;lds;
18. kw;nra;if
19. kz;fdpag;
20. mOJ Mh;e;j
$W 2
Njk;ghtzp - fhl;rpg;glyk;
ghly; vz; (xt;nthU ghlypd; Kjy;thp);
21. ngha; nghJSk;
22. ,d;G mUe;jp
23. tOjhapd ,d;G
24. kwk; Vtpdh;
$W 3
Njk;ghtzp - fhl;rpg;glyk;
ghly; vz; (xt;nthU ghlypd; Kjy;thp);
25. kz;Nzhh;fs;
26. ngha;ah tpjpNaha;
27. tpbah ,Us;
28. mOthh; vtUk;

$W 4
rpWfij - ePygj;kehgdpd; “thd tPjpapy;”

$W 5
ciueil - fk;gd; Gwj;jpiz - jp.nrhf;fypq;fk;

,yf;fzk; - vOj;Jk; nrhy;Yk;

$W 6
1. KjnyOj;Jfs;, rhh;ngOj;Jfs;
2. nkhop KjnyOj;Jfs; , nkhop ,Wjp vOj;Jfs;
$W 7
1. xw;nwOj;J kpfYk; kpfhikAk,;
2. MF ngah; , md;nkhopj; njhif.
3. tpdh-tpil tiffs;
$W 8
1. jkpo;r; nrhy;yikg;gpd; rpwg;G – ngah; , tpid, ,il, chp tbtq;fs; ,
2. gpw nkhopr; nrhw;fisj; jkpopy; MSk; Kiwfs;
$W 9
3. my; top, Ntw;Wikg; Gzh;r;rpfs;
4. jpiz, ghy; > vz; > ,l ,iaG.

jkpo; ,yf;fpa tuyhW

$W 10
1. ,f;fhy ,yf;fpa tiffs;
m) kuGf; ftpij
M) GJf; ftpijapd; Njhw;wKk; tsh;r;rpAk;
$W 11
1. ciu eil ,yf;fpaq;fs; - Njhw;wKk; tsh;r;rpAk;
m) fl;Liu M) rpWfij
,) Gjpdk; <) ehlfk;
$W 12
1. ,f;fhy ,yf;fpaf; fsq;fs;
jpiug;glk; , njhiyf;fhl;rp, thndhyp, ,jo;fs; jkpOf;F Mw;wp tUk;
gzpfs;
$W 13
1. jkpOk; rkaKk; :
m) irtk; M)itztk; ,)rkzk; <)ngsj;jk; c),Ryhk;
C) fpwpj;Jtk;
$W 14
1. gpw;fhyf; fhg;gpaq;fs; :
m) fk;guhkhazk; M) nghpaguhzk;
2. ,izak; - gw;wpa nra;jpfs;
***
 Course Code Title of the Course
34721 Part-I: Communication Skills - II
Objectives:
• To understand the conversation and presentation skills of communication
• To discuss more on corporate communication Skills

Unit 1 Code and Content of Communication Skills.

Unit 2 Stimulus and Response of Communication Skills.
Unit 3 Effective Speaking Guidelines.
Unit 4 Pronunciation Etiquette of Communication Skills.
Unit 5 Phonetics in Communication Skills.
Unit 6 A Self-Assessment of Communicating Soft Skills.
Unit 7 Language Skills - Ability - Skill Selected Need - Learner Centre activities.
Unit 8 Listening Skills - Importance - Types of Listening - Interview Skills.
Unit 9 Conversation Skills - Modes.
Unit 10 Presentation Skills - Preparing - Planning - Presentation.
Unit 11 Written Communication - Structure of Effective Sentences - Paragraph.
Unit 12 Technical Writing - Creative Writing - Editing and Publishing.
Unit 13 Corporate Communication Skills - Internal - Effective business writing -
Letters, Proposals, Resume.
Unit 14 Corporal Communication Skills - External - Press release - Newsletters-
Interviewing skills.
References:
1. Dutt. Kiranmai & Geeta Rajjevan. Basic Communication Skills. Rev.ed. Foundation
Books Pvt.Ltd. Cambridge House, New Delhi 2006.
2. Bill R. Swetmon. Communication Skills for the 21st Century. Chennai: Eswar Press. First
South Asian Edition 2006.
3. Glass. Lillian. Talk to Win. New York: Perigee Books,1987.
4. Pease. Alan. Signals: How to Use Body Language for Power, Success and Love, New
York: Bantam Books, 1981.
5. Walters. Lilly. Secrets of Successful Speakers. New York: McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1993.
6. Mandal. S.K. How to Succeed in Group Discussions & Personal Interviews. Mumbai:
JAICO Publishing House.
7. Rogoff. Leonard and Ballenger. Grady. Office Guide to Business Letters, Memos &
Reports. New York: Macmillan, 1994.
8. Krishna Mohan & Meera Banerjee, Developing Communication Skills, 2005.
9. Geetha Nagaraj, Write to Communicate, 2004.
10. Wren & Martin, English Grammar and Composition, 2002.
11. Rajendra Pal and Kortahalli J S, Essentials of Business Communication.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34722 PART-II : ENGLISH PAPER - II
Learning objective:
• To make the students to master in Poetry
• To make the students to know about language use
1.
Poetry
Unit – I Sonnet - William Shakespeare
Unit – II Lines Composed upon Westminster Bridge -William Wordsworth

Unit – III Grecian Urn - John Keats (1795-1827)

Unit – IV Andrea Del Sarto - Robert Browning (1812-1889)

Unit – V The Road Not Taken - Robert Frost (1874-1963)

Unit – VI Strange Meeting - Wilfred Owen (1813-1918)

Unit – VII Gitanjali - Rabindranath Tagore (1861-1946)

Unit – VIII The Coromandel Fishers - Sarojini Naidu

Unit – IX The Express - Stephen Spender

Unit – X Shakespeare : The Rural of Venice

Language Use:

Unit – XI Essay writing

Unit – XII Note Making

Unit – XIII Report writing

Unit – XIV Comprehension

References:
1. The Golden Quill, P.K. Seshadri, Macmillan.
2. The Rural of Venice, Shakespeare. (Any overseas edition).
3. Active English Grammar, Ed. by the Board of Editors, Macmillan.
4. Modern English – A Book of Grammar Usage and Composition by
5. N.Krishnaswamy, Macmillan Publishers.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34723 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
• To understand the basic concepts and principles of management
• To give exposure to the learners about business communication, leadership and
control.

UNIT 1 Introduction: Concept, nature, process and significance of management;

Managerial levels, skills, functions and roles; Management Vs.
Administration; Coordination as essence of management. Development of
management thought: classical, neo-classical, behavioral, systems and
contingency approaches.
UNIT 2 Evolution of Management Thought-Contribution of F.W.Taylor, Henri Fayol
,EltonMayo , Chester Barhard & Peter Drucker to the management thought.
Various approaches to management (i.e. Schools of management thought)
Indian Management Thought

UNIT 3 Planning: Nature, scope and objectives of planning; Types of plans; Planning
process; Business forecasting; MBO; Concept, types, process and techniques
of decision-making; Bounded Rationality.
UNIT 4 Organizing: Concept, nature, process and significance; Principles of an
organization; Span of Control; Departmentation; Types of an organization;
Authority-.
UNIT 5 Responsibility; Delegation and Decentralization; Formal and Informal
Organization Staffing: Concept, Nature and Importance of Staffing.
UNIT 6 Motivating and Leading: Nature and Importance of motivation; Types of
motivation; Theories of motivation-Maslow, Herzberg, X, Y and Z;
UNIT 7 Leadership – meaning and importance; Traits of a leader; Leadership Styles –

UNIT 8 Likert’s Systems of Management, Tannenbaum & Schmidt Model and

Managerial Grid. Directing: Nature - Principles

UNIT 9 Controlling: Nature and Scope of control; Types of Control; Control process;
Control techniques – traditional and modern; Effective Control System
UNIT 10 Strategic Management -Definition, Classes of Decisions, Levels of Decision,
Strategy, Role of different Strategist, Relevance of Strategic Management and
its Benefits, Strategic Management in India

UNIT 11 Departmentalisation – Span of management -responsibility – Accountability –

Decentralisation.
UNIT 12 Communication process – Forms– Barriers – Overcoming barriers.
UNIT 13 Co -ordination: Importance & Need – Types- Scope. Social Responsibility of
Management
UNIT 14 environment friendly management -Management of Change -Management of
Crisis Total Quality Management -Stress Management -International
Management

REFERENCE BOOKS :

1. Prasad L N, Reddy &Appanniah, Essentials of Management

2. Lallan Prasad, Koontz, O’Donnel, Essentials of Management
3. Koontz & O’ Donnel, Essentials of Management
 Course Code Title of the Course
34724 COST ACCOUNTING
Objectives:
• To understand the basic concept of cost accounting.
• To know about standard costing, variance analysis and cost ledgers.

UNIT 1 Cost Accounting : Meaning, Features, Scope, Techniques, Methods,

Objectives, Importance and Limitations. Costing; cost accountancy; cost
centres and profit centres, Difference and similarities of cost accounting
system with financial accounting system. Cost: main elements and types.

UNIT 2 Material Control: Meaning and objectives of material control, material

purchase procedure, fixation of inventory levels-reorder level, Minimum level,
Maximum level, Danger level. EOQ analysis. Methods of Valuing Material
Issues. Wastage of material –main types.

UNIT 3 Labour Cost Control : Importance, methods of time keeping and Time
Booking; Treatment and control of Labour Turnover, Idle Time, Overtime,
Systems of Wage Payment-Time Wage System, Piece Wage System.
Incentive Wage plans –Individual plans and group plans.

UNIT 4 Overheads : Meaning and Types. Collection, Classification; Allocation,

Apportionment and Absorption of Overheads –Main methods.

UNIT 5 Unit and output costing : meaning and objectives; cost sheet–meaning,
Performa, types preparation of cost sheet; determination of tender price;
production account –types.

UNIT 6 Reconciliation of cost and financial accounts : Meaning. Objectives and

procedure

UNIT 7 Process Costing: Meaning; Uses; Preparation of process account, Treatment of

Normal Wastage, Abnormal Wastage, Abnormal Effectiveness;

UNIT 8 Treatment of opening and closing stock - .Joint -Product and By -Product:
Main methods of apportionment of Joint cost. Inter process profits.

UNIT 9 Contract Costing –meaning, main features, preparation of contract account,

Escalation clause; contract near completion; cost plus contract.

UNIT 10 Job and batch costing - Budgetary control –meaning of budget and budgetary
control, budgetary control as a management tool,.

UNIT 11 limitations of budgetary control, forecasts and budgets, installation of

budgetary control system, classification of budgets, fixed and flexible
budgeting, performance budgeting, zero based budgeting and responsibility
accounting
UNIT 12 Standard Costing : meaning, limitations, standard costs and budgeted costs,
determination of standard cost, cost variances, direct material and direct
labour only.

UNIT 13 Marginal Costing and Profit planning: Marginal costing, Absorption costing,
Marginal cost, Cost volume Profit analysis, BEP Analysis, Key factor, BE
chart, angle of incidence,

UNIT 14 concept of decision-making and steps involved, determination of sales mix,

make or buy Decisions - Cost Ledgers -Reconciliation of Cost and Financial
Profits –Need for Control – Integral Accounting.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Jain and Narang, Advanced Cost Accounting

2. Prasad N K, Iyengar S P and Nigam and Sharma Cost Accounting
3. Ratnam P V, Costing Adviser.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34731 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR
Objectives:
• To understand the basic concept of organizational behavior.
• To gain knowledge on significance of organizational culture.

UNIT 1 Organizational Behaviour: Meaning – Elements – Need – Approaches –

Models – Global scenario

UNIT 2 Individual Behaviour: Personality & Attitudes- Development of

personality - Nature and dimensions of attitude – Organizational
Commitment

UNIT 3 Learning – Attitudes – Perception – Motivation – Ability – Their relevance to

organizational behavior.

UNIT 4 Group Behaviour: Theories of Group Formation - Formal Organization and

Informal Groups and their interaction- Importance of teams

UNIT 5 Formation of teams - Team Work- Group dynamics – Group norms – Group
cohesiveness – Their relevance to organizational behavior.

UNIT 6 Organizational Power and Politics: Organizational Power: Definition, Types

of powers, Sources and Characteristics

UNIT 7 Effective use of power- Organizational Politics: Factors and Impact.

UNIT 8 Organizational Stress and Conflict Management: Stress Management:

Meaning – Types – Sources – Consequences – Management of stress

UNIT 9 Organizational conflict: Constructive and Destructive conflicts - Conflict

Process - Strategies for encouraging constructive conflict - Strategies for
resolving destructive conflict.

UNIT 10 Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Dynamics – Organizational

Efficiency, Effectiveness and Excellence: Meaning and Approaches

UNIT 11 Organizational Culture – Meaning, significance – Organizational Climate –

Implications on organizational behavior.

UNIT 12 Organizational Change and Development: Organizational Change: Meaning,

Nature and Causes of organizational change

UNIT 13 Resistance to change – Managing change.-Stress – Work Stressors –

Prevention and Management of stress – Balancing work and Life.
.

UNIT 14 Development: Meaning, Nature and scope of OD – OD Interventions-

Challenges to OD- Learning Organizations.
REFERENCES

• Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2006.

• Stephen P. Robbins, Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall; 2010
• Keith Davis, Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work, McGraw
Hill, 2010
• Griffin and Moorhead, Organizational Behavior: Managing People and
Organizations, 2006.
• Judith R. Gordon, Organizational Behavior: A Diagnostic, Prentice Hall,
2001.
• K.Aswathappa, Organizational Behaviour, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai,
2010
• Judith R. Gordon, A Diagnostic Approach to OrganisationalBehaviour, Allyn
& Bacon, 1993
 Course Code Title of the Course
34732 BUSINESS STATISTICS
Objectives:
• To understand the basic concept of Statistics.
• To gain knowledge on different measures of central tendency, index numbers and
time series.

UNIT 1 Definition, important and limitations; Functions and scope of statistics;

Types of data; Data collection techniques; Presentation of data.
UNIT 2 Data Condensation and graphical Methods :Raw data , attributes and variables
classification , frequency distribution , cumulative frequency distributions.
Graphs- Histogram , Frequency polygon. Diagrams - Multiple bar , Pie
,Subdivided bar

UNIT 3 Measures of Central Tendency – Mean (A.M., G.M., H.M.), Median, Mode –
different properties; Partition values – Quartiles, Deciles, Percentiles; Partion
values from Ogives

UNIT 4 Measures of Dispersion– Range, Q.D., M.D., S.D. – their coefficients;

Comparing consistency; Different properties.

UNIT 5 Moments, Skewness and Kurtosis– Moments about an arbitrary number;

Central Moments; Relation between central and non-central moments upto 4th
order; β and γ- coefficients; Meaning of skewness and kurtosis; Different
measures of skewness and kurtosis.

UNIT 6 Linear Correlation and Regression - Types of correlation, Scatter diagram,

Two-waytable, Marginal and Conditional distributions; Pearson’s coefficient
of correlation,Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient, Properties of
correlation coefficient,

UNIT 7 Regression analysis- Meaning and types of regression equations, Curve fitting
by the method of least squares, Derivation of regression equations, Properties
of regression equations.

UNIT 8 Index Number– Construction, Price and Quantity index numbers, Laspeyres’,
Paasche’s, Edgeworth-Marshall’s, Fisher’s method, Relative methods, Tests
of index number formulae: Time and Factor reversal tests, General index
number, Chain base index number, Cost of living index number (CLI), Uses
of CLI and its applications, Uses and limitations of index numbers.
.UNIT 9 Analysis of Time Series- Components of a time series, Adjustment in time
series, Measurement of trend by moving average and least squares methods
(linear and quadratic trends), Measurement of seasonal variation by simple
average method, Forecasting, Deseasonalisation.
UNIT 10 Sampling-. Sampling and Sampling Distributions; Procedure of hypothesis
testing; Type I and Type II errors; One tailed and two tailed tests;

UNIT 11 Tests of Hypothesis - Testing of hypothesis w.r.t. large samples, about

population means, difference between means, attributes, population
proportion and difference between two proportions.

UNIT 12 Chi-square test; Analysis of Variance; Statistical decision making

UNIT 13 Probability– Basic terms; Total, Compound and Bayes’ Theorems for two and
three events – Problems based on them. \

UNIT 14 Probability Distribution – Binomial, Poisson and Normal distributions; Mean

and S.D. of Binomial and Poisson distributions

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Elhance D N, Fundamentals of Statistics

2. Gupta S P, Statistics for Business Students
3. Gupta S P, Statistical methods
 Course Code Title of the Course
34733 Banking Theory
Objectives:
• To understand the functions of Commercial Banks.
• To know the importance of Indian money market.

UNIT 1 Definition of bank –kinds of banks – Credit creation by banks –Balance sheet
of Banks.

UNIT 2 Unit Banking Vs Branch Banking.

UNIT 3 Commercial Banking –Classification of Banks –Functions –Creation of Credit

–Balance Sheet –Investment Policies –Bank Assets –Banking Structure –
Clearing Houses.
UNIT 3 Reserve Bank of India –Objectives and Functions –Control of credit by R.B.I.
–Indian Money Market

UNIT 4 Introduction to Money –Kinds, Functions and Significance –Demand for and
Supply of Money –Monetary Standards –Gold Standard –Bimetallism and
Paper Currency Systems –Paper Money –Money Market.

UNIT 5 Foreign Exchanges – Exchange Market and Rates of Exchange – Exchange

Control.

UNIT 6 Banking Regulation Act, 1949: History; Social control; Banking Regulation
Act as applicable to banking companies and public sector banks; Banking
Regulation Act as applicable to Co- operative banks.

UNIT 7 Indian Banking –Reserve Bank of India–Organisation –Management -

Functions –NABARD –State Bank of India –Exchange Banks –Commercial
Banks -Indigenous Banks –Co-operative Banks.

UNIT 8 State Bank of India: Brief History; objectives; Functions; Structure and
organization; Working and progress

UNIT 9 Regional Rural and Co- operative Banks in India: Functions; Role of
Regional rural and co-operative banks in rural India; Progress and
performance

UNIT 10 Regional Rural and Co- operative Banks in India: Functions; Role of Regional
rural and co-operative banks in rural India; Progress and performance

UNIT 11 Place of Private Sector Banks.-Role and functions in india

UNIT 12 Bankers as Borrowers – Precautions to be taken before

opening accounts -Legal significance of Fixed Deposit Receipts.
UNIT 13 Definition of the term banker and customer – General relationship – special
relationship – main functions and subsidiary services rendered by banker –
agency services and general utility services.

UNIT 14 Recent Trends in Indian Banking System

Note: Students are expected to be aware of changes upto 6 months prior
to the date of examinations.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Basu, Theory and Practice of Development Banking

2. Muranjan S K, Modern Banking in India
3. Reddy, Appanniah, Natarajan & Gordon, Banking Theory and Practice.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34734 BANKING LAW AND PRACTICE-I
Objectives:
• To understand the basic concept of banking.
• To know about the negotiable instruments.

UNIT I Definition of banking – Relationship between banker and customer – General

relationship

UNIT 2 Obligations of a banker: Obligation to honour cheques and to maintain secrecy of

accounts

UNIT 3 Banker’s rights: Right of general line, set-off, appropriation and to charge interest
and incidental charges.

UNIT 4 Negotiable Instruments – Definition – Characteristics features – Distinguishing

features of cheque, bill and promissory note

UNIT 5 Types of bills of exchange – Trade bills and accommodation bills – Discounting
of bills – Due date of bills – Dishonour of bills – Noting and protesting

UNIT 6 Holder and Holder in due course of negotiable instruments – Payment in due
course – Return of cheques.

UNIT 7 Endorsements – Definition – Kinds – Crossing – Types – MICR Cheques –

Paying banker;

UNIT 8 Precautions to be taken before a cheque for payment and statutory protection –
Collecting banker Duties and Statutory Protection.

UNIT 9 Types of customers and account holders – Procedure and practice in opening and
conducting the accounts of customers viz., Minors, Joint account holders,
Partnership firms, Joint stock companies,

UNIT 10 Executors and Trustees, Clubs and Associations, Joint Hindu Family etc –
Non-Resident Accounts.

UNIT 11 Different types of accounts in a bank: Savings, Current and Fixed deposit
accounts

UNIT I2 Opening, Operation and Closing of such a counts – Legal aspects of entries in
the Pass Book.

UNIT 13 Services to customers: Remittance of funds, Safe Deposit Lockers, Guarantee,

Letters of credit,
UNIT 14 Travellers cheques, Gift cheques, Credit Cards, Rural Banking Services, -
Investment Counselling, carrying out standing instructions and other
miscellaneous services. legal effect. Modern Banking,Banking practice – e
banking – Internet banking – Mobile banking – ATMS- Cash Machine – EFT
(Electronic Fund Transfer) – RTGs, NEFT, MICR.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Tannan, M.L, Banking Law and Practice in India, Thacker & Co. Ltd., Bombay,
Latest Edn.
2. Sundaram&Varshney, Banking Theory, Law and Practice, Sultan Chand &
Sons, New Delhi, Latest Edn.
3. Indian Institute of Bankers, Mumbai , Commercial Banking Volume I, II and III.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34741 ELEMENTS OF MARKETING
Objectives:
• To understand the elements of marketing
• To know more about market segmentation strategies and consumer behavior

UNIT 1 Introduction: Nature and scope of marketing; importance of

marketing as a business function, and in the economy;

UNIT 2 Marketing concepts -traditional and modern; Selling vs. marketing; Marketing
mix; Marketing environment.

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour: Nature, scope and significance of consumer behaviour.-

Factors influencing consumer behaviour

UNIT 4 Market segmentation -concept and importance; Bases for market

segmentation- Market Segmentation Strategies – Marketing mix

UNIT 5 Product Concept of product, consumer, and industrial goods; Product

planning and development.

UNIT 6 Product positioning – Packaging -role and functions; Brand name and trade
mark; After- sales service; Product life cycle concept

UNIT 7 Price- Importance of price in the marketing mix; Factors affecting price of a
product/service; Discounts and rebates

UNIT 8 Distributions Channels: Distribution channels - concept and role; Types of

distribution channels; Factors affecting choiceof a distribution channel;
Retailer and wholesaler;

UNIT 9 Physical distribution of goods; Transportation Warehousing; Inventory

control; Order processing

UNIT 10 Promotion: Methods of promotion; Optimum promotion mix; Advertising

media- their relative merits and limitations; Characteristics of an effective
advertisement

UNIT 11 Personal selling; Selling as a career; Classification of a successful sales

person; Function of salesman

UNIT 12 Training and Compensation – Evaluation of performance of Sale Force –

Advertisement and Publicity
UNIT 13 Communication –Meaning, nature and importance. Communication process
and elements of communication process. Barriers in communication.
Marketing communication mix concept, factors affecting the promotion or
communication mix. Communication mix determination process.

UNIT 14 Setting up of target, policies, strategies, integrated communication in

marketing, recent trends in marketing

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. William J Stanton, Fundamental of Marketing

2. Mamoria C B & Satish Mamoria, Marketing Management
3. Gandhi J C, Rajan Nair, Marketing
4. Sherlekar S A, Essentials of Marketing Management
 Course Code Title of the Course
34742 Banking Law and Practice-II
Objectives:
• To understand law of banking practice
• To analyze the industrial sickness and causes

UNIT 1 Principles of Lending –Types of Borrowings –Precautions to be taken by a

banker- Loans and advances against different type of securities

UNIT 2 forms of advances such as Cash credit, Overdraft, Loan, Purchase and
Discounting of bills – borrower study.

UNIT 3 Secured advances: Different types of securities viz., – Need for Control –Types-
Scope, Features Government securities

UNIT 4 Corporate securities, Life Insurance Policies. Goods, Document of Title to Goods,
Real estate and Book debts,

UNIT 5 Modes of creating charges viz., Meaning- Importance – Implication – Need for
Control –Types- Scope, Features Lien, Pledge, Hypothecation and Mortgage.

UNIT 6 Guarantees: Definition – Essential features of a contract of guarantee- Features

UNIT 7 Liability of the surety – Rights of surety

UNIT 8 Obligations of creditor towards surety Rights of creditor. Meaning- Importance –

Implication – Need for Control –Types- Scope, Features

UNIT 9 Loan appraisal: Managerial appraisal, Technical appraisal

UNIT 10 Commercial appraisal and Financial appraisal – Follow up and supervision –

NPAs. - Need for Control –Types- Scope, Features

UNIT 11 Documentation: Meaning – Documentation in respect of various types of

borrowers
and securities
UNIT 12 Essential clauses – Indian Stamp Act – Limitation Act.

UNIT 13 Industrial Sickness

UNIT 14 Industrial Causes – Rehabilitation of Sick units.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bedi H.L. and Hardikar V.K., Practical Banking Advances.

2. Kannan M.L., Banking law and Practice in India, Thacker & Co.
3. Commercial Banking 4 Volumes.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34743 RESEARCH METHODS
Objectives:

• To know the basic concepts of research

• To know about different sampling methods and techniques

UNIT 1 Meaning, Types and Process of Research: Meaning – Purpose – Types of

Research
UNIT 2 Pure & Applied, Historical & Futuristic, Analytical & Synthetic, Descriptive
& Prescriptive, Survey & Experimental and Case & Generic Researches
UNIT 3 Significance of research in social sciences – Process of research – Meaning –
Scientific method – Induction and deduction.
UNIT 4 Planning Research: Research problem – Identification, selection and
formulation of research problem – Review of literature in the field of business
UNIT 5 Economic management: Use in identifying Research Gaps and Techniques –
Hypothesis – Meaning – Sources and Types of Hypothesis – Hypothesis
Formulation for testing – Research design – Factors affecting research design
– Evaluation of research design.
UNIT 6 Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation –
Principle of sampling – Essentials of a good sampling – Methods of sampling
UNIT 7 Probability and non-probability sampling methods – Sample size – Factors
affecting the size of the sample – Biased sample – Sampling and non-sampling
errors.
UNIT 8 Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data – Primary and secondary data
– Modes of data collection – Observation: Types and Techniques –Interview:
Types and conduct – Preparation for an interview – Effective interview
techniques – Limitations of interview
UNIT 9 Schedule: Meaning and kinds – Essentials of a good schedule – Procedure for
the formulation of a schedule – Questionnaire: Meaning and types – Format of
a good questionnaire– Schedules vis-a-vis Questionnaires
UNIT 10 Scaling techniques: Meaning, Importance, Methods of their construction of
Questionnaires or Schedules – Pre-testing of Data Collection Tools- Validity
and Reliability – Methods.
UNIT 11 Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning – Importance – Process of data
analysis – Editing – Coding – Tabulation – Diagrams – Univariate, Bivariate
and Multi-variate analyses
UNIT 12 Test of Hypothesis: Fundamentals on Test Procedure- Testing for significance
of Mean/Proportion and difference between Means/Proportions- F Test for
Means and Chi-square test Contingency Table

UNIT 13 Concept and Types of Non-parametric Texts- Mann Whitney Test- The
process of interpretation of Test Results– Guidelines for making valid
interpretation.

UNIT 14 Report Writing : Role and types of reports – Contents of research report –
Steps involved in drafting reports – Principles of good report writing –
Grammatical Quality – Language flow- Data Support- Diagrammatic
Elucidation- References and Annotations – Clarity and Brevity of
expressions- Features of a good Report- Criteria for evaluating research
reports/ research findings.

REFERENCES

1. John W Best & James V. Kahn Research in Education, Allyn and Bacon, 2009
2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley, New Delhi, 1989.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34744 COMPUTER AND BANKING
Objectives:

• To understand more about computer

• To know about hardware and software

UNIT I Electronic Banking: Traditional Banking Vs E-Banking-Facets of E-Banking -E-

Banking transactions - truncated cheque and Electronic cheque

UNIT 2 Models for E-banking-complete centralized solution- features-CCS-Cluster

approach-Hi tech. Bank with in Bank Advances of E-Banking-Constraints in E-
Banking

UNIT 3 Online Banking: Introduction –concept and meaning-the electronic delivery channels-
need for computerization-Automatic Teller Machine(ATM) at home –Electronic
Fund Transfer(EFT)-uses – computerization in clearing houses- Telebanking-
Banking on home computers –Electronic Money Transfer -uses of EMT.

UNIT 4 Updating Bank saving accounts –Computer bank branches-Financial Transaction

Terminals- (FTT)-E-Cheque-Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) and
Cheques

UNIT 5 E-Banking Security- Introduction need for security –Security concepts-Privacy –

Survey. Findings on security-Attack-Cyber crimes-Reasons for Privacy

UNIT 6 Tampering-Encryption –Meaning-The encryption process-may appear as follows -

Cryptogram-Cryptanalyst-cryptography-Types of Cipher systems –Code systems-
Cryptography-Cipher-Decipher-Jumbling-Asymmetric-Crypto system-Data
Encryption Standard

UNIT 7 E-Banking in India-Procedure-Programmes-Components- How to go on net for

Online Banking-advantages-Limitations.

UNIT 8 E-Builder solutions-Digital certificate-Digital Signature &Electronic Signature-E-

Security solutions— solutions providers-E-locking technique- E-locking services-
Netscape security solutions- Pry Zone

UNIT 9 E-software security Internet-Transactions-Transaction security-PKI-Sierras Internet

solutions-inc –security devices-Public Key Infrastructure-(PKI)-Firewalls Secure
Ledger-(FSL)-Secure Electronic Transaction(SET).
UNIT 10 Basic concepts of data processing – Binary number system – Octal and
hexadecimal – Representation of non-numeric data

UNIT 11 CPU – Main memory – Peripheral controllers – Peripherals.

UNIT 12 Software: Need for software – What is software? Types of software, System
Software -Operating systems – language translators -Programming languages.

UNIT 13 LAN – Local processing with batch updates – Meaning- Importance –

Implication – Need for Control –Types- Scope, Features AIMs – Home
banking – EFT – MICR.

UNIT 14 Inter branch reconciliation Security considerations – Accidental damage,

power failures and malicious damage .

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bajwa K.S., Bank Mechanization, Skylark Publications

2. Srivatsava, Computer Applications in Banks, BTC, RBI
3. Sanjay Soni and Vinayak Aggarwal, Computers and Banking Sultan Chand &
Sons.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34751 RURAL BANKING

Objectives:

• To investigate the concept of rural banking and growth

• To know about Loan syndication and capital issue

UNIT 1 Rural Banking: Meaning – Importance – Activities of a Rural banker – Project

counselling – Loan syndication – Management of public issues –
Underwriting, bankers to issue and other services

UNIT 2 Growth of Rural banking in India –– Meaning- Importance – Implication –

Need for Control –Types- Scope, Features .- Role of the SEBI in regulating
Rural banking industry - Role of NSE and OTCEI.

UNIT 4 Project related activities of a Rural banker: Corporate Counselling:

Organisational goals ––Loan Syndication: Meaning and scope – Steps in
syndication–

UNIT 5 Capital Issue related activities of a Rural banker: Changing structure of Indian
Capital Market – Management of pre-issue activities

UNIT 6 corporate securities : Types and characteristics – Marketing of corporate

securities – Steps to be taken by the issuing company and the lead manager –
Underwriting.
UNIT 7 Management of post-issue activities – Processing of data – Reporting to SEBI
– Under subscription – Bridge loans – Allotment of shares – Listing of
securities.

UNIT 8 Service oriented activities of a Rural banker: Mergers and Amalgamations:

Meaning – Purpose – Types of mergers.

UNIT 9 Role of Rural bankers in mergers – Portfolio Management: Functions of

portfolio managers – Explanation to risk – CAPM Approach to market
operations.

UNIT 10 Miscellaneous activities of a Rural banker: Venture capital – Origin –

Administration of venture capital fund – Mutual fund

UNIT 11 Classification of mutual funds – Factoring – Mechanism and types of

factoring Domestic - Cash Management, ST/MT Funding, Meaning and
importance cash management, Objectives,.
UNIT 12 Cash flow cycle, Cash flow budgeting and forecasting, Electronic cash
management, MT and LT funding, Term loans, Securitization, Cost center,
Profit center, Planning and control, Capital Budgeting.
UNIT 13 Liquidity Management- Objectives-Sources-Maturity concerns: Projected cash
and core sources- Contingency Plans- ST/NT Liquidity – Maturity Ladder
Limit- Internal control-Information- Netting.

UNIT 14 Regulation, Supervision and Compliance- Need and significance of internal

and external audit.

REFERENCES
1. Machiraju H R, Rural Banking: Principles and Practice.
2. Dr.Verma J C, Bharat’s Manual of Rural Banking.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34752 MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING
Objectives:

• To analyze the management accounting concepts and

applications
• To study the budgeting and budgetary control

UNIT 1 Management accounting – Definition – Objectives – Nature – Scope –

Merits and limitations – Differences between management accounting
and financial accounting –

UNIT2 Financial statement analysis – Comparative statement – Common size

statement – Trend percentage.

UNIT3 Ratio analysis – Meaning – Classification – Liquidity, solvency,

turnover and profitability ratios – Dupont chart – Construction of
balance sheet.

UNIT 4 Fund flow statement – Meaning– Preparation – Schedule of changes

in working capital – Funds from operation – Sources and applications

UNIT 5 Cash flow statement – Meaning – Difference between funds flow statement
and cash flow statement – Preparation of cash flow statement as per
Accounting Standard 3.

UNIT 6 Budget and Budgetary control – Meaning – Advantages – Preparation of

sales, production, production cost, purchase, overhead cost, cash and flexible
budgets

UNIT 7 Standard costing – Meaning, Advantages and Limitations.

UNIT 8 Variance analysis – Significance - Computation of variances

(Material Labour and overheads)

UNIT 9 Marginal costing – CVP analysis – Break even analysis –

UNIT 10 BEP - Managerial applications – Margin of safety – Profit planning.

UNIT 11 Differential Costing.

UNIT 12 Capital Budgeting – Meaning – Importance – Appraisal methods

UNIT 13 Payback period –– Accounting rate of return - Discounted cash flow – Net
present value – Profitability index – Internal rate of return.

UNIT 14 Methods of evaluation of Alternative Capital Expenditure

Programme.
 REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Maheswari S N, Management Accounting and Financial Control

2. Man Mohan and Goyal, Management Accounting
Hingorani, Ramanathan, and Katyal, Management Accounting
 Course Code Title of the Course
34753 HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Objectives:

• To understand basic concepts and functions of Human Resource Management

• To know more about Employee welfare and Employee retention

UNIT 1 Introduction: Concept, nature, scope, objectives and importance of HRM;

Evolution of HRM; Challenges of HRM; Personnel Management vs HRM

UNIT 2 Strategies for the New Millennium: Role of HRM in strategic management;
human capital; emotional quotient; mentoring; ESOP; flexi-time; quality
circles; Kaizen TQM and Six Sigma

UNIT 3 Role and structure of Human Resource Function in organizations- Challenges

in Human Resource Management- Approaches to Human Resource
Management

UNIT 4 Acquisition of Human Resources: HR Planning; Job analysis – job description

and job specification

UNIT 5 Recruitment and Selection Process: Sources of recruitment- internal Vs.

External; Domestic Vs. Global sources- Selection process

UNIT 6 Tests and interviews; placement and induction. Job changes – transfers,
promotions/demotions, separations.

UNIT 7 Placement and Induction- Training and Development: Concept and

importance of training

UNIT 8 types of training; methods of training; design of training programme;

evaluation of training effectiveness.
UNIY 9 Executive development – process and techniques; career planning and
development.
UNIT 10 Employee Compensation and Retention: Wages and Salary Administration –
Bonus – Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems

UNIT 11 Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems –Promotion – Demotions – Transfers-

Labour Attrition: Causes and Consequences.

UNIT 12 Performance and Potential appraisal – concept and objectives; traditional and
modern methods, limitations of performance appraisal methods, 360 degree
appraisal technique; Maintenance: overview of employee welfare, health and
safety, social security
UNIT 13 Employee Retention: Need and Programs.- Employee Welfare, Separation:
Welfare and safety – Accident prevention – Employee Grievances and their
Redressal – Industrial Relations.

UNIT 14 Trade Unions - Multiplicity of Trade Unions – Workers Participation in

Management- Separation: Need and Methods- Human Resource Information
System- Personnel Records/ Reports- e-Record on Employees – Personnel
research and personnel audit – Objectives – Scope and importance.

REFERENCES

• Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management,South-Western College, 2004.

• Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-Western College,
2007.
• R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management,Prentice Hall, 2011.
• Venkataraman& Srivastava, Personnel Management & Human Resources
• ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations
• Yodder&Standohar, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
• Edwin B. Flippo, Personnel Management , McGraw-Hill, 1984
• Pigors and Myers, Personnel Administration
• R.S. Dwivedi, Manpower Management
• Lynton &Pareek, Training and Development, Vistaar Publications, 1990.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34754 TOURISM ENTREPRENEURSHIP
Objectives:

• To make the students to know about Entrepreneurship concepts

• To analyze the Entrepreneurial Opportunities in Tourism

UNIT 1 Entrepreneur & Entrepreneurship: Definition and Theories;.

Entrepreneurship environment – Socio-economic, Cultural, Political &
Natural, Characteristics of Entrepreneur & Entrepreneurial Behaviour

UNIT 2 Ownership structure and organizational framework of small scale

enterprises in Tourism and Travel Business- Venture Creation and
Management

UNIT 3 Preparation of business plan and managerial process in small scale enterprise.
Entrepreneurial performance assessment. Managing family enterprises in
Tourism industry. Promotional agencies for SMEs in India Opportunity
Identification – Business Plan - Feasibility Report – Funding options

UNIT 4 Entrepreneurial Opportunities in Tourism –I (Accommodation):

Entrepreneurial opportunities in Tourism: An overview- Entrepreneurial
opportunities in Accommodation sector- Nature, Scope, Risk and Return
aspects of the opportunity- Sources of finance
UNIT 5 Entrepreneurial Opportunities in Tourism –II( Transportation):
Entrepreneurial opportunities in Transportation sector: Determinants of
success of the venture- Case studies of selected Hotel Projects
UNIT 6 Risk and Return aspects of the opportunity- Sources of finance – Determinants
of success of the venture- Case studies of selected Tourist cab services.
UNIT 7 Entrepreneurial Opportunities in Tourism –III (Shopping and Restaurant):
Entrepreneurial opportunities in Shopping and Restaurant services sector-
Extent of tourist spending on these aspects- Sources of finance – Determinants
of success of the venture.

UNIT 8 Entrepreneurial Opportunities in Tourism –IV (Tourism Attraction

Development): Entrepreneurial opportunities in tourism attraction
development

UNIT 9 Sources of finance – Determinants of success of the venture- Case studies of

selected Theme parks, Resorts Hotels, Tour operators, etc.
UNIT 10 Entrepreneurial Development in Tourism : Programmes for developing
entrepreneurship – Entrepreneurial culture

UNIT 11 Tourism industry and business ideas; business strategy- understanding

customers and analyzing competition
UNIT 12 Feasibility; Writing a business plan- marketing, financial, operations, people,
etc. Financial requirements and sources of finance;
UNIT 13 Form of organisation and legal considerations; networking and collaboration;
good business practices;

UNIT 14 Setting up a tourism enterprise- steps, procedures, licenses, registration etc

Entrepreneurship – Special Programmes of assistance.

REFERENCES

1. Peter F Drucker, Innovation and Entrepreneurship

2. Charles R. Goeldner, Brent Ritchie, J.R., Tourism : Principles, Practices, Philosophies.

3. Philip Kotler , et.al., Marketing for Hospitality and Tourism, Ed.3

4. Peter Mason, Tourism Impacts, Planning and Management

5. Roy A. Cook, et.al., Tourism : The Business of Travel, Ed.2

6. Douglas Robert Brown, The Restaurant Managers Handbook : How to setup, Operate
and Manage a Financially Successful Food Service Operation
 Course Code Title of the Course
34761 QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES

Objectives:
• To help develop analytical skills based on problem solving approach
• To learn quadrature problems solving of business issues.
• To acquire the knowledge in statistics and their use in business decision making.

UNIT 1 Basic Quantitative Concepts: Place of quantitative analysis in the practice of

management – Problem definition: Models and their development. Variables
notion of Mathematical models – concept of trade off – Notion of constants –
concept of Interest.

UNIT 2 Basic Concept of differentiation – integration – Optimization concepts – use of

differentiation for optimization of business problem Optimization Statistics:
Meaning and Applications of Statistics in business decision making and
research - Collection, Tabulation and presentation of data - Measures of
central tendency: Mean, Median and Mode. Measures of dispersion

UNIT 3 Variables and function: Linear and Non-linear –Graphical representation of

functions and their applications in cost and revenue behavior. Slope and its
relevance –Use of functional relationships to understand elasticity of demands,
Relationship between costs and level of activity, Decisions on Minimizing
Costs and Maximizing output/profits.
UNIT 4 Linear Programming: Introduction to the linear programming – Concepts of
optimization- Formulation of different types of linear programming –Standard
from of LP problems - Importance and practical implementation in Industry
UNIT 5 Simple regression and Correlation analysis: Introduction, Correlation,
Correlation analysis, linear regression analysis and Co-efficient. Duality and
sensitivity analysis for decision-making- Solving LP using graphical and
simplex method (only simple problems) – Interpreting the solution for
decision-making

UNIT 6 Special Algorithms of LPP: Transportation Algorithm - Balanced and

Unbalanced Problem Formulation and solving methods: North West Corner,
Vogel’s Approximation-MODI method- Assignment and Travelling Executive
Algorithms
UNIT 7 Theory of Probability: Introduction to the Concept – Development of
probability – Areas and Utilisation of probability theories in the Business –
Sample space – terminology – Types of probability.

UNIT 8 Theoretical Probability Distributions: Introduction - Concept of events –

Probability of events – Joint, conditional and marginal probabilities
Probability distributions: Binomial, Poisson and Normal – Features and
Applications – Use of Normal Tables.

UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background and

Developments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –
 Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations of
Quantitative methods.

UNIT 10 Sequencing /Scheduling Methods : Concepts – terminology – Notations –

Assumption for scheduling models – Job sequencing priorities – Processing
the job and Mass production system.

UNIT 11 Simulation Techniques: Introduction to simulation as an aid to decision-

making- Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Applications of
simulations models – Types: Inventory, Cash, and Project – Random
Numbers.

UNIT 12 Queuing Theory: Introduction – Definition – Queue priorities Product

launching problems using Monte Carlo simulation- Queuing Theory: M/M/1
queuing model and applications.

UNIT 13 Decision Analysis: Concepts – Definition – Decision Tables Pay-off and Loss
tables – Expected value of pay-off – Expected value of Perfect Formation –
decision making process

UNIT 14 Decision Tree Analysis: Decision making environments – Concept of

Posterior probabilities Decision Tree approach to choose optimal course of
action Criteria for decision – Mini-max, Maxi-max, Minimizing Maximal
Regret and their applications.

REFERENCES

1. David R. Anderson, et al, An Introduction to Management Science: Quantitative

Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning, 2008.
2. Lucey, Quantitative Techniques Cengage Learning Business Press, 2002
3. Sharma, Operations Research: Theory and Applications.
4. Richard I Levin, & C. Atkinson Kirkpatrick, Quantitative Approaches to Management,
McGraw-Hill.
5. K. Gupta and D.S. Hira, Operations Research.
6. Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma, Quantitative Techniques for Managerial Decision-
making, New Age International, 2006.
7. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
8. V.K. Kapoor, Operations Research.
9. Dharani Venkatakrishnan, Operations Research: Principles and Problems.
10. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 2002.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34762 RESEARCH METHODS

Objectives:
• To Understand the basic principles of research and design
• To practice the research process, tools and techniques
• To facilitate managerial decision making

UNIT 1 Research Bases: Definition and applications of business research; Types of

research –descriptive, exploratory, correlational, explanatory, quantitative,
qualitative; Steps in the research process; establishing operational definitions

UNIT 2 Research scope - Recent advancements in research. Distinction between Pure

& Applied, Historical & Futuristic, Analytical & Synthetic, Descriptive &
Prescriptive, Survey & Experimental and Case & Generic Researches

UNIT 3 Planning of Research: Research problem – Identification, selection and

formulation of research problem – Review of literature in the field of business
- Identifying objectives of the research.

UNIT 4 Economic management: Use in identifying Research Gaps and Techniques –

Hypothesis – Meaning – Sources and Types of Hypothesis – Hypothesis
Formulation for testing – Research design – Factors affecting research design
– Evaluation of research design

UNIT 5 Variables construction for Hypothesis: Identifying variables - Constructing

hypotheses – functions, characteristics, types of hypotheses - Significance of
research in social sciences – Induction and deduction.

UNIT 6 Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation –
Principle of sampling – Essentials of a good sampling – sampling frame;
Methods of sampling: Probability, non-probability, mixed sampling designs;

UNIT 7 Construction of sampling for Finite and Infinite populations – Sample size
determination– Calculations - Factors affecting the size of the sample – Biased
sample – Sampling and non-sampling errors.

UNIT 8 Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data – Primary and secondary data
– Modes of data collection – Observation: Types and Techniques –Interview:
Types and conduct – Preparation for an interview – Effective interview
techniques – Limitations of interview

UNIT 9 Schedule: Meaning and kinds – Essentials of a good schedule – Procedure for
the formulation of a schedule – Questionnaire: Meaning and types – Format of
a good questionnaire– Schedules Vs. Questionnaires

UNIT 10 Scaling techniques: Meaning, Importance, Types of measurement scales –

Nominal, Ordinal, Interval, Ratio; Methods of their construction of
 Questionnaires or Schedules – Pre-testing of Data Collection Tools- Validity
and Reliability – Methods.

UNIT 11 Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning – Importance – Process of data

analysis – Editing – Coding – Tabulation – Diagrams – Univariate, Bivariate
and Multi-variant analysis

UNIT 12 Test of Significance: Fundamentals on Test Procedure- Testing for

significance of Mean/Proportion and difference between Means/Proportions- F
Test for Means and Chi-square test Contingency Table - Parametric Test: T
test, F Test and Z test

UNIT 13 Non-parametric Test: Concept and Types: Mann Whitney Test- Test, Kruskal
Wallis, sign test. Multivariate analysis-factor, cluster, MDS, Discriminant
analysis - The process of interpretation of Test Results– Guidelines for making
valid interpretation

UNIT 14 Report Writing : Role and types of reports – Contents of research report –
Steps involved in drafting reports – Principles of good report writing –
Grammatical Quality – Language flow- Data Support- Diagrammatic
Elucidation- References and Annotations – Clarity and Brevity of
expressions- Features of a good Report- Criteria for evaluating research
reports/ research findings.

REFERENCES

1. John W Best & James V. Kahn Research in Education, Allyn and Bacon, 2009
2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley, New Delhi, 1989.
3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw Hill,
1981.
4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003, HPH.
5. Earl R. BabbieRobert, ThePractice of Social Research, Cengage Learning, 2010.
6. B. Burns & A. Burns, Business Research Methods and Statistics Using SPSS, Sage
Publications, 2008.
7. Krishnaswami and Ranganatham, Research Methodology in social Sciences, HPH,
Mumbai
8. Bryman & Bell: Business Research Methods, OUP.
9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall, (Digitalized)
2007.
10. C.R.Kothari, Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, 2009
 Course Code Title of the Course
34763 BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Objectives:
• To understand the concepts and constituents of Business environment
• To know the environmental issues in the business context
• To analyze the changes in the global environmental relating to business

UNIT 1 Business Environment: Introduction: Concepts – Significance - Dynamic

factors of environment – Importance of scanning the environment – Macro and
Micro Environment – Micro and Macro Economics to the business –
Constituents of Business environment

UNIT 2 Fundamental issues captured in PESTLE– Political, Economic, Socio-cultural,

Technological, Legal and Ecological environment- Opportunities and Threats
as environmental issues to address by Businesses.

UNIT 3 Political Environment: Government and Business – Political Systems, Political

Stability and Political Maturity as conditions of business growth - Role of
Government in Business: Entrepreneurial, Catalytic, Competitive, Supportive,
Regulative and Control functions

UNIT 4 Government and Economic planning: Industrial policies and promotion

schemes – Government policy and SSI – Interface between Government and
public sector - Guidelines to the Industries – Industrial Development
strategies; salient features, Role of public and private sectors, Comparative
cost dynamics.

UNIT 5 Economic Environment: Phase of Economic Development and its impact-

GDP Trend and distribution and Business Opportunities – capacity utilisation
– Regional disparities and evaluation - Global Trade and investment
environment.

UNIT 6 Financial System and Business capital: Monetary and Fiscal policies -
Financial Market structure – Money and Capital markets – Stock Exchanges
and Its regulations – Industrial Finance - Types, Risk - Cost-Role of Banks;
Industrial Financial Institutions - Role of Management Institutions

UNIT 7 Role of Central Bank- Fiscal System: Government Budget and Taxation
Measures- Fiscal Deficits and Inflation- FDI and collaboration –Foreign
Capital tapping by businesses- Export-Import policy – Foreign Exchange and
Business Development.

UNIT 8 Labour Environment: Labour Legislation – Labour and social securities –

Industrial Relations – Trade Unions – Workers participation in management –
Exit Policy – Quality Circles.

UNIT 9 Social and Technological Environment: Societal Structure and Features-

Entrepreneurial Society and its implications for business – Social and cultural
 factors and their implications for business- Technology Development Phase in
the Economy as conditioner of Business Opportunities

UNIT 10 Technology Environment: Technology Policy- Technology Trade and transfer-

Technology Trends in India- Role of Information Technology – Clean
Technology. – Time lag in technology – Appropriate technology and
Technology adoption- Impact of technology on globalization.

UNIT 11 Legal and Ecological Environment: Legal Environment as the all-enveloping

factor from inception, location, incorporation, conduct, expansion and closure
of businesses – IDRA and Industrial licensing – Public, Private, Joint and
Cooperative Sectors.

UNIT 12 Legal Aspects of Entering Primary and Secondary Capital Markets- Law on
Patents- Law on Consumer Protection- Law on Environmental Protection-
Need for Clean energy and Reduction of Carbon footprint.

UNIT 13 New Economic Policy Environment in India: Liberalization, Privatization and

Globalization (LPG): Efficiency Drive through Competition- Facets of
Liberalization and impact on business growth

UNIT 14 Aspects of Privatization and impact on business development– Globalization

and Enhanced Opportunities and Threats – Extended competition in Input and
Output Markets Role of WTO, IMF and World Bank in global economic
development.

REFERENCES

1. Brooks, Weatherston, Wilkinson, International Business Environment, Pearson, 2010.

2. Steiner & Steiner, Business, Government and Society: A Managerial Perspective,
McGraw-Hill, 2008.
3. Mohinder Kumar Sharma, Business Environment in India, South Asia Books.
4. Adhikary M, Economic Environment of Business, Sultan Chand & Sons.
5. Amarchand D, Government and Business, TMH.
6. Francis Cherunilam, Business Environment and Development, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2008.
7. Maheswari & Gupta, Government, Business and Society.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34764 BUSINESS LAW
Objectives:

• To understand the basics in business law

• To identify Fundamental Principles, need, scope of business law

UNIT 1 Introduction: Introduction, Meaning and Scope of Business Law, Sources of

Law, Laws applicable to Business

UNIT 2 Indian Contract Act, 1872: Introduction, Definition and Meaning of Contract,
Essentials of a Contract, Types of Contracts, Capacity of Parties, Modes of
Discharge of a Contract, Remedies for Breach of Contract.

UNIT 3 Law of Agency: Introduction, Agent and Agency, Kinds of Agencies,

Creation of Agency, Principal and Agent , Termination of Agency

UNIT 4 Sale of Goods Act, 1930: Introduction, Contact of Sale of Goods, Essentials of
a Contract of Sale, Price, Agreement to sell at valuation, Rights and Duties of
Buyer, Right of Unpaid Seller, Conditions and Warranties, Transfer of
Property, Performance of Contract

UNIT 5 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881: Introduction , Definition and Meaning of

Negotiable Instrument, Promissory Note, Bill of Exchange , Cheque, Parties to
Negotiable Instruments, Maturity of Negotiable Instrument, Negotiation ,
Dishonor of a Negotiable Instrument, Notice of dishonor, discharge of a
Negotiable Instrument

UNIT 6 Partnership Act, 1932: Introduction, Nature of the Partnership, Features of

Partnership, Qualities of a Partnership, Advantages, Limitations, Kinds of
Partners, Partnership Deed, Registration of a Partnership, Effects of
registration , Effects of non – registration, Rights and Duties of Partners,
Dissolution of Partnership.

UNIT 7 Companies Act, 1956: Introduction, Definition and Characteristics,

Classification of Companies, Incorporation of a Company, Share Capital,
Company management, Meetings, Resolution

UNIT 8 Consumer Protection Act [COPRA], 1986: Introduction, Background,

Definitions, Consumer Protection Council, Central Consumer Protection
Council, Consumer Redressal Agencies, Administrative Control of National
Commission.
UNIT 9 Competition Act, 2002: Meaning and Scope of Competition Act, Salient
Features of Competition Act, Offences and Penalties under the Act

UNIT 10 Intellectual Property Rights: Meaning and Scope of Patent Act and
Amendments of WTO Agreements, Rights of Patentee , Infringement ,
Remedies, Trademarks, Copyright

UNIT 11 Information Technology Act, 2000: Background, Salient Features, Digital

Signature, Electronic Governance, Regulation of Certifying Authorities, Cyber
Laws, Penalties for Offences.

UNIT 12 Micro Small And Medium Enterprises Development Act, 2006: Classification
of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises,

UNIT 13 Salient Features of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises Act, Reservation
Policy, Credit Policy, Government Policy towards Taxation and Incentives

UNIT 14 Management of companies –Meetings- Types- Requirements- Protection of

minority interest- Methods of Winding-up.

REFERENCES

1. M.S.Pandit and ShobhaPandit, Business Law, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai,

2010.
2. Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, TMH, 2009.
3. N.D. Kapoor, Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
4. M.C. Shukla, Mercantile Law, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
5. Relevant Bare Acts.
6. Balachandran and Thothadri, business Law, TMH, 2010
 Course Code Title of the Course
34771 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS

Objectives:
• To understand the economic principles and its applications in business
• To develop economics based analytic skills for business
• To make the learners to strong in economical approach

UNIT 1 Economics: Introduction – Meaning, nature and scope of Managerial

Economics – General Foundations of managerial Economics – Economic
Approach – Working of Economic system - Circular flow activities -
Economics & Business Decisions - Relationship between Economic theory
and Managerial Economics.

UNIT 2 Business Decisions: Role of managerial Economics in Decision making –

Decision making under Risk and Uncertainty - Concepts of Opportunity cost, -
Production possibility curve – Incremental Concepts - Cardinal and Ordinal
approaches to consumer Behaviour Time Value of Money –

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour: Marginalism – Equilibrium and Equi-marginalism and

their role in business decision making. – Equi-Marginal principles – Utility
analysis – Total and Marginal Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility –
Marshallian approach and Indifference curve analysis.

UNIT 4 Demand analysis: Meaning, Functions - Determinants of demand-Law of

Demand – Demand Estimation and Forecasting - Applications of demand in
analysis - Elasticity of Demand: Types, Measures and Role in Business
Decisions.

UNIT 5 Supply Analysis: Determinants of supply- Elasticity of Supply- Measures and

Significance - Derivations of market demand – Demand Estimation and Fore
casting- Demand and Supply equilibrium – Giffen Paradox

UNIT 6 Production Functions: Managerial uses of production function - Cobb-Douglas

and other production functions - Isoquants – Short run and long run
production function – Theory of production – Empirical estimations of
production functions.

UNIT 7 Forms of Markets: Meaning and Characteristics - Market Equilibrium:

Practical Importance, Market Equilibrium and Changes in Market Equilibrium.
Pricing Functions: Market Structures - Pricing and output decisions under
different competitive conditions: Monopoly Monopolistic completion and
Oligopoly

UNIT 8 Strategic Behaviour of the firms and Game Theory - Nash Equilibrium:
Implications – Prisoner’s Dilemma: Types of strategy – Price and Non price
competition – Relation to the firm behaviour.
 UNIT 9 Cost and Return: Cost function and cost output relationship – Economics and
Diseconomies of scale - Cost control and cost reduction- Cost Behaviour and
Business Decision- Relevant costs for decision-making- Traditional and
Modern theory of Cost.

UNIT 10 New Product Penetrative Decision and Skimming the cream Pricing-
Government control over pricing - Concept of Profit- Types and Theories of
Profit by Knight (Uncertainty), Schumpeter (Innovation), Clark (Dynamic)
and Hawley (Risk) - Profit maximization – Cost volume profit analysis – Risk
and Return Relationship.

UNIT 11 Profit and Investment Analysis: Meaning – Measurement of profit – Theories

of Pricing- Profit planning and forecasting- Profit and Wealth maximization –
Cost volume profit analysis – Investment analysis and Evaluation: IRR, NPV
and APV techniques.

UNIT 12 Macro-economic Factors: Nature, Importance ; Economic Growth and

Development - Business cycle – Phases and Business Decision- Inflation -
Factors causing Inflation and Deflation - Control measures – Balance of
payment Trend and its implications in managerial decision.

UNIT 13 National Income: Introduction Meaning – Theories – Methods of

Measurement - Sectoral and Population distributions – Per capita Income:
Definition – Calculations – Uses – Limitations – GDP – GNP - Recent
developments in Indian Economy.

UNIT 14 Economic Regulations of Business: Introduction – Antitrust theory and

Regulations – The structure – Conduct – Performance paradigm –
Concentration: Overview – Measuring concentration – Regulation of
Externalities.

REFERENCES
1. Dominick Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy,OxfordUniversity
Press, 2011.
2. Ivan Png and Dale Lehman, Managerial Economics, Wiley-Blackwell, 2007.
3. Truett Lila J., Truett, Dale B. and Truett J. Lila (2006), Managerial Economics:
Analysis Problems, Cases, 8th Editon, John Wiley & Sons.
4. Atmanand (2008), Managerial Economics, 2nd Edition, Excel Books.
5. Christopher R Thomas & S Charles Maurice (2008), Managerial Economics, 9th
edition, McGraw Hill Co.
6. Petersen, H. C., Cris, L W and Jain, S.K. (2008), Managerial Economics, 1st edition
Pearson
7. Gupta G S, Managerial Economics, Tata McGraw-Hill.
8. Varshney and Maheswari, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
9. Mehta P L, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
10. Joel Dean, Managerial Economics, Prentice-Hall.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34772 ENTREPRENEURSHIP

Objectives:
• To stimulate the learners to the concept of entrepreneurship
• To imbibe the knowledge to the students on entrepreneurial
culture, training and special programs.

UNIT 1 Introduction to Entrepreneurship: Meaning and concept of

entrepreneurship, the history of entrepreneurship development, role of
entrepreneurship in economic development, agencies in
entrepreneurship management and future of entrepreneurship

.UNIT 2 The Entrepreneur: Meaning of entrepreneur, the skills required to be

an entrepreneur, the entrepreneurial decision process, and role
models, mentors and support system.

UNIT 3 Business Opportunity Identification: Business ideas, methods of

generating ideas, and opportunity recognition

UNIT 4 Preparing a Business Plan: Meaning and significance of a business

plan, components of a business plan, and feasibility study

UNIT 5 Financing the New Venture: Importance of new venture financing,

types of ownership securities, venture capital, types of debt securities,
determining ideal debt-equity mix, and financial institutions and
banks

UNIT 6 Launching the New Venture: Choosing the legal form of new venture,
protection of intellectual property, and marketing the new venture

UNIT 7 Managing Growth in New Venture: Characteristics of high growth

new ventures, strategies for growth, and building the new venture
capital

UNIT 8 Business ideas – project identifications and formulations –classifications -

Project feasibility study – projects appraisal methods- product designs network
analysis – financial analysis.

UNIT 9 Financing Entrepreneur – Institutional finance to Entrepreneurs – role of IDBI

–IFCI-ICICI-IRCI-SIDBI-LIC-SFC-TIIC-Commercial banks in financial role.

UNIT 10 Promoting Enterprise –SSI-Role and growth of SSI – Regulation governing

SSI-incentives and concessions - sickness and causes and remedial.
UNIT 11 Institutional developments of Entrepreneurs- role of DIC –SISI –SIDCO–
NSIC- NAYE-KVIC-TCDS-ITCOT and Entrepreneurial guidance bureau -
Incentives and subsidies to Entrepreneurs problems and prospectus EDP-for
developing women and rural Entrepreneurs- Entrepreneurial motivation.

UNIT 12 Harvesting Rewards: Exit strategies for entrepreneurs, bankruptcy,

and succession and harvesting strategy

UNIT 13 Programmes for Developing Entrepreneurship : Entrepreneurship

development programmes – Seed Capital assistance – Capital subsidy
- Backward area development schemes – Sales tax concessions –
Energy concessions – Recent trends.

UNIT 14 Entrepreneurial Culture – Entrepreneurial Society –

Intrapreneurship.Meaning- Importance – Implication – Need–Types-
Scope, Features Management of change-Special Programmes of
assistance to Entrepreneurship

REFERENCES :

1. Peter F. Drucker, Innovation are Entrepreneurship.

2. Saravanavel,EntrepreneurshipDevelopment.
3. Gupta and Srinivasan, Entrepreneurship Development.
4. N.P. Singh, Entrepreneurship Development N.P. Singh.
5. B.C. Tandon,Environment and Entrepreneurship.
6. Srivastava, A Practical Guide to Industrial Entrepreneurs.
 Course Code Title of the Course
34773 FOREIGN EXCHANGE MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

• To understand the Foreign Exchange: Concept and Significance

• To analyses the Exchange management system in India

UNIT 1 Foreign Exchange: Concept and Significance – Foreign change Rate:

Direct and indirect quotations – Inter- bank and Merchant rates –

UNIT 2 Spot rates and forward rates – T.T. rates – Cross rates; Computation –
Foreign exchange markets – Organisation of forex market.
UNIT 3 Determination of Exchange Rate: Purchasing Power Parity theory –
Interest rate parity theory – Flow model – Asset market model

UNIT 4 Forecasting of exchange rates – Concepts of Nominal Effective Exchange

Rate and Real effective Exchange rate.

UNIT 5 Forward exchange contracts: Types – Forward exchange rate computation

– Factors affecting forward rates –

UNIT 6 Extension and cancellation of forward contracts – option contracts: Types

and mechanism.
UNIT 7 Foreign exchange risk management: Transaction exposure
risk:
Int
ernal Strategies – Risk shifting, Risk sharing – Exposure netting and
offsetting

UNIT 8 External Strategies: Foreign currency options – Forward and money

market hedge – Currency Swaps – Interest Rate Swaps.

UNIT 9 Economic Exposure risk – Inflating and exchange risk – Meaning-

Importance – Implication – Need–Types- Scope, Features Management
of change

UNIT 10 Economic consequences of Exchange rate changes – managing

economic exposure risk.
UNIT 11 Exchange management in India: Fixed and fling rates – Rupee
convertibility – NOSTRO, VOSTRO and LORO Accounts –

UNIT 12 Exchange control measures: Need and Forms and relevance –

 UNIT 13 Foreign Exchange Reserves of India: Trend, composition and management

UNIT 14 Impact on exchange Rate – Monetary and fiscal policy initiatives for
exchange rate management.

REFERENCES:

1. Multinational Financial Management : Alan C Shapiro

2. ABC of Foreign Exchange : Clare G. Gump
3. Guide to Foreign Exchange Regulations : Krishnamoorthy.S
4. Principles of Foreign Exchange : Chatterjee.A.K.
5. Foreign Exchange – Practice, Concepts and control : Jeevanadam.N.S.
6. Foreign Exchange Management : Rajwadi
7. Rupee Convertibility : BibekDebroi
 Course Code Title of the Course
34774 E-BANKING

Objectives:
• To understand basic concepts and Operating systems for E-Banking
• To know the evolution of E-Banking system.

UNIT I Electronic Banking: Traditional Banking Vs E-Banking-Facets of E-Banking -E-

Banking transactions - truncated cheque and Electronic cheque

UNIT 2 Models for E-banking-complete centralized solution- features-CCS-Cluster

approach-Hi tech. Bank with in Bank Advances of E-Banking-Constraints in E-
Banking

UNIT 3 Online Banking: Introduction –concept and meaning-the electronic delivery

channels- need for computerization-Automatic Teller Machine(ATM) at home –
Electronic Fund Transfer(EFT)-uses – computerization in clearing houses-
Telebanking- Banking on home computers –Electronic Money Transfer -uses of
EMT.

UNIT 4 Updating Bank saving accounts –Computer bank branches-Financial Transaction

Terminals- (FTT)-E-Cheque-Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) and
Cheques

UNIT 5 E-Banking Security- Introduction need for security –Security concepts-Privacy –

Survey. Findings on security-Attack-Cyber crimes-Reasons for Privacy

UNIT 6 Tampering-Encryption –Meaning-The encryption process-may appear as follows

- Cryptogram-Cryptanalyst-cryptography-Types of Cipher systems –Code
systems-Cryptography-Cipher-Decipher-Jumbling-Asymmetric-Cryptosystem-
Data Encryption Standard

UNIT 7 E-Banking in India-Procedure-Programmes-Components- How to go on net for

Online Banking-advantages-Limitations.

UNIT 8 E-Builder solutions-Digital certificate-Digital Signature &Electronic Signature-E-

Security solutions— solutions providers-E-locking technique- E-locking services-
Netscape security solutions- Pry Zone

62
UNIT 9 E-software security Internet-Transactions-Transaction security-PKI-Sierras
Internet solutions-inc –security devices-Public Key Infrastructure-(PKI)-Firewalls
Secure Ledger-(FSL)-Secure Electronic Transaction(SET).

UNIT 10 Basic concepts of data processing – Binary number system – Octal and
hexadecimal – Representation of non-numeric data

UNIT 11 CPU – Main memory – Peripheral controllers – Peripherals.

UNIT 12 Software: Need for software – What is software? Types of software, System
Software -Operating systems – language translators -Programming languages.

UNIT 13 LAN – Local processing with batch updates – Meaning- Importance – Implication
– Need for Control –Types- Scope, Features AIMs – Home banking – EFT –
MICR.

UNIT 14 Inter branch reconciliation Security considerations – Accidental damage, power

failures and malicious damage .

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Bajwa K.S., Bank Mechanization, Skylark Publications

2. Srivatsava, Computer Applications in Banks, BTC, RBI
3. Sanjay Soni and Vinayak Aggarwal, Computers and Banking Sultan
Chand & Sons.

63
 Course Code Title of the Course
34781 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Objectives:
• To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management
• To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital management.
• To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications

UNIT 1 Introduction: Financial management: objectives - Concept, nature, evaluation and

significance – Finance Functions: Managerial and operative – Role of Financial
management in the organization – Indian Financial system.

UNIT 2 Financial System: Legal and Regulatory frame work – Financial Functions:
Meaning and scope – Finance and Tax Management Nexus- Tax Avoidance and
Tax evasion- Tax incentive and business decisions.

UNIT 3 Investment Function: Meaning and scope - Time value of Money concepts and
applications –Risk return relationship - Dividend function – Risk return trade off –
Management planning- Global management environment

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity share, preference
shares – types of preference share - debentures – types - sources of long-term
capital.

UNIT 5 Capital Issues: Meaning, Nature, Purpose – Roles and Guidelines of SEBI in
capital issues- Bridge finance, loan syndication, Book building – Borrowings from
the term lending institutions and International capital market- Tax considerations
in financing decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital : Concept of cost of capital- Cost of debt, equity, preference share
capital, retaining earning - Weighted average cost: EBIT –EPS Analysis- Tax,
Capital structure and Value nexus - Computation of overall cost of capital – Tax
and cost of capital.

UNIT 7 Capital structure: Determinates - Concept and Types- Optimum capital structure –
Theories of capital structure – Net income and net operative income approach –
M.M. Approach – Traditional theory – Their assumptions – Significance and
limitations – Management leverage operating leverage – Combined leverage.

UNIT 8 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital Investment- Methods of
appraisal under certainty conditions: PBP, ARR, IRR and NPV techniques - Basic
and International capital budgeting.

64
 UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis- Decision
tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures- Tax
considerations in Investment Decisions Cost of capital and Investment Decisions.

UNIT 10 Working Capital Management: Definitions and Objectives - Concept and types –
Determinants – Financing approaches – Conservative approaches - Sources of
working capital finance Factors affecting working capital requirements- Working
capital financing by commercial banks – Types of assistance

UNIT 11 Inventories and receivables Management under conditions of certainty and

uncertainty – Operating cycle – Planning of funds through the management of
assets – Various techniques used.

UNIT 12 Cash and liquidity management: Credit Management and evaluation alternative
credit variables Methods and Functions- Tax considerations in Remittances and
Purchases.

UNIT 13 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories – Dividend
irrelevance under M.M. Theory – Assumptions – Limitations - Implications and
contributions of theories in financial decision making process.

UNIT 14 Dividend Policy: Types – Share valuation practices – Factors affecting dividend
decision – Tax considerations in dividend decision when tax is levied at the hands
of companies and recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Thomson ONE, 2010
2. Brigham and Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson ONE, 2009.
3. Van Horne: Fundamentals of Financial Management, Prentice Hall, 2008
4. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management,South-WesternCollege Pub., 2010
5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, McGraw Hill, 2008.
6. Khan and Jain, Financial Management ,Tata McGrawHill,2009
7. Pandey I M, Financial Management, Vikas Publishers,2009
8. Sheeba Kapil(2010), Financial Management, Pearson Education.
9. B J Camsey, Engene F.Brigham, “Introduction to Financial Management”, The Gryden Press

65
 Course Code Title of the Course
34782 MARKETING MANAGEMENT

Objectives:
• To help the learners understand markets, consumers and marketing principles.
• To understand the buyer behaviour and influencing factors
• To learn marketing plan, pricing, promotion and distribution in global context

UNIT 1 Introduction to Marketing: Meaning and Scope of Marketing; Marketing

Philosophies; Marketing Management Process-an overview; Modern Marketing
Concept: Social marketing concept – Approaches to the study of marketing.

UNIT 2 Marketing segmentation: Meaning – Bases for segmentation, benefits – Systems

approach - Four Ps of Product and Seven Ps Service marketing mix and
Extensions- Targeting and Positioning - meaning and importance.

UNIT 3 Marketing Environment: Internal and External and Demographic factors –

Adopting marketing to new liberalized and globalized economy – Digitalization –
Customization and E business settings.

UNIT 4 Consumer Behaviour : Meaning and importance – Consumer buying process –

Determinants and Theories of consumer behaviour – Psychological, sociological
determinants – Theories and their relevance to marketing-

UNIT 5 Marketing Research: Procedure. Meaning – Objectives – Process- Demand

Forecasting- Marketing Information System – Strategic marketing plan and
organization – Changing marketing practices.

UNIT 6 Product Mix Management: Product planning and development – Meaning and
process – Test marketing – Product failures – Product line management: Practices
– Implications and Strategies for current market condition.

UNIT 7 Product life cycles: Meaning and Stages – Strategies – Managing PLC- Product-
Market Integration: Strategies – Product positioning – Diversification – Product
line simplification – Planned obsolescence – Branding Policies and Strategies –
Packing.

UNIT 8 Price Mix Management: Pricing and pricing policies – Objectives – Procedures –
Bases for and Methods of price fixing. Cases for Free Pricing, Administered and
Regulated pricing – Pricing and product life cycle

66
 UNIT 9 Physical Distribution Mix: Types of physical Distribution - Importance of
Physical Distribution- Distribution channel policy – Logistics Decisions –
Methods – Strategic alliance for Logistic cost reduction.

UNIT 10 Marketing Channel system: Marketing channel decisions: Choice considerations–

Managing Conflict and Cooperation in channels – Middlemen functions- Modern
Trends in Retailing- Malls and Online.

UNIT 11 Promotional Mix: Personal selling Vs. impersonal selling – Personal selling –
Process – Steps in selling – Management of sales force – Recruitment and
selection – Training – Compensation plans – Evaluation of performance

UNIT 12 Integrated marketing communication Process: Advertising and sales promotion –

Online Sales promotional activities – Public relationships – Direct marketing:
Meaning, Nature, Growth and Channels.

UNIT 13 Advertising: Importance – Objectives – Media planning and selection – Factors

influencing selection – Advertisement copy – Layout – Evaluation of advertising
– Advertising budget – Sales promotion – Methods and practices.

UNIT 14 Competitor analyses: Identifying and analyzing the competitors – Types of

Competitors – Competitive strategies framing for leaders, challengers, followers
and nichers. Customer relationship marketing: Customer data base, Data ware
housing and data mining

REFERENCES

1. Etzel, Walker and Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill, 2004

2. Philip Kotler & Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Jerome Mccarthy, Basic Marketing, Richard D. Irwin.
4. Cundiff, Still &Govani, Fundamentals of Modern Marketing, Prentice Hall.
5. Memoria & Joshi, Fundamental of Marketing.
6. Paul Peter and James Donnelly Jr, Marketing Management, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
7. William O. Bearden, Marketing: Principles & Perspectives, McGraw-Hill, 2006.
8. William Arens, et al, Contemporary Advertising, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
9. Perreault and McGarthy - Basic Marketing - Tata McGraw Hill, 2002\

10. Michael J Etzel, Bruce J Walker, William J Stanton and Ajay Pandit, Marketing concepts
and cases - TMH 13th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.

67
 Course Code Title of the Course
34783 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

Objectives:
• To learn the principles of Management Information System for organizations
• To understand the uses , function of application MIS in organization
• To analyze the scope of MIS for business organizations

UNIT 1 Foundations of Information System: Information system: Meaning, Role –

System concepts – Organization as a system – Components of Information system
– Various activities of IS and Types of IS

UNIT 2 Information System: Concepts of Information System and Management

information systems design and development-Implementation testing and
conversion- Evolution and element of MIS

UNIT 3 MIS : Definition – Characteristics and basic requirements of MIS – Structure of

MIS- Approaches to MIS development- Computerized MIS- Pre-requisites of an
effective MIS- Limitations of MIS.

UNIT 4 MIS and Decision support System (DSS): MIS Vs. data processing – MIS and
decision support system – MIS and information resource management – DSS and
AI – Overview of AI - DSS models and software.

UNIT 5 MIS and Operations Research- Executive information and Decision support
systems – Artificial intelligence and expert system – Merits and De Merits –
Pitfalls in MIS.

UNIT 6 MIS in Indian organizations – Recent developments in information technology -

Installation of Management Information & Control System in Indian organization

UNIT 7 Computers and Communication: Information technology and Global integration –

On-line information services – Electronic bulletin board systems – The internet,
electronic mail, interactive video

UNIT 8 Communication Channels: Advantages disadvantages – Communication networks

– Local area networks – Wide area networks – Video conferencing- Relevance to
MIS- Usage in Business process.

UNIT 9 Functional Information systems: MIS for Research Production - MIS for
Marketing - MIS for Personnel - MIS for Finance - MIS for Inventory- MIS for
Logistics- MIS for Product Development- MIS for Market Development.

UNIT 10 Client/ Server Computing: Communication servers – Digital networks –

Electronic data interchange and its applications - Enterprise resource planning
68
 systems (ERP Systems) – Inter-organizational information systems – Value added
networks – Networking.

UNIT 11 Electronic Commerce and Internet: E-Commerce bases – E-Commerce and

Internet – M-Commerce- Electronic Data Inter-change (EDI) - Applications of
internet and website management - Types of Social Media - uses of social media
in business organization

UNIT 12 Computer System and Resources: Computers systems: Types and Types of
computer system processing - Secondary storage media and devices – Input and
output devices – Hardware standards – Other acquisition issues.

UNIT 13 Managing Information Technology: Managing Information Resources and

technologies – IS architecture and management - Centralized, Decentralized
and Distributed - EDI, Supply chain management & Global Information
technology Management.

UNIT 14 Security and Ethical Challenges: IS controls - facility control and procedural
control - Risks to online operations - Denial of service, spoofing - Ethics for IS
professional - Societal challenges of Information technology

REFERENCES

1. James O'Brien & George Marakas, Management Information Systems, McGraw Hill,
2011.
2. Kenneth Laudon & Jane Laudon, Essentials of MIS, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Lisa Miller, MIS Cases: Decision Making with Application Software, Prentice Hall, 2008.
4. David M. Kroenke, Experiencing MIS, Prentice Hall, 2011.
5. Kenneth C. Laudon, MIS: Managing the Digital Firm, Prentice Hall, 2005.
6. Sadogopan S, Management Information Systems, 2001PHI.
7. Murdie and Ross, Management Information Systems, Prentice Hall.
8. Henri C. Lucas, Information Systems Concepts for Management, McGraw Hill, 1994.
9. Stephen Haag, Management Information Systems, 2008.

69
 Course Code Title of the Course
34784 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

• To know the basic concept and function of Production and Operation

Management
• To understand the Production process and planning

UNIT 1 Introduction to Production and Operation functions: Functions of Production `

Management

UNIT 2 Relationship between production and other functions –Types of Production or

Manufacturing systems- Job and Mass production- industrial engineering-
Manufacturing engineering- operations research

UNIT 3 Toyota Production System- principles – Models - CAD and CAM- Automation
in Production.- Functions and significance

UNIT 4 Capacity and Facility Planning: Importance of capacity planning- Capacity

measurement – Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP) process for manufacturing
and service industry

UNIT 5 Facility Planning – Location of facilities – Location flexibility – Facility design

process and techniques – Location break even analysis.

UNIT 6 Production Process Planning: Characteristic of production process systems – steps

for production process.

UNIT 7 Process selection with PLC phases- Process simulation tools- Work Study –
Significance – Methods, evolution of normal/ standard time – Job design and
rating.

UNIT 8 Plant Layout: meaning – characters –- Importance and function – Objectives –

Work Flow patterns - Plant location techniques-types.
70
UNIT 9 Factors for good layout design – REL (Relationship) Chart – Assembly line
balancing- Production Planning Control Functions – Planning phase- Action
phase- Control phase

UNIT 10 Mixed model line balancing- Aggregate production planning – Plant design
optimization-Forecasting methods.

UNIT 11 Material requirement planning (MRP) and control: MRP concept and process –
Scope and Functions

UNIT 12 Inventory control systems and techniques – JIT and Lean manufacturing-
Embedded JIT and MRP - Network techniques.

UNIT 13 Quality Management: Preventive Vs Breakdown maintenance for Quality –

Techniques for measuring quality

UNIT 14 Statistical Quality Control: Control charts and Acceptance sampling

procedures –Total Quality Management- 6 Sigma approach and Zero
Defect Manufacturing.

REFERENCES:

1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated

Manufacturing, Pearson, 2007.
2. Amitabh Raturi, Production and Inventory Management,SouthWesternCollege, 2008.
3. Adam Jr. Ebert, Production and Operations Management, PHI Publication, 1992.
4. Muhlemann, Okland and Lockyer, Production and Operation Management, Macmillan.
5. Buffa E.S, Modern Production and Operation Management, TMH Publications.
6. Monks, Joseph G, Operations Management, Schaum’s Outlines
7. Chary S.N, Production and Operations Management, TMH Publications, 2010.
8. Khanne O.P, Industrial Engineering.

71
 Course Code Title of the Course
34791 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS

Objectives:

This course introduces undergraduate students to the theory of International Economics and its
application to the real world. Upon completion of this course students will be able to:

• Compare alternative theories of international trade

• Analyze and test international trade models
• Evaluate the impact of tariffs and non-tariff barriers
• Estimate the impact of preferential trade arrangements
• Read and analyze the nation’s balance of payment
• Understand how a foreign exchange market operates
• Analyze international investment, banking, debt, and risk
• Explain financial crises in emerging economies, their causes and solutions

At the end of the course, students should be able to analyze current international trade issues and
critically evaluate the policy options.

UNIT 1 Introduction: Important issues in international trade - History and present state of
world trade flows - Indian trade balance - History of the development of trade
theory

UNIT 2 Theories of International Trade: Absolute and comparative cost advantages theories
- Essentials: Ricardo and Comparative Advantage - The Ricardian model of trade -
Empirical evidence and policy results

UNIT 3 Factor Price Equalization and Trade: Hecksher-Ohlin model of trade - Stolper-
Samuelson effects - Rybczynski effects; Modern theories – Concepts – principles –
process and Different approaches- modern Vs Classical theories – System approach
– socio – technology approach and contingency/ situational approach

UNIT 4 BOT, BOP, Tariff & Non-Tariff: Balance of Trade - Balance of Payments - Tariffs
and Non-Tariff Barriers to Trade: Economics of Tariffs - Economics of Quotas -
Protection and Imperfect Competition.

UNIT 5 Who Wins and Who Loses from Trade? - The “Specific Factors” model of trade -
Redistribution aspect of trade policy - International experience; Terms of trade:
Concept- measures – Influencing factors – procedure and techniques.
72
UNIT 6 Trade and development: Gains from trade – Trade as a substitute for growth Theory
of Immiserating growth – Free trade vs Protection – Trade Barriers.

UNIT 7 Market Imperfections and Trade: Imperfect Competition and trade - Externalities
and protectionism - Empirical evaluation of importance

UNIT 8 International Factor Movements: International Labor Mobility - International

Capital Flows - Multinational Firms and Direct Foreign Investment

UNIT 9 Government Intervention in Trade: Welfare arguments - Income Distribution -

Optimum Tariff; Exchange Rate: Determinants of Exchange Rate – Fixed Rate Vs
Floating Rate systems.

UNIT 10 International agency for trade and economics: International monetary system – IMF
and International liquidity – World Bank and International Economics Development

UNIT 11 Strategic Trade Policies: Technology and Externalities - Imperfect Competition and
Protection

UNIT 12 Development through Trade Policies - Import Substitution and Infant Industry
argument - Export-oriented development strategies -The East Asian Miracle? Trade
Blocks: NAFTA, ECM, and ASEAN.

UNIT 13 World Trade Organization & International trade negotiations: Preferential Trading
Arrangements, Custom Unions and Economic Integration - Free trade agreements,
customs unions - Trade creation vs trade diversion - Trade policy in developing
countries: import substitutions, export promotion - International negotiations:
GATT, WTO, Doha round.

UNIT 14 International Capital Flows: FDI and Portfolio Investments: Nature, significance
and trend – International Labour migration: types and factors involved –
Technology transfer: Need, Issues and Trend.

REFERENCES:

1. International Economics: Francis Cherunilam

2. The International Economy: P.T. Ellsworth
3. International economics: C.P. Kindlebergr&Bertil Ohlin
4. International and Interregional Trade: P.H. Lindert
5. The Theory of International Trade: G. Haberler
6. International Economics: J.Sidney Wells
7. International Economics: Ingo Walter

73
 Course Code Title of the Course
34792 PROJECT FINANCE

Objective:
• To understand the process of project finance
• To give knowledge about project appraisal
• To evaluate the financial aspect in project finance

UNIT 1 Project – Meaning and Definition - Stages in a project cycle: Project

identification, formulation, evaluation and implementation

UNIT 2 Project Consultants: Meaning - Role of consultants in project management –

Functions of Project Consultant

UNIT 3 Sources of finance for a project - I: Public issue of shares, debentures, public
deposits, leasing, internal generation of funds, commercial papers.

UNIT 4 Sources of finance for a project – II: Global depository receipts, borrowings from
banks and FIs – Venture capital – Innovative instruments in the capital market.

UNIT 5 Project financing – Estimating the total capital requirements – Factors

determining the fixed capital and working capital – Judicious financing plan.

UNIT 6 Capital gearing – Matching of requirements with available financial assistance

from various sources.

UNIT 7 Process of lending for a project – Pre-sanction appraisal and procedures.

UNIT 8 Appraisal of managerial and technical aspects: Evaluation of managerial skills,

past records, Management and working of other group companies evaluation of
appropriative technology, availability or raw materials and utilities and safeguards
against pollution, effluent disposal/treatment.

UNIT 9 Project appraisal – Evaluation of commercial aspects: Estimation of demand

supply gap, distribution channels and selling arrangements.

UNIT 10 Evaluation of financial aspects - I: Debt equity ratio, current ratio, debt service
coverage ratio, return on investment.

UNIT 11 Evaluation of financial aspects - II: Security margin, internal rate of return and
breakeven analysis.

UNIT 12 Project appraisal – Economic analysis: Economies of scale, employment

generation, social cost benefit analysis, contribution to government revenue.
74
UNIT 13 Political stability, priority and evaluation of international competitiveness. Project
monitoring – Post sanction supervision and follow up – Steps to improve
recovery.

UNIT 14 Industrial sickness: Warning signals and causes - Rehabilitation of a sick

industrial unit– Role of the board for industrial and financial reconstruction
(BIFR).

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. B.B. Goel, Project Management: A Development Perspective, Deep and Deep Publications,
New Delhi
2. A.K. Sengupta, Bank Credit to Industry, Skylark Publications, New Delhi.
3. Prasanna Chandra, Projects Preparations, Appraisal, Budgeting and Implementation, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

75
 Course Code Title of the Course
34793 QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

• To expose students to various concept of quality management and its applications

• Thread bare understanding of the basic techniques and types of quality
management
UNIT 1 Quality: Concepts and Significance: Quality as customer delight – Quality as
meeting standards – Actual VsPerceived quality – Concept of total quality

UNIT 2 Design, inputs, process and output – Need for quality – Function of quality –
Philosophy of Quality : Old Vs. New – Quality as a problem, as a challenge and
as a delight

UNIT 3 Six sigma concept- Contributions of Quality Gurus: Juran, Deming and Crosby-
importance of six sigma - Tools

UNIT 4 Statistical Quality Control: Fundamentals, evolution and objectives – Planning for
quality – Quality process – Statistical Process Control (SPC) and acceptance
sampling

UNIT 5 Quality Assurance:Vendor Quality -Zero Defect Manufacturing.- Quality and

Competitiveness in Business, Zero Defects and Continuous Improvement.

UNIT 6 Quality Economics: Quality and Cost – Quality and Productivity- Benefits of
Quality – Competition in Quality –

UNIT 7 Quality as a Competitive Edge- Role of MNCs in emergence of global quality.

,Role of Leadership and Commitment in Quality Deployment

UNIT 8 Quality Systems: Total quality control system Vs. Total quality management
system – Total Quality Control (TQC) in Japan, US, Europe – Elements of TQC

UNIT 9 Just in time-Advantages and Dis-Advantages SPC, quality circles, quality teams-
6 Sigma Quality approach and process.

UNIT 10 Total Quality Management (TQM): Elements – TQM in global perspective –

Global bench marking – Business process reengineering

UNIT 11 Global standards – ISO 9000 series – Environmental QS 14000- Quality manual –
Barriers to TQM.

76
UNIT 12 Total Quality Management and Leadership: Implementing TQM – Market choices
– Meeting customer requirements – Maintaining competitive advantage –

UNIT 13 Core competence and strategic alliances for ensuring quality – Quality review,
recognition and reward

UNIT 14 Quality awards: Japanese Deming Award, US Malcolm Baldrige National Quality
Award& Indian Golden Peacock National Quality Award.

REFERENCES:

1. Armond V. Feigerbaum, Total Quality Control, McGraw Hill, 2004.

2. Ron Collard,Total Quality: Success Through People, Jaico, 2006.
3. Juran, Planning for Quality, The Free Press, 1988
4. Willborn& Cheng, Global Management of Quality Assurance Systems, McGraw Hill.
5. Townsend &Gebhardt, Commit to Quality, John Wiley & Sons, 1990.
6. E. David Spong, The Making of a World-Class Organization, ASQ Quality Press, 2008.
7. Suganthi, L, Samuel, A Anand, Total Quality Management, Phi Learning, 2009.
8. Patrick L. Townsend, Joan E. Gebhardt, How Organizations Learn, ASQ QP, 2007.
9. Joel E. Ross, Susan Perry,Total Quality Management:St.Lucie Press, 1988.
10. P.N. Mukherjee, Total Quality Management, PHI, 2006.
11. Willborn& Cheng, Global Management of Quality Assurance Systems, McGraw Hill.
12. Nancy R. Tague, Quality Toolbox, ASQ Quality Press, 2005.
13. George and Weimerskirch, Total Quality Management: 2009
14. Pyzdek and Keller, The Six Sigma Handbook, McGraw Hill, 2009.

77
 Course Code Title of the Course
34794 GROWTH MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

• To become familiar with concept of growth management

• To understand the techniques and types of growth management
• To examining the various levels of growth management
• To handle change and its implications

UNIT 1 Sinews of Growth: Defining Growth and Growth Management- Overview of

Growth Management ‘SIX-S’ Process: Sinews, Strategy, Staging, Synchronizing,
Securing and Sustenance-

UNIT 2 Sinews: Identifying Growth Opportunities – Entry Enticements and

Barriers- Competition and Cooperation- Creativity and Engagement- Prioritizing
Growth

UNIT 3 Developing a Growth Proposition and Plan- Building up the Growth sinews: Fine-
Ware, Soft-Ware and Hard-Ware- Growth propellers and escalators- Reinventing
the Future.

UNIT 4 Strategizing Growth- Strategic thrusts for Growth- Improvement Strategies

(Synergy and Value chain based): Vertical growth, Horizontal growth (related
growth and unrelated growth), Evolutionary growth and Continuous growth,

UNIT 5 Organic growth- Venture Strategies: Disruptive Ventures and Innovation

Strategies: Revolutionary growth, Discontinuous growth, and Acquired growth-
Blue Ocean Strategy- Ansoff’s model- McKinsey model- SWOT/TOWS model

UNIT 6 3 Levels ofEnterprise Strategies for growth- Porters Generic Competitive

Strategies- Choosing the strategic growth choice: Considerations of Internal and
External Factors.

UNIT 7 Staging Growth: Organizing for Growth- Inertia Escape- Activation of growth-
Well thought out implementation plan- Competitive compensation programs

UNIT 8 Supportive organization culture- Strategic core competencies in place- Frequent,

two-way communications- Strategic staffing plan- Efficient decision-making
process- Full delegation and accountability- Team based environment-
Performance management program
78
UNIT 9 Change management tools in place- Supportive systems and processes- Employee
development plans- Succession plan – Warding off Organization from signs of
Slowing and Losing- Resources for Growth- Mentor for Growth (M4G)- Getting
focus and balance- Monitoring growth.

UNIT 10 Synchronizing for Growth: Synchronized Efforts - Directing the Growth Resource
mix – Greiner’s model of Crises Induced Growth- Managing Growth fatigue:
Concept and overcoming the same

UNIT 11 Managing the momentum of growth: Steady and Speed – Alert and Advancing-
High Growth Road Map.

UNIT 12 Securing Growth in every domain: Product & Brand domain, Market &
Competition domain, Assets & Capacity domain, Finance & Profitability domain,
Networks & Relationship domain.

UNIT 13 Geography & Spread domain and People & Organizational domain- Handling un-
sought consequences of growth- Turning Risks into Opportunities.

UNIT 14 Sustaining Growth: Efficiency Improvement- Effectiveness Enhancement-

Excellence Management- Continuous Innovation- Kaizen and Radical Innovation-
Harnessing Diversity- Rapid Growth Strategies- Managing Rapid Growth-
Passion for Growth.

REFERENCES

1. Christopher Meyer, Relentless Growth, Free Press, 1997.

2. Robert Slater, Jack Welch and the GE Way: Management Insights and Leadership, 1999.
3. Richard Leifer, et al, Radical Innovation,HBP, 2000.
4. Peter S Pande, 6 Sigma Way, McGraw Hill, 2000.
5. B Tucker & B Tucker, Driving Growth Through Innovation, Berrett-Koehler, 2002.
6. Jack Trout & Steve Rivkin, Differentiate or Die, John Wiley and Sons, 2008
7. Ram Charan and Noel. M. Tich, Every Business is a Growth Business, Three Rivers Press,
2000.
8. Jennings & Haughton, It's not BIG and eats SMALL... it's FAST that eats SLOW, Harper,
2002.
9. Andrew Lester, Growth Management:Two Hats Are Better Than One, MacMillan, 2009
10. Feigenbaum, A V; Feigenbaum, D. S, The power of management innovation : McGraw-Hill,
2009
11. Timothy George Kotnour, Transforming Organizations,CRC Press 2009.
12. Rodolphe Durand, Organizational evolution and strategic management, Sage, 2006

79
 34710A1 - PRODUCT MANAGEMENT

Objective:

• To know the basic concept Product management.

• To understand the key aspects of product strategy, product development, product
lifecycle management
• To comprehend strategy to develop and disseminate products according to need of
market.

UNIT 1 Product Concept: Product Classification – Product Vs. Service – Product Vs.
commodity- Financial Products

UNIT 2 Derivative Products- Product line decisions: Product mix decisions, Product
modification, Product differentiation, Product elimination

UNIT 3 New Product Development: Need, risks and uncertainty- Product management
organization structure – Role of product managers.

UNIT 4 New Product Development Process: Generation of ideas – Idea screening –

Feasibility testing – Concept development and testing – Designing a new
product: Factors to be considered

UNIT 5 Standardization Vs Adaptation Vs. Differentiation– Modular design –Reverse

engineering - Marketing strategy development – Business analysis – Product
development – Test marketing

UNIT 6 Commercialization – Launching – Success and Failures in launches: New

product success and failures in Indian context – Classification of new products.

UNIT 7 Creativity and Innovation for NPD: Concept and Contours of creativity-
Sources of Innovation- New Product Championing-Venture teams in new
product development (NPD)

UNIT 8 Organization for new product development – Top management contribution –

7S framework and its use in NPD – Team working.

UNIT 9 Product and Branding Positioning: Product Positioning: Concept and Process -
Branding Positioning: Product Branding – Brand extension

UNIT 10 Brand valuation – Brand image and equity – Brand positioning strategies –
Packaging – Trends in packaging.

80
UNIT 11 Product Life Cycle (PLC): Phases of PLC and features thereof- Functional
Management strategies for different phases of PLC

UNIT 12 Strategic intervention for PLC management. New product success and failures
in Indian context – Classification of new products

UNIT 13 Product Strategy and Policy: Product Portfolio Strategy – Product Investment
and Divestment strategy- Product policy: New product development policy:
Product Line consistency,

UNIT 14 Frequency, Launch time and Cannibalization Mitigation- Product Research –

Components and areas of product research.

REFERENCES

1. Crawford and Benedetto, New Products Management, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

2. Kenneth B. Kahn, The PDMA Handbook of New Product Development, Wiley, 2004.
3. Robert G. Cooper, Winning at New Products, Basic Books, 2001.
4. Donald G. Reinertsen, The Principles of Product Development Flow, Celeritas, 2009.
5. RamanujMajumdar, Product Management in India, PHI, 2011
6. John Stark, Product Lifecycle Management: Springer, 2011.
7. Om P Kaushal, Product Management, Lalvani.
8. Dave Littler, Marketing and Product Development, PhilioAlen.
9. SubratoSengupta, Brand Positioning: Strategies for Competitive Advantage, TMH.

81
 34710A2 - PROMOTIONAL MANAGEMENT

Objective:

• To know the basic concept Promotional management.

• To gain knowledge on Promotional management
• The course is designed to develop the student's understanding of the environment for
promotional efforts, with special emphasis on understanding the relevancy of consumer
motivation and behavior in the promotional strategies of business, public, and social
organizations.

UNIT 1 Overview of Promotion Management: Need for Marketing Promotion of

Products and Services- Establishing promotional objectives

UNIT 2 Setting the promotional budget – Techniques used – Promotional decision

Different Promo-tools - Promotional Mix for New Products and Existing
Products- Organizing for Promotion

UNIT 3 Advertising: Importance, scope, benefits and criticisms – Advertising

objectives – Advertising appropriation – Need, methods

UNIT 4 Advertising agency – Functions, client – Agency relationships – Indian

advertising agencies – Role of persuasion in advertising – Copy Development

UNIT 5 Message strategy development and evaluation- Techniques used in producing

advertisement for print, broadcast and media.

UNIT 6 Media Management: Media planning and selection – Media strategy – Media
status in India – Media characteristics

UNIT 7 Media research – Concept, Application, and Approach - Media Buying - Media
strategy - Measuring advertising effectiveness-

UNIT 8 Public Relations and Publicity (PR &P): Public relations – Role, types of
publics, process – Tools of public relations – Publicity – Institutional
advertising

UNIT 9 Direct marketing – Importance, techniques used, relevance in Indian context –

Event marketing- Role of PR&P in Corporate Image Building.

82
UNIT 10 Sales promotion and Personal Selling/Salesmanship: Concept and Need for
Sales promotion- Distinction between Sales Promotion and Advertisement-
Sales promotion measures aimed at Consumer, Trade and Sales Force
promotion

UNIT 11 Personal selling or Salesmanship– Characteristics of Personal selling- Sales

force management

UNIT 12 Recruiting, Selecting, Training, Performance appraisal – Territory structuring –

Trends in personal selling.

UNIT 13 Promotional Program Evaluation: Comparison and Contrast of Advertising,

Publicity, Sales promotion and Personal selling – Evaluation of Promotional
Measures: Bases for Promotional Evaluation

UNIT 14 Process of Evaluation – Regulations of promotions – Legislations, relevance to

society – Social responsibility – Promotion and women – Promotion and
children – Ethics in promotion.

REFERENCES

1. George Belch and Michael Belch, Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated

Marketing Communications Perspective, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
2. Govani et-al, Promotional Management, PHI.
3. Russell and Vernill, Advertising Procedure, Prentice Hall.
4. Chunawala et-al, Foundation of Advertising Theory and Practice, 1995
5. Aakar, Batra and Myers, Advertising Management, PHI, 2003.
6. Gelder and Woodcock, Marketing & Promotional Strategy, Nelson Thornes, 2003.
7. James F. Engel, et al, Promotional Strategy: Managing the Marketing
Communications Process, McGraw Hill, 1994.

83
 34710A3 - MARKETING OF SERVICES

Objective:

• To know the basic concept marketing services.

• Articulate the role and importance of the service sector in the global economy.
• Comprehend the differences between services and physical goods and to understand how
these differences translate into strategic direction.

UNIT 1 Services: Concept of Services- Definition, characteristics, classification –

Service Vs Product – Service Marketing planning process

UNIT 2 Essentials of Service Marketing- Services Market Segmentation: Meaning –

Process – Bases and purpose of market segmentation-

UNIT 3 Vision and Mission in Service Marketing– Service Marketing planning

process.- strategic approaches – Levels of management approaches.

UNIT 4 Services Positioning and Differentiation: Evolution of positioning – Positioning

and services – Levels of positioning

UNIT 5 Process of positioning – Importance of positioning- Considerations in

Positioning – Re-positioning.

UNIT 6 Services Marketing Mix: Marketing mix elements – The 7Ps- Service Product
– Pricing the service – Service location and channels

UNIT 7 Promotion and communication of services – Processes – Physical evidence –

Developing a marketing mix strategy.

UNIT 8 Marketing strategy formulation – Resource allocation and monitoring –

Marketing planning and services.

UNIT 9 Customer-focused Services: Customer Expectations of service product- Service

quality and marketing – Intangibles in Intangibles

UNIT 10 Improving service quality – Customer retention -Relationship Marketing -

Service Marketing Strategy.

UNIT 11 Experiential Services Marketing: Tourism Service marketing – Hotel Service

marketing –– Hospital services marketing

UNIT 12 Education service marketing- Entertainment/Recreational Service Marketing.-

Scope – Challenges – pitfalls of execution.

84
UNIT 13 Encounter Services Marketing: Bank marketing – Insurance marketing ––
Telecommunication services marketing

UNIT 14 Consultancy services marketing – Transport Service Marketing.- Functions –

uses – characters – legal barriers – business scope.

REFERENCES

1. Lovelock, and Wirtz, Services Marketing, Prentice Hall, 2010.

2. Adrian Payne, Services Marketing, PHI, 1993.
3. Helen Woodruffe, Services Marketing, Macmillan, 1995.
4. Jha S.M, Services Marketing, Himalaya, 2002.
5. Sinha P.K and Sahoo S.C, Services Marketing, Himalaya.
6. Valarie Zeithaml, et al, Services Marketing, McGraw hill, 2004.

85
 36041 - INTERNATIONAL MARKETING

Objective

• To know the basic concept International marketing.

• To gain an insight on international marketing strategies.
• To comprehend the international marketing in current era

UNIT 1 Marketing Concept and Functions – Marketing Environment and system –

Meaning- Features- Objectives

UNIT 2 Marketing Concepts: Marketing Mix – Product Mix – Product strategies – New
Product Planning and Development - Market segmentation – Product
positioning – Product Life Cycle concept in global market context

UNIT 3 International Marketing Approaches: Ethno, Poly, Regio and Geo Centric
approaches - International dimensions of Marketing – Meaning- Features-
Objectives- Nature and Scope

UNIT 4 International Marketing Channels - Distribution mix – Direct and indirect

channels – Types of intermediaries in the international market – Channel
Development – Channel Adaptation – Channel decisions. International

UNIT 5 Consumer Behavior in the international context – Consumer Decision making

process - Consumer Behavior – Theories and Models – Meaning- Features-
Objectives- Nature and Scope

UNIT 6 Marketing Mix – Product Mix – Product strategies – New Product Planning and
Development – Market segmentation

UNIT 7 Product positioning – Product Life Cycle concept in global market context –
Product standardization Vs product adaptation – National vs International
Product

UNIT 8 Marketing of services – Brand decisions – Packaging. – . Meaning- Features-

Objectives- Nature and Scope

UNIT 9 Price mix – Pricing decisions – pricing strategies – dumping – . Meaning-

Features- Objectives- Nature and Scope

UNIT 10 International transfer pricing – Countertrade – price quotation – financing and

payment - financing and payment – Credit system.
86
UNIT 11 Promotion mix – Personal selling – publicity – sales promotion – Overseas
product exhibitions & trade fairs - Advertising – Advertising media –
International Advertising.

UNIT 12 MIS & Communication medium: Marketing Information System - Integrated

Marketing Communications and International Advertising

UNIT 13 Distribution mix – Direct and indirect channels – Types of intermediaries in the
international market

UNIT 14 Channel Development – Channel Adaptation – Channel decisions -

International Marketing Information System and Research.

REFERENCES:

1. International Marketing, Analysis & Strategy : SakOnkvisit& John J Shaw

2. Global Marketing Management : Keegan
3. Marketing Analysis, Planning & Control : Philip Kotler
4. Fundamentals of Marketing : Stanton
5. International Marketing : Philip R. Catero
6. International Marketing : Kirpalani .V.H.
7. Marketing, an Environmental approach : Kerr, John.R. & others.
8. Marketing in the International Environment : Edward Cundiff& M.T. Hilger.

87
 34710B1 - MANAGEMENT OF FUNDS

Objectives:
• To know about business capitalization
• To identify the techniques in Fund management
UNIT 1 Meaning and importance of funds: Concept of funds- Types and features of funds-
Sources of Funds: Short term finance, Medium term finance and Long term
finance.

UNIT 2 Effective Mobilization and allocation of funds - Consequences of mal-

mobilization and misallocation of funds – Organizing for funds management –
Relationship with other function.

UNIT 3 Role of financial systems in Mobilization and Allocation of funds – Barometer of

business conditions – Causes and Consequences.

UNIT 4 Considerations in Fund Allocation: Allocation of funds to most profitable

opportunity – Development of profitable opportunity and evaluation – Methods of
evaluation.

UNIT 5 Business Capitalization- Assessment of funds for fixed assets – ROI, PBP, ARR,
IRR considerations- considerations of risks and uncertainty – Management of
risks.

UNIT 6 Capital rationing and its impact on financial planning-Treatment of inflation in

capital budgeting – Tools for capital budgeting.

UNIT 7 Considerations in fund Mobilization: Capital Market conditions- Interest rate

scenario- Global financial contours- Variety of Instruments: Shares, Bonds and
Debentures - Cost of floatation.

UNIT 8 Cost of Capital- Meaning and Definition -Agency and Bankruptcy costs- Explicit
and Implicit costs- Tax treatment - Relationship with financial Institutions.

UNIT 9 Capital structure Decisions: Types of capital structures – Capital structure and
Asset structure match - Liquidity, Solvency, Flexibility, Value impact and Risk
considerations.

88
UNIT 10 Interest coverage, debt capacity and Debt service coverage considerations–
Leverage aspects- Acquisition for specific allocation- Optimum capital structure.

UNIT 11 Leasing: Need for Lease - Types of Leasing- Operating and financial lease,
Domestic Lease and International Lease, Open ended lease and close ended lease
- Capital Leases - Evaluation of cash flows of leasing and buying alternatives.

UNIT 12 Venture capital: Meaning, Venture financing options- Pros and cons – Venture
capital industry in India – Origin and Growth.

UNIT 13 International financing and investment: International Financing Equity and Debt
instruments: GDRs, ADRs, ECBs, FCCBs, Syndicated Loans- Finance from
Multilateral financing institutions.

UNIT 14 Financing via MNCs- Domestic sources vis-à-vis international sources- Investing
abroad: Opportunities- Considerations- Risk-Return – Foreign currency risk
management.

REFERENCES

1. Eugene F. Brigham, Financial Management: Theory and Practice (Harcourt) 2005.

2. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management, South-WesternCollege Pub., 2010.
3. F. Brigham and Joel F. Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson, 2009.
4. Alan C. Shapiro, Multinational Financial Management, Wiley, 2008.
5. Kuchal, S.C, Financial Management, Chaitanya, Allahabad, 1992.
6. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, 2007.

89
 34710B2 - INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT
Objective:
• To expose students in investment analysis concept
• To know the various approaches in portfolio management

UNIT 1 Investment: Investment Concepts and Goals – Types of investment – Financial –

Real, business, Personal and Institutional investments.

UNIT 2 Comparison of investments, speculation, gambling – Hedging – Concepts of

portfolio and portfolio management – Goals – Risk and return trade off.

UNIT 3 Financial investment avenues – Fixed income Securities– Varying income

securities – Derivative Instruments: Options, Swaps, Forward, Futures.

UNIT 4 Investment Analysis: Aspects of Analysis – Return analysis – Concepts,

measures and computation of return of individual security and portfolio.

UNIT 5 Risk analysis: Concepts, types, measure, computation of risk of individual

security and portfolio – Valuation analysis – Share valuation – Bond value – Price
earnings analysis.

UNIT 6 Approaches to Investment Analysis: Fundamental analysis – Concept and

components – Tools of economy analysis.
UNIT 7 Industry and company analysis - I – Technical analysis – Concept and tools –
Assumption – Theories – Dow theory – Contrary opinion.

UNIT 8 Industry and company analysis – II: The confidence index, breadth of market and
strength analysis – Moving average analysis – Chart patterns.

UNIT 9 Portfolio Construction and Choice: Markowtz diversification – Efficient frontier –

Risk-return indifferent curves.
UNIT 10 Portfolio choice – Sharpe’s Single and two factorial models – Lagrange multiplier
method.

UNIT 11 Capital Asset Pricing Model: Assumptions and application – Capital market line
and security market line

UNIT 12 Efficient market hypotheses - The weakly efficient, semi strongly efficient and
strongly efficient market forms – Random-Walk theory.

UNIT 13 Portfolio Performance: Measures: Sharpe, Treynor and Jenson.

UNIT 14 Portfolio audit and Portfolio revision – Need and methods – Formula plans.
90
REFERENCES
1. Jack Clark Francis, Management of Investments, McGraw Hill, 1993
2. Frank J. Fabozzi and Harry M. Markowitz, Theory and Practice of Investment Management,
Wiley, 2011.
3. Frank K. Reilly and Keith C. Brown, Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management,
Thomson, 2008.
4. Preeti Singh, Investment Management, HPH, 2006.

91
 34710B3 - FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSTITUTIONS
Objective:
• To identify the various concepts of financial services
• To know the function of financial institutions
UNIT 1 Financial Services: Concept, Functions, Characteristics and scope of financial
services – Functions of Indian financial system – Financial Instruments – Types –
Pros and Cons

UNIT 2 Merchant Banking: Meaning – Importance and Need - Functions concerning

public and private placement of capital issues.

UNIT 3 SEBI regulations regarding lead managers and merchant banking functionaries –
Inspection by SEBI.

UNIT 4 Mutual Fund Services – Definition – Features, need and scope – MFs in India:
Types of scheme: Features, Merits and Demerits – Performance Evaluation of
Mutual Fund.

UNIT 5 History of Indian Mutual Fund Industry and Recent Developments – Regulations
regarding mutual funds in India.

UNIT 6 Credit Rating: Objectives, Importance of Credit rating – Institutions: CRISIL –

ICRA - CARE – Rating Process.

UNIT 7 Factors contributing to the success of the rating system - Debt and deposit rating
equity rating procedures

UNIT 8 Reading different grades of rating – International credit rating institutions –

Functions of rating agencies.

UNIT 9 Role of UTI and LIC as investment institutions – Portfolio management services

UNIT 10 Concept and need – Services of NBFC to investors.

UNIT 11 Development Financial Institution – Role, functions of IDBI, IFC, ICICI and
IRBI.
UNIT 12 RBI – Functions, role and management of gilt securities market – Regulatory
measures.

UNIT 13 Stock Exchanges: Role and organizations of BSE and NSE – OTCEI – SEBI and
stock exchange – Investor information and education.

92
UNIT 14 Role of SEBI – Role of investor association and investment consultancies –
Indian and Global Scenario.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Raghunathan V, Stock Exchanges and Investments

2. Avadhani V, Security Market
3. Varma, Merchant Banking

93
 34710B4 - INTERNATIONAL FINANCE
Objective:
• To identify the various concept of International finance
• To know the function of International finance

UNIT 1 Foreign Exchange: Concept and Significance – Foreign change Rate: Direct and
indirect quotations – Inter bank and Merchant rates –

UNIT 2 Spot rates and forward rates – T.T. rates – Cross rates; Computation – Foreign
exchange markets – Organisation of forex market.

UNIT 3 Determination of Exchange Rate: Purchasing Power Parity theory – Interest rate
parity theory – Flow model – Asset market model –

UNIT 4 Forecasting of exchange rates – Concepts of Nominal Effective Exchange Rate

and Real effective Exchange rate.

UNIT 5 Forward exchange contracts: Types – Forward exchange rate computation –

Factors affecting forward rates

UNIT 6 Extension and cancellation of forward contracts – option contracts: Types and
mechanism.

UNIT 7 Foreign exchange risk management: Transaction exposure risk: Internal

Strategies – Risk shifting, Risk sharing – Exposure netting and offsetting

UNIT 8 External Strategies: Foreign currency options – Forward and money market
hedge – Currency Swaps – Interest Rate Swaps.

UNIT 9 Economic Exposure risk – Inflating and exchange risk –

UNIT 10 Economic consequences of Exchange rate changes – managing economic

exposure risk.

UNIT 11 Exchange management in India: Fixed and fling rates – Rupee convertibility –
NOSTRO, VOSTRO and LORO Accounts –

UNIT 12 Exchange control measures: Need and Forms and relevance –

UNIT 13 Foreign Exchange Reserves of India: Trend, composition and management –

UNIT 14 Impact on exchange Rate – Monetary and fiscal policy initiatives for exchange
rate management.

94
REFERENCES:
1. Multinational Financial Management : Alan C Shapiro
2. ABC of Foreign Exchange : Clare G. Gump
3. Guide to Foreign Exchange Regulations : Krishnamoorthy.S
4. Principles of Foreign Exchange : Chatterjee.A.K.
5. Foreign Exchange – Practice, Concepts and control : Jeevanadam.N.S.
6. Foreign Exchange Management : Rajwadi
7. Rupee Convertibility : BibekDebroi

95
 34710C1 - LABOUR LEGISLATIONS – I
Objective:

• To know the basic concept of labour legislations .

• To gain knowledge about the labour act

UNIT 1 Factories Act, 1948: Provision’s relating to health, safety, welfare, working hours,
leave etc., of workers approval

UNIT 2 Licensing and registration of factories, manager and occupier – Their obligations
under the Act, powers of the authorities under the Act, Penalty provisions.

UNIT 3 Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923: Employer’s liability for compensation, amount
of compensation method of calculating wages – Review

UNIT 4 distribution of compensation – Remedies of employer against stranger – Returns as to

compensation – Commission for workmen’s compensation.

UNIT 5 Industrial Dispute Act, 1947: Industrial dispute – Authorities for settlement of
industrial disputes – Reference of industrial disputes

UNIT 6 Procedures – Power and duties of authorities, settlement and strikes – Lock-out –
Lay-off – Retrenchment – Transfer and closure

UNIT 7 Unfair labour practices – Miscellaneous provision offences by companies, conditions

of service to remain unchanged under certain circumstances, etc.

UNIT 8 Shops and Establishments Act, 1947: Definitions – Salient provisions – Powers of the
authorities.

UNIT 9 Employee’s State Insurance Act, 1948: Registration of Factories and Establishments,
the employee’s State Insurance Corporation, Standing Committee and Medical
Benefit Council, provisions relating to contributions

UNIT 10 Inspectors – Their functions and disputes and claims – Offences and penalties –
Miscellaneous provisions.

UNIT 11 Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952: Employees
provident fund and other schemes

96
UNIT 12 Determination and recovery of money due from employer, appointment of inspectors
and their duties

UNIT 13 Provisions relating to transfer of accounts and liability in case of transfer of

establishment exemption under the Act –

UNIT 14 Contract Labour Regulations and Abolition Act, 1970 ,Count’s power under the act -
employer and employee relationship – Problems – pertaining to the employee –
solvation at door steps.

REFERENCES :

1. Bare Acts
2. Kapoor N D, Industrial Law
3. Shukla M C, Industrial Law
4. D. R. N. Sinha, Indu Balasinha & Semma Priyadarshini Shekar, Industrial Relation, Trade
unions and Labour Legislation, 2004.

97
 34710C2 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Objective:

• To understand the concepts and methods and techniques of Human Resource Management
• To know the Human resource management theories and real time practices
• To identify the contemporary issues in human resource management

UNIT 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management: Concept, Definition, Objectives,

Nature and Scope of HRM - Functions of HRM – Evolution of human resource
management - Role and structure of Human Resource Function in organizations-
Challenges in Human Resource Management

UNIT 2 Human Resource Management Approaches: Phases of human resource

Management- The importance of the human factor – Competitive challenges of
HRM – HRM Models – Roles and responsibilities of HR department.

UNIT 3 Human Resource Planning: Personnel Policy - Characteristics - Role of human

resource manager – Human resource policies – Need, Scope and Process – Job
analysis – Job description – Job specification- Succession Planning.

UNIT 4 Recruitment and Selection Process: Employment planning and fore casting
Sources of recruitment- internal Vs. External; Domestic Vs. Global sources-
Selection process Building employee commitment : Promotion from within -
Sources, Developing and Using application forms – IT and recruiting on the
internet.

UNIT 5 Employee Testing & selection : Selection process, basic testing concepts, types of
test, work samples & simulation, selection techniques, interview, common
interviewing mistakes, Designing & conducting the effective interview, small
business applications, computer aided interview.

UNIT 6 Training and Development: Orientation & Training: Orienting the employees,
the training process, need analysis, Training techniques, special purpose training,
Training via the internet. - Need Assessment - Training methods for
Operatives and Supervisors

UNIT 7 Executive Development: Need and Programs - Computer applications in human

resource management – Human resource accounting and audit. On-the - job and
off-the-job Development techniques using HR to build a responsive organization

UNIT 8 Employee Compensation : Wages and Salary Administration – Bonus –

Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems - and Employee Benefits, Health and
Social Security Measures,

98
 UNIT 9 Employee Retention: Need and Problems of Employees – various retention
methods– Implication of job change. The control process – Importance – Methods
– Employment retention strategies for production and services industry

UNIT 10 Appraising and Improving Performance: Performance Appraisal Programs,

Processes and Methods, Job Evaluation, Managing Compensation, Incentives
Performance appraisal: Methods - Problem and solutions - MBO approach - The
appraisal interviews - Performance appraisal in practice.

UNIT 11 Managing careers: Career planning and development - Managing promotions and
transfers - Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems – Promotion – Demotions –
Transfers- Labour Attrition: Causes and Consequences

UNIT 12 Employee Welfare, Separation: Welfare and safety – Accident prevention –

Employee Grievances and their Redressal – Industrial Relations - Statutory
benefits - non-statutory (voluntary) benefits – Insurance benefits - retirement
benefits and other welfare measures to build employee commitment

UNIT 13 Industrial relations and collective bargaining: Trade unions – Collective

bargaining - future of trade unionism - Discipline administration - grievances
handling - managing dismissals and workers Participation in Management-
Separation: Need and Methods.

UNIT 14 Human Resource Information System- Personnel Records/ Reports- e-Record on

Employees – Personnel research and personnel audit – Objectives – Scope and
importance.

REFERENCES

1. Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management,South-WesternCollege, 2004.

2. Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-WesternCollege,
2007.
3. R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management,Prentice Hall, 2011.
4. Venkataraman& Srivastava, Personnel Management & Human Resources
5. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations
6. Yodder&Standohar, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
7. Edwin B. Flippo, Personnel Management , McGraw-Hill, 1984
8. Pigors and Myers, Personnel Administration
9. R.S. Dwivedi, Manpower Management
10. Lynton &Pareek, Training and Development, Vistaar Publications, 1990.

99
 34710C3 - INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS MANAGEMENT
Objective:

• To gain knowledge about the trade unions

• To know the basic concept of industrial relations management

UNIT 1 Constitution of India – Salient features – Fundamental rights and directive

principles of State policy – Labour movement

UNIT 2 Concept of labour movement and Union Organization – Trade union movement
and various phases of the movement – Trade unions and economic development.

UNIT 3 Development of Trade Unionism in India – Historical retrospect – Central

organization of workers in India – Role of internal trade union

UNIT 4 Inter and intra union rivalries – Union recognition – International Labour
Movement: ICFTU – WFTU – ILO – History

UNIT 5 objective and functions – Convention and recommendations – PCR rights and
duties – functions - problems-Voluntary Welfare Measures – Statutory Welfare
Measures – Labour – Welfare Funds – Education and Training Schemes

UNIT 6 Concept of Industrial Relations – Social obligations of industry – Role of

government employers and the unions in industrial relations

UNIT 7 Industrial relations machinery – Joint consultation – Works committee –

Negotiation: Types of Negotiations – Conciliations

UNIT 8 Adjudication, voluntary arbitration – Workers participation in industry –

Grievance procedure.

UNIT 9 Process of collective bargaining – Problems and prospects – Bipartisan in

agreements – Code of conduct and code of discipline –

UNIT 10 Wage boards – Reports of wage boards – Management of strikes and lockouts –
measures to stop strikes and lock outs Disputes – Impact – Causes – Prevention –
Industrial Peace – Government Machinery – Conciliation – Arbitration –
Adjudication.

UNIT 11 Employee safety programme – Types of safety organization – functions –

implications – features - Industrial Relations problems in the Public Sector –
Growth of Trade Unions – Codes of conduct.

UNIT 12 Safety committee – Ergonomics – Damage control and system, safety – insurance
– grievance redressal.

100
UNIT 13 Employee communication – House journals – Notice boards suggestion schemes
– upward communication, personnel counselling and mental health –

UNIT 14 Educational and social development – modern trends – employee education –

NGC .Child Labour – Female Labour – Contract Labour – Construction Labour –
Agricultural Labour – Differently abled Labour –BPO & KPO Labour - Social
Assistance – Social Security – Implications

REFERENCE

1. Bhagoliwal T N, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, Agra Publishers, Agra.

2. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Michael V P,HRM and Human Relations, Himalaya Book House, Mumbai.
4. Mamoria C.B. and Sathish Mamoria, Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalaya
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Arun Monappa, Ranjeet Nambudiri, Patturaja Selvaraj. Industrial Relations & Labour
Laws.Tata McGraw Hill. 2012

101
 34710C4 - GLOBAL HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT
Objective:

• To understand the basic concept of Human Resource Management.

• To gain knowledge on GHRM

UNIT 1 Nature and scope of International Human Resource Management (IHRM)-

approaches to HRM-differences between domestic HRM and IHRM. Human
Resources management: Overview of operative functions – Recruitment –
Selection – Integration – Compensation

UNIT 2 Training for development and separation – Challenges and opportunities of

globalising HR. Human resource planning in IHRM- recruitment and selection-
issues in staff selection of expatriates.

UNIT 3 Global HR Recruitment and Selection: Home – Host – Third country nations –
Selection criteria for global assignments

UNIT 4 Global HR - Election process – Challenges of global placements – current

scenario.

UNIT 5 Global HR Integration Process: Process of integration – Motivation and team in

HR – Cultural adoptability vis-à-vis Individuality

UNIT 6 Managing cross-cultural diversities – Multiculturalism – Organisational culture of

MNCs – Experiences of best run companies.

UNIT 7 Global HR Compensation Process: Direct and indirect compensation – procedure

– wage linked performance

UNIT 8 International compensation – Pay for performance – Executive incentive pay –

Pay differences – Causes and consequences

UNIT 9 Compensation structure in MNCs – types – WTO – IBRD – Implications =

problems Training and development -expatriate training-developing international
staff and multinational teams. Brain drain and brain bank.

102
UNIT 10 Global HR Training and Development Practice: Relevance of training and
development Compensation-objectives of international compensation approaches
of international compensation.

UNIT 11 Area of training – Types: Standard Vs Tailor made training – Cultural

assimilations and other approaches

UNIT 12 Impact of different learning styles on training and development – Leadership

training-Key issues in International relations-strategic choices before firms-
strategic choices before unions-union tactics

UNIT 13 HR Relations Management: Labour relations in the international area –

Relationship between employer and employee

UNIT 14 US, Japanese, UK, European approaches to labour relations –Role of strategic
management of international labour relations-Issues and Challenges of IHRM.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Venkataraman C.S &Srivatsava B.K ‘Personnel Management and Human Resources, Tata
Mcgrew Hill, New Delhi.
2. Prasad, L.M, Human Resource Management, SulteyChend& Sons, New Delhi.
3. Edwin Flippo, Personnel Management.
4. Memoria, CB, Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.

103
 34710D1- OFFICE AUTOMATION

Objective:

• To understand the basic and introduction of computing

• To gain the knowledge with application programs

UNIT 1 Introduction: Basics and Evolution of Computing – Hardware and Software

Aspects – Modern IT accessories- System Software, Operating Systems, and
Application Softwares.

UNIT 2 Introduction to Network: Setting – LAN and WAN, Internet and Intranet-
Information Needs of Business and IT support – Impact of IT on Business
Excellence.

UNIT 3 Windows: Working with windows elements –Windows Desktop – View Drives
with My Computer - Managing files with Windows Explorer – Working with
multiple windows

UNIT 4 Office Shortcut Bar – Start and Exit Office application – Menu Commands –
Toolbars – Dialog boxes – Getting help in MS-Office – Creating, Opening,
Saving Files.

UNIT 5 Working with Microsoft Office Suite: MS Word – Creating, Opening, Saving and
Formatting Documents - Headers and Footers - Spell Checking -Mail Merge-
Printing a document – Print preview – Page Orientation - Zoom in and Zoom out
pages

UNIT 6 Working with Spread Sheets: MS Excel – Tables – Formulas and Functions –
Data Analysis using excel – Linking Work Sheets and Work Books – Charts –
Macros Forms – Pivot Tables.

UNIT 7 MS Power Point: Creating a Power Point Presentation (PPT) Using Slide
Master, Animation and Graphics in PPT - View Slide Show – Handouts.

UNIT 8 MS Access – Creating and Modifying Data Bases – Report Generation – Linking
Access Files with Excel Files. MS: Project: Creating Project Design, Schedules,
PERT / CPM Charts and Reports.

104
UNIT 9 Internet and E-Commerce: E-Mail Etiquette - Usages of Search Engines and
Portals –Website and Web Based E-mail, FTP and Net Meeting – WiFi
Environment in Modern Offices- E- advertisements

UNIT 10 Basic Models of E-Business: Business to Business (B2B), Business to

Customer(B2C), Customer to Customer (C2C) and Mobile Commerce (M-
Commerce)

UNIT 11 Buying and Selling through Internet: E-Payment and Electronic Fund Transfer –
E-ticketing – IT for Supply chain- online shopping.

UNIT 12 Payment Gateway and Security Systems – On-line Stores – E-banking- Internet
Banking –Mobile Banking- Smartcards and Plastic Money.

UNIT 13 Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) - Enterprise Resource Planning System (ERP)
- Data Mining- Data Warehousing- Big Data Analytics-Teleconferencing.

UNIT 14 Online office suite- Paperless Office - Telecommuting or Telework- Virtual

Team- Virtual Business – Cashless Office – E-transactions.

REFERENCES

1. Vijayaraghavan. G., Computer Applications for Management, 1st Edition (2006),

Himalaya Publishing Company.
2. Rayudu, C.S., E-Commerce and E-Business, 1st Edition (2004), Himalaya Publishing
Company.
3. Agarwala, N. Kamlesh, Business on the Net, Macmillan Publishers
4. George Reynolds, Information Technology for Managers, Course Tech., 2009.
5. Shelly, Cashman and Vermaat, Microsoft Office 2007, Course Tech., 2007.
6. Shelly and Vermaat, Discovering Computers, Course Tech., 2010.
7. Brown, DeHayes, et al, Managing Information Technology, Prentice Hall, 2011.

105
 34710D2- INTERNET PROGRAMMING AND WEB DESIGN

Objectives

• To understand the basics of internet programming

• To gain knowledge on internet programming languages.

UNIT 1 An overview of internet programming – web system architecture- internet –

intranet – LAN – MAN –WAN-Domain Name System - Name Server Concepts -
Resolver

UNIT 2 Internet Protocols : Finger user information protocol - Internet E-mail - Mail
Transfer Protocol - File Transer Protocols - Managing Data - Telenet - HTTP -
HTTP client Requests & response - URI - URLs - HTTP methods - Programming
the WEB - Creating Web Server.

UNIT 3 WWW design issues – Network Security - Encryption – Decryption - Developing

Intranet applications. Internet at Home - Entertainment on the Internet -
Television and the Net, Movies and Music - At Office : Electronic Commerce -
Shopping on the internet, Doing Business, Finding Job - At School :

UNIT 4 Internet Programming Languages: Java –Common Gateway Interface (CGI) -

PERL: Strawberry Perl or Active Perl – Microsoft Internet implementation.

UNIT 5 Java basics – Object Oriented Programming Principles - Java Classes and Objects
- I/O streaming – concept of streams –stream classes – byte stream classes –
character Stream - files

UNIT 6 Client/server programs – Looking up Internet Address - Socket programming - E-

mail client – SMTP - POP3 programs – web page retrieval –protocol handlers –
content handlers - Remote Method Invocation.

UNIT 7 Applets –How applets differ from Applications – preparing to write applets –
Building Applet Code – Applet life cycle – creating an Executable Applet –
Designing a Web Page – Applet Tag – Adding Applet to HTML file – Running
the Applet image handling

UNIT 8 Internet Markup Languages: HTML & SGML: Introduction- Basic HTML-
Formatting and Fonts- Commenting Code- Anchors- Backgrounds- Images-
Hyperlinks- Lists-Tables- Frames- simple HTML Forms-XHTML

UNIT 9 DHTML /CSS : Netscape extensions – Microsoft internet explorer – Only HTML
tags – Shockwave and Lingo- Dynamic HTML – introduction – cascading style
sheets.

106
UNIT 10 Internet Scripting Languages: Java Script – Java Script Event driven
programming – VB Script – VB Event driven programming - Other
Scripting languages

UNIT 11 ActiveX Controls: Creating an ActiveX control to activate a Web Page – VDO
Live Technology – Creating Netscape Navigator Plug-ins

UNIT 12 Application Development: Introduction - Pulling web information – Creating a

custom integrated application with multiple protocols.

UNIT 13 Web Graphics: Introduction - A graphic view of web – Essay web graphics –
Working with Images and Hyperlinks – Adding graphics to web pages

UNIT 14 Graphics Design : Introduction – Web Site and page design – Framing your
graphics – Dynamic graphics – Animation fundamentals.

REFERENCES

1. Ralph Moseley, Developing Web Applications, Wiley publication.

2. Krishnamoorthy R and Prabhu S., Internet and Java Programming,

New Age International Publishers, 2004.

3. Thomno A. Powell, The Complete Reference HTML and XHTML , TMH, 2003.

4. Naughton, The Complete Reference – Java2, Tata McGraw-Hill, 3rd Edition, 1999.

5. Powell, HTML: The Complete Reference, Tata McGraw Hill, 1998.

6. Tom Negrino and Dori Smith, JAVA script for World Wide Web.

7. Bob Breedlove et-al, Web Programming Unleased, Sams Net Publ., 1996.

8. Ron Wodaski, Web Graphics Bible, Comdex Computer Publ., 1997

9. Young, Internet -Complete Reference, TMH, 1998.

10. Fred Halsall , Lingana Gouda Kulkarni, Computer Networking and the Internet,
Pearson.

107
 34710D3- MULTIMEDIA AND APPLICATIONS

Objective:

• To understand the need, benefits and problems of Multimedia

• To gain knowledge on media types and video compression technique

UNIT 1 Multimedia in Use and Technology: Introducing multimedia – Multimedia

definition – Need , benefits and problems

UNIT 2 Multimedia System components – Introduction - Multimedia platforms –

Multimedia Development tools – Flash – Director – Studiomax – Multimedia
Authoring tools

UNIT 3 Multimedia Cross platform compatibility – Introduction - multimedia Commercial

tools – Multimedia Standards.

UNIT 4 Media Types: Introduction - Non-temporal – Text, image, graphics – Temporal –

Analog, digital audio/video, music, animation, other media types

UNIT 5 Multimedia Extended images, Introduction - Multimedia digital ink fundamentals,

Multimedia speech audio overview.

UNIT 6 Multimedia data compression: Types of compression color, gray scale and still
video image compression video image compression audio compression .Digital
Video and Image Compression: Introduction - Evaluating a compression system –
Redundancy and visibility

UNIT 7 Video compression techniques – Introduction - Image compression standards –

Data and file formats: RTF TIFF RIFF, MIDI, JPEG, AVI video file formats,
MPEG standards.

UNIT 8 Multimedia I/O technologies: Pen input Video and Image display systems Print
output technologies image scanners digital voice and audio digital camera Video
images and animation full motion video.

UNIT 9 Multimedia storage and retrieval technologies: Introduction - Optical media -

hierarchical storage management - cache management for storage systems.

UNIT 10 Object Oriented Multimedia: Introduction - Objects, Classes and related

items – Multimedia Frameworks: Overview - MultiMedia classes, Introduction -
Transform classes, Format classes, Component classes.

108
UNIT 11 Multimedia Environments: Introduction - The Compact Disk CD family, CD-i –
Overview – Media types – Media organization

UNIT 12 Architecture and operations, Applications: Media in real world – Multimedia on

networks –Training and education.

UNIT 13 Virtual Reality: Introduction : Intelligent Multi Media System- Multimedia Desk-
top Virtual Reality (VR) Multimedia VR operating system - Introduction - Virtual
Environment Display and Orientation making.

UNIT 14 Multimedia visually coupled system requirements – Introduction – Multimedia

Intelligent Virtual Reality software systems.

REFERENCES

1. JuidthJeffcoate, Multimedia in Practice: Technology and Application, Better World

Books Ltd, 2008.
2. Prabhat K. Andleigh, KiranThakrar, Multimedia Systems Design , PHI 2002
3. Simon J Gibbs and Dionysion C Tsichrikzis, Multimedia Programming, , Addison
Wesly, 1994.
4. Jeffery Jefcoat, Multimedia Systems and Application , TMH.
5. Fred Halsall, Multimedia Communication Application Networks, Protocols and
Standards , Addison Wesley, 2001.
6. John F Koegel Buford, Multimedia Systems, Addison Wesley, 1994.
7. Walter Worth John A, Multimedia Technology and Applications, Ellis Horowood
Ltd, 1991.
8. Arch C Luther, Designing Interactive Multimedia, Bantam Books, 1992.
9. David Gries and Paul Gries, Multimedia Introduction to Programming Using Java,
2004.
10. Patrick McNeil, The Web Designer's Idea Book, 2008
11. Scott Kelby, The iPod Book: How to Do Just the Useful and Fun Stuff with Your
iPod and iTunes, 2009
12. SusmitBagchi, Ubiquitous Multimedia and Mobile Agents: Models and
Implementations, 2011.

109
 34710D4 VISUAL PROGRAMMING

Objective:

• To understand the basics concept of visual programming

• To gain knowledge on visual programming languages

UNIT 1 DBMS: Database - Database Management System - Features -

UNIT 2 Advantages - Data Base Scheme - Schema and Subschema - Manipulative

capabilities -

UNIT 3 Guidelines - Different User Interfaces.

UNIT 4 Relational Model : Concepts of Relational Model - Comments on the Relational

Model: Semantic issues,

UNIT 5 Navigation, Efficiency - DBMS based on the Relational Model: The mapping
operation - Data Manipulation facilities -

UNIT 6 Data Definition facilities - Data Control facilities.

UNIT 7 Introduction to Oracle: Types of Databases, Relational Database properties,

Benefits of Oracle, Client/Server Systems

UNIT 8 Oracle Database Architecture: Overview of Oracle Architecture, Processes,

Physical files, CPU, Network System Tables,

UNIT 9 Oracle Users, Logical Structures.

UNIT 10 Oracle Fundamentals: Elements of SQL Language: Database Objects, Data

Access SQL commands, DML commands –

UNIT 11 Oracle Queries - Basic Query, Using Expressions, Working with NULL values,
Joining Multiple Tables in a Query, Selecting Distinct values, Using Subqueries,
Unions and Multiple part Queries.

UNIT 12 Table Creation: Create Table statement, Privileges required, Describing Table
Definitions, Modifying Tables,

UNIT 13 Renaming a Table, Copying another table, Dropping a Table - Other Database Objects,
Reason for Database Objects, Indexes –

110
UNIT 14 Embedded SQL: Languages supported by Oracle Precompiler, Embedded SQL
statements.

REFERENCE BOOKS:
1. David Mcclanahan, Oracle Developers's Guide, Oracle Press, 2005.
2. Naveen Prakash, Introduction to Data Base Management Tata McGraw-Hill Publications,
2006.

111
 34710 PROJECT

Project is considered to be an integral part of business administration by all ‘B’ Schools in India.
In order to maintain the academic quality of business acumen, it has mentioned the following
objectives of project.

1. Development of professional skills through learning to use knowledge for the study and
analysis of problems and selection of appropriate means to solve them.
2. Development of self awareness and professional ideal.

The students opted the project have to select research areas systematically.

a. Understanding both the organization and the functions.

b. Understanding socio, economic and cultural realities and their impact on the
organization.
c. Administrative structure, communication pattern, leadership, power structure,
decision making and functions of personnel in business organizations

Records:

a. Analysis of problem solving situations for new and significant areas of problem solving.
b. Means, skills for documentation of activities like projects, case studies etc...

The students can select Project Guides from the approved list of DDE, Alagappa University
Guidelines.

112
3.DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The course shall consist of Five academic years divided into Ten semesters.

4.Faculty and Support Staff Requirements

This programme requires the following faculty and supporting staffs

Staff Category Required

Core Faculty * 3
Faculty – Specialization* 2
Faculty for Language 2
Clerical Assistant 1

*At least Assistant Professor Level (Either permanent or part time)

5.Instructional Delivery Mechanism

Each semester there will be one contact programme of 64 hours duration in theory. The SLM
(Self Learning Material) will be supplied to the students in print form as well as in CD form. The
face to face contact sessions of the programme for theory courses will be held at the head quarter
only. The conduct of end semester examinations, evaluation and issuance of certificates will be
done by office of the Controller of examinations, Alagappa University, Karaikudi.

PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION, CURRICULUM TRANSACTION, AND

EVALUATION

Procedure of Admission

A candidate who has passed HSC or 3yr Diploma is eligible for getting admission in 5 Year
Integrated MBA programme.

Curriculum Transactions:

The class room teaching would be through conventional lecture, use of OHP, power point
presentation and novel innovative teaching ideas like television and computer aided instruction.
Student seminars would be arranged to improve their awareness and communicative skill.

113
Face to face contact session will be conducted as given in below table.

Course Type Face to Face Contact

Session/semester (in Hours)
Theory courses 64

Total 64

Evaluation
The examinations shall be conducted for theory to assess the knowledge acquired during
the study. There shall be two systems of examinations viz., internal and external examinations. In
the case of theory courses, the internal evaluation shall be conducted as Continuous Internal
Assessment via. Student assignments preparation. The internal assessment shall comprise of
maximum 25 marks for each course. The end semester examination shall be of three hours
duration to each course at the end of each semester. The end semester examinations shall
comprise of maximum of 75 marks for each course. The candidate failing in any course(s) will
be permitted to appear for each failed course(s) in the subsequent examination.

f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments:

The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory courses

Component Marks

Assignments(2) 25
(12.5+12.5)
Total 25

Question paper pattern (Theory)

• The question paper carries a maximum of 75 marks.

• The question paper consists of three sections namely Part-A, Part-B and Part-C.
• Part-A consists of 10 questions of 2 marks each (10 x 2 = 20 marks) with no choice. The
candidate should answer all questions.
• Part-B consists of 5 either or choice questions. Each question carries 5 marks (5 x 5=25
marks).

114
 • Part-C consists of 5 questions. Each question carries 10 marks. The candidate should
Answer any three questions (10 x 3 = 30 marks).

Passing minimum

• There shall be no Passing Minimum for Internal.

• For External Examination, Passing Minimum shall be of 40% upto 3 years and from 4 th
& 5th year Percentage of Max Mark 50% (Fourty Percentage/ Fifty Percentage) of the
maximum marks (75) prescribed for the paper
• In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of 40% for each
Paper
• Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (internal + external).

Candidate who does not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass in a course shall be
required to appear and pass the same at a subsequent appearance.

Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and classification to indicate the
performance of the candidate.

Range of Marks Grade Points Letter Grade Description

90-100 9.0-10.0 O Outstanding

80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent
75-79 7.5-7.9 D Distinction
70-74 7.0-74 A+ Very Good
60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good
50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average
00-49 0.0 U Re-appear
ABSENT 0.0 AAA ABSENT

Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semester

Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester.
n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited

115
For a semester;

Grade Point Average [GPA] = ∑i Ci Gi / ∑i Ci

Grade Point Average = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the courses

Sum of the credits of the courses in a semester

For the entire programme;

Cumulative Grade Point Average [CGPA] = ∑n ∑i Cni Gni / ∑n ∑i Cni

CGPA = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the entire programme

Sum of the credits of the courses for the entire programme

CGPA Grad Classification of Final

Result

9.5-10.0 O+ First Class- Exemplary*

9.0 and above but below 9.5 O

8.5 and above but below 9.0 D++ First Class with
8.0 and above but below 8.5 D+ Distinction*

7.5 and above but below 8.0 D

7.0 and above but below 7.5 A++ First Class

6.5 and above but below 7.0 A+
6.0 and above but below 6.5 A

5.5 and above but below 6.0 B+ Second Class

5.0 and above but below 5.5 B

0.0 and above but below 5.0 U Re-appear

*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the prescribed semester of
the PG Programme are eligible.

116
Maximum duration for completion of the course

The maximum duration for the programme shall not exceed five years after the completion of
the minimum duration of the programme.

Commencement of this regulation

These regulations shall come into effect from the academic year 2018-19 for students who are
admitted to the first year of the course during the academic year 2018-19.
Fee structure

Sl. No. Fees Detail Amount in Rs.

First Second Third Fourth Fifth

Year Year Year Year Year

1 Admission 300.00 - -
Processing Fees

2 Course Fees 3300.00 4400.00 5500.00 8800.00 8800.00

5 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00 150.00 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 3750 4550 5650 8950 8950

REQUIREMENT OF THE LIBRARY RESOURCES:

LIBRARY RESOURCES
The Central Library is one of the important central facilities of Alagappa University. It has text
book, reference books, conference proceedings, back volumes, standards, and non-book material
such as CD-ROMs and audios. The central Library procured several e-books in different areas.
The library also subscribes to about 250 current periodicals. The Directorate of Distance
Education of Alagappa University has adequate number of copies of books related to
Management Programme.

117
COST ESTIMATE OF THE PROGRAMME AND THE PROVISIONS:

Sl. No. Nature of Expenditure Amount in Rs.

(Approx.)
1 Programme Development 15,00,000/-
2 Programme Delivery 20,00,000/-
3 Programme Maintenance 6,00,000/-

i) QUALITY ASSURANCE MECHANISM AND EXPECTED PROGRAMME

OUTCOMES

• The feedback from students on teaching will be collected every semester using standard
formats.
• Feedback on the curriculum will also be collected from the experiences of the students
which help teachers in fine tuning of deliverables in the classroom.
• It helps in improving the standard of teaching as expected by the students.
• Exit survey feedback on various parameters to improve and quality of the programme and
support services like course material, library and infrastructure.
• It helps to Strengthen the contents of the program to meet the requirements of the
employment market and keep the curriculum as a treasure of knowledge.
• This programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate
knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes.

118
119
120
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT
MBA (GENERAL)

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
KARAIKUDI – 630 003
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT FOR

MBA (GENERAL)

a) PROGRAMME MISSION AND OBJECTIVES

Business Studies have fascinated humans for two reasons, namely generating interest and
augmenting essentials of running a firm effectively. That is why their study is enchanting and
glorifying. The primary objective of this programme is to provide ample exposure to subjects
from the fields of business legacy and accountancy, equip the Students for entry level jobs in
industry and to contribute to the economic development of the country.

b) RELEVANCE OF THE PROGRAMME WITH HEI’S MISSION AND GOALS:

The Alagappa University is functioning with following Vision and Mission:

Mission: Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular emphasis on

‘PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and Learning

Vision: Affording High Quality Higher Education to the learners so that they are transformed
into intellectually competent human resources that will help in the uplift of the nation to
Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence.

Therefore, the introduction of MBA (GENERAL) programme in the Directorate of Distance

Education will contribute substantially in fulfilling the mission of Alagappa University. Such
a higher education in subject with appropriate Practical Exposer will enrich the human
resources for the uplift of the Nation to Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental
and Economic Magnificence (ESTEEM).

c) NATURE OF PROSPECTIVE TARGET GROUP OF LEARNERS

• Working Professionals
• Entrepreneurs
• Service Personnel
• Academic Faculty
• Government Officials
• Researchers
• Home makers
• Unemployed Graduates
d) APPROPRIATENESS OF PROGRAMME

To Attain Leadership in spearheading qualitative and responsible academic programs relevant

to the society through cost effective off-campus distance mode of education. knowledge and
understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes in the following areas:

• The fundamental concepts of Management

• The higher-level taxonomy and diversity of Business Studies.
• How principles of Business can be applied to problems
• Internship training in Industry
• Undertake Inter tasks and techniques.
• Inter-disciplinary knowledge like statistics, Mathematics, Computer and E-Banking.
• Using the SPSS package for the analysis of data
• It also improves the Intellectual skills of the students.
• In nutshell, these skills will improve the performance of the students parameters.
E) INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN
MBA (GENERAL)

I YEAR
Course Title CIA ESE TOT C
Code Max. Max. Max.
I Semester
31711 Management – Principles and Practices 25 75 100 4
31712 Organizational Behaviour 25 75 100 4
31713 Managerial Economics 25 75 100 4
31714 Quantitative Techniques 25 75 100 4
31715 Financial and Management Accounting 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
II Semester
31721 Research Methods 25 75 100 4
31722 Business Environment 25 75 100 4
31723 Business Laws 25 75 100 4
31724 Management Information System 25 75 100 4
31725 Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
II YEAR
III Semester
GROUP – A : HUMAN RESOURCE
31731 Marketing Management 25 75 100 4
31732 Financial Management 25 75 100 4
31733A1 Industrial Relations Management 25 75 100 4
31734A2 Labour Legislations – 1 25 75 100 4
31735A3 Training and Development 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
III Semester
GROUP – B : MARKETING
31731 Marketing Management 25 75 100 4
31732 Financial Management 25 75 100 4
31733B1 Marketing of Services 25 75 100 4
31734B2 Promotional Management 25 75 100 4
31735B3 Product Management 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

 III Semester
GROUP – C : FINANCE
31731 Marketing Management 25 75 100 4
31732 Financial Management 25 75 100 4
31733C1 Management of Funds 25 75 100 4
31734C2 Investment Analysis and Portfolio 25 75 100 4
Management
31735C3 Financial Services and Institutions 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
IV Semester
GROUP – A: HUMAN RESOURCE
31741 Production and Operation Management 25 75 100 4
31742A1 Compensation Management 25 75 100 4
31743A2 Labour Legislations – II 25 75 100 4
31744A3 Organizational Development 25 75 100 4
31745 Project (Compulsory) 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
GROUP - B : MARKETING
31741 Production and Operation Management 25 75 100 4
31742B1 International Marketing 25 75 100 4
31743B2 Logistics Marketing and Technology 25 75 100 4
31744B3 Strategic Retail Management 25 75 100 4
31745 Project (Compulsory) 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
GROUP – C : FINANCE
31741 Production and Operation Management 25 75 100 4
31742C1 Foreign Exchange Management 25 75 100 4
31743C2 Multinational Financial Management 25 75 100 4
31744C3 Project Finance 25 75 100 4
31745 Project (Compulsory) 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
GRAND TOTAL 2000 80
Course Code Legend:
3 1 7 Y Z

317- M.B.A Programme

Y -Semester Number
Z- Course Number in the Semester
CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total, C:
Credit Points, Max.: Maximum

No. of Credits per Course (Theory) - 4 Total No. of Credits per Semester- 20
Total Credits for the Programme- 20 X 4 = 80
 31711- MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES

Objectives:
• To introduce the basic concepts of Management functions and principles
• To learn the scientific decision making and modern trend in the management process
• To understand the contemporary practices and issues in management

UNIT 1 Management: Definition – Nature, Scope and Functions – Evolution of

Management – Management thought in modern trend – Patterns of the
management analysis – Management Vs. Administration - Management and
Society: The external Environment, Social Responsibility and Ethics.

UNIT 2 Management Science and Theories : Contributions of FW Taylor, Henri Fayol,

Elton Mayo, Roethilisberger, H.A.Simon and P.F Drucker - Universality of
Management - Relevance of management to different types of organization.

UNIT 3 Planning: Nature and Purpose – Principles and planning premises –

Components of planning as Vision, Mission, Objectives, Managing By
Objective (MBO) Strategies, Types and Policies -Planning and Decision
Making: Planning process.

UNIT 4 Decision making: Meanings and Types – Decision-making Process under

Conditions of Certainty and Uncertainty – Rational Decision Making
Strategies, Procedures, Methods, Rules, Projects and Budgets.

UNIT 5 Organizing: Nature, Importance, Principles, purpose and Scope - Organizing

functions of management – Classifications of organization – Principles and
theories of organization – Effective Organizing – Organizational Culture and
Global Organizing.

UNIT 6 Organizational Structure – Departmentalization – Span of control – Line and

staff functions – Formal and Informal Groups in Organizations - Authority and
responsibility - Centralization and decentralization – Delegation of authority –
Committees – Informal organization.

UNIT 7 Staffing: General Principles of Staffing- Importance, techniques, Staff

authority and Empowerment in the organization – Selection and Recruitment -
Orientation - Career Development - Career stages – Training – Performance
Appraisal.

UNIT 8 Creativity and Innovation – Motivation - Meaning – Importance – Human

factors of Motivation – Motivation Theories: Maslow, Herzberg, Mc Gregor
(X&Y), Ouchi (Z) ,Vroom, Porter-Lawler, McClelland and Adam –
Physiological and psychological aspects of motivation .
 UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:
Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,
Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.
Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics and
Ethics. Leader Vs. Manager.

UNIT 10 Communications: Meaning – Types – Process – Communication in the

decision making – Global Leading - Effective communication in the levels of
management. – Uses of Communication to Planning, Organizing, coordinating
and controlling.

UNIT 11 Co-ordination: Concept; Meaning, Characteristics, Importance in the

organization, Co-ordination process and principles - Techniques of Effective
co-ordination in the organization - Understanding and managing the group
process.

UNIT 12 Business ethics: Relevance of values in Management; Holistic approach for

managers indecision-making; Ethical Management: Role of organizational
culture in ethics – Ethics Committee in the organization.

UNIT 13 Controlling: Objectives and Process of control Devices of control – Integrated

control – Special control techniques- Contemporary - Perspectives in Device
of Controls

UNIT 14 New Perspectives in Management - Strategic alliances – Core competence –

Business process reengineering – Total quality management – Six Sigma-
Benchmarking- Balanced Score-card.

REFERENCES

1. Stoner, et-al, Management, Prentice Hall, 1989.

2. Koontz and O’Donnell, Management: A Systems Approach, McGraw Hill, 1990
3. Weihrich and Koontz,Management: A Global Perspective, McGraw Hill, 1988
4. Peter F. Drucker, Management, 2008.
5. Gene Burton and Manab Thakur, Management Today: Principles and Practice, Tata
McGraw Hill.
6. Ricky W. Griffin, Management, South-WesternCollege Publications, 2010
7. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, Management, 9th Edition, 2006.
8. Kaplan and Norton, The Strategy-Focused Organization: How Balanced Scorecard
Companies Thrive in the New Business Environment, HBP, 2000.
 31712 - ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Objectives:
• To understand the personality trades and influence on the organization.
• To imbibe the necessary conceptual understanding of behaviour related people
• To learn the modern trends, theories and changes in organizational Behaviour.

UNIT 1 Organizational Behaviour: History – Meaning Elements – Evolution,

Challenges and opportunities – Trends – disciplines – Approaches – Models –
Management functions relevance to organizational Behaviour – Global
Emergence of OB as a discipline.

UNIT 2 Personality – Determinants, Structure, Behaviour, Assessment, Individual

Behaviour: Personality & Attitudes- Development of personality – Nature and
dimensions of attitude – Trait Theory – Organizational fit – Organizational
Commitment

UNIT 3 Emotions – Emotional Intelligence – Implications of Emotional Intelligence on

Managers – EI as Managerial tool – EI performance in the organization –
Attitudes: Definitions – Meaning – Attitude relationship with behaviour –
Types – Consistency

UNIT 4 Individual Behaviour and process of the organization: Learning, Emotions,

Attitudes, Perception, Motivation, Ability, Job satisfaction, Personality, Stress
and its Management – Problem solving and Decision making – Interpersonal
Communication - Relevance to organizational behaviour.

UNIT 5 Group Behaviour: Group Dynamics - Theories of Group Formation - Formal

and Informal Groups in organization and their interaction - Group norms –
Group cohesiveness – Team: Importance and Objectives - Formation of teams
– Team Work- Group dynamics – Issues - Their relevance to organizational
behaviour.

UNIT 6 Organizational Power: Organizational Power: Definition, Nature,

Characteristics - Types of powers - Sources of Power - Effective use of power
– Limitations of Power – Power centre in Organization.

UNIT 7 Organizational Politics: Definition – Political behaviour in organization -

Factors creating political behaviour – Personality and Political Behaviour -
Techniques of managing politics in organization – Impact of organizational
politics.

UNIT 8 Organizational Conflict Management: Stress Management: Meaning – Types –

Sources and strategies resolve conflict – Consequences – Organizational
conflict: Constructive and Destructive conflicts - Conflict Process - Strategies
for encouraging constructive conflict - Strategies for resolving destructive
conflict.
 UNIT 9 Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Dynamics – Organizational
Efficiency, Effectiveness and Excellence: Meaning and Approaches – Factors
affecting the organizational Climate.

UNIT 10 Organizational Culture: Meaning, significance – Theories – Organizational

Climate – Creation, Maintenance and Change of Organizational Culture –
Impact of organizational culture on strategies – Issues in Organizational
Culture.

UNIT 11 Inter personal Communication: Essentials, Networks, Communication

technologies – Non-Verbal communications Barriers – Strategies to overcome
the barriers. Behavioral Communication in organization - Uses to Business

UNIT 12 Organizational Change: Meaning, Nature and Causes of organizational change

Organizational Change –Importance – Stability Vs Change – Proactive Vs.
Reaction change – the change process – Resistance to change – Managing
change.

UNIT 13 Organizational Behaviour responses to Global and Cultural diversity,

challenges at international level, Homogeneity and heterogeneity of National
cultures, Differences between countries.

UNIT 14 Organizational Development: Meaning, Nature and scope – Features of OD –

OD Interventions- Role of OD – Problems and Process of OD – process OD
and Process of Intervention - Challenges to OD- Learning Organizations -
Organizational effectiveness Developing Gender sensitive workplace

REFERENCES

1. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2006.

2. Stephen P. Robbins, Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall; 2010
3. Keith Davis, Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work, McGraw Hill, 2010
4. Griffin and Moorhead, Organizational Behavior: Managing People and Organizations,
2006.
5. Judith R. Gordon, Organizational Behavior: A Diagnostic, Prentice Hall, 2001.
6. K. Aswathappa, Organizational Behaviour, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai, 2010
7. Judith R. Gordon, A Diagnostic Approach to Organizational Behaviour, Allyn &
Bacon, 1993.
 31713 - MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
Objectives:
• To understand the economic principles and its applications in business
• To develop economics based analytic skills for business
• To make the learners to strong in economical approach

UNIT 1 Economics: Introduction – Meaning, nature and scope of Managerial

Economics – General Foundations of managerial Economics – Economic
Approach – Working of Economic system - Circular flow activities -
Economics & Business Decisions - Relationship between Economic theory
and Managerial Economics.

UNIT 2 Business Decisions: Role of managerial Economics in Decision making –

Decision making under Risk and Uncertainty - Concepts of Opportunity cost, -
Production possibility curve – Incremental Concepts - Cardinal and Ordinal
approaches to consumer Behaviour Time Value of Money –

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour: Marginalism – Equilibrium and Equi-marginalism and

their role in business decision making. – Equi-Marginal principles – Utility
analysis – Total and Marginal Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility –
Marshallian approach and Indifference curve analysis.

UNIT 4 Demand analysis: Meaning, Functions - Determinants of demand-Law of

Demand – Demand Estimation and Forecasting - Applications of demand in
analysis - Elasticity of Demand: Types, Measures and Role in Business
Decisions.

UNIT 5 Supply Analysis: Determinants of supply- Elasticity of Supply- Measures and

Significance - Derivations of market demand – Demand Estimation and Fore
casting- Demand and Supply equilibrium – Giffen Paradox

UNIT 6 Production Functions: Managerial uses of production function - Cobb-Douglas

and other production functions - Isoquants – Short run and long run
production function – Theory of production – Empirical estimations of
production functions.

UNIT 7 Forms of Markets: Meaning and Characteristics - Market Equilibrium:

Practical Importance, Market Equilibrium and Changes in Market Equilibrium.
Pricing Functions: Market Structures - Pricing and output decisions under
different competitive conditions: Monopoly Monopolistic completion and
Oligopoly

UNIT 8 Strategic Behaviour of the firms and Game Theory - Nash Equilibrium:
Implications – Prisoner’s Dilemma: Types of strategy – Price and Non price
competition – Relation to the firm behaviour.

UNIT 9 Cost and Return: Cost function and cost output relationship – Economics and
Diseconomies of scale - Cost control and cost reduction- Cost Behaviour and
Business Decision- Relevant costs for decision-making- Traditional and
Modern theory of Cost.
 UNIT 10 New Product Penetrative Decision and Skimming the cream Pricing-
Government control over pricing - Concept of Profit- Types and Theories of
Profit by Knight (Uncertainty), Schumpeter (Innovation), Clark (Dynamic)
and Hawley (Risk) - Profit maximization – Cost volume profit analysis – Risk
and Return Relationship.

UNIT 11 Profit and Investment Analysis: Meaning – Measurement of profit – Theories

of Pricing- Profit planning and forecasting- Profit and Wealth maximization –
Cost volume profit analysis – Investment analysis and Evaluation: IRR, NPV
and APV techniques.

UNIT 12 Macro-economic Factors: Nature, Importance ; Economic Growth and

Development - Business cycle – Phases and Business Decision- Inflation -
Factors causing Inflation and Deflation - Control measures – Balance of
payment Trend and its implications in managerial decision.

UNIT 13 National Income: Introduction Meaning – Theories – Methods of

Measurement - Sectoral and Population distributions – Per capita Income:
Definition – Calculations – Uses – Limitations – GDP – GNP - Recent
developments in Indian Economy.

UNIT 14 Economic Regulations of Business: Introduction – Antitrust theory and

Regulations – The structure – Conduct – Performance paradigm –
Concentration: Overview – Measuring concentration – Regulation of
Externalities.

REFERENCES
1. Dominick Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy,OxfordUniversity
Press, 2011.
2. Ivan Png and Dale Lehman, Managerial Economics, Wiley-Blackwell, 2007.
3. Truett Lila J., Truett, Dale B. and Truett J. Lila (2006), Managerial Economics:
Analysis Problems, Cases, 8th Editon, John Wiley & Sons.
4. Atmanand (2008), Managerial Economics, 2nd Edition, Excel Books.
5. Christopher R Thomas & S Charles Maurice (2008), Managerial Economics, 9th
edition, McGraw Hill Co.
6. Petersen, H. C., Cris, L W and Jain, S.K. (2008), Managerial Economics, 1st edition
Pearson
7. Gupta G S, Managerial Economics, Tata McGraw-Hill.
8. Varshney and Maheswari, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
9. Mehta P L, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
10. Joel Dean, Managerial Economics, Prentice-Hall.
 31714 - QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES
Objectives:
• To help develop analytical skills based on problem solving approach
• To learn quadrature problems solving of business issues.
• To acquire the knowledge in statistics and their use in business decision making.

UNIT 1 Basic Quantitative Concepts: Place of quantitative analysis in the practice of

management – Problem definition: Models and their development. Variables
notion of Mathematical models – concept of trade off – Notion of constants –
concept of Interest.

UNIT 2 Basic Concept of differentiation – integration – Optimization concepts – use of

differentiation for optimization of business problem Optimization Statistics:
Meaning and Applications of Statistics in business decision making and
research - Collection, Tabulation and presentation of data - Measures of central
tendency: Mean, Median and Mode. Measures of dispersion

UNIT 3 Variables and function: Linear and Non-linear –Graphical representation of

functions and their applications in cost and revenue behavior. Slope and its
relevance –Use of functional relationships to understand elasticity of demands,
Relationship between costs and level of activity, Decisions on Minimizing
Costs and Maximizing output/profits.
UNIT 4 Linear Programming: Introduction to the linear programming – Concepts of
optimization- Formulation of different types of linear programming –Standard
from of LP problems - Importance and practical implementation in Industry
UNIT 5 Simple regression and Correlation analysis: Introduction, Correlation,
Correlation analysis, linear regression analysis and Co-efficient. Duality and
sensitivity analysis for decision-making- Solving LP using graphical and
simplex method (only simple problems) – Interpreting the solution for
decision-making

UNIT 6 Special Algorithms of LPP: Transportation Algorithm - Balanced and

Unbalanced Problem Formulation and solving methods: North West Corner,
Vogel’s Approximation-MODI method- Assignment and Travelling Executive
Algorithms
UNIT 7 Theory of Probability: Introduction to the Concept – Development of
probability – Areas and Utilisation of probability theories in the Business –
Sample space – terminology – Types of probability.

UNIT 8 Theoretical Probability Distributions: Introduction - Concept of events –

Probability of events – Joint, conditional and marginal probabilities
Probability distributions: Binomial, Poisson and Normal – Features and
Applications – Use of Normal Tables.

UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background and

Developments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –
Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations of
Quantitative methods.
 UNIT 10 Sequencing /Scheduling Methods : Concepts – terminology – Notations –
Assumption for scheduling models – Job sequencing priorities – Processing
the job and Mass production system.

UNIT 11 Simulation Techniques: Introduction to simulation as an aid to decision-

making- Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Applications of
simulations models – Types: Inventory, Cash, and Project – Random Numbers.

UNIT 12 Queuing Theory: Introduction – Definition – Queue priorities Product

launching problems using Monte Carlo simulation- Queuing Theory: M/M/1
queuing model and applications.

UNIT 13 Decision Analysis: Concepts – Definition – Decision Tables Pay-off and Loss
tables – Expected value of pay-off – Expected value of Perfect Formation –
decision making process

UNIT 14 Decision Tree Analysis: Decision making environments – Concept of

Posterior probabilities Decision Tree approach to choose optimal course of
action Criteria for decision – Mini-max, Maxi-max, Minimizing Maximal
Regret and their applications.

REFERENCES

1. David R. Anderson, et al, An Introduction to Management Science: Quantitative

Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning, 2008.
2. Lucey, Quantitative Techniques Cengage Learning Business Press, 2002
3. Sharma, Operations Research: Theory and Applications.
4. Richard I Levin, & C. Atkinson Kirkpatrick, Quantitative Approaches to Management,
McGraw-Hill.
5. K. Gupta and D.S. Hira, Operations Research.
6. Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma, Quantitative Techniques for Managerial Decision-
making, New Age International, 2006.
7. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
8. V.K. Kapoor, Operations Research.
9. Dharani Venkatakrishnan, Operations Research: Principles and Problems.
10. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 2002.
 31715 - FINANCIAL AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Objectives:
• To enable the students to learn basic accounting principles, concepts.
• To practice Financial and Management accounting applications
• To make the learners familiarize in managerial decision making.

UNIT 1 Accounting: Definition – Accounting for historical function and managerial

function - Types of Accounting- Management, Management and Cost
accounting – Scope for Accounting-Managerial Uses of Management
accounting and Financial Accounting.

UNIT 2 Accounting Concepts and Conventions – Accounting standards - Financial

Accounting Definitions – Principles – Accounting standards - Double entry
system of accounting: Accounting books – Preparation of journal and ledger,
subsidiary books.

UNIT 3 Preparation of Trial Balance – Errors and rectification – Classifications of

capital and Revenue – Fixed Assets and Depreciation accounting – Preparation
of Manufacturing accounting- Preparation of Final Accounts - Accounting
from incomplete records – Statements of affairs methods

UNIT 4 Conversion methods – Preparation of Trading, Profit & Loss Account and
Balance Sheet from incomplete records – Depreciation methods - Straight line
method, Written down value method, Sinking fund method.

UNIT 5 Financial Statement Analysis - Objectives - Reorganizing the Financial

Statement information -Techniques of Financial Statement Analysis:
Comparative Statements, Common – Size statement, Trend Percentage -

UNIT 6 Management Statement Analysis: Management statements – Nature of

management statements – Limitations of management statements – Analysis
of interpretation -Types of analysis- Tools of analysis: Trend analysis,
Common size statements and Comparative statements;

UNIT 7 Accounting Ratios: Construction of balance sheet using ratios (problems) –

Financial ratios – Types: Profitability ratios – Turnover ratios – Liquidity
ratios – Proprietary ratios – Market earnings ratios- Uses and limitations of
ratios - Dupont analysis.

UNIT 8 Fund Flow Analysis: Need and meaning – Preparation of schedule of changes
in working capital and the fund flow statement – Workings for
Computation of various sources and uses - Preparation of Fund Flow
Statement

UNIT 9 Cash flow Analysis: Meaning and importance Managerial uses of cash flow
statement – Differences between fund flow and cash flow analysis - Uses and
limitation of fund flow statement- Preparation of cash flow statement
 UNIT 10 Cost Accounting: Cost Accounting - Meaning - Distinction between Financial
Accounting and Cost Accounting - Cost Terminology: Cost, Cost Centre, Cost
Unit - Elements of Cost - Cost Sheet – Problems - Overhead Cost Allocations:
Over and under Absorption. Job and Contract Costing,

UNIT 11 Operating Costing: Material Cost Accounting, Perpetual Inventory Control,

Inventory Valuation, EOQ, ABC Analysis, Setting of Reorder Level,
Maximum Level, Minimum Level, Labour Cost Accounting, Remuneration
and Incentive Schemes- Reconciliation of Financial and Cost Accounting

UNIT 12 Marginal Costing: Definition – Difference between marginal costing and

absorption costing – Break- even point Analysis - Contribution, p/v Ratio,
margin of safety - Decision making under marginal costing system-key factor
analysis, make or buy decisions, export decision, sales mix decision-Problems

UNIT 13 Budgeting and Budgetary Control: Concept and Need for Budgeting-
Classification of budgets – Preparation of Sales, Production, Material,
Purchase and Cash Budgets –Budgetary control system – Mechanism – Master
budget.

UNIT 14 Capital Budgeting System: Importance – Methods of capital expenditure

appraisal – Payback period method – ARR method – DCF methods – NPV and
IRR methods – Their rationale – Capital rationing.

REFERENCES
1. Arulanandam& K.S. Raman,Advanced Accounting, Himalaya Publishing House.
2. Gupta &Radhasamy,Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons.
3. Shukla & T.S. Grewal,Advanced Accounting, S.Chand&Company.
4. Jain &Narang,Advanced Cost Accounting, Kalyani. Publications.
5. Ravi M. Kishore, Cost Management, Taxman Publications
6. S.N. Maheswari, Management Accounting &Management Accounting, Vikas
Publishers.
7. Manmohan & Goyal, Principles of Management Accounting, Shakithabhavan
Publication.
8. N. K. Prasad,Advanced Cost Accounting, Book Syndicate Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta.
9. Andrew A Haried, Advanced Accounting, Atlantic Publishers.
10. Hoyle,Advanced Accounting, McGraw Hill.
 31721 - RESEARCH METHODS
Objectives:
• To Understand the basic principles of research and design
• To practice the research process, tools and techniques
• To facilitate managerial decision making

UNIT 1 Research Bases: Definition and applications of business research; Types of

research –descriptive, exploratory, correlational, explanatory, quantitative,
qualitative; Steps in the research process; establishing operational definitions

UNIT 2 Research scope - Recent advancements in research. Distinction between Pure

& Applied, Historical & Futuristic, Analytical & Synthetic, Descriptive &
Prescriptive, Survey & Experimental and Case & Generic Researches

UNIT 3 Planning of Research: Research problem – Identification, selection and

formulation of research problem – Review of literature in the field of business
- Identifying objectives of the research.

UNIT 4 Economic management: Use in identifying Research Gaps and Techniques –

Hypothesis – Meaning – Sources and Types of Hypothesis – Hypothesis
Formulation for testing – Research design – Factors affecting research design
– Evaluation of research design

UNIT 5 Variables construction for Hypothesis: Identifying variables - Constructing

hypotheses – functions, characteristics, types of hypotheses - Significance of
research in social sciences – Induction and deduction.

UNIT 6 Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation –
Principle of sampling – Essentials of a good sampling – sampling frame;
Methods of sampling: Probability, non-probability, mixed sampling designs;

UNIT 7 Construction of sampling for Finite and Infinite populations – Sample size
determination– Calculations - Factors affecting the size of the sample – Biased
sample – Sampling and non-sampling errors.

UNIT 8 Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data – Primary and secondary data
– Modes of data collection – Observation: Types and Techniques –Interview:
Types and conduct – Preparation for an interview – Effective interview
techniques – Limitations of interview

UNIT 9 Schedule: Meaning and kinds – Essentials of a good schedule – Procedure for
the formulation of a schedule – Questionnaire: Meaning and types – Format of
a good questionnaire– Schedules Vs. Questionnaires

UNIT 10 Scaling techniques: Meaning, Importance, Types of measurement scales –

Nominal, Ordinal, Interval, Ratio; Methods of their construction of
Questionnaires or Schedules – Pre-testing of Data Collection Tools- Validity
and Reliability – Methods.
 UNIT 11 Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning – Importance – Process of data
analysis – Editing – Coding – Tabulation – Diagrams – Univariate, Bivariate
and Multi-variant analysis

UNIT 12 Test of Significance: Fundamentals on Test Procedure- Testing for

significance of Mean/Proportion and difference between Means/Proportions- F
Test for Means and Chi-square test Contingency Table - Parametric Test: T
test, F Test and Z test

UNIT 13 Non-parametric Test: Concept and Types: Mann Whitney Test- Test, Kruskal
Wallis, sign test. Multivariate analysis-factor, cluster, MDS, Discriminant
analysis - The process of interpretation of Test Results– Guidelines for making
valid interpretation

UNIT 14 Report Writing : Role and types of reports – Contents of research report –
Steps involved in drafting reports – Principles of good report writing –
Grammatical Quality – Language flow- Data Support- Diagrammatic
Elucidation- References and Annotations – Clarity and Brevity of
expressions- Features of a good Report- Criteria for evaluating research
reports/ research findings.

REFERENCES

1. John W Best & James V. Kahn Research in Education, Allyn and Bacon, 2009
2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley, New Delhi, 1989.
3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw Hill,
1981.
4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003, HPH.
5. Earl R. BabbieRobert, ThePractice of Social Research, Cengage Learning, 2010.
6. B. Burns & A. Burns, Business Research Methods and Statistics Using SPSS, Sage
Publications, 2008.
7. Krishnaswami and Ranganatham, Research Methodology in social Sciences, HPH,
Mumbai
8. Bryman & Bell: Business Research Methods, OUP.
9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall, (Digitalized)
2007.
10. C.R.Kothari, Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, 2009
 31722 - BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Objectives:
• To understand the concepts and constituents of Business environment
• To know the environmental issues in the business context
• To analyze the changes in the global environmental relating to business

UNIT 1 Business Environment: Introduction: Concepts – Significance - Dynamic

factors of environment – Importance of scanning the environment – Macro and
Micro Environment – Micro and Macro Economics to the business –
Constituents of Business environment

UNIT 2 Fundamental issues captured in PESTLE– Political, Economic, Socio-cultural,

Technological, Legal and Ecological environment- Opportunities and Threats
as environmental issues to address by Businesses.

UNIT 3 Political Environment: Government and Business – Political Systems, Political

Stability and Political Maturity as conditions of business growth - Role of
Government in Business: Entrepreneurial, Catalytic, Competitive, Supportive,
Regulative and Control functions

UNIT 4 Government and Economic planning: Industrial policies and promotion

schemes – Government policy and SSI – Interface between Government and
public sector - Guidelines to the Industries – Industrial Development
strategies; salient features, Role of public and private sectors, Comparative
cost dynamics.

UNIT 5 Economic Environment: Phase of Economic Development and its impact-

GDP Trend and distribution and Business Opportunities – capacity utilisation
– Regional disparities and evaluation - Global Trade and investment
environment.

UNIT 6 Financial System and Business capital: Monetary and Fiscal policies -
Financial Market structure – Money and Capital markets – Stock Exchanges
and Its regulations – Industrial Finance - Types, Risk - Cost-Role of Banks;
Industrial Financial Institutions - Role of Management Institutions

UNIT 7 Role of Central Bank- Fiscal System: Government Budget and Taxation
Measures- Fiscal Deficits and Inflation- FDI and collaboration –Foreign
Capital tapping by businesses- Export-Import policy – Foreign Exchange and
Business Development.

UNIT 8 Labour Environment: Labour Legislation – Labour and social securities –

Industrial Relations – Trade Unions – Workers participation in management –
Exit Policy – Quality Circles.

UNIT 9 Social and Technological Environment: Societal Structure and Features-

Entrepreneurial Society and its implications for business – Social and cultural
factors and their implications for business- Technology Development Phase in
the Economy as conditioner of Business Opportunities
 UNIT 10 Technology Environment: Technology Policy- Technology Trade and transfer-
Technology Trends in India- Role of Information Technology – Clean
Technology. – Time lag in technology – Appropriate technology and
Technology adoption- Impact of technology on globalization.

UNIT 11 Legal and Ecological Environment: Legal Environment as the all-enveloping

factor from inception, location, incorporation, conduct, expansion and closure
of businesses – IDRA and Industrial licensing – Public, Private, Joint and
Cooperative Sectors.

UNIT 12 Legal Aspects of Entering Primary and Secondary Capital Markets- Law on
Patents- Law on Consumer Protection- Law on Environmental Protection-
Need for Clean energy and Reduction of Carbon footprint.

UNIT 13 New Economic Policy Environment in India: Liberalization, Privatization and

Globalization (LPG): Efficiency Drive through Competition- Facets of
Liberalization and impact on business growth

UNIT 14 Aspects of Privatization and impact on business development– Globalization

and Enhanced Opportunities and Threats – Extended competition in Input and
Output Markets Role of WTO, IMF and World Bank in global economic
development.

REFERENCES

1. Brooks, Weatherston, Wilkinson, International Business Environment, Pearson, 2010.

2. Steiner & Steiner, Business, Government and Society: A Managerial Perspective,
McGraw-Hill, 2008.
3. Mohinder Kumar Sharma, Business Environment in India, South Asia Books.
4. Adhikary M, Economic Environment of Business, Sultan Chand & Sons.
5. Amarchand D, Government and Business, TMH.
6. Francis Cherunilam, Business Environment and Development, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2008.
7. Maheswari & Gupta, Government, Business and Society.
 31723 - BUSINESS LAWS
Objectives:
• To understand the legal structure and provision for running a business
• To learn various acts, enactments and amendments of mercantile law
• To know the various aspects of Business law for legal process.

UNIT 1 Indian Contract Act 1872: Contract – Meaning – Essential elements – Nature
and formation of contract: Nature, elements, Classifications of Contracts on
the basis of Validity, Formation and Performance– offer and acceptance

UNIT 2 Offer and Acceptance: Introduction – Proposal – acceptance –

Communications of offer, Acceptance and Revocations – Offer and acceptance
by Post.

UNIT 3 Consideration: Definitions, Types of consideration – essentials of

Consideration – Privity of Contracts: Exceptions – Capacity: Consent –
Legality of object – Quasi contract Discharge of contract - Remedies for
breach of contract – Quasi contracts.

UNIT 4 Special Contracts: Contract of Indemnity and Guarantee – Bailment and

Pledge – Law of Agency-Definition – Rights of Surety -Discharge of Surety –
Bailment and Pledge: Introduction, Classifications, Duties and Rights of Bailer
and Bailee – termination of Bailment -

UNIT 5 Formation of contract under Sale of Goods Act, 1930: Contract of sale -
Conditions and Warranties - Transfer of property - Performance of the
contract: Essentials of valid tender performance, Performance reciprocal
promise- Rights of an unpaid seller.

UNIT 6 Laws on Carriage of Goods: Duties, Rights and Liabilities of Common

Carriers under: (i) The Carriers Act, 1865. (ii) The Railways Act, 1989, (iii)
The Carriage of Goods by Sea Act, 1925, (iv) The Carriage by Air Act, 1972
and (v) The Carriage By Road Act, 2007

UNIT 7 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881: Negotiable Instruments: Features – Types-

Parties – Material alteration – Parties to negotiable instruments – Presentations
of negotiable instrument.

UNIT 8 Insurance: Definition and sources of Law – Judicial set up in India ––

Insurance as a contract -History of Insurance Legislation in India - Legal
principles - Fundamental Principles of Life Insurance Fire Insurance and
Marine Insurance.

UNIT 9 Indian Partnership Act, 1932: Meaning and test of partnership – registration of
firms Life Insurance Corporation Act 1956 – General Insurance Business
Nationalization Act 1973.
 UNIT 10 Partners Relations: Introduction – Eligibility to be a partner – Registration of
change in partner – Limited Liabilities of partnership - Dissolution of firms -
Characteristics – Kinds – Incorporation of Companies – Memorandum of
Association – Articles of Association

UNIT 11 Companies Act 1956: Nature and kinds of companies – Prospectus –

Disclosure Needs - Management and Administration – Director –
Appointment, Powers and Duties

UNIT 12 Formation of a Company : Introduction – process - Minutes and Resolutions –

E-Filling of documents under Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) 21-
Management of companies –Meetings- Types- Requirements -AGM and EGM
– Board Meeting

UNIT 13 Law of Information Technology: Introduction – Rationale behind IT act 2000

– Information technology Act 2000: Scheme of the IT Act 2000: Digital
signature: attribution; Acknowledgement and dispatch of Electronics Record –
Regulation certifying authorities.

UNIT 14 Protection of minority interest: Introduction - Methods of Winding-up - The

Right to Information Act, 2005 Right to know, Salient features of the Act,
obligation of public Authority, Designation of Public Information officer,
Request for obtaining information,

REFERENCES

1. M.S.Pandit and ShobhaPandit, Business Law, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai,

2010.
2. Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, TMH, 2009.
3. N.D. Kapoor, Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
4. M.C. Shukla, Mercantile Law, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
5. Relevant Bare Acts.
6. Balachandran and Thothadri, business Law, TMH, 2010
 31724 - MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

Objectives:
• To learn the principles of Management Information System for organizations
• To understand the uses , function of application MIS in organization
• To analyze the scope of MIS for business organizations

UNIT 1 Foundations of Information System: Information system: Meaning, Role –

System concepts – Organization as a system – Components of Information
system – Various activities of IS and Types of IS

UNIT 2 Information System: Concepts of Information System and Management

information systems design and development-Implementation testing and
conversion- Evolution and element of MIS

UNIT 3 MIS : Definition – Characteristics and basic requirements of MIS – Structure

of MIS- Approaches to MIS development- Computerized MIS- Pre-requisites
of an effective MIS- Limitations of MIS.

UNIT 4 MIS and Decision support System (DSS): MIS Vs. data processing – MIS and
decision support system – MIS and information resource management – DSS
and AI – Overview of AI - DSS models and software.

UNIT 5 MIS and Operations Research- Executive information and Decision support
systems – Artificial intelligence and expert system – Merits and De Merits –
Pitfalls in MIS.

UNIT 6 MIS in Indian organizations – Recent developments in information technology

- Installation of Management Information & Control System in Indian
organization

UNIT 7 Computers and Communication: Information technology and Global

integration –On-line information services – Electronic bulletin board systems –
The internet, electronic mail, interactive video

UNIT 8 Communication Channels: Advantages disadvantages – Communication

networks – Local area networks – Wide area networks – Video conferencing-
Relevance to MIS- Usage in Business process.

UNIT 9 Functional Information systems: MIS for Research Production - MIS for
Marketing - MIS for Personnel - MIS for Finance - MIS for Inventory- MIS
for Logistics- MIS for Product Development- MIS for Market Development.

UNIT 10 Client/ Server Computing: Communication servers – Digital networks –

Electronic data interchange and its applications - Enterprise resource planning
systems (ERP Systems) – Inter-organizational information systems – Value
added networks – Networking.
 UNIT 11 Electronic Commerce and Internet: E-Commerce bases – E-Commerce and
Internet – M-Commerce- Electronic Data Inter-change (EDI) - Applications of
internet and website management - Types of Social Media - uses of social
media in business organization

UNIT 12 Computer System and Resources: Computers systems: Types and Types of
computer system processing - Secondary storage media and devices – Input
and output devices – Hardware standards – Other acquisition issues.

UNIT 13 Managing Information Technology: Managing Information Resources and

technologies – IS architecture and management - Centralized, Decentralized
and Distributed - EDI, Supply chain management & Global Information
technology Management.

UNIT 14 Security and Ethical Challenges: IS controls - facility control and procedural
control - Risks to online operations - Denial of service, spoofing - Ethics for IS
professional - Societal challenges of Information technology

REFERENCES

1. James O'Brien & George Marakas, Management Information Systems, McGraw Hill,
2011.
2. Kenneth Laudon & Jane Laudon, Essentials of MIS, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Lisa Miller, MIS Cases: Decision Making with Application Software, Prentice Hall,
2008.
4. David M. Kroenke, Experiencing MIS, Prentice Hall, 2011.
5. Kenneth C. Laudon, MIS: Managing the Digital Firm, Prentice Hall, 2005.
6. Sadogopan S, Management Information Systems, 2001PHI.
7. Murdie and Ross, Management Information Systems, Prentice Hall.
8. Henri C. Lucas, Information Systems Concepts for Management, McGraw Hill, 1994.
9. Stephen Haag, Management Information Systems, 2008.
 31725 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Objective:

• To understand the concepts and methods and techniques of Human Resource

Management
• To know the Human resource management theories and real time practices
• To identify the contemporary issues in human resource management

UNIT 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management: Concept, Definition,

Objectives, Nature and Scope of HRM - Functions of HRM – Evolution of
human resource management - Role and structure of Human Resource
Function in organizations- Challenges in Human Resource Management

UNIT 2 Human Resource Management Approaches: Phases of human resource

Management- The importance of the human factor – Competitive challenges of
HRM – HRM Models – Roles and responsibilities of HR department.

UNIT 3 Human Resource Planning: Personnel Policy - Characteristics - Role of

human resource manager – Human resource policies – Need, Scope and
Process – Job analysis – Job description – Job specification- Succession
Planning.

UNIT 4 Recruitment and Selection Process: Employment planning and fore casting
Sources of recruitment- internal Vs. External; Domestic Vs. Global sources-
Selection process Building employee commitment : Promotion from within -
Sources, Developing and Using application forms – IT and recruiting on the
internet.

UNIT 5 Employee Testing & selection : Selection process, basic testing concepts,
types of test, work samples & simulation, selection techniques, interview,
common interviewing mistakes, Designing & conducting the effective
interview, small business applications, computer aided interview.

UNIT 6 Training and Development: Orientation & Training: Orienting the employees,
the training process, need analysis, Training techniques, special purpose
training, Training via the internet. - Need Assessment - Training methods
for Operatives and Supervisors

UNIT 7 Executive Development: Need and Programs - Computer applications in

human resource management – Human resource accounting and audit. On-the
- job and off-the-job Development techniques using HR to build a responsive
organization

25
UNIT 8 Employee Compensation : Wages and Salary Administration – Bonus –
Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems - and Employee Benefits, Health
and Social Security Measures,
UNIT 9 Employee Retention: Need and Problems of Employees – various retention
methods– Implication of job change. The control process – Importance –
Methods – Employment retention strategies for production and services
industry

UNIT 10 Appraising and Improving Performance: Performance Appraisal Programs,

Processes and Methods, Job Evaluation, Managing Compensation, Incentives
Performance appraisal: Methods - Problem and solutions - MBO approach -
The appraisal interviews - Performance appraisal in practice.

UNIT 11 Managing careers: Career planning and development - Managing promotions

and transfers - Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems – Promotion –
Demotions – Transfers- Labour Attrition: Causes and Consequences

UNIT 12 Employee Welfare, Separation: Welfare and safety – Accident prevention –

Employee Grievances and their Redressal – Industrial Relations - Statutory
benefits - non-statutory (voluntary) benefits – Insurance benefits - retirement
benefits and other welfare measures to build employee commitment

UNIT 13 Industrial relations and collective bargaining: Trade unions – Collective

bargaining - future of trade unionism - Discipline administration - grievances
handling - managing dismissals and workers Participation in Management-
Separation: Need and Methods.

UNIT 14 Human Resource Information System- Personnel Records/ Reports- e-Record

on Employees – Personnel research and personnel audit – Objectives – Scope
and importance.

26
REFERENCES

1. Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management,South-WesternCollege, 2004.

2. Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-WesternCollege,
2007.
3. R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management,Prentice Hall, 2011.
4. Venkataraman& Srivastava, Personnel Management & Human Resources
5. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations
6. Yodder&Standohar, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
7. Edwin B. Flippo, Personnel Management , McGraw-Hill, 1984
8. Pigors and Myers, Personnel Administration
9. R.S. Dwivedi, Manpower Management
10. Lynton &Pareek, Training and Development, Vistaar Publications, 1990.

27
 31731 - MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
• To help the learners understand markets, consumers and marketing principles.
• To understand the buyer behaviour and influencing factors
• To learn marketing plan, pricing, promotion and distribution in global context

UNIT 1 Introduction to Marketing: Meaning and Scope of Marketing; Marketing

Philosophies; Marketing Management Process-an overview; Modern
Marketing Concept: Social marketing concept – Approaches to the study of
marketing.

UNIT 2 Marketing segmentation: Meaning – Bases for segmentation, benefits –

Systems approach - Four Ps of Product and Seven Ps Service marketing mix
and Extensions- Targeting and Positioning - meaning and importance.

UNIT 3 Marketing Environment: Internal and External and Demographic factors –

Adopting marketing to new liberalized and globalized economy –
Digitalization – Customization and E business settings.

UNIT 4 Consumer Behaviour : Meaning and importance – Consumer buying process –

Determinants and Theories of consumer behaviour – Psychological,
sociological determinants – Theories and their relevance to marketing-

UNIT 5 Marketing Research: Procedure. Meaning – Objectives – Process- Demand

Forecasting- Marketing Information System – Strategic marketing plan and
organization – Changing marketing practices.

UNIT 6 Product Mix Management: Product planning and development – Meaning and
process – Test marketing – Product failures – Product line management:
Practices – Implications and Strategies for current market condition.

UNIT 7 Product life cycles: Meaning and Stages – Strategies – Managing PLC-
Product-Market Integration: Strategies – Product positioning – Diversification
– Product line simplification – Planned obsolescence – Branding Policies and
Strategies – Packing.

UNIT 8 Price Mix Management: Pricing and pricing policies – Objectives –

Procedures – Bases for and Methods of price fixing. Cases for Free Pricing,
Administered and Regulated pricing – Pricing and product life cycle

UNIT 9 Physical Distribution Mix: Types of physical Distribution - Importance of

Physical Distribution- Distribution channel policy – Logistics Decisions –
Methods – Strategic alliance for Logistic cost reduction.

28
 UNIT 10 Marketing Channel system: Marketing channel decisions: Choice
considerations– Managing Conflict and Cooperation in channels – Middlemen
functions- Modern Trends in Retailing- Malls and Online.

UNIT 11 Promotional Mix: Personal selling Vs. impersonal selling – Personal selling –
Process – Steps in selling – Management of sales force – Recruitment and
selection – Training – Compensation plans – Evaluation of performance

UNIT 12 Integrated marketing communication Process: Advertising and sales promotion

– Online Sales promotional activities – Public relationships – Direct
marketing: Meaning, Nature, Growth and Channels.

UNIT 13 Advertising: Importance – Objectives – Media planning and selection –

Factors influencing selection – Advertisement copy – Layout – Evaluation of
advertising – Advertising budget – Sales promotion – Methods and practices.

UNIT 14 Competitor analyses: Identifying and analyzing the competitors – Types of

Competitors – Competitive strategies framing for leaders, challengers,
followers and nichers. Customer relationship marketing: Customer data base,
Data ware housing and data mining

REFERENCES

1. Etzel, Walker and Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill, 2004

2. Philip Kotler & Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Jerome Mccarthy, Basic Marketing, Richard D. Irwin.
4. Cundiff, Still &Govani, Fundamentals of Modern Marketing, Prentice Hall.
5. Memoria & Joshi, Fundamental of Marketing.
6. Paul Peter and James Donnelly Jr, Marketing Management, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
7. William O. Bearden, Marketing: Principles & Perspectives, McGraw-Hill, 2006.
8. William Arens, et al, Contemporary Advertising, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
9. Perreault and McGarthy - Basic Marketing - Tata McGraw Hill, 2002\

10. Michael J Etzel, Bruce J Walker, William J Stanton and Ajay Pandit, Marketing
concepts and cases - TMH 13th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.

29
 31732 - FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Objectives:
• To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management
• To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital management.
• To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications

UNIT 1 Introduction: Financial management: objectives - Concept, nature, evaluation

and significance – Finance Functions: Managerial and operative – Role of
Financial management in the organization – Indian Financial system.

UNIT 2 Financial System: Legal and Regulatory frame work – Financial Functions:
Meaning and scope – Finance and Tax Management Nexus- Tax Avoidance
and Tax evasion- Tax incentive and business decisions.

UNIT 3 Investment Function: Meaning and scope - Time value of Money concepts and
applications –Risk return relationship - Dividend function – Risk return trade
off – Management planning- Global management environment

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity share,
preference shares – types of preference share - debentures – types - sources of
long-term capital.

UNIT 5 Capital Issues: Meaning, Nature, Purpose – Roles and Guidelines of SEBI in
capital issues- Bridge finance, loan syndication, Book building – Borrowings
from the term lending institutions and International capital market- Tax
considerations in financing decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital : Concept of cost of capital- Cost of debt, equity, preference
share capital, retaining earning - Weighted average cost: EBIT –EPS
Analysis- Tax, Capital structure and Value nexus - Computation of overall
cost of capital – Tax and cost of capital.

UNIT 7 Capital structure: Determinates - Concept and Types- Optimum capital

structure – Theories of capital structure – Net income and net operative income
approach – M.M. Approach – Traditional theory – Their assumptions –
Significance and limitations – Management leverage operating leverage –
Combined leverage.

UNIT 8 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital Investment-

Methods of appraisal under certainty conditions: PBP, ARR, IRR and NPV
techniques - Basic and International capital budgeting.

30
 UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis-
Decision tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures-
Tax considerations in Investment Decisions Cost of capital and Investment
Decisions.
UNIT 10 Working Capital Management: Definitions and Objectives - Concept and
types – Determinants – Financing approaches – Conservative approaches -
Sources of working capital finance Factors affecting working capital
requirements- Working capital financing by commercial banks – Types of
assistance

UNIT 11 Inventories and receivables Management under conditions of certainty and

uncertainty – Operating cycle – Planning of funds through the management of
assets – Various techniques used.

UNIT 12 Cash and liquidity management: Credit Management and evaluation

alternative credit variables Methods and Functions- Tax considerations in
Remittances and Purchases.

UNIT 13 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories – Dividend
irrelevance under M.M. Theory – Assumptions – Limitations - Implications
and contributions of theories in financial decision making process.

UNIT 14 Dividend Policy: Types – Share valuation practices – Factors affecting

dividend decision – Tax considerations in dividend decision when tax is levied
at the hands of companies and recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Thomson ONE,
2010
2. Brigham and Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson ONE, 2009.
3. Van Horne: Fundamentals of Financial Management, Prentice Hall, 2008
4. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management,South-WesternCollege Pub., 2010
5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, McGraw Hill, 2008.
6. Khan and Jain, Financial Management ,Tata McGrawHill,2009
7. Pandey I M, Financial Management, Vikas Publishers,2009
8. Sheeba Kapil(2010), Financial Management, Pearson Education.
9. B J Camsey, Engene F.Brigham, “Introduction to Financial Management”, The Gryden
Press

31
 31733A1 - INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS MANAGEMENT
Objective:

• To gain knowledge about the trade unions

• To know the basic concept of industrial relations management

UNIT 1 Constitution of India – Salient features – Fundamental rights and directive

principles of State policy – Labour movement

UNIT 2 Concept of labour movement and Union Organization – Trade union

movement and various phases of the movement – Trade unions and economic
development.

UNIT 3 Development of Trade Unionism in India – Historical retrospect – Central

organization of workers in India – Role of internal trade union

UNIT 4 Inter and intra union rivalries – Union recognition – International Labour
Movement: ICFTU – WFTU – ILO – History

UNIT 5 objective and functions – Convention and recommendations – PCR rights and
duties – functions - problems-Voluntary Welfare Measures – Statutory
Welfare Measures – Labour – Welfare Funds – Education and Training
Schemes

UNIT 6 Concept of Industrial Relations – Social obligations of industry – Role of

government employers and the unions in industrial relations

UNIT 7 Industrial relations machinery – Joint consultation – Works committee –

Negotiation: Types of Negotiations – Conciliations

UNIT 8 Adjudication, voluntary arbitration – Workers participation in industry –

Grievance procedure.

UNIT 9 Process of collective bargaining – Problems and prospects – Bipartisan in

agreements – Code of conduct and code of discipline –

UNIT 10 Wage boards – Reports of wage boards – Management of strikes and lockouts
– measures to stop strikes and lock outs Disputes – Impact – Causes –
Prevention – Industrial Peace – Government Machinery – Conciliation –
Arbitration – Adjudication.

UNIT 11 Employee safety programme – Types of safety organization – functions –

implications – features - Industrial Relations problems in the Public Sector –
Growth of Trade Unions – Codes of conduct.

32
UNIT 12 Safety committee – Ergonomics – Damage control and system, safety –
insurance – grievance redressal.

UNIT 13 Employee communication – House journals – Notice boards suggestion

schemes – upward communication, personnel counselling and mental health –

UNIT 14 Educational and social development – modern trends – employee education –

NGC .Child Labour – Female Labour – Contract Labour – Construction
Labour – Agricultural Labour – Differently abled Labour –BPO & KPO
Labour - Social Assistance – Social Security – Implications

REFERENCE

1. Bhagoliwal T N, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, Agra Publishers, Agra.

2. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Michael V P,HRM and Human Relations, Himalaya Book House, Mumbai.
4. Mamoria C.B. and Sathish Mamoria, Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalaya
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Arun Monappa, Ranjeet Nambudiri, Patturaja Selvaraj. Industrial Relations & Labour
Laws.Tata McGraw Hill. 2012

33
 31734A2 - LABOUR LEGISLATIONS – I
Objective:

• To know the basic concept of labour legislations .

• To gain knowledge about the labour act

UNIT 1 Factories Act, 1948: Provision’s relating to health, safety, welfare, working hours,
leave etc., of workers approval

UNIT 2 Licensing and registration of factories, manager and occupier – Their obligations
under the Act, powers of the authorities under the Act, Penalty provisions.

UNIT 3 Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923: Employer’s liability for compensation,

amount of compensation method of calculating wages – Review

UNIT 4 distribution of compensation – Remedies of employer against stranger – Returns

as to compensation – Commission for workmen’s compensation.

UNIT 5 Industrial Dispute Act, 1947: Industrial dispute – Authorities for settlement of
industrial disputes – Reference of industrial disputes

UNIT 6 Procedures – Power and duties of authorities, settlement and strikes – Lock-out –
Lay-off – Retrenchment – Transfer and closure

UNIT 7 Unfair labour practices – Miscellaneous provision offences by companies,

conditions of service to remain unchanged under certain circumstances, etc.

UNIT 8 Shops and Establishments Act, 1947: Definitions – Salient provisions – Powers of
the authorities.

UNIT 9 Employee’s State Insurance Act, 1948: Registration of Factories and

Establishments, the employee’s State Insurance Corporation, Standing Committee
and Medical Benefit Council, provisions relating to contributions

UNIT 10 Inspectors – Their functions and disputes and claims – Offences and penalties –
Miscellaneous provisions.

34
UNIT 11 Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952: Employees
provident fund and other schemes

UNIT 12 Determination and recovery of money due from employer, appointment of

inspectors and their duties

UNIT 13 Provisions relating to transfer of accounts and liability in case of transfer of

establishment exemption under the Act –

UNIT 14 Contract Labour Regulations and Abolition Act, 1970 ,Count’s power under the
act - employer and employee relationship – Problems – pertaining to the
employee – solvation at door steps.

REFERENCES :

1. Bare Acts
2. Kapoor N D, Industrial Law
3. Shukla M C, Industrial Law
4. D. R. N. Sinha, Indu Balasinha & Semma Priyadarshini Shekar, Industrial Relation, Trade
unions and Labour Legislation, 2004.

35
 31735A3 - TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
Objective:

• To know the basic concept of training and development

• To understand the various training method

UNIT 1 Training: Meaning – Definition – Need – Objectives – Difference among

education, training and development - Training, Development and
Performance consulting – Design of HRD systems – Development of HRD
strategies

UNIT 2 Levels of Training: Individual, operational and organizational levels –

horizontal , vertical , top , bottom& official training.

UNIT 3 Training Organisation: Need assessment of Training- Organisational structure

of training organizations

UNIT 4 Training in manufacturing and service organizations – GST – Tax slap for
state and central - Professional tax. Organisational analysis, task analysis and
individual analysis – consolidation..

UNIT 5 Duties and responsibilities of training managers – Challenges – Selection of

trainers: Internal and external.

UNIT 6 Employees Training: Meaning – Need – importance = implications – features

– functions- organizational climate for training and development

UNIT 7 Areas of training: Knowledge, skill, attitude – Methods of training: On the job
– Off the job.

UNIT 8 Executive Development Programmes: Meaning – Need –importance – nature

– scope – implications

UNIT 9 Methods of evaluation of effectiveness of training - development programmes

- Key performance parameter

UNIT 10 Evaluation of Training: Evaluation of training - meaning – nature –

significance - types – implications

UNIT 11 Concept of return on Investment and cost benefit analysis –ROI – IRR – CPA-
CBA Linking training needs and objectives of various theories of learning and
methods of training
36
UNIT 12 Current practices in assessing training and development – latest scenario of
assessing training. Learning cycles – factors for fixing duration – selection of
participants – choice of trainers

UNIT 13 Training and Development in India: Government policy on training – budget

estimate – allocation - CSR - Conducting the programs – ice breaking and
games – relevance of culture of participants

UNIT 14 Training Institutes in India – Management Associations – Development

programmes in Public and Private Sector organization- – Cost benefit analysis
– Role of trainer and line manager in evaluations – Design of Evaluation –
Kirkpatric’s model

REFERENCES

1. Sikula A F, Personnel Administration and Human Resource Development, John Wiley

and Sons, New York.
2. Ahmed Abad, Management and Organisational Development, RachanaPrakashan, New
Delhi.
3. Memoria C B, Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.
4. Larney M C & William J, Management Training: Cases and Principles, Richad D Irwin,
Illinois.
5. RudraBaswaraj, Personnel Administration Practice in India, Vaikunta Lal Mehta Inst. of
Co-op. Management, Pune.
6. Human Resources Development – Theory and Practice, Tapomoy Deb Ane Books India,
2008.
7. Human performance consulting, James. S. Pepitone, Guely publishing Company,
Houston,2006.

37
 31733B1 - MARKETING OF SERVICES

Objective:

• To know the basic concept marketing services.

• Articulate the role and importance of the service sector in the global economy.
• Comprehend the differences between services and physical goods and to understand how
these differences translate into strategic direction.

UNIT 1 Services: Concept of Services- Definition, characteristics, classification –

Service Vs Product – Service Marketing planning process

UNIT 2 Essentials of Service Marketing- Services Market Segmentation: Meaning –

Process – Bases and purpose of market segmentation-

UNIT 3 Vision and Mission in Service Marketing– Service Marketing planning

process.- strategic approaches – Levels of management approaches.

UNIT 4 Services Positioning and Differentiation: Evolution of positioning – Positioning

and services – Levels of positioning

UNIT 5 Process of positioning – Importance of positioning- Considerations in

Positioning – Re-positioning.

UNIT 6 Services Marketing Mix: Marketing mix elements – The 7Ps- Service Product
– Pricing the service – Service location and channels

UNIT 7 Promotion and communication of services – Processes – Physical evidence –

Developing a marketing mix strategy.

UNIT 8 Marketing strategy formulation – Resource allocation and monitoring –

Marketing planning and services.

UNIT 9 Customer-focused Services: Customer Expectations of service product- Service

quality and marketing – Intangibles in Intangibles

UNIT 10 Improving service quality – Customer retention -Relationship Marketing -

Service Marketing Strategy.

UNIT 11 Experiential Services Marketing: Tourism Service marketing – Hotel Service

marketing –– Hospital services marketing

UNIT 12 Education service marketing- Entertainment/Recreational Service Marketing.-

Scope – Challenges – pitfalls of execution.

38
UNIT 13 Encounter Services Marketing: Bank marketing – Insurance marketing ––
Telecommunication services marketing

UNIT 14 Consultancy services marketing – Transport Service Marketing.- Functions –

uses – characters – legal barriers – business scope.

REFERENCES

1. Lovelock, and Wirtz, Services Marketing, Prentice Hall, 2010.

2. Adrian Payne, Services Marketing, PHI, 1993.
3. Helen Woodruffe, Services Marketing, Macmillan, 1995.
4. Jha S.M, Services Marketing, Himalaya, 2002.
5. Sinha P.K and Sahoo S.C, Services Marketing, Himalaya.
6. Valarie Zeithaml, et al, Services Marketing, McGraw hill, 2004.

39
 31734B2 - PROMOTIONAL MANAGEMENT

Objective:

• To know the basic concept Promotional management.

• To gain knowledge on Promotional management
• The course is designed to develop the student's understanding of the environment for
promotional efforts, with special emphasis on understanding the relevancy of consumer
motivation and behavior in the promotional strategies of business, public, and social
organizations.

UNIT 1 Overview of Promotion Management: Need for Marketing Promotion of

Products and Services- Establishing promotional objectives

UNIT 2 Setting the promotional budget – Techniques used – Promotional decision

Different Promo-tools - Promotional Mix for New Products and Existing
Products- Organizing for Promotion

UNIT 3 Advertising: Importance, scope, benefits and criticisms – Advertising

objectives – Advertising appropriation – Need, methods

UNIT 4 Advertising agency – Functions, client – Agency relationships – Indian

advertising agencies – Role of persuasion in advertising – Copy Development

UNIT 5 Message strategy development and evaluation- Techniques used in producing

advertisement for print, broadcast and media.

UNIT 6 Media Management: Media planning and selection – Media strategy – Media
status in India – Media characteristics

UNIT 7 Media research – Concept, Application, and Approach - Media Buying - Media
strategy - Measuring advertising effectiveness-

UNIT 8 Public Relations and Publicity (PR &P): Public relations – Role, types of
publics, process – Tools of public relations – Publicity – Institutional
advertising

UNIT 9 Direct marketing – Importance, techniques used, relevance in Indian context –

Event marketing- Role of PR&P in Corporate Image Building.

40
UNIT 10 Sales promotion and Personal Selling/Salesmanship: Concept and Need for
Sales promotion- Distinction between Sales Promotion and Advertisement-
Sales promotion measures aimed at Consumer, Trade and Sales Force
promotion

UNIT 11 Personal selling or Salesmanship– Characteristics of Personal selling- Sales

force management

UNIT 12 Recruiting, Selecting, Training, Performance appraisal – Territory structuring –

Trends in personal selling.

UNIT 13 Promotional Program Evaluation: Comparison and Contrast of Advertising,

Publicity, Sales promotion and Personal selling – Evaluation of Promotional
Measures: Bases for Promotional Evaluation

UNIT 14 Process of Evaluation – Regulations of promotions – Legislations, relevance to

society – Social responsibility – Promotion and women – Promotion and
children – Ethics in promotion.

REFERENCES

1. George Belch and Michael Belch, Advertising and Promotion: An Integrated

Marketing Communications Perspective, McGraw-Hill, 2011.
2. Govani et-al, Promotional Management, PHI.
3. Russell and Vernill, Advertising Procedure, Prentice Hall.
4. Chunawala et-al, Foundation of Advertising Theory and Practice, 1995
5. Aakar, Batra and Myers, Advertising Management, PHI, 2003.
6. Gelder and Woodcock, Marketing & Promotional Strategy, Nelson Thornes, 2003.
7. James F. Engel, et al, Promotional Strategy: Managing the Marketing
Communications Process, McGraw Hill, 1994.

41
 31735B3 - PRODUCT MANAGEMENT

Objective:

• To know the basic concept Product management.

• To understand the key aspects of product strategy, product development, product
lifecycle management
• To comprehend strategy to develop and disseminate products according to need of
market.

UNIT 1 Product Concept: Product Classification – Product Vs. Service – Product Vs.
commodity- Financial Products

UNIT 2 Derivative Products- Product line decisions: Product mix decisions, Product
modification, Product differentiation, Product elimination

UNIT 3 New Product Development: Need, risks and uncertainty- Product management
organization structure – Role of product managers.

UNIT 4 New Product Development Process: Generation of ideas – Idea screening –

Feasibility testing – Concept development and testing – Designing a new
product: Factors to be considered

UNIT 5 Standardization Vs Adaptation Vs. Differentiation– Modular design –Reverse

engineering - Marketing strategy development – Business analysis – Product
development – Test marketing

UNIT 6 Commercialization – Launching – Success and Failures in launches: New

product success and failures in Indian context – Classification of new products.

UNIT 7 Creativity and Innovation for NPD: Concept and Contours of creativity-
Sources of Innovation- New Product Championing-Venture teams in new
product development (NPD)

UNIT 8 Organization for new product development – Top management contribution –

7S framework and its use in NPD – Team working.

UNIT 9 Product and Branding Positioning: Product Positioning: Concept and Process -
Branding Positioning: Product Branding – Brand extension

UNIT 10 Brand valuation – Brand image and equity – Brand positioning strategies –
Packaging – Trends in packaging.

42
UNIT 11 Product Life Cycle (PLC): Phases of PLC and features thereof- Functional
Management strategies for different phases of PLC

UNIT 12 Strategic intervention for PLC management. New product success and failures
in Indian context – Classification of new products

UNIT 13 Product Strategy and Policy: Product Portfolio Strategy – Product Investment
and Divestment strategy- Product policy: New product development policy:
Product Line consistency,

UNIT 14 Frequency, Launch time and Cannibalization Mitigation- Product Research –

Components and areas of product research.

REFERENCES

1. Crawford and Benedetto, New Products Management, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

2. Kenneth B. Kahn, The PDMA Handbook of New Product Development, Wiley, 2004.
3. Robert G. Cooper, Winning at New Products, Basic Books, 2001.
4. Donald G. Reinertsen, The Principles of Product Development Flow, Celeritas, 2009.
5. RamanujMajumdar, Product Management in India, PHI, 2011
6. John Stark, Product Lifecycle Management: Springer, 2011.
7. Om P Kaushal, Product Management, Lalvani.
8. Dave Littler, Marketing and Product Development, PhilioAlen.
9. SubratoSengupta, Brand Positioning: Strategies for Competitive Advantage, TMH.

43
 31733C1 - MANAGEMENT OF FUNDS

Objectives:
• To know about business capitalization
• To identify the techniques in Fund management

UNIT 1 Meaning and importance of funds: Concept of funds- Types and features of funds-
Sources of Funds: Short term finance, Medium term finance and Long term
finance.

UNIT 2 Effective Mobilization and allocation of funds - Consequences of mal-

mobilization and misallocation of funds – Organizing for funds management –
Relationship with other function.

UNIT 3 Role of financial systems in Mobilization and Allocation of funds – Barometer of

business conditions – Causes and Consequences.

UNIT 4 Considerations in Fund Allocation: Allocation of funds to most profitable

opportunity – Development of profitable opportunity and evaluation – Methods of
evaluation.

UNIT 5 Business Capitalization- Assessment of funds for fixed assets – ROI, PBP, ARR,
IRR considerations- considerations of risks and uncertainty – Management of
risks.

UNIT 6 Capital rationing and its impact on financial planning-Treatment of inflation in

capital budgeting – Tools for capital budgeting.

UNIT 7 Considerations in fund Mobilization: Capital Market conditions- Interest rate

scenario- Global financial contours- Variety of Instruments: Shares, Bonds and
Debentures - Cost of floatation.

UNIT 8 Cost of Capital- Meaning and Definition -Agency and Bankruptcy costs- Explicit
and Implicit costs- Tax treatment - Relationship with financial Institutions.

UNIT 9 Capital structure Decisions: Types of capital structures – Capital structure and
Asset structure match - Liquidity, Solvency, Flexibility, Value impact and Risk
considerations.

UNIT 10 Interest coverage, debt capacity and Debt service coverage considerations–
Leverage aspects- Acquisition for specific allocation- Optimum capital structure.

44
UNIT 11 Leasing: Need for Lease - Types of Leasing- Operating and financial lease,
Domestic Lease and International Lease, Open ended lease and close ended lease
- Capital Leases - Evaluation of cash flows of leasing and buying alternatives.

UNIT 12 Venture capital: Meaning, Venture financing options- Pros and cons – Venture
capital industry in India – Origin and Growth.

UNIT 13 International financing and investment: International Financing Equity and Debt
instruments: GDRs, ADRs, ECBs, FCCBs, Syndicated Loans- Finance from
Multilateral financing institutions.

UNIT 14 Financing via MNCs- Domestic sources vis-à-vis international sources- Investing
abroad: Opportunities- Considerations- Risk-Return – Foreign currency risk
management.

REFERENCES

1. Eugene F. Brigham, Financial Management: Theory and Practice (Harcourt) 2005.

2. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management, South-WesternCollege Pub., 2010.
3. F. Brigham and Joel F. Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson, 2009.
4. Alan C. Shapiro, Multinational Financial Management, Wiley, 2008.
5. Kuchal, S.C, Financial Management, Chaitanya, Allahabad, 1992.
6. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, 2007.

45
 31734C2 - INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT

Objectives:
• To expose students in investment analysis concept
• To know the various approaches in portfolio management

UNIT 1 Investment: Investment Concepts and Goals – Types of investment – Financial –

Real, business, Personal and Institutional investments.

UNIT 2 Comparison of investments, speculation, gambling – Hedging – Concepts of

portfolio and portfolio management – Goals – Risk and return trade off.

UNIT 3 Financial investment avenues – Fixed income Securities– Varying income

securities – Derivative Instruments: Options, Swaps, Forward, Futures.

UNIT 4 Investment Analysis: Aspects of Analysis – Return analysis – Concepts,

measures and computation of return of individual security and portfolio.

UNIT 5 Risk analysis: Concepts, types, measure, computation of risk of individual

security and portfolio – Valuation analysis – Share valuation – Bond value – Price
earnings analysis.

UNIT 6 Approaches to Investment Analysis: Fundamental analysis – Concept and

components – Tools of economy analysis.
UNIT 7 Industry and company analysis - I – Technical analysis – Concept and tools –
Assumption – Theories – Dow theory – Contrary opinion.

UNIT 8 Industry and company analysis – II: The confidence index, breadth of market and
strength analysis – Moving average analysis – Chart patterns.

UNIT 9 Portfolio Construction and Choice: Markowtz diversification – Efficient frontier –

Risk-return indifferent curves.
UNIT 10 Portfolio choice – Sharpe’s Single and two factorial models – Lagrange multiplier
method.

UNIT 11 Capital Asset Pricing Model: Assumptions and application – Capital market line
and security market line

UNIT 12 Efficient market hypotheses - The weakly efficient, semi strongly efficient and
strongly efficient market forms – Random-Walk theory.

UNIT 13 Portfolio Performance: Measures: Sharpe, Treynor and Jenson.

UNIT 14 Portfolio audit and Portfolio revision – Need and methods – Formula plans.

46
REFERENCES
1. Jack Clark Francis, Management of Investments, McGraw Hill, 1993
2. Frank J. Fabozzi and Harry M. Markowitz, Theory and Practice of Investment Management,
Wiley, 2011.
3. Frank K. Reilly and Keith C. Brown, Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management,
Thomson, 2008.
4. Preeti Singh, Investment Management, HPH, 2006.

47
 31735C3 - FINANCIAL SERVICES AND INSTITUTIONS
Objectives:
• To identify the various concepts of financial services
• To know the function of financial institutions

UNIT 1 Financial Services: Concept, Functions, Characteristics and scope of financial

services – Functions of Indian financial system – Financial Instruments – Types –
Pros and Cons

UNIT 2 Merchant Banking: Meaning – Importance and Need - Functions concerning

public and private placement of capital issues.
UNIT 3 SEBI regulations regarding lead managers and merchant banking functionaries –
Inspection by SEBI.

UNIT 4 Mutual Fund Services – Definition – Features, need and scope – MFs in India:
Types of scheme: Features, Merits and Demerits – Performance Evaluation of
Mutual Fund.

UNIT 5 History of Indian Mutual Fund Industry and Recent Developments – Regulations
regarding mutual funds in India.

UNIT 6 Credit Rating: Objectives, Importance of Credit rating – Institutions: CRISIL –

ICRA - CARE – Rating Process.

UNIT 7 Factors contributing to the success of the rating system - Debt and deposit rating
equity rating procedures

UNIT 8 Reading different grades of rating – International credit rating institutions –

Functions of rating agencies.

UNIT 9 Role of UTI and LIC as investment institutions – Portfolio management services

UNIT 10 Concept and need – Services of NBFC to investors.

UNIT 11 Development Financial Institution – Role, functions of IDBI, IFC, ICICI and
IRBI.
UNIT 12 RBI – Functions, role and management of gilt securities market – Regulatory
measures.

UNIT 13 Stock Exchanges: Role and organizations of BSE and NSE – OTCEI – SEBI and
stock exchange – Investor information and education.

UNIT 14 Role of SEBI – Role of investor association and investment consultancies –

Indian and Global Scenario.

48
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Raghunathan V, Stock Exchanges and Investments

2. Avadhani V, Security Market
3. Varma, Merchant Banking

49
 31741 PRODUCTION AND OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT
Objectives:

• To know the basic concept and function of Production and Operation

Management
• To understand the Production process and planning

UNIT 1 Introduction to Production and Operation functions: Functions of Production `

Management

UNIT 2 Relationship between production and other functions –Types of Production or

Manufacturing systems- Job and Mass production- industrial engineering-
Manufacturing engineering- operations research

UNIT 3 Toyota Production System- principles – Models - CAD and CAM- Automation
in Production.- Functions and significance

UNIT 4 Capacity and Facility Planning: Importance of capacity planning- Capacity

measurement – Capacity Requirement Planning (CRP) process for manufacturing
and service industry

UNIT 5 Facility Planning – Location of facilities – Location flexibility – Facility design

process and techniques – Location break even analysis.

UNIT 6 Production Process Planning: Characteristic of production process systems – steps

for production process.

UNIT 7 Process selection with PLC phases- Process simulation tools- Work Study –
Significance – Methods, evolution of normal/ standard time – Job design and
rating.

UNIT 8 Plant Layout: meaning – characters –- Importance and function – Objectives –

Work Flow patterns - Plant location techniques-types.

50
UNIT 9 Factors for good layout design – REL (Relationship) Chart – Assembly line
balancing- Production Planning Control Functions – Planning phase- Action
phase- Control phase

UNIT 10 Mixed model line balancing- Aggregate production planning – Plant design
optimization-Forecasting methods.

UNIT 11 Material requirement planning (MRP) and control: MRP concept and process –
Scope and Functions

UNIT 12 Inventory control systems and techniques – JIT and Lean manufacturing-
Embedded JIT and MRP - Network techniques.

UNIT 13 Quality Management: Preventive Vs Breakdown maintenance for Quality –

Techniques for measuring quality

UNIT 14 Statistical Quality Control: Control charts and Acceptance sampling

procedures –Total Quality Management- 6 Sigma approach and Zero
Defect Manufacturing.

REFERENCES

1. Mikell P. Groover, Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated

Manufacturing, Pearson, 2007.
2. Amitabh Raturi, Production and Inventory Management,SouthWesternCollege, 2008.
3. Adam Jr. Ebert, Production and Operations Management, PHI Publication, 1992.
4. Muhlemann, Okland and Lockyer, Production and Operation Management, Macmillan.
5. Buffa E.S, Modern Production and Operation Management, TMH Publications.
6. Monks, Joseph G, Operations Management, Schaum’s Outlines
7. Chary S.N, Production and Operations Management, TMH Publications, 2010.
8. Khanne O.P, Industrial Engineering.

51
 31742A1 - COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT
Objectives:

• To know the basic concept of compensation management

• To gain knowledge on wage theories

UNIT 1 Introduction to Compensation, Rewards, Wage Levels and Wage Structures;

Introduction to Wage -Determination Process and Wage Administration rules; -Pay -
Compensation based on macroeconomic - micro economic factors – wage settlement
– safety measures

UNIT 2 Introduction to Factors Influencing Wage and Salary -Structure and Principles of
Wage and Salaries Administration Wage theories – Evaluation of theories –
Components of compensation – implications – problems – prospects

UNIT 3 Introduction to Minimum Wages; Introduction to Basic Kinds of Wage Plans;

Introduction to Wage-Differentials & Elements of a Good Wage Plans Wage Fixation
Factors: Job factors – Personnel factors – Company factors

UNIT 4 Trade unionism – Price levels – Competition factors – perfect competition –

imperfect competition

UNIT 5 Pay Fixation Process: Surveying pay and compensation practices – Designing pay
structure.

UNIT 6 Incentive Schemes: Monetary and Non-monetary dimensions – Incentive plans –

Incentives for direct and indirect categories

UNIT 7 Introduction to Importance of Wage Differentials; Introduction to Executive

Compensation and Components of Remuneration Individual/ group incentives –
Fringe benefits/ perquisites – Profit sharing

UNIT 8 Introduction to Nature and Objectives of Job Evaluation; Introduction to Principles

and Procedure of Job Evaluation Programs; Introduction to Basic Job Evaluation
Methods; Employee Stock Option Plan – Non-monetary incentive schemes: Types
and relevance.

52
UNIT 9 Performance Linked Compensation: Measuring performance – KPP - implications –
problems- prospects Introduction to Implementation of Evaluated Job; Introduction to
Determinants of Incentives; Introduction to Classification of Rewards; Incentive
Payments and its Objectives.

UNIT 10 Introduction to Institutional Mechanisms for Wage Determination Performance

parameters – service benefit – merit cum reward –citation – token of gift -
promotions

UNIT 11 Performance compensation – Structure – measures – Key performance parameters -

Control of employee cost – implications - problems.

UNIT 12 Legislations regarding Compensations – Key provisions of Payment of Wages Act,

Minimum Wages Act and Payment of Bonus Act.

UNIT 13 Current Trends in Compensation: Executive compensation – International

compensation – Challenges and scope. Introduction to Planning Compensation for
Executives & knowledge Workers

UNIT 14 Introduction to Wage Incentives in India; Introduction to Types of Wage Incentive

Plans- Compensation and satisfaction – Compensation and motivation –
Compensation for knowledge personnel.

REFERENCES :

1. Suril G K, Wage, incentives: Theory and Practice.

2. Morris, Principles and Practices of Job Evaluation.
3. Dravid W Belcher, Wage and Salary Administration.
4. Richard Henderson, Compensation Management in a Knowledge Based World

53
 31743A2 - LABOUR LEGISLATIONS - II

Objectives:

• To know the basic concept of LL and provisions.

• To gain knowledge on payment of gratuity act on 1972

UNIT 1 Payment of Bonus Act: Computation of available surplus calculation of direct tax
payable surplus calculation of direct tax payable by the employer

UNIT 2 Eligibility for bonus and payment of bonus – deduction from bonus payable –
adjustment of customary of interim bonus payable

UNIT 3 Adjustment of customary or interim bonus linked with production or productivity

– set on and set off allocable surplus

UNIT 4 Set on and set off allocable surplus set on and set off allocable surplus
presumption about accuracy of balance sheet and profit and loss account.

UNIT 5 Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972: Payment of Gratuity – exemption – nomination

– determination and recovery of the amount of gratuity.

UNIT 6 Payment of Wages Act, 1936: Objects, provisions relating to responsibility for
payment of wages

UNIT 7 Fixation of wage periods, time of payment, deduction and fines

UNIT 8 Maintenance of records and registers, inspectors appointment of authorities and

adjudication of claims.

UNIT 9 Minimum Wages Act, 1948: Objects, fixing of minimum rate or wages –
procedure for fixing and receiving minimum wages

UNIT 10 Appointment of advisory board – payment of minimum wages, maintenance of

registers and records contracting out

UNIT 11 An Act to provide for fixing minimum rates of wages in certain employments.
Powers of appropriate government offences and penalties.

54
UNIT 12 Industrial Employment(Standing Orders) Act, 1946: Provisions regarding
certification and operating of standing orders .

UNIT 13 Duration and modification of standing orders – power of certifying officer –

interpretation of standing orders.

UNIT 14 Trade Union Act, 1926: Registration of Trade Unions, rights, and liabilities trade
unions – procedure – penalties

REFERENCE

1 Bare Acts
2 Kapoor N D, Industrial Laws
3 Shukla M C, Industrial Laws
4 Tax Mann, Labour Laws, 2008.

55
 31744A3 - ORGANISATIONAL DEVELOPMENT
Objectives:

• To know the basic concept of Organizational Development.

• To gain knowledge on theories and practices

UNIT 1 Introduction to Organization Development – Concept – Nature and scope of

organizational development

UNIT 2 History of organizational development – Underlying assumptions and values.

OD interventions meaning – methods - classifications of interventions - team
interventions

UNIT 3 Gestalt approach of team building - inter group interventions - comprehensive

interventions Theory and practice of organizational development – Operational
components

UNIT 4 Diagnostic, action and process – Maintenance component – nature – scope –

implications

UNIT 5 Action Research as a process – An approach – History – Use and varieties of

action research

UNIT 6 When and how to use action research in organizational development – concept -
nature.

UNIT 7 Organizational development interventions – Team interventions – Inter-group

interventions

UNIT 8 Personal, interpersonal and group process interventions – implications- OD

diagnosis - action component - OD interventions - action research - its application
and approach

UNIT 9 MBO - quality circle – TQM - QWL (quality of work life) Physical setting etc.,
Training – T groups - coaching and mentoring and other methods

UNIT 10 Implementation and assessment of organizational development – Conditions for

success and failure

UNIT 11 Ethical standards in organizational development – Organizational development

and organizational performance – Implications.

56
UNIT 12 Key consideration and issues in organizational development- Comprehensive
interventions – Structural interventions.

UNIT 13 Models and theories of planned change - teams and teamwork - applied behaviour
science Future of organizational development - current scenario – barriers-
implications

UNIT 14 Consultant – client relationship - power, politics and OD Research on OD - Indian

experiences in organizational development – lesson drawn from abroad

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. French and Bell, Organizational development, Prentice Hall, 1995.

2. French, Bell, Zawach (Edn) Organization Development: Theory, Practice and Research.
UBP.
3. Rosabeth Moss Kanter, The Change Masters, Simon &Schaster.
4. Wendell, L. French, Cecil H. Bell, “Organization Development”, Prentice Hall, 6th Edition
2008

57
 31742B1 - INTERNATIONAL MARKETING

Objectives:

• To know the basic concept of International marketing.

• To gain an insight on international marketing strategies.
• To comprehend the international marketing in current era

UNIT 1 Marketing Concept and Functions – Marketing Environment and system –

Meaning- Features- Objectives

UNIT 2 Marketing Concepts: Marketing Mix – Product Mix – Product strategies – New
Product Planning and Development - Market segmentation – Product
positioning – Product Life Cycle concept in global market context

UNIT 3 International Marketing Approaches: Ethno, Poly, Regio and Geo Centric
approaches - International dimensions of Marketing – Meaning- Features-
Objectives- Nature and Scope

UNIT 4 International Marketing Channels - Distribution mix – Direct and indirect

channels – Types of intermediaries in the international market – Channel
Development – Channel Adaptation – Channel decisions. International

UNIT 5 Consumer Behavior in the international context – Consumer Decision making

process - Consumer Behavior – Theories and Models – Meaning- Features-
Objectives- Nature and Scope

UNIT 6 Marketing Mix – Product Mix – Product strategies – New Product Planning and
Development – Market segmentation

UNIT 7 Product positioning – Product Life Cycle concept in global market context –
Product standardization Vs product adaptation – National vs International
Product

UNIT 8 Marketing of services – Brand decisions – Packaging. – . Meaning- Features-

Objectives- Nature and Scope

UNIT 9 Price mix – Pricing decisions – pricing strategies – dumping – . Meaning-

Features- Objectives- Nature and Scope

58
UNIT 10 International transfer pricing – Countertrade – price quotation – financing and
payment - financing and payment – Credit system.

UNIT 11 Promotion mix – Personal selling – publicity – sales promotion – Overseas

product exhibitions & trade fairs - Advertising – Advertising media –
International Advertising.

UNIT 12 MIS & Communication medium: Marketing Information System - Integrated

Marketing Communications and International Advertising

UNIT 13 Distribution mix – Direct and indirect channels – Types of intermediaries in the
international market

UNIT 14 Channel Development – Channel Adaptation – Channel decisions -

International Marketing Information System and Research.

REFERENCES:

1. International Marketing, Analysis & Strategy : SakOnkvisit& John J Shaw

2. Global Marketing Management : Keegan
3. Marketing Analysis, Planning & Control : Philip Kotler
4. Fundamentals of Marketing : Stanton
5. International Marketing : Philip R. Catero
6. International Marketing : Kirpalani .V.H.
7. Marketing, an Environmental approach : Kerr, John.R. & others.
8. Marketing in the International Environment : Edward Cundiff& M.T. Hilger.

59
 31743B2 - LOGISTICS MARKETING AND TECHNOLOGY

Objectives:

• To understand the basic concept logistics marketing and technology

• To gain an insight on marketing strategy that are best suited for logistic services.
• To attain familiarity with logistic technologies in current era for better operations

UNIT 1 Marketing Concepts - Marketing Environment and System - Approaches to the

study of marketing- marketing with respect to logistic Industry

UNIT 2 Consumer and Service Marketing – Marketing segmentation - Marketing Mix-

Marketing by 3Pl and 4PL services.

UNIT 3 User Behavior and Networking - User Decision Making process - Market
Segmentation - Concentrated Marketing

UNIT 4 Differentiated and Undifferentiated Marketing - Service positioning -

Networking: Networking with Shippers, Wholesalers and Industries

UNIT 5 Networking with Warehouse service providers, Transport operators. – .

Meaning- Features- Objectives- Nature and Scope

UNIT 6 Product and Price mix decisions – Line, Range and Consistency of (Product)
Service Mix offering - Innovative product offering

UNIT 7 New Service Planning and development Process - Service Life Cycle - BCG
Product Portfolio concept and uses- Price mix decisions – Pricing: Objectives
& Methods -

UNIT 8 Pricing Policies - New product pricing strategies- Reacting to competitor price
changes – Types of pricing strategy

UNIT 9 Promotion and Distribution mix decisions: Promotools- Advertisement: Types

and Importance- Sales Promotion: Types and Relevance- Publicity: Concept
and Significance- Salesmanship: Types and Traits

UNIT 10 Budgeting for Promotional expenses- Distribution mix decisions- Local,

National, Regional and Global Choices.

UNIT 11 Supply chain software Technology: WMS, TMS, LMS, OMS, WCS and
Network Optimization- Software Evaluations & Selections-Logistics Network
Optimizations

60
UNIT 12 Transportation routing, mileage and mapping software-RFID (Radio Frequency
Identification) technology- Integrated GPS, Wireless Data and Micro-Chip
Technology System- Tracking Technology.

UNIT 13 Transport Technology: Advances in Shipping Technology- Flight Technology-

Truck Technology – Rail Technology

UNIT 14 Billing Technology- Payment Technology- (ISO 9000)- Total Quality

Management (TQM) and benchmarking.

REFERENCES

1. Philip Kotler and Kevin Keller, Marketing Management, Prentice Hall, 2006
2. Mullins, Walker and Boyd, Marketing Management: A Strategic Approach, McGraw
Hill, 2009.
3. Alexander Chernev and Philip Kotler, Strategic Marketing Management, Brightstar
Media, 2009
4. Joseph D. Patton, Logistics Technology and Management, Soloman, 1986.
5. Philip T. Frohne, Quantitative Measurements for Logistics, McGraw Hill, 2007

61
 31743B3 - STRATEGIC RETAIL MANAGEMENT

Objectives:

• To know the basic concept retail management

• To understand various strategies adopted by retain industry.
• To comprehend and analyze suitable retail strategy

UNIT 1 Strategy and Success Symbiosis: Concept of Strategy- Nature and Significance
- Defining strategic intent -Strategic Vision, Mission, Objectives, Structure and
Tactics (VMOST) - Strategic Management Process: Strategic Planning,
Strategic Execution (Actions & Responses) and Strategic Control

UNIT 2 Relationship between a Companies’s Strategy and its Retail Business Model-
Retail Business Strategy and Success Symbiotic Relationship- Role of Retail
strategists.

UNIT 3 Strategy Formulation – Analysis of Factors: Internal Appraisal – The internal

environment and organizational capabilities in various functional areas-
Analysis of Areas of strategic edges

UNIT 4 Environmental Factors (PESTLE/PESTEL: Political, Economic, Sociological,

Technological, Legal, Environmental) and their Dynamics - Environmental
scanning techniques- Methods and techniques used for organizational appraisal:
Value chain analysis, Financial and non-financial analysis, Balanced scorecard
and key factor rating- Developing Strategic Advantage Profile

UNIT 5 Identification of Critical Success Factors (CSF)- Profiling Strengths,

Weaknesses, Competencies, Uniqueness and Success Quotient as to Retail
Business.

UNIT 6 Strategic Analysis and choice: Strategic Trinity: Functional, Business and
Corporate Level Strategies – Functional Level Strategies: Production,
Marketing, Employee, Financial, Innovation and Quality Strategies -

UNIT 7 Business level strategies—Porter’s framework of competitive strategies:

Conditions, risks and benefits of Cost leadership, Differentiation and Focus
strategies- Location and timing tactics- Concept, Importance, Building and Use
of Core Competence Corporate level strategies

UNIT 8 Stability, Expansion, Retrenchment and Combination strategies - Corporate

restructuring- Strategic alliances, Collaborative partnerships, Mergers and

62
 acquisition, Joint Ventures Strategies – Outsourcing Strategies- Concept of
Synergy and its relevance.

UNIT 9 Design of strategy –Project life cycle analysis– Portfolio analysis – BCG Matrix
– General Electronic-McKinsey Matrix

UNIT 10 Hofer’s product market evolution and Shell Directional policy Matrix- Ansoff
Matrix- Bowman’s Strategy Clock Price-Value matrix- Blue Ocean Strategy.

UNIT 11 Retail strategy: Strategic options in Retailing: Product line options: Multi or
limited-line or exclusives- Channel options: Direct or indirect models-
Structural Options: Physical or Virtual models- Vertical and Lateral structures

UNIT 12 Scale Options: Hyper, Super, Mall, Large, Medium, Small or Micro models-
Brand Strategy: Multi brand Vs single brand-Franchise Vs Ownership strategy-
Shop Positioning strategy: Managing Uniqueness and Image- Geo strategy:
National, Regional and Global spread.

UNIT 13 Executing and Audit of Strategy: Good crafting of the strategy -

Institutionalizing the strategy- Creating a worker-friendly culture-
Communication the Pyramid of Purpose Concisely - Corporate Governance-
Simons' Seven Strategy Questions for better implementation- Resource
allocation, Projects and Procedural issues

UNIT 14 Organization structure and systems in strategy implementation-Leadership and

corporate culture - Strategic control and operational Control- Organizational
systems and Techniques of strategic evaluation- evaluating deviations,
challenges of strategy Implementation- Retail Strategy Audit.

63
REFERENCES

1. Hitt, Ireland and Hoskisson, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases:

Competitiveness and Globalization,South-WesternCollege, 2011
2. Michael E Porter, Corporate Strategy: Competitive Advantage, Free Press, 1998.
3. Greek W.P and Jauch L.R., Business Policy and Strategy Management, McGraw Hill.
4. Garth Saloner, Andrea Shepard &Joel Podolny- Strategic Management
5. Fred David, Strategic Management: Concepts and Cases, Prentice Hall, 2010.
6. Zentes, Morschett, Klein, Strategic Retail Management, 2007
7. Jay Barney, Gaining and Sustaining Competitive Advantage, Prentice Hall, 2010.
8. Barney and Hesterly, Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage, Prentice
Hall, 2009.
9. Kaplan and Norton, Strategy Maps: Converting Intangible Assets into Tangible
Outcomes, HBP, 2004.

64
 31742C1 - FOREIGN EXCHANGE MANAGEMENT

Objectives:
To understand the concept related to foreign exchange management
To analysis the foreign exchange risk management

UNIT 1 Foreign Exchange: Concept and Significance – Foreign change Rate: Direct and
indirect quotations – Inter-bank and Merchant rates.

UNIT 2 Spot rates and forward rates – T.T. rates – Cross rates; Computation – Foreign
exchange markets – Organisation of forex market

UNIT 3 Determination of Exchange Rate: Purchasing Power Parity theory – Interest rate
parity theory – Flow model – Asset market model.

UNIT 4 Forecasting of exchange rates – Concepts of Nominal Effective Exchange Rate

and Real effective Exchange rate.

UNIT 5 Forward exchange contracts: Types – Forward exchange rate computation –

Factors affecting forward rates - Extension and cancellation of forward contracts.

UNIT 6 Options: Meaning, Features –Types: Put option, Call option – Mechanism –
Merits and Demerits.

UNIT 7 Foreign exchange risk management: Transaction exposure risk: Internal

Strategies – Risk shifting, Risk sharing – Exposure netting and offsetting.

UNIT 8 External Strategies: Foreign currency options – Forward and money market
hedge – Currency Swaps – Interest Rate Swaps.

UNIT 9 Economic Exposure risk – Inflation and exchange risk– Factors influence
exchange risk.
UNIT 10 Economic consequences of Exchange rate changes – managing economic
exposure risk.

UNIT 11 Exchange management in India: Fixed and fling rates – Rupee convertibility –
NOSTRO, VOSTRO and LORO Accounts.

UNIT 12 Exchange control measures: Need, Forms and relevance.

UNIT 13 Foreign Exchange Reserves of India: Trend, composition and management.

UNIT 14 Impact on exchange Rate – Monetary and fiscal policy initiatives for exchange
rate management.

65
REFERENCES:
1. Multinational Financial Management : Alan C Shapiro
2. ABC of Foreign Exchange : Clare G. Gump
3. Guide to Foreign Exchange Regulations : Krishnamoorthy.S
4. Principles of Foreign Exchange : Chatterjee.A.K.
5. Foreign Exchange – Practice, Concepts and control : Jeevanadam.N.S.
6. Foreign Exchange Management : Rajwadi
7. Rupee Convertibility : BibekDebroi

66
 31743C2 - MULTINATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
• To discuss the economic and political factor of multinational financial management.
• To understand the exchange safe system.

UNIT 1 Concept of multinational financial management – Functions – Risk - Return

trade off

UNIT 2 Aspects of multinational financial environment and system – Global financial

markets.

UNIT 3 Foreign Direct Investment by MNCs – Need, strategy and opportunities.

UNIT 4 Economic and political risk – Planning – operating policies to deal with risk.

UNIT 5 Capital budgeting: Basics – NPV – IRR – Increment Cash flows – Parent Vs
Project Cash flows.

UNIT 6 Taxes – Exchange rate changes and inflation – Transfer Pricing – APV and
CAPM.

UNIT 7 Working Capital Management of MNCs – International Cash management:

Objectives – Functions – Techniques: Netting – Leading and Lagging.

UNIT 8 Intercompany loans – Transfer pricing – Cash Planning and budgeting –

Management of Short term investment Portfolio.

UNIT 9 Receivables Management: Credit policy variables: Standards – period – Discount

– Collection effort.

UNIT 10 Credit extension – Exchange rate implications – Inventory management –

Concepts and tools.

UNIT 11 Risk and Uncertainty Models – Off shore production Vs Local Purchase.

UNIT 12 International financing: Long Term Financing: Equity Instruments: International

Depository Receipts and Direct equity participation.

67
UNIT 13 Debt Instruments: Bonds Notes and Syndicated loans. Short term financing:
Sources – Euro notes and Euro commercial paper – Inter firm financing methods.

UNIT 14 Cost of Capital: Cost of equity – Cost of debt – Cost of back – to - back financing
Overall cost of Capital structure of MNC: Theory, Practice and determinants –
Debt Vs Equity Flow analysis.

REFERENCES:
1. Multinational Financial Management: Shapiro.A.C.
2. International financial Management : Rodrigule and Carter
3. International Business Finance : Wood.D, Byrne.J
4. International Capital Markets : Watson, Marwell

68
 31743C3 - PROJECT FINANCE
Objectives:
• To understand the process of project finance
• To give knowledge about project appraisal
• To evaluate the financial aspect in project finance

UNIT 1 Project – Meaning and Definition - Stages in a project cycle: Project

identification, formulation, evaluation and implementation

UNIT 2 Project Consultants: Meaning - Role of consultants in project management –

Functions of Project Consultant

UNIT 3 Sources of finance for a project - I: Public issue of shares, debentures, public
deposits, leasing, internal generation of funds, commercial papers.

UNIT 4 Sources of finance for a project – II: Global depository receipts, borrowings from
banks and FIs – Venture capital – Innovative instruments in the capital market.

UNIT 5 Project financing – Estimating the total capital requirements – Factors

determining the fixed capital and working capital – Judicious financing plan.

UNIT 6 Capital gearing – Matching of requirements with available financial assistance

from various sources.

UNIT 7 Process of lending for a project – Pre-sanction appraisal and procedures.

UNIT 8 Appraisal of managerial and technical aspects: Evaluation of managerial skills,

past records, Management and working of other group companies evaluation of
appropriative technology, availability or raw materials and utilities and safeguards
against pollution, effluent disposal/treatment.

UNIT 9 Project appraisal – Evaluation of commercial aspects: Estimation of demand

supply gap, distribution channels and selling arrangements.

UNIT 10 Evaluation of financial aspects - I: Debt equity ratio, current ratio, debt service
coverage ratio, return on investment.

UNIT 11 Evaluation of financial aspects - II: Security margin, internal rate of return and
breakeven analysis.

UNIT 12 Project appraisal – Economic analysis: Economies of scale, employment

generation, social cost benefit analysis, contribution to government revenue.

69
UNIT 13 Political stability, priority and evaluation of international competitiveness. Project
monitoring – Post sanction supervision and follow up – Steps to improve
recovery.

UNIT 14 Industrial sickness: Warning signals and causes - Rehabilitation of a sick

industrial unit– Role of the board for industrial and financial reconstruction
(BIFR).

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. B.B. Goel, Project Management: A Development Perspective, Deep and Deep Publications,
New Delhi
2. A.K. Sengupta, Bank Credit to Industry, Skylark Publications, New Delhi.
3. Prasanna Chandra, Projects Preparations, Appraisal, Budgeting and Implementation, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi.

70
 31745 PROJECT

Project is considered to be an integral part of business administration by all ‘B’ Schools in India.
In order to maintain the academic quality of business acumen, it has mentioned the following
objectives of project.

1. Development of professional skills through learning to use knowledge for the study and
analysis of problems and selection of appropriate means to solve them.
2. Development of self awareness and professional ideal.

The students opted the project have to select research areas systematically.

a. Understanding both the organization and the functions.

b. Understanding socio, economic and cultural realities and their impact on the
organization.
c. Administrative structure, communication pattern, leadership, power structure,
decision making and functions of personnel in business organizations

Records:

a. Analysis of problem solving situations for new and significant areas of problem solving.
b. Means, skills for documentation of activities like projects, case studies etc...

The students can select Project Guides from the approved list of DDE, Alagappa University
Guidelines.

71
3. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The course shall consist of two academic years divided into four semesters.

4.Faculty and Support Staff Requirements

This programme requires the following faculty and supporting staffs

Staff Category Required

Core Faculty * 3
Faculty for Specialization* 2
Clerical Assistant 1

*At least Assistant Professor Level (Either permanent or part time)

5. Instructional Delivery Mechanism

Each semester there will be one contact programme of 80 hours duration in theory. The SLM
(Self Learning Material) will be supplied to the students in print form as well as in CD form. The
face to face contact sessions of the programme for theory courses will be held at the head quarter
/ learning centres. The conduct of end semester examinations, evaluation and issuance of
certificates will be done by office of the Controller of examinations, Alagappa University,
Karaikudi.

F) PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION, CURRICULUM TRANSACTION, AND

EVALUATION

Procedure of Admission
A candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University in the Pattern of
10+2+3 shall be permitted to appear and qualify for the programme.

Curriculum Transactions:

72
The class room teaching would be through conventional lecture, use of OHP, power point
presentation and novel innovative teaching ideas like television and computer aided instruction.
Student seminars would be arranged to improve their awareness and communicative skill.

Face to face contact session will be conducted as given in below table.

Course Type Face to Face Contact

Session/semester (in Hours)

5 Theory courses with 4 credits 80

Total 80

Evaluation
The examinations shall be conducted for theory to assess the knowledge acquired during
the study. There shall be two systems of examinations viz., internal and external examinations. In
the case of theory courses, the internal evaluation shall be conducted as Continuous Internal
Assessment via. Student assignments preparation. The internal assessment shall comprise of
maximum 25 marks for each course. The end semester examination shall be of three hours
duration to each course at the end of each semester. The end semester examinations shall
comprise of maximum of 75 marks for each course. The candidate failing in any course(s) will
be permitted to appear for each failed course(s) in the subsequent examination.
f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments:
The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory courses

Component Marks

Assignments(2) 25
(12.5+12.5)
Total 25

73
Question paper pattern (Theory)

• The question paper carries a maximum of 75 marks.

• The question paper consists of three sections namely Part-A, Part-B and Part-C.
• Part-A consists of 10 questions of 2 marks each (10 x 2 = 20 marks) with no choice. The
candidate should answer all questions.
• Part-B consists of 5 either or choice questions. Each question carries 5 marks (5 x 5=25
marks).
• Part-C consists of 5 questions. Each question carries 10 marks. The candidate should
Answer any three questions (10 x 3 = 30 marks).
Passing minimum

• There shall be no Passing Minimum for Internal.

• For External Examination, Passing Minimum shall be of 50% (Fifty Percentage) of the
maximum marks (75) prescribed for the paper.

• In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of 50 Mark for each
Paper
• Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (internal + external).

Candidate who does not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass in a course shall be
required to appear and pass the same at a subsequent appearance.

Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and classification to indicate the
performance of the candidate.

Range of Marks Grade Points Letter Grade Description

90-100 9.0-10.0 O Outstanding

80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent
75-79 7.5-7.9 D Distinction
70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good
60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good

74
 50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average
00-49 0.0 U Re-appear
ABSENT 0.0 AAA ABSENT

Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semester

Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester.
n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited

For a semester;

Grade Point Average [GPA] = ∑iCiGi/ ∑i Ci

Grade Point Average = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the courses

Sum of the credits of the courses in a semester

For the entire programme;

Cumulative Grade Point Average [CGPA] = ∑n ∑iCniGni/ ∑n ∑iCni

CGPA = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the entire programme

Sum of the credits of the courses for the entire programme

CGPA Grad Classification of Final

Result

9.5-10.0 O+ First Class- Exemplary*

9.0 and above but below 9.5 O

8.5 and above but below 9.0 D++ First Class with
8.0 and above but below 8.5 D+ Distinction*

7.5 and above but below 8.0 D

7.0 and above but below 7.5 A++ First Class

6.5 and above but below 7.0 A+
6.0 and above but below 6.5 A

75
 5.5 and above but below 6.0 B+ Second Class
5.0 and above but below 5.5 B

0.0 and above but below 5.0 U Re-appear

*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the prescribed semester of
the PG Programme are eligible.

Maximum duration for completion of the course

The maximum duration for the programme shall not exceed five years after the completion of
the minimum duration of the programme.

Commencement of this regulation

These regulations shall come into effect from the academic year 2018-19 for students who are
admitted to the first year of the course during the academic year 2018-19.

Fee structure

Sl. No. Fees Detail Amount in Rs.

First Second
Year Year

1 Admission 300.00 -
Processing Fees

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

5 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00

76
G) REQUIREMENT OF THE LIBRARY RESOURCES:

LIBRARY RESOURCES
The Central Library is one of the important central facilities of Alagappa University. It has text
book, reference books, conference proceedings, back volumes, standards, and non-book material
such as CD-ROMs and audios. The central Library procured several e-books in different areas.
The library also subscribes to about 250 current periodicals. The Directorate of Distance
Education of Alagappa University has adequate number of copies of books related to
Management Programme.

COST ESTIMATE OF THE PROGRAMME AND THE PROVISIONS:

Sl. No. Nature of Expenditure Amount in Rs.

(Approx.)
1 Programme Development 10,00,000/-
2 Programme Delivery 20,00,000/-
3 Programme Maintenance 3,00,000/-

i) QUALITY ASSURANCE MECHANISM AND EXPECTED PROGRAMME

OUTCOMES

• The feedback from students on teaching will be collected every semester using standard
formats.
• Feedback on the curriculum will also be collected from the experiences of the students
which help teachers in fine tuning of deliverables in the classroom.
• It helps in improving the standard of teaching as expected by the students.
• Exit survey feedback on various parameters to improve and quality of the programme and
support services like course material, library and infrastructure.
• It helps to Strengthen the contents of the program to meet the requirements of the
employment market and keep the curriculum as a treasure of knowledge.
• This programme provides Opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate
knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes.

****

77
78
79
80
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT

MBA HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
KARAIKUDI – 630 003
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT

MBA HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT

a) PROGRAMME MISSION AND OBJECTIVES

Business Studies have fascinated humans for two reasons, namely generating interest and
augmenting essentials of running a firm effectively. That is why their study is enchanting and
glorifying. The primary objective of this programme is to provide ample exposure to subjects
from the fields of business legacy and accountancy, equip the Students for entry level jobs in
industry and to contribute to the economic development of the country.

b) RELEVANCE OF THE PROGRAMME WITH HEI’S MISSION AND GOALS:

The Alagappa University is functioning with following Vision and Mission:

Mission: Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular emphasis on

‘PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and Learning

Vision: Affording High Quality Higher Education to the learners so that they are transformed
into intellectually competent human resources that will help in the uplift of the nation to
Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence.

Therefore, the introduction of MBA HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT programme in the

Directorate of Distance Education will contribute substantially in fulfilling the mission of
Alagappa University. Such a higher education in subject with appropriate Practical Exposer
will enrich the human resources for the uplift of the Nation to Educational, Social,
Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence (ESTEEM).

c) NATURE OF PROSPECTIVE TARGET GROUP OF LEARNERS

• Working Professionals
• Entrepreneurs
• Service Personnel
• Academic Faculty
• Government Officials
• Researchers
• Home makers
• Unemployed Graduates
d) APPROPRIATENESS OF PROGRAMME

To Attain Leadership in spearheading qualitative and responsible academic programs relevant

to the society through cost effective off-campus distance mode of education. knowledge and
understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes in the following areas:

• The fundamental concepts of Management

• The higher-level taxonomy and diversity of Business Studies.
• How principles of Business can be applied to problems
• Internship training in Industry
• Undertake Inter tasks and techniques.
• Inter-disciplinary knowledge like statistics, Mathematics, Computer and E-Banking.
• Using the SPSS package for the analysis of data
• It also improves the Intellectual skills of the students.
• In nutshell, these skills will improve the performance of the students parameters.
E)INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN
MBA HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT

Course Title CIA ESE TOT C

Code Max. Max. Max.
I Semester
33311 Management – Principles and Practices 25 75 100 4
33312 Organizational Behaviour 25 75 100 4
33313 Managerial Economics 25 75 100 4
33314 Quantitative Techniques 25 75 100 4
33315 Financial and Management Accounting 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
II Semester
33321 Research Methods 25 75 100 4
33322 Business Environment 25 75 100 4
33323 Business Laws 25 75 100 4
33324 Management Information System 25 75 100 4
33325 Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
III Semester
33331 Marketing Management 25 75 100 4
33332 Hospital Management 25 75 100 4
33333 Principles of Hospital Management 25 75 100 4
33334 Hospital Planning and Designing 25 75 100 4

33335 Materials Management in Hospitals 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

IV Semester
33341 Hospital Records Management 25 75 100 4
33342 Hospital Related Laws 25 75 100 4
33343 Marketing of Hospital Services 25 75 100 4
33344 Quality Management in Hospitals 25 75 100 4
33345 Hospital Hazards Management 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
Grand Total 2000 80
Course Code Legend:
3 3 3 Y Z

333- M.B.A Programme

Y -Semester Number
Z- Course Number in the Semester

CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total,
C: Credit Points, Max.: Maximum

No. of Credits per Course (Theory) - 5 Total No. of Credits per Semester- 20
Total Credits for the Programme- 20 X 4 = 80
 33311- MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES

Objectives:
• To introduce the basic concepts of Management functions and principles
• To learn the scientific decision making and modern trend in the management process
• To understand the contemporary practices and issues in management

UNIT 1 Management: Definition – Nature, Scope and Functions – Evolution of

Management – Management thought in modern trend – Patterns of the
management analysis – Management Vs. Administration - Management and
Society: The external Environment, Social Responsibility and Ethics.

UNIT 2 Management Science and Theories : Contributions of FW Taylor, Henri Fayol,

Elton Mayo, Roethilisberger, H.A.Simon and P.F Drucker - Universality of
Management - Relevance of management to different types of organization.

UNIT 3 Planning: Nature and Purpose – Principles and planning premises –

Components of planning as Vision, Mission, Objectives, Managing By
Objective (MBO) Strategies, Types and Policies -Planning and Decision
Making: Planning process.

UNIT 4 Decision making: Meanings and Types – Decision-making Process under

Conditions of Certainty and Uncertainty – Rational Decision Making
Strategies, Procedures, Methods, Rules, Projects and Budgets.

UNIT 5 Organizing: Nature, Importance, Principles, purpose and Scope - Organizing

functions of management – Classifications of organization – Principles and
theories of organization – Effective Organizing – Organizational Culture and
Global Organizing.

UNIT 6 Organizational Structure – Departmentalization – Span of control – Line and

staff functions – Formal and Informal Groups in Organizations - Authority and
responsibility - Centralization and decentralization – Delegation of authority –
Committees – Informal organization.

UNIT 7 Staffing: General Principles of Staffing- Importance, techniques, Staff

authority and Empowerment in the organization – Selection and Recruitment -
Orientation - Career Development - Career stages – Training – Performance
Appraisal.

UNIT 8 Creativity and Innovation – Motivation - Meaning – Importance – Human

factors of Motivation – Motivation Theories: Maslow, Herzberg, Mc Gregor
(X&Y), Ouchi (Z) ,Vroom, Porter-Lawler, McClelland and Adam –
Physiological and psychological aspects of motivation .
 UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:
Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,
Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.
Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics and
Ethics. Leader Vs. Manager.

UNIT 10 Communications: Meaning – Types – Process – Communication in the

decision making – Global Leading - Effective communication in the levels of
management. – Uses of Communication to Planning, Organizing, coordinating
and controlling.

UNIT 11 Co-ordination: Concept; Meaning, Characteristics, Importance in the

organization, Co-ordination process and principles - Techniques of Effective
co-ordination in the organization - Understanding and managing the group
process.

UNIT 12 Business ethics: Relevance of values in Management; Holistic approach for

managers indecision-making; Ethical Management: Role of organizational
culture in ethics – Ethics Committee in the organization.

UNIT 13 Controlling: Objectives and Process of control Devices of control – Integrated

control – Special control techniques- Contemporary - Perspectives in Device
of Controls

UNIT 14 New Perspectives in Management - Strategic alliances – Core competence –

Business process reengineering – Total quality management – Six Sigma-
Benchmarking- Balanced Score-card.

REFERENCES

1. Stoner, et-al, Management, Prentice Hall, 1989.

2. Koontz and O’Donnell, Management: A Systems Approach, McGraw Hill, 1990
3. Weihrich and Koontz,Management: A Global Perspective, McGraw Hill, 1988
4. Peter F. Drucker, Management, 2008.
5. Gene Burton and Manab Thakur, Management Today: Principles and Practice, Tata
McGraw Hill.
6. Ricky W. Griffin, Management, South-WesternCollege Publications, 2010
7. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, Management, 9th Edition, 2006.
8. Kaplan and Norton, The Strategy-Focused Organization: How Balanced Scorecard
Companies Thrive in the New Business Environment, HBP, 2000.
 33312 - ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Objectives:
• To understand the personality trades and influence on the organization.
• To imbibe the necessary conceptual understanding of behaviour related people
• To learn the modern trends, theories and changes in organizational Behaviour.

UNIT 1 Organizational Behaviour: History – Meaning Elements – Evolution,

Challenges and opportunities – Trends – disciplines – Approaches – Models –
Management functions relevance to organizational Behaviour – Global
Emergence of OB as a discipline.

UNIT 2 Personality – Determinants, Structure, Behaviour, Assessment, Individual

Behaviour: Personality & Attitudes- Development of personality – Nature and
dimensions of attitude – Trait Theory – Organizational fit – Organizational
Commitment

UNIT 3 Emotions – Emotional Intelligence – Implications of Emotional Intelligence on

Managers – EI as Managerial tool – EI performance in the organization –
Attitudes: Definitions – Meaning – Attitude relationship with behaviour –
Types – Consistency

UNIT 4 Individual Behaviour and process of the organization: Learning, Emotions,

Attitudes, Perception, Motivation, Ability, Job satisfaction, Personality, Stress
and its Management – Problem solving and Decision making – Interpersonal
Communication - Relevance to organizational behaviour.

UNIT 5 Group Behaviour: Group Dynamics - Theories of Group Formation - Formal

and Informal Groups in organization and their interaction - Group norms –
Group cohesiveness – Team: Importance and Objectives - Formation of teams
– Team Work- Group dynamics – Issues - Their relevance to organizational
behaviour.

UNIT 6 Organizational Power: Organizational Power: Definition, Nature,

Characteristics - Types of powers - Sources of Power - Effective use of power
– Limitations of Power – Power centre in Organization.

UNIT 7 Organizational Politics: Definition – Political behaviour in organization -

Factors creating political behaviour – Personality and Political Behaviour -
Techniques of managing politics in organization – Impact of organizational
politics.

UNIT 8 Organizational Conflict Management: Stress Management: Meaning – Types –

Sources and strategies resolve conflict – Consequences – Organizational
conflict: Constructive and Destructive conflicts - Conflict Process - Strategies
for encouraging constructive conflict - Strategies for resolving destructive
conflict.
 UNIT 9 Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Dynamics – Organizational
Efficiency, Effectiveness and Excellence: Meaning and Approaches – Factors
affecting the organizational Climate.

UNIT 10 Organizational Culture: Meaning, significance – Theories – Organizational

Climate – Creation, Maintenance and Change of Organizational Culture –
Impact of organizational culture on strategies – Issues in Organizational
Culture.

UNIT 11 Inter personal Communication: Essentials, Networks, Communication

technologies – Non-Verbal communications Barriers – Strategies to overcome
the barriers. Behavioral Communication in organization - Uses to Business

UNIT 12 Organizational Change: Meaning, Nature and Causes of organizational change

Organizational Change –Importance – Stability Vs Change – Proactive Vs.
Reaction change – the change process – Resistance to change – Managing
change.

UNIT 13 Organizational Behaviour responses to Global and Cultural diversity,

challenges at international level, Homogeneity and heterogeneity of National
cultures, Differences between countries.

UNIT 14 Organizational Development: Meaning, Nature and scope – Features of OD –

OD Interventions- Role of OD – Problems and Process of OD – process OD
and Process of Intervention - Challenges to OD- Learning Organizations -
Organizational effectiveness Developing Gender sensitive workplace

REFERENCES

1. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2006.

2. Stephen P. Robbins, Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall; 2010
3. Keith Davis, Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work, McGraw Hill, 2010
4. Griffin and Moorhead, Organizational Behavior: Managing People and Organizations,
2006.
5. Judith R. Gordon, Organizational Behavior: A Diagnostic, Prentice Hall, 2001.
6. K. Aswathappa, Organizational Behaviour, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai, 2010
7. Judith R. Gordon, A Diagnostic Approach to Organizational Behaviour, Allyn &
Bacon, 1993.
 33313 - MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
Objectives:
• To understand the economic principles and its applications in business
• To develop economics based analytic skills for business
• To make the learners to strong in economical approach

UNIT 1 Economics: Introduction – Meaning, nature and scope of Managerial

Economics – General Foundations of managerial Economics – Economic
Approach – Working of Economic system - Circular flow activities -
Economics & Business Decisions - Relationship between Economic theory
and Managerial Economics.

UNIT 2 Business Decisions: Role of managerial Economics in Decision making –

Decision making under Risk and Uncertainty - Concepts of Opportunity cost, -
Production possibility curve – Incremental Concepts - Cardinal and Ordinal
approaches to consumer Behaviour Time Value of Money –

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour: Marginalism – Equilibrium and Equi-marginalism and

their role in business decision making. – Equi-Marginal principles – Utility
analysis – Total and Marginal Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility –
Marshallian approach and Indifference curve analysis.

UNIT 4 Demand analysis: Meaning, Functions - Determinants of demand-Law of

Demand – Demand Estimation and Forecasting - Applications of demand in
analysis - Elasticity of Demand: Types, Measures and Role in Business
Decisions.

UNIT 5 Supply Analysis: Determinants of supply- Elasticity of Supply- Measures and

Significance - Derivations of market demand – Demand Estimation and Fore
casting- Demand and Supply equilibrium – Giffen Paradox

UNIT 6 Production Functions: Managerial uses of production function - Cobb-Douglas

and other production functions - Isoquants – Short run and long run
production function – Theory of production – Empirical estimations of
production functions.

UNIT 7 Forms of Markets: Meaning and Characteristics - Market Equilibrium:

Practical Importance, Market Equilibrium and Changes in Market Equilibrium.
Pricing Functions: Market Structures - Pricing and output decisions under
different competitive conditions: Monopoly Monopolistic completion and
Oligopoly

UNIT 8 Strategic Behaviour of the firms and Game Theory - Nash Equilibrium:
Implications – Prisoner’s Dilemma: Types of strategy – Price and Non price
competition – Relation to the firm behaviour.

UNIT 9 Cost and Return: Cost function and cost output relationship – Economics and
Diseconomies of scale - Cost control and cost reduction- Cost Behaviour and
Business Decision- Relevant costs for decision-making- Traditional and
Modern theory of Cost.
 UNIT 10 New Product Penetrative Decision and Skimming the cream Pricing-
Government control over pricing - Concept of Profit- Types and Theories of
Profit by Knight (Uncertainty), Schumpeter (Innovation), Clark (Dynamic)
and Hawley (Risk) - Profit maximization – Cost volume profit analysis – Risk
and Return Relationship.

UNIT 11 Profit and Investment Analysis: Meaning – Measurement of profit – Theories

of Pricing- Profit planning and forecasting- Profit and Wealth maximization –
Cost volume profit analysis – Investment analysis and Evaluation: IRR, NPV
and APV techniques.

UNIT 12 Macro-economic Factors: Nature, Importance ; Economic Growth and

Development - Business cycle – Phases and Business Decision- Inflation -
Factors causing Inflation and Deflation - Control measures – Balance of
payment Trend and its implications in managerial decision.

UNIT 13 National Income: Introduction Meaning – Theories – Methods of

Measurement - Sectoral and Population distributions – Per capita Income:
Definition – Calculations – Uses – Limitations – GDP – GNP - Recent
developments in Indian Economy.

UNIT 14 Economic Regulations of Business: Introduction – Antitrust theory and

Regulations – The structure – Conduct – Performance paradigm –
Concentration: Overview – Measuring concentration – Regulation of
Externalities.

REFERENCES
1. Dominick Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy,OxfordUniversity
Press, 2011.
2. Ivan Png and Dale Lehman, Managerial Economics, Wiley-Blackwell, 2007.
3. Truett Lila J., Truett, Dale B. and Truett J. Lila (2006), Managerial Economics:
Analysis Problems, Cases, 8th Editon, John Wiley & Sons.
4. Atmanand (2008), Managerial Economics, 2nd Edition, Excel Books.
5. Christopher R Thomas & S Charles Maurice (2008), Managerial Economics, 9th
edition, McGraw Hill Co.
6. Petersen, H. C., Cris, L W and Jain, S.K. (2008), Managerial Economics, 1st edition
Pearson
7. Gupta G S, Managerial Economics, Tata McGraw-Hill.
8. Varshney and Maheswari, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
9. Mehta P L, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
10. Joel Dean, Managerial Economics, Prentice-Hall.
 33314 - QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES
Objectives:
• To help develop analytical skills based on problem solving approach
• To learn quadrature problems solving of business issues.
• To acquire the knowledge in statistics and their use in business decision making.

UNIT 1 Basic Quantitative Concepts: Place of quantitative analysis in the practice of

management – Problem definition: Models and their development. Variables
notion of Mathematical models – concept of trade off – Notion of constants –
concept of Interest.

UNIT 2 Basic Concept of differentiation – integration – Optimization concepts – use of

differentiation for optimization of business problem Optimization Statistics:
Meaning and Applications of Statistics in business decision making and
research - Collection, Tabulation and presentation of data - Measures of central
tendency: Mean, Median and Mode. Measures of dispersion

UNIT 3 Variables and function: Linear and Non-linear –Graphical representation of

functions and their applications in cost and revenue behavior. Slope and its
relevance –Use of functional relationships to understand elasticity of demands,
Relationship between costs and level of activity, Decisions on Minimizing
Costs and Maximizing output/profits.
UNIT 4 Linear Programming: Introduction to the linear programming – Concepts of
optimization- Formulation of different types of linear programming –Standard
from of LP problems - Importance and practical implementation in Industry
UNIT 5 Simple regression and Correlation analysis: Introduction, Correlation,
Correlation analysis, linear regression analysis and Co-efficient. Duality and
sensitivity analysis for decision-making- Solving LP using graphical and
simplex method (only simple problems) – Interpreting the solution for
decision-making

UNIT 6 Special Algorithms of LPP: Transportation Algorithm - Balanced and

Unbalanced Problem Formulation and solving methods: North West Corner,
Vogel’s Approximation-MODI method- Assignment and Travelling Executive
Algorithms
UNIT 7 Theory of Probability: Introduction to the Concept – Development of
probability – Areas and Utilisation of probability theories in the Business –
Sample space – terminology – Types of probability.

UNIT 8 Theoretical Probability Distributions: Introduction - Concept of events –

Probability of events – Joint, conditional and marginal probabilities
Probability distributions: Binomial, Poisson and Normal – Features and
Applications – Use of Normal Tables.

UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background and

Developments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –
Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations of
Quantitative methods.
 UNIT 10 Sequencing /Scheduling Methods : Concepts – terminology – Notations –
Assumption for scheduling models – Job sequencing priorities – Processing
the job and Mass production system.

UNIT 11 Simulation Techniques: Introduction to simulation as an aid to decision-

making- Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Applications of
simulations models – Types: Inventory, Cash, and Project – Random Numbers.

UNIT 12 Queuing Theory: Introduction – Definition – Queue priorities Product

launching problems using Monte Carlo simulation- Queuing Theory: M/M/1
queuing model and applications.

UNIT 13 Decision Analysis: Concepts – Definition – Decision Tables Pay-off and Loss
tables – Expected value of pay-off – Expected value of Perfect Formation –
decision making process

UNIT 14 Decision Tree Analysis: Decision making environments – Concept of

Posterior probabilities Decision Tree approach to choose optimal course of
action Criteria for decision – Mini-max, Maxi-max, Minimizing Maximal
Regret and their applications.

REFERENCES

1. David R. Anderson, et al, An Introduction to Management Science: Quantitative

Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning, 2008.
2. Lucey, Quantitative Techniques Cengage Learning Business Press, 2002
3. Sharma, Operations Research: Theory and Applications.
4. Richard I Levin, & C. Atkinson Kirkpatrick, Quantitative Approaches to Management,
McGraw-Hill.
5. K. Gupta and D.S. Hira, Operations Research.
6. Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma, Quantitative Techniques for Managerial Decision-
making, New Age International, 2006.
7. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
8. V.K. Kapoor, Operations Research.
9. Dharani Venkatakrishnan, Operations Research: Principles and Problems.
10. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 2002.
 33315 - FINANCIAL AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Objectives:
• To enable the students to learn basic accounting principles, concepts.
• To practice Financial and Management accounting applications
• To make the learners familiarize in managerial decision making.

UNIT 1 Accounting: Definition – Accounting for historical function and managerial

function - Types of Accounting- Management, Management and Cost
accounting – Scope for Accounting-Managerial Uses of Management
accounting and Financial Accounting.

UNIT 2 Accounting Concepts and Conventions – Accounting standards - Financial

Accounting Definitions – Principles – Accounting standards - Double entry
system of accounting: Accounting books – Preparation of journal and ledger,
subsidiary books.

UNIT 3 Preparation of Trial Balance – Errors and rectification – Classifications of

capital and Revenue – Fixed Assets and Depreciation accounting – Preparation
of Manufacturing accounting- Preparation of Final Accounts - Accounting
from incomplete records – Statements of affairs methods

UNIT 4 Conversion methods – Preparation of Trading, Profit & Loss Account and
Balance Sheet from incomplete records – Depreciation methods - Straight line
method, Written down value method, Sinking fund method.

UNIT 5 Financial Statement Analysis - Objectives - Reorganizing the Financial

Statement information -Techniques of Financial Statement Analysis:
Comparative Statements, Common – Size statement, Trend Percentage -

UNIT 6 Management Statement Analysis: Management statements – Nature of

management statements – Limitations of management statements – Analysis
of interpretation -Types of analysis- Tools of analysis: Trend analysis,
Common size statements and Comparative statements;

UNIT 7 Accounting Ratios: Construction of balance sheet using ratios (problems) –

Financial ratios – Types: Profitability ratios – Turnover ratios – Liquidity
ratios – Proprietary ratios – Market earnings ratios- Uses and limitations of
ratios - Dupont analysis.

UNIT 8 Fund Flow Analysis: Need and meaning – Preparation of schedule of changes
in working capital and the fund flow statement – Workings for
Computation of various sources and uses - Preparation of Fund Flow
Statement

UNIT 9 Cash flow Analysis: Meaning and importance Managerial uses of cash flow
statement – Differences between fund flow and cash flow analysis - Uses and
limitation of fund flow statement- Preparation of cash flow statement
 UNIT 10 Cost Accounting: Cost Accounting - Meaning - Distinction between Financial
Accounting and Cost Accounting - Cost Terminology: Cost, Cost Centre, Cost
Unit - Elements of Cost - Cost Sheet – Problems - Overhead Cost Allocations:
Over and under Absorption. Job and Contract Costing,

UNIT 11 Operating Costing: Material Cost Accounting, Perpetual Inventory Control,

Inventory Valuation, EOQ, ABC Analysis, Setting of Reorder Level,
Maximum Level, Minimum Level, Labour Cost Accounting, Remuneration
and Incentive Schemes- Reconciliation of Financial and Cost Accounting

UNIT 12 Marginal Costing: Definition – Difference between marginal costing and

absorption costing – Break- even point Analysis - Contribution, p/v Ratio,
margin of safety - Decision making under marginal costing system-key factor
analysis, make or buy decisions, export decision, sales mix decision-Problems

UNIT 13 Budgeting and Budgetary Control: Concept and Need for Budgeting-
Classification of budgets – Preparation of Sales, Production, Material,
Purchase and Cash Budgets –Budgetary control system – Mechanism – Master
budget.

UNIT 14 Capital Budgeting System: Importance – Methods of capital expenditure

appraisal – Payback period method – ARR method – DCF methods – NPV and
IRR methods – Their rationale – Capital rationing.

REFERENCES
1. Arulanandam& K.S. Raman,Advanced Accounting, Himalaya Publishing House.
2. Gupta &Radhasamy,Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons.
3. Shukla & T.S. Grewal,Advanced Accounting, S.Chand&Company.
4. Jain &Narang,Advanced Cost Accounting, Kalyani. Publications.
5. Ravi M. Kishore, Cost Management, Taxman Publications
6. S.N. Maheswari, Management Accounting &Management Accounting, Vikas
Publishers.
7. Manmohan & Goyal, Principles of Management Accounting, Shakithabhavan
Publication.
8. N. K. Prasad,Advanced Cost Accounting, Book Syndicate Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta.
9. Andrew A Haried, Advanced Accounting, Atlantic Publishers.
10. Hoyle,Advanced Accounting, McGraw Hill.
 33321 - RESEARCH METHODS
Objectives:
• To Understand the basic principles of research and design
• To practice the research process, tools and techniques
• To facilitate managerial decision making

UNIT 1 Research Bases: Definition and applications of business research; Types of

research –descriptive, exploratory, correlational, explanatory, quantitative,
qualitative; Steps in the research process; establishing operational definitions

UNIT 2 Research scope - Recent advancements in research. Distinction between Pure

& Applied, Historical & Futuristic, Analytical & Synthetic, Descriptive &
Prescriptive, Survey & Experimental and Case & Generic Researches

UNIT 3 Planning of Research: Research problem – Identification, selection and

formulation of research problem – Review of literature in the field of business
- Identifying objectives of the research.

UNIT 4 Economic management: Use in identifying Research Gaps and Techniques –

Hypothesis – Meaning – Sources and Types of Hypothesis – Hypothesis
Formulation for testing – Research design – Factors affecting research design
– Evaluation of research design

UNIT 5 Variables construction for Hypothesis: Identifying variables - Constructing

hypotheses – functions, characteristics, types of hypotheses - Significance of
research in social sciences – Induction and deduction.

UNIT 6 Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation –
Principle of sampling – Essentials of a good sampling – sampling frame;
Methods of sampling: Probability, non-probability, mixed sampling designs;

UNIT 7 Construction of sampling for Finite and Infinite populations – Sample size
determination– Calculations - Factors affecting the size of the sample – Biased
sample – Sampling and non-sampling errors.

UNIT 8 Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data – Primary and secondary data
– Modes of data collection – Observation: Types and Techniques –Interview:
Types and conduct – Preparation for an interview – Effective interview
techniques – Limitations of interview

UNIT 9 Schedule: Meaning and kinds – Essentials of a good schedule – Procedure for
the formulation of a schedule – Questionnaire: Meaning and types – Format of
a good questionnaire– Schedules Vs. Questionnaires

UNIT 10 Scaling techniques: Meaning, Importance, Types of measurement scales –

Nominal, Ordinal, Interval, Ratio; Methods of their construction of
Questionnaires or Schedules – Pre-testing of Data Collection Tools- Validity
and Reliability – Methods.
 UNIT 11 Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning – Importance – Process of data
analysis – Editing – Coding – Tabulation – Diagrams – Univariate, Bivariate
and Multi-variant analysis

UNIT 12 Test of Significance: Fundamentals on Test Procedure- Testing for

significance of Mean/Proportion and difference between Means/Proportions- F
Test for Means and Chi-square test Contingency Table - Parametric Test: T
test, F Test and Z test

UNIT 13 Non-parametric Test: Concept and Types: Mann Whitney Test- Test, Kruskal
Wallis, sign test. Multivariate analysis-factor, cluster, MDS, Discriminant
analysis - The process of interpretation of Test Results– Guidelines for making
valid interpretation

UNIT 14 Report Writing : Role and types of reports – Contents of research report –
Steps involved in drafting reports – Principles of good report writing –
Grammatical Quality – Language flow- Data Support- Diagrammatic
Elucidation- References and Annotations – Clarity and Brevity of
expressions- Features of a good Report- Criteria for evaluating research
reports/ research findings.

REFERENCES

1. John W Best & James V. Kahn Research in Education, Allyn and Bacon, 2009
2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley, New Delhi, 1989.
3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw Hill,
1981.
4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003, HPH.
5. Earl R. BabbieRobert, ThePractice of Social Research, Cengage Learning, 2010.
6. B. Burns & A. Burns, Business Research Methods and Statistics Using SPSS, Sage
Publications, 2008.
7. Krishnaswami and Ranganatham, Research Methodology in social Sciences, HPH,
Mumbai
8. Bryman & Bell: Business Research Methods, OUP.
9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall, (Digitalized)
2007.
10. C.R.Kothari, Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, 2009
 33322 - BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Objectives:
• To understand the concepts and constituents of Business environment
• To know the environmental issues in the business context
• To analyze the changes in the global environmental relating to business

UNIT 1 Business Environment: Introduction: Concepts – Significance - Dynamic

factors of environment – Importance of scanning the environment – Macro and
Micro Environment – Micro and Macro Economics to the business –
Constituents of Business environment

UNIT 2 Fundamental issues captured in PESTLE– Political, Economic, Socio-cultural,

Technological, Legal and Ecological environment- Opportunities and Threats
as environmental issues to address by Businesses.

UNIT 3 Political Environment: Government and Business – Political Systems, Political

Stability and Political Maturity as conditions of business growth - Role of
Government in Business: Entrepreneurial, Catalytic, Competitive, Supportive,
Regulative and Control functions

UNIT 4 Government and Economic planning: Industrial policies and promotion

schemes – Government policy and SSI – Interface between Government and
public sector - Guidelines to the Industries – Industrial Development
strategies; salient features, Role of public and private sectors, Comparative
cost dynamics.

UNIT 5 Economic Environment: Phase of Economic Development and its impact-

GDP Trend and distribution and Business Opportunities – capacity utilisation
– Regional disparities and evaluation - Global Trade and investment
environment.

UNIT 6 Financial System and Business capital: Monetary and Fiscal policies -
Financial Market structure – Money and Capital markets – Stock Exchanges
and Its regulations – Industrial Finance - Types, Risk - Cost-Role of Banks;
Industrial Financial Institutions - Role of Management Institutions

UNIT 7 Role of Central Bank- Fiscal System: Government Budget and Taxation
Measures- Fiscal Deficits and Inflation- FDI and collaboration –Foreign
Capital tapping by businesses- Export-Import policy – Foreign Exchange and
Business Development.

UNIT 8 Labour Environment: Labour Legislation – Labour and social securities –

Industrial Relations – Trade Unions – Workers participation in management –
Exit Policy – Quality Circles.

UNIT 9 Social and Technological Environment: Societal Structure and Features-

Entrepreneurial Society and its implications for business – Social and cultural
factors and their implications for business- Technology Development Phase in
the Economy as conditioner of Business Opportunities
 UNIT 10 Technology Environment: Technology Policy- Technology Trade and transfer-
Technology Trends in India- Role of Information Technology – Clean
Technology. – Time lag in technology – Appropriate technology and
Technology adoption- Impact of technology on globalization.

UNIT 11 Legal and Ecological Environment: Legal Environment as the all-enveloping

factor from inception, location, incorporation, conduct, expansion and closure
of businesses – IDRA and Industrial licensing – Public, Private, Joint and
Cooperative Sectors.

UNIT 12 Legal Aspects of Entering Primary and Secondary Capital Markets- Law on
Patents- Law on Consumer Protection- Law on Environmental Protection-
Need for Clean energy and Reduction of Carbon footprint.

UNIT 13 New Economic Policy Environment in India: Liberalization, Privatization and

Globalization (LPG): Efficiency Drive through Competition- Facets of
Liberalization and impact on business growth

UNIT 14 Aspects of Privatization and impact on business development– Globalization

and Enhanced Opportunities and Threats – Extended competition in Input and
Output Markets Role of WTO, IMF and World Bank in global economic
development.

REFERENCES

1. Brooks, Weatherston, Wilkinson, International Business Environment, Pearson, 2010.

2. Steiner & Steiner, Business, Government and Society: A Managerial Perspective,
McGraw-Hill, 2008.
3. Mohinder Kumar Sharma, Business Environment in India, South Asia Books.
4. Adhikary M, Economic Environment of Business, Sultan Chand & Sons.
5. Amarchand D, Government and Business, TMH.
6. Francis Cherunilam, Business Environment and Development, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2008.
7. Maheswari & Gupta, Government, Business and Society.
 33323 - BUSINESS LAWS
Objectives:
• To understand the legal structure and provision for running a business
• To learn various acts, enactments and amendments of mercantile law
• To know the various aspects of Business law for legal process.

UNIT 1 Indian Contract Act 1872: Contract – Meaning – Essential elements – Nature
and formation of contract: Nature, elements, Classifications of Contracts on
the basis of Validity, Formation and Performance– offer and acceptance

UNIT 2 Offer and Acceptance: Introduction – Proposal – acceptance –

Communications of offer, Acceptance and Revocations – Offer and acceptance
by Post.

UNIT 3 Consideration: Definitions, Types of consideration – essentials of

Consideration – Privity of Contracts: Exceptions – Capacity: Consent –
Legality of object – Quasi contract Discharge of contract - Remedies for
breach of contract – Quasi contracts.

UNIT 4 Special Contracts: Contract of Indemnity and Guarantee – Bailment and

Pledge – Law of Agency-Definition – Rights of Surety -Discharge of Surety –
Bailment and Pledge: Introduction, Classifications, Duties and Rights of Bailer
and Bailee – termination of Bailment -

UNIT 5 Formation of contract under Sale of Goods Act, 1930: Contract of sale -
Conditions and Warranties - Transfer of property - Performance of the
contract: Essentials of valid tender performance, Performance reciprocal
promise- Rights of an unpaid seller.

UNIT 6 Laws on Carriage of Goods: Duties, Rights and Liabilities of Common

Carriers under: (i) The Carriers Act, 1865. (ii) The Railways Act, 1989, (iii)
The Carriage of Goods by Sea Act, 1925, (iv) The Carriage by Air Act, 1972
and (v) The Carriage By Road Act, 2007

UNIT 7 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881: Negotiable Instruments: Features – Types-

Parties – Material alteration – Parties to negotiable instruments – Presentations
of negotiable instrument.

UNIT 8 Insurance: Definition and sources of Law – Judicial set up in India ––

Insurance as a contract -History of Insurance Legislation in India - Legal
principles - Fundamental Principles of Life Insurance Fire Insurance and
Marine Insurance.

UNIT 9 Indian Partnership Act, 1932: Meaning and test of partnership – registration of
firms Life Insurance Corporation Act 1956 – General Insurance Business
Nationalization Act 1973.
 UNIT 10 Partners Relations: Introduction – Eligibility to be a partner – Registration of
change in partner – Limited Liabilities of partnership - Dissolution of firms -
Characteristics – Kinds – Incorporation of Companies – Memorandum of
Association – Articles of Association

UNIT 11 Companies Act 1956: Nature and kinds of companies – Prospectus –

Disclosure Needs - Management and Administration – Director –
Appointment, Powers and Duties

UNIT 12 Formation of a Company : Introduction – process - Minutes and Resolutions –

E-Filling of documents under Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) 21-
Management of companies –Meetings- Types- Requirements -AGM and EGM
– Board Meeting

UNIT 13 Law of Information Technology: Introduction – Rationale behind IT act 2000

– Information technology Act 2000: Scheme of the IT Act 2000: Digital
signature: attribution; Acknowledgement and dispatch of Electronics Record –
Regulation certifying authorities.

UNIT 14 Protection of minority interest: Introduction - Methods of Winding-up - The

Right to Information Act, 2005 Right to know, Salient features of the Act,
obligation of public Authority, Designation of Public Information officer,
Request for obtaining information,

REFERENCES

1. M.S.Pandit and ShobhaPandit, Business Law, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai,

2010.
2. Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, TMH, 2009.
3. N.D. Kapoor, Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
4. M.C. Shukla, Mercantile Law, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
5. Relevant Bare Acts.
6. Balachandran and Thothadri, business Law, TMH, 2010
 33324 - MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

Objectives:
• To learn the principles of Management Information System for organizations
• To understand the uses , function of application MIS in organization
• To analyze the scope of MIS for business organizations

UNIT 1 Foundations of Information System: Information system: Meaning, Role –

System concepts – Organization as a system – Components of Information
system – Various activities of IS and Types of IS

UNIT 2 Information System: Concepts of Information System and Management

information systems design and development-Implementation testing and
conversion- Evolution and element of MIS

UNIT 3 MIS : Definition – Characteristics and basic requirements of MIS – Structure

of MIS- Approaches to MIS development- Computerized MIS- Pre-requisites
of an effective MIS- Limitations of MIS.

UNIT 4 MIS and Decision support System (DSS): MIS Vs. data processing – MIS and
decision support system – MIS and information resource management – DSS
and AI – Overview of AI - DSS models and software.

UNIT 5 MIS and Operations Research- Executive information and Decision support
systems – Artificial intelligence and expert system – Merits and De Merits –
Pitfalls in MIS.

UNIT 6 MIS in Indian organizations – Recent developments in information technology

- Installation of Management Information & Control System in Indian
organization

UNIT 7 Computers and Communication: Information technology and Global

integration –On-line information services – Electronic bulletin board systems –
The internet, electronic mail, interactive video

UNIT 8 Communication Channels: Advantages disadvantages – Communication

networks – Local area networks – Wide area networks – Video conferencing-
Relevance to MIS- Usage in Business process.

UNIT 9 Functional Information systems: MIS for Research Production - MIS for
Marketing - MIS for Personnel - MIS for Finance - MIS for Inventory- MIS
for Logistics- MIS for Product Development- MIS for Market Development.

UNIT 10 Client/ Server Computing: Communication servers – Digital networks –

Electronic data interchange and its applications - Enterprise resource planning
systems (ERP Systems) – Inter-organizational information systems – Value
added networks – Networking.
 UNIT 11 Electronic Commerce and Internet: E-Commerce bases – E-Commerce and
Internet – M-Commerce- Electronic Data Inter-change (EDI) - Applications of
internet and website management - Types of Social Media - uses of social
media in business organization

UNIT 12 Computer System and Resources: Computers systems: Types and Types of
computer system processing - Secondary storage media and devices – Input
and output devices – Hardware standards – Other acquisition issues.

UNIT 13 Managing Information Technology: Managing Information Resources and

technologies – IS architecture and management - Centralized, Decentralized
and Distributed - EDI, Supply chain management & Global Information
technology Management.

UNIT 14 Security and Ethical Challenges: IS controls - facility control and procedural
control - Risks to online operations - Denial of service, spoofing - Ethics for IS
professional - Societal challenges of Information technology

REFERENCES

1. James O'Brien & George Marakas, Management Information Systems, McGraw Hill,
2011.
2. Kenneth Laudon & Jane Laudon, Essentials of MIS, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Lisa Miller, MIS Cases: Decision Making with Application Software, Prentice Hall,
2008.
4. David M. Kroenke, Experiencing MIS, Prentice Hall, 2011.
5. Kenneth C. Laudon, MIS: Managing the Digital Firm, Prentice Hall, 2005.
6. Sadogopan S, Management Information Systems, 2001PHI.
7. Murdie and Ross, Management Information Systems, Prentice Hall.
8. Henri C. Lucas, Information Systems Concepts for Management, McGraw Hill, 1994.
9. Stephen Haag, Management Information Systems, 2008.
 33325 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Objective:

• To understand the concepts and methods and techniques of Human Resource

Management
• To know the Human resource management theories and real time practices
• To identify the contemporary issues in human resource management

UNIT 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management: Concept, Definition,

Objectives, Nature and Scope of HRM - Functions of HRM – Evolution of
human resource management - Role and structure of Human Resource
Function in organizations- Challenges in Human Resource Management

UNIT 2 Human Resource Management Approaches: Phases of human resource

Management- The importance of the human factor – Competitive challenges of
HRM – HRM Models – Roles and responsibilities of HR department.

UNIT 3 Human Resource Planning: Personnel Policy - Characteristics - Role of

human resource manager – Human resource policies – Need, Scope and
Process – Job analysis – Job description – Job specification- Succession
Planning.

UNIT 4 Recruitment and Selection Process: Employment planning and fore casting
Sources of recruitment- internal Vs. External; Domestic Vs. Global sources-
Selection process Building employee commitment : Promotion from within -
Sources, Developing and Using application forms – IT and recruiting on the
internet.

UNIT 5 Employee Testing & selection : Selection process, basic testing concepts,
types of test, work samples & simulation, selection techniques, interview,
common interviewing mistakes, Designing & conducting the effective
interview, small business applications, computer aided interview.

UNIT 6 Training and Development: Orientation & Training: Orienting the employees,
the training process, need analysis, Training techniques, special purpose
training, Training via the internet. - Need Assessment - Training methods
for Operatives and Supervisors

UNIT 7 Executive Development: Need and Programs - Computer applications in

human resource management – Human resource accounting and audit. On-the
- job and off-the-job Development techniques using HR to build a responsive
organization
24
UNIT 8 Employee Compensation : Wages and Salary Administration – Bonus –
Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems - and Employee Benefits, Health
and Social Security Measures,
UNIT 9 Employee Retention: Need and Problems of Employees – various retention
methods– Implication of job change. The control process – Importance –
Methods – Employment retention strategies for production and services
industry

UNIT 10 Appraising and Improving Performance: Performance Appraisal Programs,

Processes and Methods, Job Evaluation, Managing Compensation, Incentives
Performance appraisal: Methods - Problem and solutions - MBO approach -
The appraisal interviews - Performance appraisal in practice.

UNIT 11 Managing careers: Career planning and development - Managing promotions

and transfers - Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems – Promotion –
Demotions – Transfers- Labour Attrition: Causes and Consequences

UNIT 12 Employee Welfare, Separation: Welfare and safety – Accident prevention –

Employee Grievances and their Redressal – Industrial Relations - Statutory
benefits - non-statutory (voluntary) benefits – Insurance benefits - retirement
benefits and other welfare measures to build employee commitment

UNIT 13 Industrial relations and collective bargaining: Trade unions – Collective

bargaining - future of trade unionism - Discipline administration - grievances
handling - managing dismissals and workers Participation in Management-
Separation: Need and Methods.

UNIT 14 Human Resource Information System- Personnel Records/ Reports- e-Record

on Employees – Personnel research and personnel audit – Objectives – Scope
and importance.

25
REFERENCES

1. Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management,South-WesternCollege, 2004.

2. Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-WesternCollege,
2007.
3. R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management,Prentice Hall, 2011.
4. Venkataraman& Srivastava, Personnel Management & Human Resources
5. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations
6. Yodder&Standohar, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
7. Edwin B. Flippo, Personnel Management , McGraw-Hill, 1984
8. Pigors and Myers, Personnel Administration
9. R.S. Dwivedi, Manpower Management
10. Lynton &Pareek, Training and Development, Vistaar Publications, 1990.

26
 33331 - MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
• To help the learners understand markets, consumers and marketing principles.
• To understand the buyer behaviour and influencing factors
• To learn marketing plan, pricing, promotion and distribution in global context

UNIT 1 Introduction to Marketing: Meaning and Scope of Marketing; Marketing

Philosophies; Marketing Management Process-an overview; Modern
Marketing Concept: Social marketing concept – Approaches to the study of
marketing.

UNIT 2 Marketing segmentation: Meaning – Bases for segmentation, benefits –

Systems approach - Four Ps of Product and Seven Ps Service marketing mix
and Extensions- Targeting and Positioning - meaning and importance.

UNIT 3 Marketing Environment: Internal and External and Demographic factors –

Adopting marketing to new liberalized and globalized economy –
Digitalization – Customization and E business settings.

UNIT 4 Consumer Behaviour : Meaning and importance – Consumer buying process –

Determinants and Theories of consumer behaviour – Psychological,
sociological determinants – Theories and their relevance to marketing-

UNIT 5 Marketing Research: Procedure. Meaning – Objectives – Process- Demand

Forecasting- Marketing Information System – Strategic marketing plan and
organization – Changing marketing practices.

UNIT 6 Product Mix Management: Product planning and development – Meaning and
process – Test marketing – Product failures – Product line management:
Practices – Implications and Strategies for current market condition.

UNIT 7 Product life cycles: Meaning and Stages – Strategies – Managing PLC-
Product-Market Integration: Strategies – Product positioning – Diversification
– Product line simplification – Planned obsolescence – Branding Policies and
Strategies – Packing.

UNIT 8 Price Mix Management: Pricing and pricing policies – Objectives –

Procedures – Bases for and Methods of price fixing. Cases for Free Pricing,
Administered and Regulated pricing – Pricing and product life cycle

UNIT 9 Physical Distribution Mix: Types of physical Distribution - Importance of

Physical Distribution- Distribution channel policy – Logistics Decisions –
Methods – Strategic alliance for Logistic cost reduction.
27
 UNIT 10 Marketing Channel system: Marketing channel decisions: Choice
considerations– Managing Conflict and Cooperation in channels – Middlemen
functions- Modern Trends in Retailing- Malls and Online.

UNIT 11 Promotional Mix: Personal selling Vs. impersonal selling – Personal selling –
Process – Steps in selling – Management of sales force – Recruitment and
selection – Training – Compensation plans – Evaluation of performance

UNIT 12 Integrated marketing communication Process: Advertising and sales promotion

– Online Sales promotional activities – Public relationships – Direct
marketing: Meaning, Nature, Growth and Channels.

UNIT 13 Advertising: Importance – Objectives – Media planning and selection –

Factors influencing selection – Advertisement copy – Layout – Evaluation of
advertising – Advertising budget – Sales promotion – Methods and practices.

UNIT 14 Competitor analyses: Identifying and analyzing the competitors – Types of

Competitors – Competitive strategies framing for leaders, challengers,
followers and nichers. Customer relationship marketing: Customer data base,
Data ware housing and data mining

REFERENCES

1. Etzel, Walker and Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill, 2004

2. Philip Kotler & Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Jerome Mccarthy, Basic Marketing, Richard D. Irwin.
4. Cundiff, Still &Govani, Fundamentals of Modern Marketing, Prentice Hall.
5. Memoria & Joshi, Fundamental of Marketing.
6. Paul Peter and James Donnelly Jr, Marketing Management, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
7. William O. Bearden, Marketing: Principles & Perspectives, McGraw-Hill, 2006.
8. William Arens, et al, Contemporary Advertising, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
9. Perreault and McGarthy - Basic Marketing - Tata McGraw Hill, 2002\

10. Michael J Etzel, Bruce J Walker, William J Stanton and Ajay Pandit, Marketing
concepts and cases - TMH 13th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.

28
 33332 - FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Objectives:
• To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management
• To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital management.
• To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications

UNIT 1 Introduction: Financial management: objectives - Concept, nature, evaluation

and significance – Finance Functions: Managerial and operative – Role of
Financial management in the organization – Indian Financial system.

UNIT 2 Financial System: Legal and Regulatory frame work – Financial Functions:
Meaning and scope – Finance and Tax Management Nexus- Tax Avoidance
and Tax evasion- Tax incentive and business decisions.

UNIT 3 Investment Function: Meaning and scope - Time value of Money concepts and
applications –Risk return relationship - Dividend function – Risk return trade
off – Management planning- Global management environment

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity share,
preference shares – types of preference share - debentures – types - sources of
long-term capital.

UNIT 5 Capital Issues: Meaning, Nature, Purpose – Roles and Guidelines of SEBI in
capital issues- Bridge finance, loan syndication, Book building – Borrowings
from the term lending institutions and International capital market- Tax
considerations in financing decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital : Concept of cost of capital- Cost of debt, equity, preference
share capital, retaining earning - Weighted average cost: EBIT –EPS
Analysis- Tax, Capital structure and Value nexus - Computation of overall
cost of capital – Tax and cost of capital.

UNIT 7 Capital structure: Determinates - Concept and Types- Optimum capital

structure – Theories of capital structure – Net income and net operative income
approach – M.M. Approach – Traditional theory – Their assumptions –
Significance and limitations – Management leverage operating leverage –
Combined leverage.

UNIT 8 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital Investment-

Methods of appraisal under certainty conditions: PBP, ARR, IRR and NPV
techniques - Basic and International capital budgeting.
29
 UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis-
Decision tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures-
Tax considerations in Investment Decisions Cost of capital and Investment
Decisions.
UNIT 10 Working Capital Management: Definitions and Objectives - Concept and
types – Determinants – Financing approaches – Conservative approaches -
Sources of working capital finance Factors affecting working capital
requirements- Working capital financing by commercial banks – Types of
assistance

UNIT 11 Inventories and receivables Management under conditions of certainty and

uncertainty – Operating cycle – Planning of funds through the management of
assets – Various techniques used.

UNIT 12 Cash and liquidity management: Credit Management and evaluation

alternative credit variables Methods and Functions- Tax considerations in
Remittances and Purchases.

UNIT 13 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories – Dividend
irrelevance under M.M. Theory – Assumptions – Limitations - Implications
and contributions of theories in financial decision making process.

UNIT 14 Dividend Policy: Types – Share valuation practices – Factors affecting

dividend decision – Tax considerations in dividend decision when tax is levied
at the hands of companies and recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Thomson ONE,
2010
2. Brigham and Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson ONE, 2009.
3. Van Horne: Fundamentals of Financial Management, Prentice Hall, 2008
4. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management,South-WesternCollege Pub., 2010
5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, McGraw Hill, 2008.
6. Khan and Jain, Financial Management ,Tata McGrawHill,2009
7. Pandey I M, Financial Management, Vikas Publishers,2009
8. Sheeba Kapil(2010), Financial Management, Pearson Education.
9. B J Camsey, Engene F.Brigham, “Introduction to Financial Management”, The Gryden
Press

30
 33333: PRINCIPLES OF HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT
Objective:
• To examine the concept of Hospital management principles
• To understand the concept of Hospital organizations and leadership.

UNIT 1 Hospital Management - Meaning - Importance - Hospital Planning -

Meaning - Rationale - Types of plans - Planning process

UNIT 2 Steps in hospital planning Process - MBO in hospitals - Need - Process -

Advantages and limitations

UNIT 3 Decision-making – decision tree – analysis – Sources - Meaning and

importance - Types - Process.

UNIT 4 Hospital Organisation - Meaning - structures - Organisation Chart -

Delegation Vs Decentralisation

UNIT 5 Depart mentation- supermarket – hypermarket – assortment- Organisational

competence - Core competence - Strategic alliances.

UNIT 6 Direction– concept – definition – Meaning and significance – traits-

Problems - Prospective

UNIT 7 Principles of effective direction – meaning – types – structure – scope –

features- implications of Supervision

UNIT 8 Leadership in hospitals – Meaning – Scope – Importance – Styles – Qualities

of successful leader.

UNIT 9 Motivation in Hospitals – Meaning – Types – Motivational theories – Their

impact on hospital management – Motivating the employees of hospitals.

UNIT 10 Hospital Communications – Essentials – vertical communications –

horizontal communications – oral communications- Types – Barriers

UNIT 11 Methods to overcome barriers – personal connivance - Principles of effective

communication – Problem

31
UNIT 12 Coordination – types – essentials – problems - Importance of coordination in
hospitals – Techniques of coordination.

UNIT 13 New Perspectives in Management: Business Process Outsourcing –

Business Process Re-engineering

UNIT 14 Enterprise Resource Planning – Supply Chain Management – types – private –

public – integrated - logistics.

REFERENCE:

1. Essentials of Management : Koontz and O’ Donnel

2. Management : Griffin

32
 33334: HOSPITAL PLANNING AND DESIGNING
Objective:
• To Know the basic Concept of Hospital Planning and designing
• To identify the standards in Hospital

UNIT 1 Introduction :Introduction to Hospital – meaning – definition – concept –

types nature – scope - Classification – Changing role of hospitals

UNIT 2 role of hospital administration – hospital as a system – hospital and

community

UNIT 3 Planning :Principles of planning – regionalization – Hospital planning team –

Planning process

UNIT 4 Size of the hospital – Site selection – tactic – strategic – problems –

accommodations

UNIT 5 Hospital architect – Architect report – Equipping a hospital – Interiors and

Graphics – Construction and Commissioning.

UNIT 6 Technical Analysis : Assessment the extent need for the hospital services –
Demand and need

UNIT 7 Factors influencing hospital utilization – Bed planning –Land requirements –

Project cost

UNIT 8 Space requirements – Hospital drawings and documents – layout – designing –

budget estimate – approval.

UNIT 9 Hospital Design : Building requirement – Entrance and ambulatory zone –

Diagnostic zone – Intermediate zone

UNIT 10 Critical zone – Service zone – Administrative zone.

UNIT 11 Facilities Planning : Transport – Communication –Food services

UNIT 12 Mortuary - Information system – Minor facilities – others.

33
UNIT 13 Standard in Hospital : Voluntary and mandatory standards – General standards
–Mechanical standards

UNIT 14 Electrical standards – Standard for centralised medical gas system – Standards
Biomedical waste.

REFERENCE

1. G.D. Kunders, Designing for Total Quality in Health Care.

2. Ervin Putseps, ModernHospital
3. Macaulary HMC and Liewelyn – Davis, Hospital Planning and Administration
4. Dr.AshokSahni – Hospital Planning.
5. Frank E-Fischer – How to Achieve Effective Communication
6. BM Sakharkar – Principles of Hospital Administration and Planning

34
 33335- MATERIALS MANAGEMENT IN HOSPITALS
Objective:

• To know the material management concepts in Hospital

• To analysis the purchasing methods and policies

UNIT 1 Materials Management: Concept – Objectives – Importance- meaning - nature

– scope – features

UNIT 2 Material planning – Objectives – Integrated approach to material planning and

control - Relevance of materials management to hospitals.

UNIT 3 Purchasing –meaning – Types- sources -prudential purchase - problems –

Significance of purchasing policy

UNIT 4 Principles of scientific purchasing – Essentials – barriers - Factors of

influencing- implications

UNIT 5 Essence of sound purchasing policy – active purchase policy – day to day
purchase

UNIT 6 Purchasing methods – Purchasing procedure – types – significance – features-

implications

UNIT 7 Imports of equipment’s and medicines for hospitals – types – nature –

features- problems – implications

UNIT 8 Documents – meaning – concept – significance – scope - Procedure -

implications

UNIT 9 Material Handling: Importance – Principles – Benefits – types – features –

methods – procedure - implications

UNIT 10 Material handling equipment’s – meaning – definitions – concept – nature –

types – significance

UNIT 11 Selection of material handling equipment’s - procedure – methods- problems

– implications

35
UNIT 12 Stores Management: Objectives – meaning – concept – nature – scope -
Functions – features

UNIT 13 Stores location – Store accounting and records – Stock verification – layout –
types- protection – insurance

UNIT 14 Inventory Management: Concept – meaning - Importance – Techniques –

ABC analysis – EOQ

REFERENCE :
1. Hospital Medical International Pvt. Ltd., Hospital Administration, Office Journal of I.H.A

36
 33341- HOSPITAL RECORDS MANAGEMENT
Objective:

• To gain knowledge from the Hospital record management

• To expose the students to prepare medical forms and registers

UNIT I History & Significance of Medical Records: History – Meaning - definition –

types – nature – scope – features- implications

UNIT 2 Significance of Medical Records: Purpose – Meaning - definition – types –

nature – scope – features Development and Content – Format

UNIT 3 Significance of Medical Records: types – features – implications - Uses &

Importance.

UNIT 4 Medical Records Department: Meaning – types – nature Functions –

Objectives – Assembling

UNIT 5 Filing - Filing System – Coding – Indexing – Deficiency Check – Retrieval –

Retention – Storage – types

UNIT 6 Other Services: Outpatient – Inpatient – Admission – Laboratory – Radiology

UNIT 7 Pharmacy –meaning – definition – concept – nature – scope - Control of

Movement of Records – Statistics - significance.

UNIT 8 Medical Forms & Registers: Forms: Meaning – Standardization – Availability

– Development

UNIT 9 Medical Forms & Registers: Design – Control – Inventory – Uses – Basic
Forms – types – features - implications

UNIT 10 Registers: types – nature – scope - Hospital Administrative Records – Nurses

Records.

37
UNIT 11 Computerisation and Quality Control in Medical Records: Introduction –
Administrative Application – Patient Related Application – Criteria

UNIT 12 Computerisation and Quality Control in Medical Records Computerisation of

Medical Records – Uses – Inactive Medical Records.

UNIT 13 Quality Control: Quantitative Analysis, Qualitative Analysis - Medical Audit –

Standards – Responsibility – Records in Infection Control – General
Instructions.

UNIT 14 Legal Aspects of Medical Records: Introduction – Personal – Impersonal –

Consumer Protection Act – Documentation Medical Audit Committee – Tools
– Medicolegal Cases – Custody – Disposal – Consent – Release of
Information – Code of Ethics – Purpose of Confidential Relationship – Law of
Evidence – Responsibility.

REFERENCE:
1. Managing a ModernHospital, A. V. Srinivasan, Response Books, I Ed.
2. Principles of Hospital Administration and Planning, BM Sakharkar, Jaypee Brothers, I
Ed
3. Hospital and Health Service Administration, Syed Amin Tabish, OxfordUniversity
Press, I Ed.
4. Medical Records Organisation & Management, G. D. Mogli, Jaypee Brothers.

38
 33342 - HOSPITAL RELATED LAWS
Objective:

• To expose the students known the hospital related law

• To provide the knowledge about medical negligence +

UNIT 1 Laws pertaining to Health: Central Births and Deaths Registration Act, 1969 -
health hazards

UNIT 2 Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act, 1971 – treatment – concession –

facility – private – public- quasi government

UNIT 3 Infant Milk Substitutes, Feeding Bottles and Infant Food Act, 1992 – child kit

UNIT 4 Laws pertaining to Hospitals: Transplantation of Human Organs Act, 1994

UNIT 5 Pre-natal Diagnostic Techniques (Regulation and Prevention of Misuse) Act,

1994

UNIT 6 Medical Negligence – Medico Legal Case – Dying Declaration

UNIT 7 Laws pertaining to Manufacture and Sale of Drugs: Drugs and Cosmetics Act,
1940

UNIT 8 Pharmacy Act, 1948 – Drugs and Magic Remedies (Objectionable

Advertisement) Act, 1954

UNIT 9 Poison Act, 1919 – Legislation for Tobacco Control.

UNIT 10 Labour Laws Applicable to Hospitals-I: Industrial Employment (Standing

Order) Act, 1946 – Shops and Establishment Act, 1954

UNIT 11 Employees’ State Insurance Act, 1948 – Employees’ Provident Fund Act,
1952 – Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 – Maternity Benefit Act, 1961.

UNIT 12 Labour Laws Applicable to Hospitals-II: Minimum Wages Act, 1948 –

Payment of Wages Act, 1936 – Payment of Bonus Act, 1965.

39
UNIT 13 Labour Laws Applicable to Hospitals-III: Factories Act, 1948 – Workmen’s
Compensation Act, 1923

UNIT 14 Industrial Disputes Act, 1947 – Trade Union Act, 1926 – Consumer Protection
Act, 1986.

REFERENCE

1. Kapoor N D, Industrial Laws.

2. Bare Acts.

40
 33343: MARKETING OF HOSPITAL SERVICES
Objective:
• To understand the concept of service marketing
• To give exposure about marketing mix of hospitals

UNIT I Services Marketing: Concept – Significance – Salient features – Service

Mission Statement

UNIT 2 Planning for marketing hospital services – Market Segmentation in hospital

services

UNIT 3 Services mix – Elements – Their relation to hospital marketing.

UNIT 4 Hospital Services – Service product mix – Planning and development of new
services – Modification – Diversification and Elimination of services

UNIT 5 Branding of hospital services – Their implication on marketing – Package of

services.

UNIT 6 Pricing of Hospital Services – Meaning – Factors influencing pricing –

Pricing objectives and methods.

UNIT 7 Distribution of hospital services – Need – Importance – Types – Medical

camps – Suburbancenters

UNIT 8 Rural centers management – Logistics management – Franchise in hospital

services.

UNIT 9 Promotion and Communication mix for Hospital Services – Promotional

strategies

UNIT 10 Advertisement and Public relations – Sales Promotion – Personal selling.

UNIT 11 People and Process in hospital services – Internal marketing – processes -

Customer relationship marketing

41
UNIT 12 Process – Service quality – Delivery of hospital services – Procedures, tasks,
schedules, mechanisms, activities and routines.

UNIT 13 Physical Evidence in hospital services – Meaning – Need

UNIT 14 Importance – Kinds – Brochures – Physical facilities and equipment.

REFERENCES:
1. Jha S.M, “Services Marketing”, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai, 1998.
2. Adrian Payne, “The Essence Of Services Marketing”, Phi, New Delhi, 2000.
3. Helen Woodruffe, “Services Marketing”, Macmillan, Delhi, 1995.

42
 33344: QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN HOSPITALS
Objective:
• To provide an idea about quality concepts
• To understand the TQM measures

UNIT 1 Quality Concepts and Total Quality Management - Quality: Significance –

Meaning – Concept – Quality Terminologies
UNIT 2 Total Quality Management: Concept – Elements – Aspects – Focus –
Components – Process.
UNIT 3 Quality Management -ISO 9000: Evolution – Meaning – Characteristics
UNIT 4 Quality Management Benefits – ISO Manual – meaning – definitions - types
UNIT 5 JCIA: Meaning – Purpose - ISO Case Study
UNIT 6 Quality Assurance - Concept -Process - Purpose - Methods - Standards and
Criteria
UNIT 7 Quality Management - Quality Assurance Committee - scope - need and
importance - objectives
UNIT 8 Quality Audit & Evaluation of Health Care Services - Quality System
Assessments: Quality Auditing – Purpose – Types – Techniques
UNIT 9 Quality Control - Quality Circles - Steps –Review - Measurements - Quality
Delivery Process.
UNIT 10 Evaluation of Hospital Performance: Purpose – Organization – Prerequisites –
Methods – Parameters – Evaluation – Standardisation.
UNIT 11 Tools and Techniques of Quality - Flow Charting – Brainstorming – Pareto
Analysis – Cause and Effect Analysis – Fishbone Diagram – Scatter Diagram –
Histograms
UNIT 12 Company Self-Assessment Process – Quality Strategy – Quality Policies –
Business Process Analysis – Process Re-engineering
UNIT 13 Benchmarking – Redesign Process – Problem Solving – scope – implications-
features.
UNIT 14 Training for Quality - Training Process – Analyzing Training Needs – Training
Plan.

43
REFERENCES:

1. Principles of Hospital Administration and Planning, BM Sakharkar, Jaypee Brothers, I Ed.

2. Hospital and Health Service Administration, Syed Amin Tabish, OxfordUniversity Press, I
Ed.
3. Managing a ModernHospital, A. V. Srinivasan, Response Books, I Ed.
4. The Essence of Total Quality Management, John Bank, Prentice Hall Intentional Ltd., I Ed.
5. Managing Quality, Desmond Bell, Philip McBride and George Wilson, Butterworth-
Heinemann Ltd., I Ed.

44
 33345 - HOSPITAL HAZARDS MANAGEMENT
Objective:

• To analysis the hazards in hospital management

• To expose student about bio medical waste management

UNIT 1 Hospital Hazards: Meaning – definitions -Types – Physical – Biological

UNIT 2 Mechanical – Psychological – Its impact on employees – Preventive

measures.

UNIT 3 Hospital Hazards Management: Meaning – Need – Principles – Purpose.

UNIT 4 Hospital Related Infection: Types of infection – Common Nosocomial infections

and their Causative agents

UNIT 5 Prevention of hospital acquired infection – insurance – building – persons-

groups

UNIT 6 Role of the central sterile supply department – Infection control committee –
Monitoring and control of cross infection – Staff health.

UNIT 7 Biomedical Waste Management: Meaning – Categories of biomedical wastes –

Disposal of biomedical waste products – Incineration and its importance

UNIT 8 TNPCB Rules and Schedules – Standards for waste autoclaving, microwaving
and deep burial – Segregation, packaging – Transportation and storage.

UNIT 9 Human Waste Disposal and Sewage Disposal: Diseases carried from excreta –
Sanitation barrier – Methods of excreta disposal

UNIT 10 Sewage Wastes: Meaning – Composition – Aims of sewage disposal –

Decomposition of organic matter – Modern sewage treatment

UNIT 11 Drawbacks of improper disposal of wastes – Solid and liquid – recycling -

drawbacks.

45
UNIT 12 Medical Insurance: Insurance companies – Life Insurance for people with
medical problems – Medicare

UNIT 13 Third Party Insurance - Paramount health Care Services – mediclaim policy

UNIT 14 Star Health and Services Ltd., - ICICI Lombard Insurance Co. – Their Payment
terms and conditions – united india Insurance policy for the Government
Servant

REFERENCE
1. Park K, Preventive and Social Medicine.
2. Park K, Text Book on Hygiene and Preventive Medicine, BanarsidasBhanot

46
3.DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The course shall consist of two academic years divided into four semesters.

4.Faculty and Support Staff Requirements

This programme requires the following faculty and supporting staffs

Staff Category Required

Core Faculty * 3
Faculty for Specialization* 2
Clerical Assistant 1

*At least Assistant Professor Level (Either permanent or part time)

5.Instructional Delivery Mechanism

Each semester there will be one contact programme of 80 hours duration in theory. The SLM
(Self Learning Material) will be supplied to the students in print form as well as in CD form. The
face to face contact sessions of the programme for theory courses will be held at the head quarter
/ learning centres. The conduct of end semester examinations, evaluation and issuance of
certificates will be done by office of the Controller of examinations, Alagappa University,
Karaikudi.

F) PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION, CURRICULUM TRANSACTION, AND

EVALUATION

Procedure of Admission
A candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University in the Pattern of
10+2+3 shall be permitted to appear and qualify for the programme.

Curriculum Transactions:

The class room teaching would be through conventional lecture, use of OHP, power point
presentation and novel innovative teaching ideas like television and computer aided instruction.
Student seminars would be arranged to improve their awareness and communicative skill.

47
Face to face contact session will be conducted as given in below table.

Course Type Face to Face Contact

Session/semester (in Hours)
5 Theory courses with 4 credits
80
each
Total 80

Evaluation
The examinations shall be conducted for theory to assess the knowledge acquired during
the study. There shall be two systems of examinations viz., internal and external examinations. In
the case of theory courses, the internal evaluation shall be conducted as Continuous Internal
Assessment via. Student assignments preparation. The internal assessment shall comprise of
maximum 25 marks for each course. The end semester examination shall be of three hours
duration to each course at the end of each semester. The end semester examinations shall
comprise of maximum of 75 marks for each course. The candidate failing in any course(s) will
be permitted to appear for each failed course(s) in the subsequent examination.
f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments:
The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory courses

Component Marks

Assignments (2) 25
(12.5+12.5)
Total 25
Question paper pattern (Theory)

• The question paper carries a maximum of 75 marks.

• The question paper consists of three sections namely Part-A, Part-B and Part-C.
• Part-A consists of 10 questions of 2 marks each (10 x 2 = 20 marks) with no choice. The
candidate should answer all questions.
• Part-B consists of 5 either or choice questions. Each question carries 5 marks (5 x 5=25
marks).
• Part-C consists of 5 questions. Each question carries 10 marks. The candidate should
Answer any three questions (10 x 3 = 30 marks).

48
Passing minimum

• There shall be no Passing Minimum for Internal.

• For External Examination, Passing Minimum shall be of 50% (Fifty Percentage) of the
maximum marks (75) prescribed for the paper.

• In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of 50 Mark for each
Paper
• Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (internal + external).

Candidate who does not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass in a course shall be
required to appear and pass the same at a subsequent appearance.

Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and classification to indicate the
performance of the candidate.

Range of Marks Grade Points Letter Grade Description

90-100 9.0-10.0 O Outstanding

80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent
75-79 7.5-7.9 D Distinction
70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good
60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good
50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average
00-49 0.0 U Re-appear
ABSENT 0.0 AAA ABSENT

Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semester

Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester.
n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited

49
For a semester;

Grade Point Average [GPA] = ∑iCiGi/ ∑i Ci

Grade Point Average = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the courses

Sum of the credits of the courses in a semester

For the entire programme;

Cumulative Grade Point Average [CGPA] = ∑n ∑iCniGni/ ∑n ∑iCni

CGPA = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the entire programme

Sum of the credits of the courses for the entire programme

CGPA Grad Classification of Final

Result

9.5-10.0 O+ First Class- Exemplary*

9.0 and above but below 9.5 O

8.5 and above but below 9.0 D++ First Class with
8.0 and above but below 8.5 D+ Distinction*

7.5 and above but below 8.0 D

7.0 and above but below 7.5 A++ First Class

6.5 and above but below 7.0 A+
6.0 and above but below 6.5 A

5.5 and above but below 6.0 B+ Second Class

5.0 and above but below 5.5 B

0.0 and above but below 5.0 U Re-appear

*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the prescribed semester of
the PG Programme are eligible.

50
Maximum duration for completion of the course

The maximum duration for the programme shall not exceed five years after the completion of
the minimum duration of the programme.

Commencement of this regulation

These regulations shall come into effect from the academic year 2018-19 for students who are
admitted to the first year of the course during the academic year 2018-19.

Fee structure

Sl. No. Fees Detail Amount in Rs.

First Year Second Year

1 Admission Processing Fees 300.00 -

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

3 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00

G) REQUIREMENT OF THE LIBRARY RESOURCES:

LIBRARY RESOURCES
The Central Library is one of the important central facilities of Alagappa University. It has text
book, reference books, conference proceedings, back volumes, standards, and non-book material
such as CD-ROMs and audios. The central Library procured several e-books in different areas.
The library also subscribes to about 250 current periodicals. The Directorate of Distance
Education of Alagappa University has adequate number of copies of books related to
Management Programme.

51
COST ESTIMATE OF THE PROGRAMME AND THE PROVISIONS:

Sl. No. Nature of Expenditure Amount in Rs.

(Approx.)
1 Programme Development 10,00,000/-
2 Programme Delivery 20,00,000/-
3 Programme Maintenance 3,00,000/-

i) QUALITY ASSURANCE MECHANISM AND EXPECTED PROGRAMME

OUTCOMES

• The feedback from students on teaching will be collected every semester using standard
formats.
• Feedback on the curriculum will also be collected from the experiences of the students
which help teachers in fine tuning of deliverables in the classroom.
• It helps in improving the standard of teaching as expected by the students.
• Exit survey feedback on various parameters to improve and quality of the programme and
support services like course material, library and infrastructure.
• It helps to Strengthen the contents of the program to meet the requirements of the
employment market and keep the curriculum as a treasure of knowledge.
• This programme provides Opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate
knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes.

****

52
53
54
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT
MASTER OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE EDUCATION

ALAGAPPA UNIVERSITY
KARAIKUDI – 630 003
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT

MBA HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

a) PROGRAMME MISSION AND OBJECTIVES

Business Studies have fascinated humans for two reasons, namely generating interest and
augmenting essentials of running a firm effectively. That is why their study is enchanting and
glorifying. The primary objective of this programme is to provide ample exposure to subjects
from the fields of business legacy and accountancy, equip the Students for entry level jobs in
industry and to contribute to the economic development of the country.

b) RELEVANCE OF THE PROGRAMME WITH HEI’S MISSION AND GOALS:

The Alagappa University is functioning with following Vision and Mission:

Mission: Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular emphasis on

‘PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and Learning

Vision: Affording High Quality Higher Education to the learners so that they are transformed
into intellectually competent human resources that will help in the uplift of the nation to
Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence.

Therefore, the introduction of MBA HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT programme in

the Directorate of Distance Education will contribute substantially in fulfilling the mission of
Alagappa University. Such a higher education in subject with appropriate Practical Exposer
will enrich the human resources for the uplift of the Nation to Educational, Social,
Technological, Environmental and Economic Magnificence (ESTEEM).

c) NATURE OF PROSPECTIVE TARGET GROUP OF LEARNERS

• Working Professionals
• Entrepreneurs
• Service Personnel
• Academic Faculty
• Government Officials
• Researchers
• Home makers
• Unemployed Graduates
d) APPROPRIATENESS OF PROGRAMME

To Attain Leadership in spearheading qualitative and responsible academic programs relevant

to the society through cost effective off-campus distance mode of education. knowledge and
understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes in the following areas:

• The fundamental concepts of Management

• The higher-level taxonomy and diversity of Business Studies.
• How principles of Business can be applied to problems
• Internship training in Industry
• Undertake Inter tasks and techniques.
• Inter-disciplinary knowledge like statistics, Mathematics, Computer and E-Banking.
• Using the SPSS package for the analysis of data
• It also improves the Intellectual skills of the students.
• In nutshell, these skills will improve the performance of the students parameters.
E) INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN

MBA HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Course Title CIA ESE TOT C

Code Max. Max. Max.
I Semester
34311 Management – Principles and Practices 25 75 100 4
34312 Organizational Behaviour 25 75 100 4
34313 Managerial Economics 25 75 100 4
34314 Quantitative Techniques 25 75 100 4
34315 Financial and Management Accounting 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
II Semester
34321 Research Methods 25 75 100 4
34322 Business Environment 25 75 100 4
34323 Business Laws 25 75 100 4
34324 Management Information System 25 75 100 4
34325 Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
III Semester
34331 Marketing Management 25 75 100 4
34332 Financial Management 25 75 100 4
34333 Industrial Relations Management 25 75 100 4

34334 Labour Legislations – 1 25 75 100 4

34335 Training and Development 25 75 100 4

Total 125 375 500 20

IV Semester
34341 Compensation Management 25 75 100 4
34342 Global Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4
34343 Emotional Competence 25 75 100 4
34344 Labour Legislations – II 25 75 100 4
34345 Organizational Development 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
Grand Total 2000 80
Course Code Legend:
3 4 3 Y Z

343- M.B.A Programme

Y -Semester Number
Z- Course Number in the Semester

CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination, TOT: Total,
C: Credit Points, Max.: Maximum

No. of Credits per Course (Theory) - 5 Total No. of Credits per Semester- 20
Total Credits for the Programme- 20 X 4 = 80
 34311- MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES

Objectives:
• To introduce the basic concepts of Management functions and principles
• To learn the scientific decision making and modern trend in the management process
• To understand the contemporary practices and issues in management

UNIT 1 Management: Definition – Nature, Scope and Functions – Evolution of

Management – Management thought in modern trend – Patterns of the
management analysis – Management Vs. Administration - Management and
Society: The external Environment, Social Responsibility and Ethics.

UNIT 2 Management Science and Theories : Contributions of FW Taylor, Henri Fayol,

Elton Mayo, Roethilisberger, H.A.Simon and P.F Drucker - Universality of
Management - Relevance of management to different types of organization.

UNIT 3 Planning: Nature and Purpose – Principles and planning premises –

Components of planning as Vision, Mission, Objectives, Managing By
Objective (MBO) Strategies, Types and Policies -Planning and Decision
Making: Planning process.

UNIT 4 Decision making: Meanings and Types – Decision-making Process under

Conditions of Certainty and Uncertainty – Rational Decision Making
Strategies, Procedures, Methods, Rules, Projects and Budgets.

UNIT 5 Organizing: Nature, Importance, Principles, purpose and Scope - Organizing

functions of management – Classifications of organization – Principles and
theories of organization – Effective Organizing – Organizational Culture and
Global Organizing.

UNIT 6 Organizational Structure – Departmentalization – Span of control – Line and

staff functions – Formal and Informal Groups in Organizations - Authority and
responsibility - Centralization and decentralization – Delegation of authority –
Committees – Informal organization.

UNIT 7 Staffing: General Principles of Staffing- Importance, techniques, Staff

authority and Empowerment in the organization – Selection and Recruitment -
Orientation - Career Development - Career stages – Training – Performance
Appraisal.

UNIT 8 Creativity and Innovation – Motivation - Meaning – Importance – Human

factors of Motivation – Motivation Theories: Maslow, Herzberg, Mc Gregor
(X&Y), Ouchi (Z) ,Vroom, Porter-Lawler, McClelland and Adam –
Physiological and psychological aspects of motivation .

UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:

Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,
Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.
 Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics and
Ethics. Leader Vs. Manager.

UNIT 10 Communications: Meaning – Types – Process – Communication in the

decision making – Global Leading - Effective communication in the levels of
management. – Uses of Communication to Planning, Organizing, coordinating
and controlling.

UNIT 11 Co-ordination: Concept; Meaning, Characteristics, Importance in the

organization, Co-ordination process and principles - Techniques of Effective
co-ordination in the organization - Understanding and managing the group
process.

UNIT 12 Business ethics: Relevance of values in Management; Holistic approach for

managers indecision-making; Ethical Management: Role of organizational
culture in ethics – Ethics Committee in the organization.

UNIT 13 Controlling: Objectives and Process of control Devices of control – Integrated

control – Special control techniques- Contemporary - Perspectives in Device
of Controls

UNIT 14 New Perspectives in Management - Strategic alliances – Core competence –

Business process reengineering – Total quality management – Six Sigma-
Benchmarking- Balanced Score-card.

REFERENCES

1. Stoner, et-al, Management, Prentice Hall, 1989.

2. Koontz and O’Donnell, Management: A Systems Approach, McGraw Hill, 1990
3. Weihrich and Koontz,Management: A Global Perspective, McGraw Hill, 1988
4. Peter F. Drucker, Management, 2008.
5. Gene Burton and Manab Thakur, Management Today: Principles and Practice, Tata
McGraw Hill.
6. Ricky W. Griffin, Management, South-WesternCollege Publications, 2010
7. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, Management, 9th Edition, 2006.
8. Kaplan and Norton, The Strategy-Focused Organization: How Balanced Scorecard
Companies Thrive in the New Business Environment, HBP, 2000.
 34312 - ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Objectives:
• To understand the personality trades and influence on the organization.
• To imbibe the necessary conceptual understanding of behaviour related people
• To learn the modern trends, theories and changes in organizational Behaviour.

UNIT 1 Organizational Behaviour: History – Meaning Elements – Evolution,

Challenges and opportunities – Trends – disciplines – Approaches – Models –
Management functions relevance to organizational Behaviour – Global
Emergence of OB as a discipline.

UNIT 2 Personality – Determinants, Structure, Behaviour, Assessment, Individual

Behaviour: Personality & Attitudes- Development of personality – Nature and
dimensions of attitude – Trait Theory – Organizational fit – Organizational
Commitment

UNIT 3 Emotions – Emotional Intelligence – Implications of Emotional Intelligence on

Managers – EI as Managerial tool – EI performance in the organization –
Attitudes: Definitions – Meaning – Attitude relationship with behaviour –
Types – Consistency

UNIT 4 Individual Behaviour and process of the organization: Learning, Emotions,

Attitudes, Perception, Motivation, Ability, Job satisfaction, Personality, Stress
and its Management – Problem solving and Decision making – Interpersonal
Communication - Relevance to organizational behaviour.

UNIT 5 Group Behaviour: Group Dynamics - Theories of Group Formation - Formal

and Informal Groups in organization and their interaction - Group norms –
Group cohesiveness – Team: Importance and Objectives - Formation of teams
– Team Work- Group dynamics – Issues - Their relevance to organizational
behaviour.

UNIT 6 Organizational Power: Organizational Power: Definition, Nature,

Characteristics - Types of powers - Sources of Power - Effective use of power
– Limitations of Power – Power centre in Organization.

UNIT 7 Organizational Politics: Definition – Political behaviour in organization -

Factors creating political behaviour – Personality and Political Behaviour -
Techniques of managing politics in organization – Impact of organizational
politics.

UNIT 8 Organizational Conflict Management: Stress Management: Meaning – Types –

Sources and strategies resolve conflict – Consequences – Organizational
conflict: Constructive and Destructive conflicts - Conflict Process - Strategies
for encouraging constructive conflict - Strategies for resolving destructive
conflict.
 UNIT 9 Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Dynamics – Organizational
Efficiency, Effectiveness and Excellence: Meaning and Approaches – Factors
affecting the organizational Climate.

UNIT 10 Organizational Culture: Meaning, significance – Theories – Organizational

Climate – Creation, Maintenance and Change of Organizational Culture –
Impact of organizational culture on strategies – Issues in Organizational
Culture.

UNIT 11 Inter personal Communication: Essentials, Networks, Communication

technologies – Non-Verbal communications Barriers – Strategies to overcome
the barriers. Behavioral Communication in organization - Uses to Business

UNIT 12 Organizational Change: Meaning, Nature and Causes of organizational change

Organizational Change –Importance – Stability Vs Change – Proactive Vs.
Reaction change – the change process – Resistance to change – Managing
change.

UNIT 13 Organizational Behaviour responses to Global and Cultural diversity,

challenges at international level, Homogeneity and heterogeneity of National
cultures, Differences between countries.

UNIT 14 Organizational Development: Meaning, Nature and scope – Features of OD –

OD Interventions- Role of OD – Problems and Process of OD – process OD
and Process of Intervention - Challenges to OD- Learning Organizations -
Organizational effectiveness Developing Gender sensitive workplace

REFERENCES

1. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2006.

2. Stephen P. Robbins, Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall; 2010
3. Keith Davis, Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work, McGraw Hill, 2010
4. Griffin and Moorhead, Organizational Behavior: Managing People and Organizations,
2006.
5. Judith R. Gordon, Organizational Behavior: A Diagnostic, Prentice Hall, 2001.
6. K. Aswathappa, Organizational Behaviour, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai, 2010
7. Judith R. Gordon, A Diagnostic Approach to Organizational Behaviour, Allyn &
Bacon, 1993.
 34313 - MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
Objectives:
• To understand the economic principles and its applications in business
• To develop economics based analytic skills for business
• To make the learners to strong in economical approach

UNIT 1 Economics: Introduction – Meaning, nature and scope of Managerial

Economics – General Foundations of managerial Economics – Economic
Approach – Working of Economic system - Circular flow activities -
Economics & Business Decisions - Relationship between Economic theory
and Managerial Economics.

UNIT 2 Business Decisions: Role of managerial Economics in Decision making –

Decision making under Risk and Uncertainty - Concepts of Opportunity cost, -
Production possibility curve – Incremental Concepts - Cardinal and Ordinal
approaches to consumer Behaviour Time Value of Money –

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour: Marginalism – Equilibrium and Equi-marginalism and

their role in business decision making. – Equi-Marginal principles – Utility
analysis – Total and Marginal Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility –
Marshallian approach and Indifference curve analysis.

UNIT 4 Demand analysis: Meaning, Functions - Determinants of demand-Law of

Demand – Demand Estimation and Forecasting - Applications of demand in
analysis - Elasticity of Demand: Types, Measures and Role in Business
Decisions.

UNIT 5 Supply Analysis: Determinants of supply- Elasticity of Supply- Measures and

Significance - Derivations of market demand – Demand Estimation and Fore
casting- Demand and Supply equilibrium – Giffen Paradox

UNIT 6 Production Functions: Managerial uses of production function - Cobb-Douglas

and other production functions - Isoquants – Short run and long run
production function – Theory of production – Empirical estimations of
production functions.

UNIT 7 Forms of Markets: Meaning and Characteristics - Market Equilibrium:

Practical Importance, Market Equilibrium and Changes in Market Equilibrium.
Pricing Functions: Market Structures - Pricing and output decisions under
different competitive conditions: Monopoly Monopolistic completion and
Oligopoly

UNIT 8 Strategic Behaviour of the firms and Game Theory - Nash Equilibrium:
Implications – Prisoner’s Dilemma: Types of strategy – Price and Non price
competition – Relation to the firm behaviour.

UNIT 9 Cost and Return: Cost function and cost output relationship – Economics and
Diseconomies of scale - Cost control and cost reduction- Cost Behaviour and
Business Decision- Relevant costs for decision-making- Traditional and
Modern theory of Cost.
 UNIT 10 New Product Penetrative Decision and Skimming the cream Pricing-
Government control over pricing - Concept of Profit- Types and Theories of
Profit by Knight (Uncertainty), Schumpeter (Innovation), Clark (Dynamic)
and Hawley (Risk) - Profit maximization – Cost volume profit analysis – Risk
and Return Relationship.

UNIT 11 Profit and Investment Analysis: Meaning – Measurement of profit – Theories

of Pricing- Profit planning and forecasting- Profit and Wealth maximization –
Cost volume profit analysis – Investment analysis and Evaluation: IRR, NPV
and APV techniques.

UNIT 12 Macro-economic Factors: Nature, Importance ; Economic Growth and

Development - Business cycle – Phases and Business Decision- Inflation -
Factors causing Inflation and Deflation - Control measures – Balance of
payment Trend and its implications in managerial decision.

UNIT 13 National Income: Introduction Meaning – Theories – Methods of

Measurement - Sectoral and Population distributions – Per capita Income:
Definition – Calculations – Uses – Limitations – GDP – GNP - Recent
developments in Indian Economy.

UNIT 14 Economic Regulations of Business: Introduction – Antitrust theory and

Regulations – The structure – Conduct – Performance paradigm –
Concentration: Overview – Measuring concentration – Regulation of
Externalities.

REFERENCES
1. Dominick Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy,OxfordUniversity
Press, 2011.
2. Ivan Png and Dale Lehman, Managerial Economics, Wiley-Blackwell, 2007.
3. Truett Lila J., Truett, Dale B. and Truett J. Lila (2006), Managerial Economics:
Analysis Problems, Cases, 8th Editon, John Wiley & Sons.
4. Atmanand (2008), Managerial Economics, 2nd Edition, Excel Books.
5. Christopher R Thomas & S Charles Maurice (2008), Managerial Economics, 9th
edition, McGraw Hill Co.
6. Petersen, H. C., Cris, L W and Jain, S.K. (2008), Managerial Economics, 1st edition
Pearson
7. Gupta G S, Managerial Economics, Tata McGraw-Hill.
8. Varshney and Maheswari, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
9. Mehta P L, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
10. Joel Dean, Managerial Economics, Prentice-Hall.
 34314 - QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES
Objectives:
• To help develop analytical skills based on problem solving approach
• To learn quadrature problems solving of business issues.
• To acquire the knowledge in statistics and their use in business decision making.

UNIT 1 Basic Quantitative Concepts: Place of quantitative analysis in the practice of

management – Problem definition: Models and their development. Variables
notion of Mathematical models – concept of trade off – Notion of constants –
concept of Interest.

UNIT 2 Basic Concept of differentiation – integration – Optimization concepts – use of

differentiation for optimization of business problem Optimization Statistics:
Meaning and Applications of Statistics in business decision making and
research - Collection, Tabulation and presentation of data - Measures of central
tendency: Mean, Median and Mode. Measures of dispersion

UNIT 3 Variables and function: Linear and Non-linear –Graphical representation of

functions and their applications in cost and revenue behavior. Slope and its
relevance –Use of functional relationships to understand elasticity of demands,
Relationship between costs and level of activity, Decisions on Minimizing
Costs and Maximizing output/profits.
UNIT 4 Linear Programming: Introduction to the linear programming – Concepts of
optimization- Formulation of different types of linear programming –Standard
from of LP problems - Importance and practical implementation in Industry
UNIT 5 Simple regression and Correlation analysis: Introduction, Correlation,
Correlation analysis, linear regression analysis and Co-efficient. Duality and
sensitivity analysis for decision-making- Solving LP using graphical and
simplex method (only simple problems) – Interpreting the solution for
decision-making

UNIT 6 Special Algorithms of LPP: Transportation Algorithm - Balanced and

Unbalanced Problem Formulation and solving methods: North West Corner,
Vogel’s Approximation-MODI method- Assignment and Travelling Executive
Algorithms
UNIT 7 Theory of Probability: Introduction to the Concept – Development of
probability – Areas and Utilisation of probability theories in the Business –
Sample space – terminology – Types of probability.

UNIT 8 Theoretical Probability Distributions: Introduction - Concept of events –

Probability of events – Joint, conditional and marginal probabilities
Probability distributions: Binomial, Poisson and Normal – Features and
Applications – Use of Normal Tables.

UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background and

Developments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –
Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations of
Quantitative methods.
 UNIT 10 Sequencing /Scheduling Methods : Concepts – terminology – Notations –
Assumption for scheduling models – Job sequencing priorities – Processing
the job and Mass production system.

UNIT 11 Simulation Techniques: Introduction to simulation as an aid to decision-

making- Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Applications of
simulations models – Types: Inventory, Cash, and Project – Random Numbers.

UNIT 12 Queuing Theory: Introduction – Definition – Queue priorities Product

launching problems using Monte Carlo simulation- Queuing Theory: M/M/1
queuing model and applications.

UNIT 13 Decision Analysis: Concepts – Definition – Decision Tables Pay-off and Loss
tables – Expected value of pay-off – Expected value of Perfect Formation –
decision making process

UNIT 14 Decision Tree Analysis: Decision making environments – Concept of

Posterior probabilities Decision Tree approach to choose optimal course of
action Criteria for decision – Mini-max, Maxi-max, Minimizing Maximal
Regret and their applications.

REFERENCES

1. David R. Anderson, et al, An Introduction to Management Science: Quantitative

Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning, 2008.
2. Lucey, Quantitative Techniques Cengage Learning Business Press, 2002
3. Sharma, Operations Research: Theory and Applications.
4. Richard I Levin, & C. Atkinson Kirkpatrick, Quantitative Approaches to Management,
McGraw-Hill.
5. K. Gupta and D.S. Hira, Operations Research.
6. Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma, Quantitative Techniques for Managerial Decision-
making, New Age International, 2006.
7. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
8. V.K. Kapoor, Operations Research.
9. Dharani Venkatakrishnan, Operations Research: Principles and Problems.
10. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 2002.
 34315 - FINANCIAL AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Objectives:
• To enable the students to learn basic accounting principles, concepts.
• To practice Financial and Management accounting applications
• To make the learners familiarize in managerial decision making.

UNIT 1 Accounting: Definition – Accounting for historical function and managerial

function - Types of Accounting- Management, Management and Cost
accounting – Scope for Accounting-Managerial Uses of Management
accounting and Financial Accounting.

UNIT 2 Accounting Concepts and Conventions – Accounting standards - Financial

Accounting Definitions – Principles – Accounting standards - Double entry
system of accounting: Accounting books – Preparation of journal and ledger,
subsidiary books.

UNIT 3 Preparation of Trial Balance – Errors and rectification – Classifications of

capital and Revenue – Fixed Assets and Depreciation accounting – Preparation
of Manufacturing accounting- Preparation of Final Accounts - Accounting
from incomplete records – Statements of affairs methods

UNIT 4 Conversion methods – Preparation of Trading, Profit & Loss Account and
Balance Sheet from incomplete records – Depreciation methods - Straight line
method, Written down value method, Sinking fund method.

UNIT 5 Financial Statement Analysis - Objectives - Reorganizing the Financial

Statement information -Techniques of Financial Statement Analysis:
Comparative Statements, Common – Size statement, Trend Percentage -

UNIT 6 Management Statement Analysis: Management statements – Nature of

management statements – Limitations of management statements – Analysis
of interpretation -Types of analysis- Tools of analysis: Trend analysis,
Common size statements and Comparative statements;

UNIT 7 Accounting Ratios: Construction of balance sheet using ratios (problems) –

Financial ratios – Types: Profitability ratios – Turnover ratios – Liquidity
ratios – Proprietary ratios – Market earnings ratios- Uses and limitations of
ratios - Dupont analysis.

UNIT 8 Fund Flow Analysis: Need and meaning – Preparation of schedule of changes
in working capital and the fund flow statement – Workings for
Computation of various sources and uses - Preparation of Fund Flow
Statement

UNIT 9 Cash flow Analysis: Meaning and importance Managerial uses of cash flow
statement – Differences between fund flow and cash flow analysis - Uses and
limitation of fund flow statement- Preparation of cash flow statement
 UNIT 10 Cost Accounting: Cost Accounting - Meaning - Distinction between Financial
Accounting and Cost Accounting - Cost Terminology: Cost, Cost Centre, Cost
Unit - Elements of Cost - Cost Sheet – Problems - Overhead Cost Allocations:
Over and under Absorption. Job and Contract Costing,

UNIT 11 Operating Costing: Material Cost Accounting, Perpetual Inventory Control,

Inventory Valuation, EOQ, ABC Analysis, Setting of Reorder Level,
Maximum Level, Minimum Level, Labour Cost Accounting, Remuneration
and Incentive Schemes- Reconciliation of Financial and Cost Accounting

UNIT 12 Marginal Costing: Definition – Difference between marginal costing and

absorption costing – Break- even point Analysis - Contribution, p/v Ratio,
margin of safety - Decision making under marginal costing system-key factor
analysis, make or buy decisions, export decision, sales mix decision-Problems

UNIT 13 Budgeting and Budgetary Control: Concept and Need for Budgeting-
Classification of budgets – Preparation of Sales, Production, Material,
Purchase and Cash Budgets –Budgetary control system – Mechanism – Master
budget.

UNIT 14 Capital Budgeting System: Importance – Methods of capital expenditure

appraisal – Payback period method – ARR method – DCF methods – NPV and
IRR methods – Their rationale – Capital rationing.

REFERENCES
1. Arulanandam& K.S. Raman,Advanced Accounting, Himalaya Publishing House.
2. Gupta &Radhasamy,Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons.
3. Shukla & T.S. Grewal,Advanced Accounting, S.Chand&Company.
4. Jain &Narang,Advanced Cost Accounting, Kalyani. Publications.
5. Ravi M. Kishore, Cost Management, Taxman Publications
6. S.N. Maheswari, Management Accounting &Management Accounting, Vikas
Publishers.
7. Manmohan & Goyal, Principles of Management Accounting, Shakithabhavan
Publication.
8. N. K. Prasad,Advanced Cost Accounting, Book Syndicate Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta.
9. Andrew A Haried, Advanced Accounting, Atlantic Publishers.
10. Hoyle,Advanced Accounting, McGraw Hill.
 34321 - RESEARCH METHODS
Objectives:
• To Understand the basic principles of research and design
• To practice the research process, tools and techniques
• To facilitate managerial decision making

UNIT 1 Research Bases: Definition and applications of business research; Types of

research –descriptive, exploratory, correlational, explanatory, quantitative,
qualitative; Steps in the research process; establishing operational definitions

UNIT 2 Research scope - Recent advancements in research. Distinction between Pure

& Applied, Historical & Futuristic, Analytical & Synthetic, Descriptive &
Prescriptive, Survey & Experimental and Case & Generic Researches

UNIT 3 Planning of Research: Research problem – Identification, selection and

formulation of research problem – Review of literature in the field of business
- Identifying objectives of the research.

UNIT 4 Economic management: Use in identifying Research Gaps and Techniques –

Hypothesis – Meaning – Sources and Types of Hypothesis – Hypothesis
Formulation for testing – Research design – Factors affecting research design
– Evaluation of research design

UNIT 5 Variables construction for Hypothesis: Identifying variables - Constructing

hypotheses – functions, characteristics, types of hypotheses - Significance of
research in social sciences – Induction and deduction.

UNIT 6 Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation –
Principle of sampling – Essentials of a good sampling – sampling frame;
Methods of sampling: Probability, non-probability, mixed sampling designs;

UNIT 7 Construction of sampling for Finite and Infinite populations – Sample size
determination– Calculations - Factors affecting the size of the sample – Biased
sample – Sampling and non-sampling errors.

UNIT 8 Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data – Primary and secondary data
– Modes of data collection – Observation: Types and Techniques –Interview:
Types and conduct – Preparation for an interview – Effective interview
techniques – Limitations of interview

UNIT 9 Schedule: Meaning and kinds – Essentials of a good schedule – Procedure for
the formulation of a schedule – Questionnaire: Meaning and types – Format of
a good questionnaire– Schedules Vs. Questionnaires

UNIT 10 Scaling techniques: Meaning, Importance, Types of measurement scales –

Nominal, Ordinal, Interval, Ratio; Methods of their construction of
Questionnaires or Schedules – Pre-testing of Data Collection Tools- Validity
and Reliability – Methods.
 UNIT 11 Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning – Importance – Process of data
analysis – Editing – Coding – Tabulation – Diagrams – Univariate, Bivariate
and Multi-variant analysis

UNIT 12 Test of Significance: Fundamentals on Test Procedure- Testing for

significance of Mean/Proportion and difference between Means/Proportions- F
Test for Means and Chi-square test Contingency Table - Parametric Test: T
test, F Test and Z test

UNIT 13 Non-parametric Test: Concept and Types: Mann Whitney Test- Test, Kruskal
Wallis, sign test. Multivariate analysis-factor, cluster, MDS, Discriminant
analysis - The process of interpretation of Test Results– Guidelines for making
valid interpretation

UNIT 14 Report Writing : Role and types of reports – Contents of research report –
Steps involved in drafting reports – Principles of good report writing –
Grammatical Quality – Language flow- Data Support- Diagrammatic
Elucidation- References and Annotations – Clarity and Brevity of
expressions- Features of a good Report- Criteria for evaluating research
reports/ research findings.

REFERENCES

1. John W Best & James V. Kahn Research in Education, Allyn and Bacon, 2009
2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley, New Delhi, 1989.
3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw
Hill, 1981.
4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003,
HPH.
5. Earl R. BabbieRobert, ThePractice of Social Research, Cengage Learning, 2010.
6. B. Burns & A. Burns, Business Research Methods and Statistics Using SPSS, Sage
Publications, 2008.
7. Krishnaswami and Ranganatham, Research Methodology in social Sciences, HPH,
Mumbai
8. Bryman & Bell: Business Research Methods, OUP.
9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall,
(Digitalized) 2007.
10. C.R.Kothari, Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, 2009
 34322 - BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Objectives:
• To understand the concepts and constituents of Business environment
• To know the environmental issues in the business context
• To analyze the changes in the global environmental relating to business

UNIT 1 Business Environment: Introduction: Concepts – Significance - Dynamic

factors of environment – Importance of scanning the environment – Macro and
Micro Environment – Micro and Macro Economics to the business –
Constituents of Business environment

UNIT 2 Fundamental issues captured in PESTLE– Political, Economic, Socio-cultural,

Technological, Legal and Ecological environment- Opportunities and Threats
as environmental issues to address by Businesses.

UNIT 3 Political Environment: Government and Business – Political Systems, Political

Stability and Political Maturity as conditions of business growth - Role of
Government in Business: Entrepreneurial, Catalytic, Competitive, Supportive,
Regulative and Control functions

UNIT 4 Government and Economic planning: Industrial policies and promotion

schemes – Government policy and SSI – Interface between Government and
public sector - Guidelines to the Industries – Industrial Development
strategies; salient features, Role of public and private sectors, Comparative
cost dynamics.

UNIT 5 Economic Environment: Phase of Economic Development and its impact-

GDP Trend and distribution and Business Opportunities – capacity utilisation
– Regional disparities and evaluation - Global Trade and investment
environment.

UNIT 6 Financial System and Business capital: Monetary and Fiscal policies -
Financial Market structure – Money and Capital markets – Stock Exchanges
and Its regulations – Industrial Finance - Types, Risk - Cost-Role of Banks;
Industrial Financial Institutions - Role of Management Institutions

UNIT 7 Role of Central Bank- Fiscal System: Government Budget and Taxation
Measures- Fiscal Deficits and Inflation- FDI and collaboration –Foreign
Capital tapping by businesses- Export-Import policy – Foreign Exchange and
Business Development.

UNIT 8 Labour Environment: Labour Legislation – Labour and social securities –

Industrial Relations – Trade Unions – Workers participation in management –
Exit Policy – Quality Circles.

UNIT 9 Social and Technological Environment: Societal Structure and Features-

Entrepreneurial Society and its implications for business – Social and cultural
factors and their implications for business- Technology Development Phase in
the Economy as conditioner of Business Opportunities
 UNIT 10 Technology Environment: Technology Policy- Technology Trade and transfer-
Technology Trends in India- Role of Information Technology – Clean
Technology. – Time lag in technology – Appropriate technology and
Technology adoption- Impact of technology on globalization.

UNIT 11 Legal and Ecological Environment: Legal Environment as the all-enveloping

factor from inception, location, incorporation, conduct, expansion and closure
of businesses – IDRA and Industrial licensing – Public, Private, Joint and
Cooperative Sectors.

UNIT 12 Legal Aspects of Entering Primary and Secondary Capital Markets- Law on
Patents- Law on Consumer Protection- Law on Environmental Protection-
Need for Clean energy and Reduction of Carbon footprint.

UNIT 13 New Economic Policy Environment in India: Liberalization, Privatization and

Globalization (LPG): Efficiency Drive through Competition- Facets of
Liberalization and impact on business growth

UNIT 14 Aspects of Privatization and impact on business development– Globalization

and Enhanced Opportunities and Threats – Extended competition in Input and
Output Markets Role of WTO, IMF and World Bank in global economic
development.

REFERENCES

1. Brooks, Weatherston, Wilkinson, International Business Environment, Pearson, 2010.

2. Steiner & Steiner, Business, Government and Society: A Managerial Perspective,
McGraw-Hill, 2008.
3. Mohinder Kumar Sharma, Business Environment in India, South Asia Books.
4. Adhikary M, Economic Environment of Business, Sultan Chand & Sons.
5. Amarchand D, Government and Business, TMH.
6. Francis Cherunilam, Business Environment and Development, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2008.
7. Maheswari & Gupta, Government, Business and Society.
 34323 - BUSINESS LAWS
Objectives:
• To understand the legal structure and provision for running a business
• To learn various acts, enactments and amendments of mercantile law
• To know the various aspects of Business law for legal process.

UNIT 1 Indian Contract Act 1872: Contract – Meaning – Essential elements – Nature
and formation of contract: Nature, elements, Classifications of Contracts on
the basis of Validity, Formation and Performance– offer and acceptance

UNIT 2 Offer and Acceptance: Introduction – Proposal – acceptance –

Communications of offer, Acceptance and Revocations – Offer and acceptance
by Post.

UNIT 3 Consideration: Definitions, Types of consideration – essentials of

Consideration – Privity of Contracts: Exceptions – Capacity: Consent –
Legality of object – Quasi contract Discharge of contract - Remedies for
breach of contract – Quasi contracts.

UNIT 4 Special Contracts: Contract of Indemnity and Guarantee – Bailment and

Pledge – Law of Agency-Definition – Rights of Surety -Discharge of Surety –
Bailment and Pledge: Introduction, Classifications, Duties and Rights of Bailer
and Bailee – termination of Bailment -

UNIT 5 Formation of contract under Sale of Goods Act, 1930: Contract of sale -
Conditions and Warranties - Transfer of property - Performance of the
contract: Essentials of valid tender performance, Performance reciprocal
promise- Rights of an unpaid seller.

UNIT 6 Laws on Carriage of Goods: Duties, Rights and Liabilities of Common

Carriers under: (i) The Carriers Act, 1865. (ii) The Railways Act, 1989, (iii)
The Carriage of Goods by Sea Act, 1925, (iv) The Carriage by Air Act, 1972
and (v) The Carriage By Road Act, 2007

UNIT 7 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881: Negotiable Instruments: Features – Types-

Parties – Material alteration – Parties to negotiable instruments – Presentations
of negotiable instrument.

UNIT 8 Insurance: Definition and sources of Law – Judicial set up in India ––

Insurance as a contract -History of Insurance Legislation in India - Legal
principles - Fundamental Principles of Life Insurance Fire Insurance and
Marine Insurance.

UNIT 9 Indian Partnership Act, 1932: Meaning and test of partnership – registration of
firms Life Insurance Corporation Act 1956 – General Insurance Business
Nationalization Act 1973.

UNIT 10 Partners Relations: Introduction – Eligibility to be a partner – Registration of

change in partner – Limited Liabilities of partnership - Dissolution of firms -
 Characteristics – Kinds – Incorporation of Companies – Memorandum of
Association – Articles of Association

UNIT 11 Companies Act 1956: Nature and kinds of companies – Prospectus –

Disclosure Needs - Management and Administration – Director –
Appointment, Powers and Duties

UNIT 12 Formation of a Company : Introduction – process - Minutes and Resolutions –

E-Filling of documents under Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) 21-
Management of companies –Meetings- Types- Requirements -AGM and EGM
– Board Meeting

UNIT 13 Law of Information Technology: Introduction – Rationale behind IT act 2000

– Information technology Act 2000: Scheme of the IT Act 2000: Digital
signature: attribution; Acknowledgement and dispatch of Electronics Record –
Regulation certifying authorities.

UNIT 14 Protection of minority interest: Introduction - Methods of Winding-up - The

Right to Information Act, 2005 Right to know, Salient features of the Act,
obligation of public Authority, Designation of Public Information officer,
Request for obtaining information,

REFERENCES

1. M.S.Pandit and ShobhaPandit, Business Law, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai,

2010.
2. Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, TMH, 2009.
3. N.D. Kapoor, Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
4. M.C. Shukla, Mercantile Law, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
5. Relevant Bare Acts.
6. Balachandran and Thothadri, business Law, TMH, 2010
 34324 - MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

Objectives:
• To learn the principles of Management Information System for organizations
• To understand the uses , function of application MIS in organization
• To analyze the scope of MIS for business organizations

UNIT 1 Foundations of Information System: Information system: Meaning, Role –

System concepts – Organization as a system – Components of Information
system – Various activities of IS and Types of IS

UNIT 2 Information System: Concepts of Information System and Management

information systems design and development-Implementation testing and
conversion- Evolution and element of MIS

UNIT 3 MIS : Definition – Characteristics and basic requirements of MIS – Structure

of MIS- Approaches to MIS development- Computerized MIS- Pre-requisites
of an effective MIS- Limitations of MIS.

UNIT 4 MIS and Decision support System (DSS): MIS Vs. data processing – MIS and
decision support system – MIS and information resource management – DSS
and AI – Overview of AI - DSS models and software.

UNIT 5 MIS and Operations Research- Executive information and Decision support
systems – Artificial intelligence and expert system – Merits and De Merits –
Pitfalls in MIS.

UNIT 6 MIS in Indian organizations – Recent developments in information technology

- Installation of Management Information & Control System in Indian
organization

UNIT 7 Computers and Communication: Information technology and Global

integration –On-line information services – Electronic bulletin board systems –
The internet, electronic mail, interactive video

UNIT 8 Communication Channels: Advantages disadvantages – Communication

networks – Local area networks – Wide area networks – Video conferencing-
Relevance to MIS- Usage in Business process.

UNIT 9 Functional Information systems: MIS for Research Production - MIS for
Marketing - MIS for Personnel - MIS for Finance - MIS for Inventory- MIS
for Logistics- MIS for Product Development- MIS for Market Development.

UNIT 10 Client/ Server Computing: Communication servers – Digital networks –

Electronic data interchange and its applications - Enterprise resource planning
systems (ERP Systems) – Inter-organizational information systems – Value
added networks – Networking.
 UNIT 11 Electronic Commerce and Internet: E-Commerce bases – E-Commerce and
Internet – M-Commerce- Electronic Data Inter-change (EDI) - Applications of
internet and website management - Types of Social Media - uses of social
media in business organization

UNIT 12 Computer System and Resources: Computers systems: Types and Types of
computer system processing - Secondary storage media and devices – Input
and output devices – Hardware standards – Other acquisition issues.

UNIT 13 Managing Information Technology: Managing Information Resources and

technologies – IS architecture and management - Centralized, Decentralized
and Distributed - EDI, Supply chain management & Global Information
technology Management.

UNIT 14 Security and Ethical Challenges: IS controls - facility control and procedural
control - Risks to online operations - Denial of service, spoofing - Ethics for IS
professional - Societal challenges of Information technology

REFERENCES

1. James O'Brien & George Marakas, Management Information Systems, McGraw Hill,
2011.
2. Kenneth Laudon & Jane Laudon, Essentials of MIS, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Lisa Miller, MIS Cases: Decision Making with Application Software, Prentice Hall,
2008.
4. David M. Kroenke, Experiencing MIS, Prentice Hall, 2011.
5. Kenneth C. Laudon, MIS: Managing the Digital Firm, Prentice Hall, 2005.
6. Sadogopan S, Management Information Systems, 2001PHI.
7. Murdie and Ross, Management Information Systems, Prentice Hall.
8. Henri C. Lucas, Information Systems Concepts for Management, McGraw Hill, 1994.
9. Stephen Haag, Management Information Systems, 2008.
 34325 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Objective:

• To understand the concepts and methods and techniques of Human Resource

Management
• To know the Human resource management theories and real time practices
• To identify the contemporary issues in human resource management

UNIT 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management: Concept, Definition,

Objectives, Nature and Scope of HRM - Functions of HRM – Evolution of
human resource management - Role and structure of Human Resource
Function in organizations- Challenges in Human Resource Management

UNIT 2 Human Resource Management Approaches: Phases of human resource

Management- The importance of the human factor – Competitive challenges of
HRM – HRM Models – Roles and responsibilities of HR department.

UNIT 3 Human Resource Planning: Personnel Policy - Characteristics - Role of

human resource manager – Human resource policies – Need, Scope and
Process – Job analysis – Job description – Job specification- Succession
Planning.

UNIT 4 Recruitment and Selection Process: Employment planning and fore casting
Sources of recruitment- internal Vs. External; Domestic Vs. Global sources-
Selection process Building employee commitment : Promotion from within -
Sources, Developing and Using application forms – IT and recruiting on the
internet.

UNIT 5 Employee Testing & selection : Selection process, basic testing concepts,
types of test, work samples & simulation, selection techniques, interview,
common interviewing mistakes, Designing & conducting the effective
interview, small business applications, computer aided interview.

UNIT 6 Training and Development: Orientation & Training: Orienting the employees,
the training process, need analysis, Training techniques, special purpose
training, Training via the internet. - Need Assessment - Training methods
for Operatives and Supervisors

UNIT 7 Executive Development: Need and Programs - Computer applications in

human resource management – Human resource accounting and audit. On-the
- job and off-the-job Development techniques using HR to build a responsive
organization

UNIT 8 Employee Compensation : Wages and Salary Administration – Bonus –

Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems - and Employee Benefits, Health
and Social Security Measures,
 UNIT 9 Employee Retention: Need and Problems of Employees – various retention
methods– Implication of job change. The control process – Importance –
Methods – Employment retention strategies for production and services
industry

UNIT 10 Appraising and Improving Performance: Performance Appraisal Programs,

Processes and Methods, Job Evaluation, Managing Compensation, Incentives
Performance appraisal: Methods - Problem and solutions - MBO approach -
The appraisal interviews - Performance appraisal in practice.

UNIT 11 Managing careers: Career planning and development - Managing promotions

and transfers - Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems – Promotion –
Demotions – Transfers- Labour Attrition: Causes and Consequences

UNIT 12 Employee Welfare, Separation: Welfare and safety – Accident prevention –

Employee Grievances and their Redressal – Industrial Relations - Statutory
benefits - non-statutory (voluntary) benefits – Insurance benefits - retirement
benefits and other welfare measures to build employee commitment

UNIT 13 Industrial relations and collective bargaining: Trade unions – Collective

bargaining - future of trade unionism - Discipline administration - grievances
handling - managing dismissals and workers Participation in Management-
Separation: Need and Methods.

UNIT 14 Human Resource Information System- Personnel Records/ Reports- e-Record

on Employees – Personnel research and personnel audit – Objectives – Scope
and importance.

REFERENCES

1. Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management,South-WesternCollege, 2004.

2. Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-WesternCollege,
2007.
3. R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management,Prentice Hall, 2011.
4. Venkataraman& Srivastava, Personnel Management & Human Resources
5. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations
6. Yodder&Standohar, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
7. Edwin B. Flippo, Personnel Management , McGraw-Hill, 1984
8. Pigors and Myers, Personnel Administration
9. R.S. Dwivedi, Manpower Management
10. Lynton &Pareek, Training and Development, Vistaar Publications, 1990.
 34331 - MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
• To help the learners understand markets, consumers and marketing principles.
• To understand the buyer behaviour and influencing factors
• To learn marketing plan, pricing, promotion and distribution in global context

UNIT 1 Introduction to Marketing: Meaning and Scope of Marketing; Marketing

Philosophies; Marketing Management Process-an overview; Modern
Marketing Concept: Social marketing concept – Approaches to the study of
marketing.

UNIT 2 Marketing segmentation: Meaning – Bases for segmentation, benefits –

Systems approach - Four Ps of Product and Seven Ps Service marketing mix
and Extensions- Targeting and Positioning - meaning and importance.

UNIT 3 Marketing Environment: Internal and External and Demographic factors –

Adopting marketing to new liberalized and globalized economy –
Digitalization – Customization and E business settings.

UNIT 4 Consumer Behaviour : Meaning and importance – Consumer buying process –

Determinants and Theories of consumer behaviour – Psychological,
sociological determinants – Theories and their relevance to marketing-

UNIT 5 Marketing Research: Procedure. Meaning – Objectives – Process- Demand

Forecasting- Marketing Information System – Strategic marketing plan and
organization – Changing marketing practices.

UNIT 6 Product Mix Management: Product planning and development – Meaning and
process – Test marketing – Product failures – Product line management:
Practices – Implications and Strategies for current market condition.

UNIT 7 Product life cycles: Meaning and Stages – Strategies – Managing PLC-
Product-Market Integration: Strategies – Product positioning – Diversification
– Product line simplification – Planned obsolescence – Branding Policies and
Strategies – Packing.

UNIT 8 Price Mix Management: Pricing and pricing policies – Objectives –

Procedures – Bases for and Methods of price fixing. Cases for Free Pricing,
Administered and Regulated pricing – Pricing and product life cycle

UNIT 9 Physical Distribution Mix: Types of physical Distribution - Importance of

Physical Distribution- Distribution channel policy – Logistics Decisions –
Methods – Strategic alliance for Logistic cost reduction.

UNIT 10 Marketing Channel system: Marketing channel decisions: Choice

considerations– Managing Conflict and Cooperation in channels – Middlemen
functions- Modern Trends in Retailing- Malls and Online.
 UNIT 11 Promotional Mix: Personal selling Vs. impersonal selling – Personal selling –
Process – Steps in selling – Management of sales force – Recruitment and
selection – Training – Compensation plans – Evaluation of performance

UNIT 12 Integrated marketing communication Process: Advertising and sales promotion

– Online Sales promotional activities – Public relationships – Direct
marketing: Meaning, Nature, Growth and Channels.

UNIT 13 Advertising: Importance – Objectives – Media planning and selection –

Factors influencing selection – Advertisement copy – Layout – Evaluation of
advertising – Advertising budget – Sales promotion – Methods and practices.

UNIT 14 Competitor analyses: Identifying and analyzing the competitors – Types of

Competitors – Competitive strategies framing for leaders, challengers,
followers and nichers. Customer relationship marketing: Customer data base,
Data ware housing and data mining

REFERENCES

1. Etzel, Walker and Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill, 2004

2. Philip Kotler & Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Jerome Mccarthy, Basic Marketing, Richard D. Irwin.
4. Cundiff, Still &Govani, Fundamentals of Modern Marketing, Prentice Hall.
5. Memoria & Joshi, Fundamental of Marketing.
6. Paul Peter and James Donnelly Jr, Marketing Management, McGraw-Hill, 2010.
7. William O. Bearden, Marketing: Principles & Perspectives, McGraw-Hill, 2006.
8. William Arens, et al, Contemporary Advertising, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
9. Perreault and McGarthy - Basic Marketing - Tata McGraw Hill, 2002\

10. Michael J Etzel, Bruce J Walker, William J Stanton and Ajay Pandit, Marketing
concepts and cases - TMH 13th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
 34332 - FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Objectives:
• To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management
• To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital management.
• To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications

UNIT 1 Introduction: Financial management: objectives - Concept, nature, evaluation

and significance – Finance Functions: Managerial and operative – Role of
Financial management in the organization – Indian Financial system.

UNIT 2 Financial System: Legal and Regulatory frame work – Financial Functions:
Meaning and scope – Finance and Tax Management Nexus- Tax Avoidance
and Tax evasion- Tax incentive and business decisions.

UNIT 3 Investment Function: Meaning and scope - Time value of Money concepts and
applications –Risk return relationship - Dividend function – Risk return trade
off – Management planning- Global management environment

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity share,
preference shares – types of preference share - debentures – types - sources of
long-term capital.

UNIT 5 Capital Issues: Meaning, Nature, Purpose – Roles and Guidelines of SEBI in
capital issues- Bridge finance, loan syndication, Book building – Borrowings
from the term lending institutions and International capital market- Tax
considerations in financing decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital : Concept of cost of capital- Cost of debt, equity, preference
share capital, retaining earning - Weighted average cost: EBIT –EPS
Analysis- Tax, Capital structure and Value nexus - Computation of overall
cost of capital – Tax and cost of capital.

UNIT 7 Capital structure: Determinates - Concept and Types- Optimum capital

structure – Theories of capital structure – Net income and net operative income
approach – M.M. Approach – Traditional theory – Their assumptions –
Significance and limitations – Management leverage operating leverage –
Combined leverage.

UNIT 8 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital Investment-

Methods of appraisal under certainty conditions: PBP, ARR, IRR and NPV
techniques - Basic and International capital budgeting.

UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity analysis-

Decision tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-adjusted return measures-
Tax considerations in Investment Decisions Cost of capital and Investment
Decisions.
 UNIT 10 Working Capital Management: Definitions and Objectives - Concept and
types – Determinants – Financing approaches – Conservative approaches -
Sources of working capital finance Factors affecting working capital
requirements- Working capital financing by commercial banks – Types of
assistance

UNIT 11 Inventories and receivables Management under conditions of certainty and

uncertainty – Operating cycle – Planning of funds through the management of
assets – Various techniques used.

UNIT 12 Cash and liquidity management: Credit Management and evaluation

alternative credit variables Methods and Functions- Tax considerations in
Remittances and Purchases.

UNIT 13 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories – Dividend
irrelevance under M.M. Theory – Assumptions – Limitations - Implications
and contributions of theories in financial decision making process.

UNIT 14 Dividend Policy: Types – Share valuation practices – Factors affecting

dividend decision – Tax considerations in dividend decision when tax is levied
at the hands of companies and recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice, Thomson ONE,
2010
2. Brigham and Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management, Thomson ONE, 2009.
3. Van Horne: Fundamentals of Financial Management, Prentice Hall, 2008
4. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management,South-WesternCollege Pub., 2010
5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, McGraw Hill, 2008.
6. Khan and Jain, Financial Management ,Tata McGrawHill,2009
7. Pandey I M, Financial Management, Vikas Publishers,2009
8. Sheeba Kapil(2010), Financial Management, Pearson Education.
9. B J Camsey, Engene F.Brigham, “Introduction to Financial Management”, The Gryden
Press
 34333 - INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS MANAGEMENT
Objective:

• To gain knowledge about the trade unions

• To know the basic concept of industrial relations management

UNIT 1 Constitution of India – Salient features – Fundamental rights and directive

principles of State policy – Labour movement

UNIT 2 Concept of labour movement and Union Organization – Trade union

movement and various phases of the movement – Trade unions and economic
development.

UNIT 3 Development of Trade Unionism in India – Historical retrospect – Central

organization of workers in India – Role of internal trade union

UNIT 4 Inter and intra union rivalries – Union recognition – International Labour
Movement: ICFTU – WFTU – ILO – History

UNIT 5 objective and functions – Convention and recommendations – PCR rights and
duties – functions - problems-Voluntary Welfare Measures – Statutory
Welfare Measures – Labour – Welfare Funds – Education and Training
Schemes

UNIT 6 Concept of Industrial Relations – Social obligations of industry – Role of

government employers and the unions in industrial relations

UNIT 7 Industrial relations machinery – Joint consultation – Works committee –

Negotiation: Types of Negotiations – Conciliations

UNIT 8 Adjudication, voluntary arbitration – Workers participation in industry –

Grievance procedure.

UNIT 9 Process of collective bargaining – Problems and prospects – Bipartisan in

agreements – Code of conduct and code of discipline –

UNIT 10 Wage boards – Reports of wage boards – Management of strikes and lockouts
– measures to stop strikes and lock outs Disputes – Impact – Causes –
Prevention – Industrial Peace – Government Machinery – Conciliation –
Arbitration – Adjudication.

UNIT 11 Employee safety programme – Types of safety organization – functions –

implications – features - Industrial Relations problems in the Public Sector –
Growth of Trade Unions – Codes of conduct.

UNIT 12 Safety committee – Ergonomics – Damage control and system, safety –

insurance – grievance redressal.
UNIT 13 Employee communication – House journals – Notice boards suggestion
schemes – upward communication, personnel counselling and mental health –

UNIT 14 Educational and social development – modern trends – employee education –

NGC .Child Labour – Female Labour – Contract Labour – Construction
Labour – Agricultural Labour – Differently abled Labour –BPO & KPO
Labour - Social Assistance – Social Security – Implications

REFERENCE

1. Bhagoliwal T N, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, Agra Publishers, Agra.

2. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Michael V P,HRM and Human Relations, Himalaya Book House, Mumbai.
4. Mamoria C.B. and Sathish Mamoria, Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Himalaya
Publishing House, New Delhi, 2010.
5. Arun Monappa, Ranjeet Nambudiri, Patturaja Selvaraj. Industrial Relations & Labour
Laws.Tata McGraw Hill. 2012
 34334 - LABOUR LEGISLATIONS – I
Objective:

• To know the basic concept of labour legislations .

• To gain knowledge about the labour act

UNIT 1 Factories Act, 1948: Provision’s relating to health, safety, welfare, working hours,
leave etc., of workers approval

UNIT 2 Licensing and registration of factories, manager and occupier – Their obligations
under the Act, powers of the authorities under the Act, Penalty provisions.

UNIT 3 Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923: Employer’s liability for compensation,

amount of compensation method of calculating wages – Review

UNIT 4 distribution of compensation – Remedies of employer against stranger – Returns

as to compensation – Commission for workmen’s compensation.

UNIT 5 Industrial Dispute Act, 1947: Industrial dispute – Authorities for settlement of
industrial disputes – Reference of industrial disputes

UNIT 6 Procedures – Power and duties of authorities, settlement and strikes – Lock-out –
Lay-off – Retrenchment – Transfer and closure

UNIT 7 Unfair labour practices – Miscellaneous provision offences by companies,

conditions of service to remain unchanged under certain circumstances, etc.

UNIT 8 Shops and Establishments Act, 1947: Definitions – Salient provisions – Powers of
the authorities.

UNIT 9 Employee’s State Insurance Act, 1948: Registration of Factories and

Establishments, the employee’s State Insurance Corporation, Standing Committee
and Medical Benefit Council, provisions relating to contributions

UNIT 10 Inspectors – Their functions and disputes and claims – Offences and penalties –
Miscellaneous provisions.

UNIT 11 Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952: Employees
provident fund and other schemes
UNIT 12 Determination and recovery of money due from employer, appointment of
inspectors and their duties

UNIT 13 Provisions relating to transfer of accounts and liability in case of transfer of

establishment exemption under the Act –

UNIT 14 Contract Labour Regulations and Abolition Act, 1970 ,Count’s power under the
act - employer and employee relationship – Problems – pertaining to the
employee – solvation at door steps.

REFERENCES :

1. Bare Acts
2. Kapoor N D, Industrial Law
3. Shukla M C, Industrial Law
4. D. R. N. Sinha, Indu Balasinha & Semma Priyadarshini Shekar, Industrial Relation, Trade
unions and Labour Legislation, 2004.
 34335 - TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT
Objective:

• To know the basic concept of training and development

• To understand the various training method

UNIT 1 Training: Meaning – Definition – Need – Objectives – Difference among

education, training and development - Training, Development and
Performance consulting – Design of HRD systems – Development of HRD
strategies

UNIT 2 Levels of Training: Individual, operational and organizational levels –

horizontal , vertical , top , bottom& official training.

UNIT 3 Training Organisation: Need assessment of Training- Organisational structure

of training organizations

UNIT 4 Training in manufacturing and service organizations – GST – Tax slap for
state and central - Professional tax. Organisational analysis, task analysis and
individual analysis – consolidation..

UNIT 5 Duties and responsibilities of training managers – Challenges – Selection of

trainers: Internal and external.

UNIT 6 Employees Training: Meaning – Need – importance = implications – features

– functions- organizational climate for training and development

UNIT 7 Areas of training: Knowledge, skill, attitude – Methods of training: On the job
– Off the job.

UNIT 8 Executive Development Programmes: Meaning – Need –importance – nature

– scope – implications

UNIT 9 Methods of evaluation of effectiveness of training - development programmes

- Key performance parameter

UNIT 10 Evaluation of Training: Evaluation of training - meaning – nature –

significance - types – implications

UNIT 11 Concept of return on Investment and cost benefit analysis –ROI – IRR – CPA-
CBA Linking training needs and objectives of various theories of learning and
methods of training
UNIT 12 Current practices in assessing training and development – latest scenario of
assessing training. Learning cycles – factors for fixing duration – selection of
participants – choice of trainers

UNIT 13 Training and Development in India: Government policy on training – budget

estimate – allocation - CSR - Conducting the programs – ice breaking and
games – relevance of culture of participants

UNIT 14 Training Institutes in India – Management Associations – Development

programmes in Public and Private Sector organization- – Cost benefit analysis
– Role of trainer and line manager in evaluations – Design of Evaluation –
Kirkpatric’s model

REFERENCES

1. Sikula A F, Personnel Administration and Human Resource Development, John Wiley

and Sons, New York.
2. Ahmed Abad, Management and Organisational Development, RachanaPrakashan, New
Delhi.
3. Memoria C B, Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.
4. Larney M C & William J, Management Training: Cases and Principles, Richad D Irwin,
Illinois.
5. RudraBaswaraj, Personnel Administration Practice in India, Vaikunta Lal Mehta Inst. of
Co-op. Management, Pune.
6. Human Resources Development – Theory and Practice, Tapomoy Deb Ane Books India,
2008.
7. Human performance consulting, James. S. Pepitone, Guely publishing Company,
Houston,2006.
 34341 - COMPENSATION MANAGEMENT
Objective:

• To know the basic concept of compensation management

• To gain knowledge on wage theories

UNIT 1 Introduction to Compensation, Rewards, Wage Levels and Wage Structures;

Introduction to Wage -Determination Process and Wage Administration rules; -Pay -
Compensation based on macroeconomic - micro economic factors – wage settlement
– safety measures

UNIT 2 Introduction to Factors Influencing Wage and Salary -Structure and Principles of
Wage and Salaries Administration Wage theories – Evaluation of theories –
Components of compensation – implications – problems – prospects

UNIT 3 Introduction to Minimum Wages; Introduction to Basic Kinds of Wage Plans;

Introduction to Wage-Differentials & Elements of a Good Wage Plans Wage Fixation
Factors: Job factors – Personnel factors – Company factors

UNIT 4 Trade unionism – Price levels – Competition factors – perfect competition –

imperfect competition

UNIT 5 Pay Fixation Process: Surveying pay and compensation practices – Designing pay
structure.

UNIT 6 Incentive Schemes: Monetary and Non-monetary dimensions – Incentive plans –

Incentives for direct and indirect categories

UNIT 7 Introduction to Importance of Wage Differentials; Introduction to Executive

Compensation and Components of Remuneration Individual/ group incentives –
Fringe benefits/ perquisites – Profit sharing

UNIT 8 Introduction to Nature and Objectives of Job Evaluation; Introduction to Principles

and Procedure of Job Evaluation Programs; Introduction to Basic Job Evaluation
Methods; Employee Stock Option Plan – Non-monetary incentive schemes: Types
and relevance.
UNIT 9 Performance Linked Compensation: Measuring performance – KPP - implications –
problems- prospects Introduction to Implementation of Evaluated Job; Introduction to
Determinants of Incentives; Introduction to Classification of Rewards; Incentive
Payments and its Objectives.

UNIT 10 Introduction to Institutional Mechanisms for Wage Determination Performance

parameters – service benefit – merit cum reward –citation – token of gift -
promotions

UNIT 11 Performance compensation – Structure – measures – Key performance parameters -

Control of employee cost – implications - problems.

UNIT 12 Legislations regarding Compensations – Key provisions of Payment of Wages Act,

Minimum Wages Act and Payment of Bonus Act.

UNIT 13 Current Trends in Compensation: Executive compensation – International

compensation – Challenges and scope. Introduction to Planning Compensation for
Executives & knowledge Workers

UNIT 14 Introduction to Wage Incentives in India; Introduction to Types of Wage Incentive

Plans- Compensation and satisfaction – Compensation and motivation –
Compensation for knowledge personnel.

REFERENCES :

1. Suril G K, Wage, incentives: Theory and Practice.

2. Morris, Principles and Practices of Job Evaluation.
3. Dravid W Belcher, Wage and Salary Administration.
4. Richard Henderson, Compensation Management in a Knowledge Based World.
 34342 - GLOBAL HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT
Objective:

• To understand the basic concept of Human Resource Management.

• To gain knowledge on GHRM

UNIT 1 Nature and scope of International Human Resource Management (IHRM)-

approaches to HRM-differences between domestic HRM and IHRM. Human
Resources management: Overview of operative functions – Recruitment –
Selection – Integration – Compensation

UNIT 2 Training for development and separation – Challenges and opportunities of

globalising HR. Human resource planning in IHRM- recruitment and selection-
issues in staff selection of expatriates.

UNIT 3 Global HR Recruitment and Selection: Home – Host – Third country nations –
Selection criteria for global assignments

UNIT 4 Global HR - Election process – Challenges of global placements – current

scenario.

UNIT 5 Global HR Integration Process: Process of integration – Motivation and team in

HR – Cultural adoptability vis-à-vis Individuality

UNIT 6 Managing cross-cultural diversities – Multiculturalism – Organisational culture of

MNCs – Experiences of best run companies.

UNIT 7 Global HR Compensation Process: Direct and indirect compensation – procedure

– wage linked performance

UNIT 8 International compensation – Pay for performance – Executive incentive pay –

Pay differences – Causes and consequences

UNIT 9 Compensation structure in MNCs – types – WTO – IBRD – Implications =

problems Training and development -expatriate training-developing international
staff and multinational teams. Brain drain and brain bank.
UNIT 10 Global HR Training and Development Practice: Relevance of training and
development Compensation-objectives of international compensation approaches
of international compensation.

UNIT 11 Area of training – Types: Standard Vs Tailor made training – Cultural

assimilations and other approaches

UNIT 12 Impact of different learning styles on training and development – Leadership

training-Key issues in International relations-strategic choices before firms-
strategic choices before unions-union tactics

UNIT 13 HR Relations Management: Labour relations in the international area –

Relationship between employer and employee

UNIT 14 US, Japanese, UK, European approaches to labour relations –Role of strategic
management of international labour relations-Issues and Challenges of IHRM.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Venkataraman C.S &Srivatsava B.K ‘Personnel Management and Human Resources, Tata
Mcgrew Hill, New Delhi.
2. Prasad, L.M, Human Resource Management, SulteyChend& Sons, New Delhi.
3. Edwin Flippo, Personnel Management.
4. Memoria, CB, Personnel Management, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai.
 34343 - EMOTIONAL COMPETENCE
Objective:

• To know the basic concept of Emotional Competence.

• To gain knowledge on self marketing adoptability social skills

UNIT 1 Emotions: Meaning – Types – Effects – Emotional Intelligence: Meaning –

Significance –Working with emotional intelligence

UNIT 2 Emotional Competencies: Meaning – Types: Personal competence – Social

competence-intercultural communication- creative and critical thinking

UNIT 3 Self-Marketing: The inner rudder – Source of gut feeling – Power of intuition –
Emotional awareness – Recognizing one’s emotions and their effects

UNIT 4 Accurate self-assessment – Knowing one’s inner resources - abilities and limits –
Self-Confidence

UNIT 5 Developing strong sense of one’s self-worth and capabilities - Personal

Competence: Self-control

UNIT 6 leadership straits-team work- career planning -Keeping disruptive emotions and
impulses in check – passive emotions – stress

UNIT 7 Trustworthiness and consciousness – mutual trust – relationship between

individual and institutions

UNIT 8 Adaptability – Innovation – Motivation: Achievement drive – Commitment –

Initiative Optimism.

UNIT 9 Social Competence: Empathy: Understanding others – Developing others –

Service orientation – Leveraging diversity – Political awareness.

UNIT 10 Social Skills: Art of Influence – Communication – Conflict management-

Organizational behaviour application of emotion and moods Training and
development -Performance evaluation- Job enrichment, job enlargement, job
analysis.
UNIT 11 Leadership – meaning - Types – Characteristic – approaches – leaders: Types,
scope, controlling techniques - Change catalyst – Building bonds

UNIT 12 Collaboration and cooperation – Team capabilities- Group Vs. team – objectives
of team and group – types – nature – Purpose.

UNIT 13 Managing Emotions: Building emotional competence – -Emotional intelligence-

Motivation - Definition -Theories -Work environment - Employee involvement –
rewarding employees

UNIT 14 Multiple intelligences- emotional intelligence- managing changes-time

management-stress management Guidelines for learning emotion – Competence
training – Best practices.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Daniel Goleman, ‘Emotional Intelligence’, Bantam Books.

2. Daniel Goleman, ‘Working with Emotional Intelligence’, Bantam Books.
 34344 - LABOUR LEGISLATIONS - II

Objective:

• To know the basic concept of LL and provisions.

• To gain knowledge on payment of gratuity act on 1972

UNIT 1 Payment of Bonus Act: Computation of available surplus calculation of direct tax
payable surplus calculation of direct tax payable by the employer

UNIT 2 Eligibility for bonus and payment of bonus – deduction from bonus payable –
adjustment of customary of interim bonus payable

UNIT 3 Adjustment of customary or interim bonus linked with production or productivity

– set on and set off allocable surplus

UNIT 4 Set on and set off allocable surplus set on and set off allocable surplus
presumption about accuracy of balance sheet and profit and loss account.

UNIT 5 Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972: Payment of Gratuity – exemption – nomination

– determination and recovery of the amount of gratuity.

UNIT 6 Payment of Wages Act, 1936: Objects, provisions relating to responsibility for
payment of wages

UNIT 7 Fixation of wage periods, time of payment, deduction and fines

UNIT 8 Maintenance of records and registers, inspectors appointment of authorities and

adjudication of claims.

UNIT 9 Minimum Wages Act, 1948: Objects, fixing of minimum rate or wages –
procedure for fixing and receiving minimum wages

UNIT 10 Appointment of advisory board – payment of minimum wages, maintenance of

registers and records contracting out

UNIT 11 An Act to provide for fixing minimum rates of wages in certain employments.
Powers of appropriate government offences and penalties.
UNIT 12 Industrial Employment(Standing Orders) Act, 1946: Provisions regarding
certification and operating of standing orders .

UNIT 13 Duration and modification of standing orders – power of certifying officer –

interpretation of standing orders.

UNIT 14 Trade Union Act, 1926: Registration of Trade Unions, rights, and liabilities trade
unions – procedure – penalties

REFERENCE

1 Bare Acts
2 Kapoor N D, Industrial Laws
3 Shukla M C, Industrial Laws
4 Tax Mann, Labour Laws, 2008.
 34345 - ORGANISATIONAL DEVELOPMENT
Objective:

• To know the basic concept of Organizational Development.

• To gain knowledge on theories and practices

UNIT 1 Introduction to Organization Development – Concept – Nature and scope of

organizational development

UNIT 2 History of organizational development – Underlying assumptions and values.

OD interventions meaning – methods - classifications of interventions - team
interventions

UNIT 3 Gestalt approach of team building - inter group interventions - comprehensive

interventions Theory and practice of organizational development – Operational
components

UNIT 4 Diagnostic, action and process – Maintenance component – nature – scope –

implications

UNIT 5 Action Research as a process – An approach – History – Use and varieties of

action research

UNIT 6 When and how to use action research in organizational development – concept -
nature.

UNIT 7 Organizational development interventions – Team interventions – Inter-group

interventions

UNIT 8 Personal, interpersonal and group process interventions – implications- OD

diagnosis - action component - OD interventions - action research - its application
and approach

UNIT 9 MBO - quality circle – TQM - QWL (quality of work life) Physical setting etc.,
Training – T groups - coaching and mentoring and other methods

UNIT 10 Implementation and assessment of organizational development – Conditions for

success and failure

UNIT 11 Ethical standards in organizational development – Organizational development

and organizational performance – Implications.
UNIT 12 Key consideration and issues in organizational development- Comprehensive
interventions – Structural interventions.

UNIT 13 Models and theories of planned change - teams and teamwork - applied behaviour
science Future of organizational development - current scenario – barriers-
implications

UNIT 14 Consultant – client relationship - power, politics and OD Research on OD - Indian

experiences in organizational development – lesson drawn from abroad

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. French and Bell, Organizational development, Prentice Hall, 1995.

2. French, Bell, Zawach (Edn) Organization Development: Theory, Practice and Research.
UBP.
3. Rosabeth Moss Kanter, The Change Masters, Simon &Schaster.
4. Wendell, L. French, Cecil H. Bell, “Organization Development”, Prentice Hall, 6th Edition
2008
3.DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The course shall consist of two academic years divided into four semesters

4.Faculty and Support Staff Requirements

This programme requires the following faculty and supporting staffs

Staff Category Required

Core Faculty * 3
Faculty for Specialization* 2
Clerical Assistant 1

*At least Assistant Professor Level (Either permanent or part time)

5.Instructional Delivery Mechanism

Each semester there will be one contact programme of 80 hours duration in theory. The SLM
(Self Learning Material) will be supplied to the students in print form as well as in CD form. The
face to face contact sessions of the programme for theory courses will be held at the head quarter
/ learning centres. The conduct of end semester examinations, evaluation and issuance of
certificates will be done by office of the Controller of examinations, Alagappa University,
Karaikudi.

F) PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION, CURRICULUM TRANSACTION, AND

EVALUATION

Procedure of Admission
A candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University in the Pattern of
10+2+3 shall be permitted to appear and qualify for the programme.

Curriculum Transactions:

The class room teaching would be through conventional lecture, use of OHP, power point
presentation and novel innovative teaching ideas like television and computer aided instruction.
Student seminars would be arranged to improve their awareness and communicative skill.
Face to face contact session will be conducted as given in below table.

Course Type Face to Face Contact

Session/semester (in Hours)

5 Theory courses with 4 credits 80

Total 80

Evaluation
The examinations shall be conducted for theory to assess the knowledge acquired during
the study. There shall be two systems of examinations viz., internal and external examinations. In
the case of theory courses, the internal evaluation shall be conducted as Continuous Internal
Assessment via. student assignments preparation. The internal assessment shall comprise of
maximum 25 marks for each course. The end semester examination shall be of three hours
duration to each course at the end of each semester. The end semester examinations shall
comprise of maximum of 75 marks for each course. The candidate failing in any course(s) will
be permitted to appear for each failed course(s) in the subsequent examination.
f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments:
The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory courses

Component Marks

Assignments(3) 25
(10+10+5)
Total 25

Question paper pattern (Theory)

• The question paper carries a maximum of 75 marks.

• The question paper consists of three sections namely Part-A, Part-B and Part-C.
• Part-A consists of 10 questions of 2 marks each (10 x 2 = 20 marks) with no choice. The
candidate should answer all questions.
• Part-B consists of 5 either or choice questions. Each question carries 5 marks (5 x 5=25
marks).
• Part-C consists of 5 questions. Each question carries 10 marks. The candidate should
Answer any three questions (10 x 3 = 30 marks).

Passing minimum

• There shall be no Passing Minimum for Internal.

• For External Examination, Passing Minimum shall be of 50% (Fifty Percentage) of the
maximum marks (75) prescribed for the paper.
• In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of 50 Mark for each
Paper
• Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (internal + external).

Candidate who does not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass in a course shall be
required to appear and pass the same at a subsequent appearance.

Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and classification to indicate the
performance of the candidate.

Range of Marks Grade Points Letter Grade Description

90-100 9.0-10.0 O Outstanding

80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent
75-79 7.5-7.9 D Distinction
70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good
60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good
50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average
00-49 0.0 U Re-appear
ABSENT 0.0 AAA ABSENT

Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semester

Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester.
n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited
For a semester;

Grade Point Average [GPA] = ∑iCiGi/ ∑i Ci

Grade Point Average = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the courses

Sum of the credits of the courses in a semester

For the entire programme;

Cumulative Grade Point Average [CGPA] = ∑n ∑iCniGni/ ∑n ∑iCni

CGPA = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the entire programme

Sum of the credits of the courses for the entire programme

CGPA Grad Classification of Final

Result

9.5-10.0 O+ First Class- Exemplary*

9.0 and above but below 9.5 O

8.5 and above but below 9.0 D++ First Class with
8.0 and above but below 8.5 D+ Distinction*

7.5 and above but below 8.0 D

7.0 and above but below 7.5 A++ First Class

6.5 and above but below 7.0 A+
6.0 and above but below 6.5 A

5.5 and above but below 6.0 B+ Second Class

5.0 and above but below 5.5 B

0.0 and above but below 5.0 U Re-appear

*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the prescribed semester of
the PG Programme are eligible.
Maximum duration for completion of the course

The maximum duration for the programme shall not exceed five years after the completion of
the minimum duration of the programme.

Commencement of this regulation

These regulations shall come into effect from the academic year 2018-19 for students who are
admitted to the first year of the course during the academic year 2018-19.

Fee structure

Sl. No. Fees Detail Amount in Rs.

First Year Second Year

1 Admission Processing Fees 300.00 -

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

3 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00

G) REQUIREMENT OF THE LIBRARY RESOURCES:

LIBRARY RESOURCES
The Central Library is one of the important central facilities of Alagappa University. It has text
book, reference books, conference proceedings, back volumes, standards, and non-book material
such as CD-ROMs and audios. The central Library procured several e-books in different areas.
The library also subscribes to about 250 current periodicals. The Directorate of Distance
Education of Alagappa University has adequate number of copies of books related to
Management Programme.
COST ESTIMATE OF THE PROGRAMME AND THE PROVISIONS:

Sl. No. Nature of Expenditure Amount in Rs.

(Approx.)
1 Programme Development 10,00,000/-
2 Programme Delivery 20,00,000/-
3 Programme Maintenance 3,00,000/-

i) QUALITY ASSURANCE MECHANISM AND EXPECTED PROGRAMME

OUTCOMES

• The feedback from students on teaching will be collected every semester using standard
formats.
• Feedback on the curriculum will also be collected from the experiences of the students
which help teachers in fine tuning of deliverables in the classroom.
• It helps in improving the standard of teaching as expected by the students.
• Exit survey feedback on various parameters to improve and quality of the programme and
support services like course material, library and infrastructure.
• It helps to strengthen the contents of the program to meet the requirements of the
employment market and keep the curriculum as a treasure of knowledge.
• This programme provides Opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate
knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and other attributes.

****
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT

MBA (INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS)

DIRECTORATE OF DISTANCE
EDUCATION ALAGAPPA
UNIVERSITY
KARAIKUDI – 630 003
 PROGRAMME PROJECT REPORT MBA INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS

a) PROGRAMME MISSION AND OBJECTIVES

Business Studies have fascinated humans for two reasons, namely generating
interest and augmenting essentials of running a firm effectively. That is why
their study is enchanting and glorifying. The primary objective of this
programme is to provide ample exposure to subjects from the fields of business
legacy and accountancy, equip the Students for entry level jobs in industry and
to contribute to the economic development of the country.

b) RELEVANCE OF THE PROGRAMME WITH HEI’S MISSION AND GOALS:

The Alagappa University is functioning with following Vision and Mission:

Mission: Achieving Excellence in all spheres of Education, with particular

emphasis on ‘PEARL”- Pedagogy, Extension, Administration, Research and
Learning

Vision: Affording High Quality Higher Education to the learners so that they
are transformed into intellectually competent human resources that will help in
the uplift of the nation to Educational, Social, Technological, Environmental
and Economic Magnificence.

Therefore, the introduction of MBA INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS

programme in the Directorate of Distance Education will contribute
substantially in fulfilling the mission of Alagappa University. Such a higher
education in subject with appropriate Practical Exposer will enrich the human
resources for the uplift of the Nation to Educational, Social, Technological,
Environmental and Economic Magnificence (ESTEEM).

c) NATURE OF PROSPECTIVE TARGET GROUP OF LEARNERS

 Working Professionals
 Entrepreneurs
 Service Personnel
 Academic Faculty
 Government Officials
 Researchers
  Home makers
 Unemployed Graduates

d) APPROPRIATENESS OF PROGRAMME

To Attain Leadership in spearheading qualitative and responsible academic

programs relevant to the society through cost effective off-campus distance
mode of education. knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and other
attributes in the following areas:

 The fundamental concepts of Management

 The higher-level taxonomy and diversity of Business Studies.
 How principles of Business can be applied to problems
 Internship training in Industry
 Undertake Inter tasks and techniques.
 Inter-disciplinary knowledge like statistics, Mathematics, Computer and E-Banking.
 Using the SPSS package for the analysis of data
 It also improves the Intellectual skills of the students.
 In nutshell, these skills will improve the performance of the students parameters.
E) INSTRUCTIONAL DESIGN
MBA INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
Course Title CIA ESE TOT C
Code Max. Max. Max.
I Semester
32811 Management – Principles and Practices 25 75 100 4
32812 Organizational Behaviour 25 75 100 4
32813 Managerial Economics 25 75 100 4
32814 Quantitative Techniques 25 75 100 4
32815 Financial and Management Accounting 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
II Semester
32821 Research Methods 25 75 100 4
32822 Business Environment 25 75 100 4
32823 Business Laws 25 75 100 4
32824 Management Information System 25 75 100 4
32825 Human Resource Management 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
III Semester
32831 Marketing Management 25 75 100 4
32832 Financial Management 25 75 100 4
32833 International Economics 25 75 100 4
32834 International Marketing 25 75 100 4
32835 Export Management and Documentation 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
IV Semester
32841 International marketing logistics 25 75 100 4
32842 Foreign exchange management 25 75 100 4
32843 Management strategies of MNCs 25 75 100 4
32844 WTO – Constitutions and Operations 25 75 100 4
32845 Multinational financial management 25 75 100 4
Total 125 375 500 20
Grand Total 2000 80
 Course Code Legend:
3 2 8 Y Z

328- M.B.A Programme Y -Semester Number

Z- Course Number in the Semester

CIA: Continuous Internal Assessment, ESE: End Semester Examination,

TOT: Total, C: Credit Points, Max.: Maximum

No. of Credits per Course (Theory) - 5 Total No. of Credits per Semester- 20
Total Credits for the Programme- 20 X 4 =80
 32811- MANAGEMENT PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES

Objectives:
 To introduce the basic concepts of Management functions and principles
 To learn the scientific decision making and modern trend in the management process
 To understand the contemporary practices and issues in management

UNIT 1 Management: Definition – Nature, Scope and Functions – Evolution of

Management – Management thought in modern trend – Patterns of the
management analysis – Management Vs. Administration - Management and
Society: The external Environment, Social Responsibility and Ethics.

UNIT 2 Management Science and Theories : Contributions of FW Taylor, Henri Fayol,

Elton Mayo, Roethilisberger, H.A.Simon and P.F Drucker - Universality of
Management - Relevance of management to different types of organization.

UNIT 3 Planning: Nature and Purpose – Principles and planning premises –

Components of planning as Vision, Mission, Objectives, Managing By
Objective (MBO) Strategies, Types and Policies -Planning and Decision
Making: Planning process.

UNIT 4 Decision making: Meanings and Types – Decision-making Process under

Conditions of Certainty and Uncertainty – Rational Decision Making
Strategies, Procedures, Methods, Rules, Projects and Budgets.

UNIT 5 Organizing: Nature, Importance, Principles, purpose and Scope - Organizing

functions of management – Classifications of organization – Principles and
theories of organization – Effective Organizing – Organizational Culture and
Global Organizing.

UNIT 6 Organizational Structure – Departmentalization – Span of control – Line and

staff functions – Formal and Informal Groups in Organizations - Authority and
responsibility - Centralization and decentralization – Delegation of authority –
Committees – Informal organization.

UNIT 7 Staffing: General Principles of Staffing- Importance, techniques, Staff

authority and Empowerment in the organization – Selection and Recruitment -
Orientation - Career Development - Career stages – Training – Performance
Appraisal.

UNIT 8 Creativity and Innovation – Motivation - Meaning – Importance – Human

factors of Motivation – Motivation Theories: Maslow, Herzberg, Mc Gregor
(X&Y), Ouchi (Z) ,Vroom, Porter-Lawler, McClelland and Adam –
Physiological and psychological aspects of motivation .

UNIT 9 Directing : Meaning, Purpose, and Scope in the organization – Leadership:

Meaning, Leadership styles, Leadership theories: Trait, Contingency,
Situation, Path-Goal, Tactical, Transactional, Transformational and Grid.
Leaders: Type, Nature, Significance and Functions, Barriers, Politics and
 Ethics. Leader Vs. Manager.

UNIT 10 Communications: Meaning – Types – Process – Communication in the

decision making – Global Leading - Effective communication in the levels of
management. – Uses of Communication to Planning, Organizing, coordinating
and controlling.

UNIT 11 Co-ordination: Concept; Meaning, Characteristics, Importance in the

organization, Co-ordination process and principles - Techniques of Effective
co-ordination in the organization - Understanding and managing the group
process.

UNIT 12 Business ethics: Relevance of values in Management; Holistic approach for

managers indecision-making; Ethical Management: Role of organizational
culture in ethics – Ethics Committee in the organization.

UNIT 13 Controlling: Objectives and Process of control Devices of control – Integrated

control – Special control techniques- Contemporary - Perspectives in Device
of Controls

UNIT 14 New Perspectives in Management - Strategic alliances – Core competence –

Business process reengineering – Total quality management – Six Sigma-
Benchmarking- Balanced Score-card.

REFERENCES

1. Stoner, et-al, Management, Prentice Hall, 1989.

2. Koontz and O’Donnell, Management: A Systems Approach, McGraw Hill, 1990
3. Weihrich and Koontz,Management: A Global Perspective, McGraw Hill, 1988
4. Peter F. Drucker, Management, 2008.
5. Gene Burton and Manab Thakur, Management Today: Principles and Practice, Tata
McGraw Hill.
6. Ricky W. Griffin, Management, South-WesternCollege Publications, 2010
7. Stephen P. Robbins and Mary Coulter, Management, 9th Edition, 2006.
8. Kaplan and Norton, The Strategy-Focused Organization: How Balanced Scorecard
Companies Thrive in the New Business Environment, HBP, 2000.
 32812- ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR

Objectives:
 To understand the personality trades and influence on the organization.
 To imbibe the necessary conceptual understanding of behaviour related people
 To learn the modern trends, theories and changes in organizational Behaviour.

UNIT 1 Organizational Behaviour: History – Meaning Elements – Evolution,

Challenges and opportunities – Trends – disciplines – Approaches – Models –
Management functions relevance to organizational Behaviour – Global
Emergence of OB as a discipline.

UNIT 2 Personality – Determinants, Structure, Behaviour, Assessment, Individual

Behaviour: Personality & Attitudes- Development of personality – Nature and
dimensions of attitude – Trait Theory – Organizational fit – Organizational
Commitment

UNIT 3 Emotions – Emotional Intelligence – Implications of Emotional Intelligence on

Managers – EI as Managerial tool – EI performance in the organization –
Attitudes: Definitions – Meaning – Attitude relationship with behaviour –
Types – Consistency

UNIT 4 Individual Behaviour and process of the organization: Learning, Emotions,

Attitudes, Perception, Motivation, Ability, Job satisfaction, Personality, Stress
and its Management – Problem solving and Decision making – Interpersonal
Communication - Relevance to organizational behaviour.

UNIT 5 Group Behaviour: Group Dynamics - Theories of Group Formation - Formal

and Informal Groups in organization and their interaction - Group norms –
Group cohesiveness – Team: Importance and Objectives - Formation of teams
– Team Work- Group dynamics – Issues - Their relevance to organizational
behaviour.

UNIT 6 Organizational Power: Organizational Power: Definition, Nature,

Characteristics - Types of powers - Sources of Power - Effective use of power
– Limitations of Power – Power centre in Organization.

UNIT 7 Organizational Politics: Definition – Political behaviour in organization -

Factors creating political behaviour – Personality and Political Behaviour -
Techniques of managing politics in organization – Impact of organizational
politics.

UNIT 8 Organizational Conflict Management: Stress Management: Meaning – Types –

Sources and strategies resolve conflict – Consequences – Organizational
conflict: Constructive and Destructive conflicts - Conflict Process - Strategies
for encouraging constructive conflict - Strategies for resolving destructive
conflict.
 UNIT 9 Organizational Dynamics: Organizational Dynamics – Organizational
Efficiency, Effectiveness and Excellence: Meaning and Approaches – Factors
affecting the organizational Climate.

UNIT 10 Organizational Culture: Meaning, significance – Theories – Organizational

Climate – Creation, Maintenance and Change of Organizational Culture –
Impact of organizational culture on strategies – Issues in Organizational
Culture.

UNIT 11 Inter personal Communication: Essentials, Networks, Communication

technologies – Non-Verbal communications Barriers – Strategies to overcome
the barriers. Behavioral Communication in organization - Uses to Business

UNIT 12 Organizational Change: Meaning, Nature and Causes of organizational change

Organizational Change –Importance – Stability Vs Change – Proactive Vs.
Reaction change – the change process – Resistance to change – Managing
change.

UNIT 13 Organizational Behaviour responses to Global and Cultural diversity,

challenges at international level, Homogeneity and heterogeneity of National
cultures, Differences between countries.

UNIT 14 Organizational Development: Meaning, Nature and scope – Features of OD –

OD Interventions- Role of OD – Problems and Process of OD – process OD
and Process of Intervention - Challenges to OD- Learning Organizations -
Organizational effectiveness Developing Gender sensitive workplace

REFERENCES

1. Fred Luthans, Organizational Behaviour, McGraw-Hill/Irwin, 2006.

2. Stephen P. Robbins, Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall; 2010
3. Keith Davis, Organizational Behavior: Human Behavior at Work, McGraw Hill, 2010
4. Griffin and Moorhead, Organizational Behavior: Managing People and Organizations,
2006.
5. Judith R. Gordon, Organizational Behavior: A Diagnostic, Prentice Hall, 2001.
6. K. Aswathappa, Organizational Behaviour, Himalaya Publishing, Mumbai, 2010
7. Judith R. Gordon, A Diagnostic Approach to Organizational Behaviour, Allyn &
Bacon, 1993.
 32813 - MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
Objectives:
 To understand the economic principles and its applications in business
 To develop economics based analytic skills for business
 To make the learners to strong in economical approach

UNIT 1 Economics: Introduction – Meaning, nature and scope of Managerial

Economics – General Foundations of managerial Economics – Economic
Approach – Working of Economic system - Circular flow activities -
Economics & Business Decisions - Relationship between Economic theory
and Managerial Economics.

UNIT 2 Business Decisions: Role of managerial Economics in Decision making –

Decision making under Risk and Uncertainty - Concepts of Opportunity cost, -
Production possibility curve – Incremental Concepts - Cardinal and Ordinal
approaches to consumer Behaviour Time Value of Money –

UNIT 3 Consumer Behaviour: Marginalism – Equilibrium and Equi-marginalism and

their role in business decision making. – Equi-Marginal principles – Utility
analysis – Total and Marginal Utility – Law of diminishing marginal utility –
Marshallian approach and Indifference curve analysis.

UNIT 4 Demand analysis: Meaning, Functions - Determinants of demand-Law of

Demand – Demand Estimation and Forecasting - Applications of demand in
analysis - Elasticity of Demand: Types, Measures and Role in Business
Decisions.

UNIT 5 Supply Analysis: Determinants of supply- Elasticity of Supply- Measures and

Significance - Derivations of market demand – Demand Estimation and Fore
casting- Demand and Supply equilibrium – Giffen Paradox

UNIT 6 Production Functions: Managerial uses of production function - Cobb-Douglas

and other production functions - Isoquants – Short run and long run
production function – Theory of production – Empirical estimations of
production functions.

UNIT 7 Forms of Markets: Meaning and Characteristics - Market Equilibrium:

Practical Importance, Market Equilibrium and Changes in Market Equilibrium.
Pricing Functions: Market Structures - Pricing and output decisions under
different competitive conditions: Monopoly Monopolistic completion and
Oligopoly

UNIT 8 Strategic Behaviour of the firms and Game Theory - Nash Equilibrium:
Implications – Prisoner’s Dilemma: Types of strategy – Price and Non price
competition – Relation to the firm behaviour.

UNIT 9 Cost and Return: Cost function and cost output relationship – Economics and
Diseconomies of scale - Cost control and cost reduction- Cost Behaviour and
Business Decision- Relevant costs for decision-making- Traditional and
Modern theory of Cost.
 UNIT 10 New Product Penetrative Decision and Skimming the cream Pricing-
Government control over pricing - Concept of Profit- Types and Theories of
Profit by Knight (Uncertainty), Schumpeter (Innovation), Clark (Dynamic)
and Hawley (Risk) - Profit maximization – Cost volume profit analysis – Risk
and Return Relationship.

UNIT 11 Profit and Investment Analysis: Meaning – Measurement of profit – Theories

of Pricing- Profit planning and forecasting- Profit and Wealth maximization –
Cost volume profit analysis – Investment analysis and Evaluation: IRR, NPV
and APV techniques.

UNIT 12 Macro-economic Factors: Nature, Importance ; Economic Growth and

Development - Business cycle – Phases and Business Decision- Inflation -
Factors causing Inflation and Deflation - Control measures – Balance of
payment Trend and its implications in managerial decision.

UNIT 13 National Income: Introduction Meaning – Theories – Methods of

Measurement - Sectoral and Population distributions – Per capita Income:
Definition – Calculations – Uses – Limitations – GDP – GNP - Recent
developments in Indian Economy.

UNIT 14 Economic Regulations of Business: Introduction – Antitrust theory and

Regulations – The structure – Conduct – Performance paradigm –
Concentration: Overview – Measuring concentration – Regulation of
Externalities.

REFERENCES
1. Dominick Salvatore, Managerial Economics in a Global Economy,OxfordUniversity
Press, 2011.
2. Ivan Png and Dale Lehman, Managerial Economics, Wiley-Blackwell, 2007.
3. Truett Lila J., Truett, Dale B. and Truett J. Lila (2006), Managerial Economics:
Analysis Problems, Cases, 8th Editon, John Wiley & Sons.
4. Atmanand (2008), Managerial Economics, 2nd Edition, Excel Books.
5. Christopher R Thomas & S Charles Maurice (2008), Managerial Economics, 9th
edition, McGraw Hill Co.
6. Petersen, H. C., Cris, L W and Jain, S.K. (2008), Managerial Economics, 1st edition
Pearson
7. Gupta G S, Managerial Economics, Tata McGraw-Hill.
8. Varshney and Maheswari, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
9. Mehta P L, Managerial Economics, Sultan Chand and Sons.
10. Joel Dean, Managerial Economics, Prentice-Hall.
 32814- QUANTITATIVE TECHNIQUES
Objectives:
 To help develop analytical skills based on problem solving approach
 To learn quadrature problems solving of business issues.
 To acquire the knowledge in statistics and their use in business decision making.

UNIT 1 Basic Quantitative Concepts: Place of quantitative analysis in the practice of

management – Problem definition: Models and their development. Variables
notion of Mathematical models – concept of trade off – Notion of constants –
concept of Interest.

UNIT 2 Basic Concept of differentiation – integration – Optimization concepts – use of

differentiation for optimization of business problem Optimization Statistics:
Meaning and Applications of Statistics in business decision making and
research - Collection, Tabulation and presentation of data - Measures of central
tendency: Mean, Median and Mode. Measures of dispersion

UNIT 3 Variables and function: Linear and Non-linear –Graphical representation of

functions and their applications in cost and revenue behavior. Slope and its
relevance –Use of functional relationships to understand elasticity of demands,
Relationship between costs and level of activity, Decisions on Minimizing
Costs and Maximizing output/profits.
UNIT 4 Linear Programming: Introduction to the linear programming – Concepts of
optimization- Formulation of different types of linear programming –Standard
from of LP problems - Importance and practical implementation in Industry
UNIT 5 Simple regression and Correlation analysis: Introduction, Correlation,
Correlation analysis, linear regression analysis and Co-efficient. Duality and
sensitivity analysis for decision-making- Solving LP using graphical and
simplex method (only simple problems) – Interpreting the solution for
decision-making

UNIT 6 Special Algorithms of LPP: Transportation Algorithm - Balanced and

Unbalanced Problem Formulation and solving methods: North West Corner,
Vogel’s Approximation-MODI method- Assignment and Travelling Executive
Algorithms
UNIT 7 Theory of Probability: Introduction to the Concept – Development of
probability – Areas and Utilisation of probability theories in the Business –
Sample space – terminology – Types of probability.

UNIT 8 Theoretical Probability Distributions: Introduction - Concept of events –

Probability of events – Joint, conditional and marginal probabilities
Probability distributions: Binomial, Poisson and Normal – Features and
Applications – Use of Normal Tables.

UNIT 9 Operational research for Decision Making: Historical background and

Developments – Definition – Phases in the use of Operations research –
Models – Characteristics of quantitative methods - Benefits and Limitations of
Quantitative methods.
 UNIT 10 Sequencing /Scheduling Methods : Concepts – terminology – Notations –
Assumption for scheduling models – Job sequencing priorities – Processing
the job and Mass production system.

UNIT 11 Simulation Techniques: Introduction to simulation as an aid to decision-

making- Advantages and Disadvantages of Simulation – Applications of
simulations models – Types: Inventory, Cash, and Project – Random Numbers.

UNIT 12 Queuing Theory: Introduction – Definition – Queue priorities Product

launching problems using Monte Carlo simulation- Queuing Theory: M/M/1
queuing model and applications.

UNIT 13 Decision Analysis: Concepts – Definition – Decision Tables Pay-off and Loss
tables – Expected value of pay-off – Expected value of Perfect Formation –
decision making process

UNIT 14 Decision Tree Analysis: Decision making environments – Concept of

Posterior probabilities Decision Tree approach to choose optimal course of
action Criteria for decision – Mini-max, Maxi-max, Minimizing Maximal
Regret and their applications.

REFERENCES

1. David R. Anderson, et al, An Introduction to Management Science: Quantitative

Approaches to Decision Making, Cengage Learning, 2008.
2. Lucey, Quantitative Techniques Cengage Learning Business Press, 2002
3. Sharma, Operations Research: Theory and Applications.
4. Richard I Levin, & C. Atkinson Kirkpatrick, Quantitative Approaches to Management,
McGraw-Hill.
5. K. Gupta and D.S. Hira, Operations Research.
6. Srivastava, Shenoy and Sharma, Quantitative Techniques for Managerial Decision-
making, New Age International, 2006.
7. N.D. Vohra, Quantitative Techniques in Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
8. V.K. Kapoor, Operations Research.
9. Dharani Venkatakrishnan, Operations Research: Principles and Problems.
10. Hamdy A. Taha, Operations Research: An Introduction, Prentice Hall, 2002.
 32815- FINANCIAL AND MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING

Objectives:
 To enable the students to learn basic accounting principles, concepts.
 To practice Financial and Management accounting applications
 To make the learners familiarize in managerial decision making.

UNIT 1 Accounting: Definition – Accounting for historical function and managerial

function - Types of Accounting- Management, Management and Cost
accounting – Scope for Accounting-Managerial Uses of Management
accounting and Financial Accounting.

UNIT 2 Accounting Concepts and Conventions – Accounting standards - Financial

Accounting Definitions – Principles – Accounting standards - Double entry
system of accounting: Accounting books – Preparation of journal and ledger,
subsidiary books.

UNIT 3 Preparation of Trial Balance – Errors and rectification – Classifications of

capital and Revenue – Fixed Assets and Depreciation accounting – Preparation
of Manufacturing accounting- Preparation of Final Accounts - Accounting
from incomplete records – Statements of affairs methods

UNIT 4 Conversion methods – Preparation of Trading, Profit & Loss Account and
Balance Sheet from incomplete records – Depreciation methods - Straight line
method, Written down value method, Sinking fund method.

UNIT 5 Financial Statement Analysis - Objectives - Reorganizing the Financial

Statement information -Techniques of Financial Statement Analysis:
Comparative Statements, Common – Size statement, Trend Percentage -

UNIT 6 Management Statement Analysis: Management statements – Nature of

management statements – Limitations of management statements – Analysis
of interpretation -Types of analysis- Tools of analysis: Trend analysis,
Common size statements and Comparative statements;

UNIT 7 Accounting Ratios: Construction of balance sheet using ratios (problems) –

Financial ratios – Types: Profitability ratios – Turnover ratios – Liquidity
ratios – Proprietary ratios – Market earnings ratios- Uses and limitations of
ratios - Dupont analysis.

UNIT 8 Fund Flow Analysis: Need and meaning – Preparation of schedule of changes
in working capital and the fund flow statement – Workings for
Computation of various sources and uses - Preparation of Fund Flow
Statement

UNIT 9 Cash flow Analysis: Meaning and importance Managerial uses of cash flow
statement – Differences between fund flow and cash flow analysis - Uses and
limitation of fund flow statement- Preparation of cash flow statement
 UNIT 10 Cost Accounting: Cost Accounting - Meaning - Distinction between Financial
Accounting and Cost Accounting - Cost Terminology: Cost, Cost Centre, Cost
Unit - Elements of Cost - Cost Sheet – Problems - Overhead Cost Allocations:
Over and under Absorption. Job and Contract Costing,

UNIT 11 Operating Costing: Material Cost Accounting, Perpetual Inventory Control,

Inventory Valuation, EOQ, ABC Analysis, Setting of Reorder Level,
Maximum Level, Minimum Level, Labour Cost Accounting, Remuneration
and Incentive Schemes- Reconciliation of Financial and Cost Accounting

UNIT 12 Marginal Costing: Definition – Difference between marginal costing and

absorption costing – Break- even point Analysis - Contribution, p/v Ratio,
margin of safety - Decision making under marginal costing system-key factor
analysis, make or buy decisions, export decision, sales mix decision-Problems

UNIT 13 Budgeting and Budgetary Control: Concept and Need for Budgeting-
Classification of budgets – Preparation of Sales, Production, Material,
Purchase and Cash Budgets –Budgetary control system – Mechanism – Master
budget.

UNIT 14 Capital Budgeting System: Importance – Methods of capital expenditure

appraisal – Payback period method – ARR method – DCF methods – NPV and
IRR methods – Their rationale – Capital rationing.

REFERENCES
1. Arulanandam& K.S. Raman,Advanced Accounting, Himalaya Publishing House.
2. Gupta &Radhasamy,Advanced Accounting, Sultan Chand & Sons.
3. Shukla & T.S. Grewal,Advanced Accounting, S.Chand&Company.
4. Jain &Narang,Advanced Cost Accounting, Kalyani. Publications.
5. Ravi M. Kishore, Cost Management, Taxman Publications
6. S.N. Maheswari, Management Accounting &Management Accounting, Vikas
Publishers.
7. Manmohan & Goyal, Principles of Management Accounting, Shakithabhavan
Publication.
8. N. K. Prasad,Advanced Cost Accounting, Book Syndicate Pvt. Ltd., Calcutta.
9. Andrew A Haried, Advanced Accounting, Atlantic Publishers.
10. Hoyle,Advanced Accounting, McGraw Hill.
 32821- RESEARCH METHODS
Objectives:
 To Understand the basic principles of research and design
 To practice the research process, tools and techniques
 To facilitate managerial decision making

UNIT 1 Research Bases: Definition and applications of business research; Types of

research –descriptive, exploratory, correlational, explanatory, quantitative,
qualitative; Steps in the research process; establishing operational definitions

UNIT 2 Research scope - Recent advancements in research. Distinction between Pure

& Applied, Historical & Futuristic, Analytical & Synthetic, Descriptive &
Prescriptive, Survey & Experimental and Case & Generic Researches

UNIT 3 Planning of Research: Research problem – Identification, selection and

formulation of research problem – Review of literature in the field of business
- Identifying objectives of the research.

UNIT 4 Economic management: Use in identifying Research Gaps and Techniques –

Hypothesis – Meaning – Sources and Types of Hypothesis – Hypothesis
Formulation for testing – Research design – Factors affecting research design
– Evaluation of research design

UNIT 5 Variables construction for Hypothesis: Identifying variables - Constructing

hypotheses – functions, characteristics, types of hypotheses - Significance of
research in social sciences – Induction and deduction.

UNIT 6 Sampling Design: Census method and sampling method for investigation –
Principle of sampling – Essentials of a good sampling – sampling frame;
Methods of sampling: Probability, non-probability, mixed sampling designs;

UNIT 7 Construction of sampling for Finite and Infinite populations – Sample size
determination– Calculations - Factors affecting the size of the sample – Biased
sample – Sampling and non-sampling errors.

UNIT 8 Sources and Collection of Data: Sources of data – Primary and secondary data
– Modes of data collection – Observation: Types and Techniques –Interview:
Types and conduct – Preparation for an interview – Effective interview
techniques – Limitations of interview

UNIT 9 Schedule: Meaning and kinds – Essentials of a good schedule – Procedure for
the formulation of a schedule – Questionnaire: Meaning and types – Format of
a good questionnaire– Schedules Vs. Questionnaires

UNIT 10 Scaling techniques: Meaning, Importance, Types of measurement scales –

Nominal, Ordinal, Interval, Ratio; Methods of their construction of
Questionnaires or Schedules – Pre-testing of Data Collection Tools- Validity
and Reliability – Methods.
 UNIT 11 Processing and Analysis of Data: Meaning – Importance – Process of data
analysis – Editing – Coding – Tabulation – Diagrams – Univariate, Bivariate
and Multi-variant analysis

UNIT 12 Test of Significance: Fundamentals on Test Procedure- Testing for

significance of Mean/Proportion and difference between Means/Proportions- F
Test for Means and Chi-square test Contingency Table - Parametric Test: T
test, F Test and Z test

UNIT 13 Non-parametric Test: Concept and Types: Mann Whitney Test- Test, Kruskal
Wallis, sign test. Multivariate analysis-factor, cluster, MDS, Discriminant
analysis - The process of interpretation of Test Results– Guidelines for making
valid interpretation

UNIT 14 Report Writing : Role and types of reports – Contents of research report –
Steps involved in drafting reports – Principles of good report writing –
Grammatical Quality – Language flow- Data Support- Diagrammatic
Elucidation- References and Annotations – Clarity and Brevity of
expressions- Features of a good Report- Criteria for evaluating research
reports/ research findings.

REFERENCES

1. John W Best & James V. Kahn Research in Education, Allyn and Bacon, 2009
2. Anderson et-al, Thesis and Assignment Writing, Wiley, New Delhi, 1989.
3. William Josiah Goode and Paul K. Hatt, Methods of Social Research, McGraw Hill,
1981.
4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar, Methods and Techniques of Social Research, 2003, HPH.
5. Earl R. BabbieRobert, ThePractice of Social Research, Cengage Learning, 2010.
6. B. Burns & A. Burns, Business Research Methods and Statistics Using SPSS, Sage
Publications, 2008.
7. Krishnaswami and Ranganatham, Research Methodology in social Sciences, HPH,
Mumbai
8. Bryman & Bell: Business Research Methods, OUP.
9. Pauline V Young, Scientific Social Surveys and Research, Prentice-Hall, (Digitalized)
2007.
10. C.R.Kothari, Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques, 2009
 32822- BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT
Objectives:
 To understand the concepts and constituents of Business environment
 To know the environmental issues in the business context
 To analyze the changes in the global environmental relating to business

UNIT 1 Business Environment: Introduction: Concepts – Significance - Dynamic

factors of environment – Importance of scanning the environment – Macro and
Micro Environment – Micro and Macro Economics to the business –
Constituents of Business environment

UNIT 2 Fundamental issues captured in PESTLE– Political, Economic, Socio-cultural,

Technological, Legal and Ecological environment- Opportunities and Threats
as environmental issues to address by Businesses.

UNIT 3 Political Environment: Government and Business – Political Systems, Political

Stability and Political Maturity as conditions of business growth - Role of
Government in Business: Entrepreneurial, Catalytic, Competitive, Supportive,
Regulative and Control functions

UNIT 4 Government and Economic planning: Industrial policies and promotion

schemes – Government policy and SSI – Interface between Government and
public sector - Guidelines to the Industries – Industrial Development
strategies; salient features, Role of public and private sectors, Comparative
cost dynamics.

UNIT 5 Economic Environment: Phase of Economic Development and its impact-

GDP Trend and distribution and Business Opportunities – capacity utilisation
– Regional disparities and evaluation - Global Trade and investment
environment.

UNIT 6 Financial System and Business capital: Monetary and Fiscal policies -
Financial Market structure – Money and Capital markets – Stock Exchanges
and Its regulations – Industrial Finance - Types, Risk - Cost-Role of Banks;
Industrial Financial Institutions - Role of Management Institutions

UNIT 7 Role of Central Bank- Fiscal System: Government Budget and Taxation
Measures- Fiscal Deficits and Inflation- FDI and collaboration –Foreign
Capital tapping by businesses- Export-Import policy – Foreign Exchange and
Business Development.

UNIT 8 Labour Environment: Labour Legislation – Labour and social securities –

Industrial Relations – Trade Unions – Workers participation in management –
Exit Policy – Quality Circles.

UNIT 9 Social and Technological Environment: Societal Structure and Features-

Entrepreneurial Society and its implications for business – Social and cultural
factors and their implications for business- Technology Development Phase in
the Economy as conditioner of Business Opportunities
 UNIT 10 Technology Environment: Technology Policy- Technology Trade and transfer-
Technology Trends in India- Role of Information Technology – Clean
Technology. – Time lag in technology – Appropriate technology and
Technology adoption- Impact of technology on globalization.

UNIT 11 Legal and Ecological Environment: Legal Environment as the all-enveloping

factor from inception, location, incorporation, conduct, expansion and closure
of businesses – IDRA and Industrial licensing – Public, Private, Joint and
Cooperative Sectors.

UNIT 12 Legal Aspects of Entering Primary and Secondary Capital Markets- Law on
Patents- Law on Consumer Protection- Law on Environmental Protection-
Need for Clean energy and Reduction of Carbon footprint.

UNIT 13 New Economic Policy Environment in India: Liberalization, Privatization and

Globalization (LPG): Efficiency Drive through Competition- Facets of
Liberalization and impact on business growth

UNIT 14 Aspects of Privatization and impact on business development– Globalization

and Enhanced Opportunities and Threats – Extended competition in Input and
Output Markets Role of WTO, IMF and World Bank in global economic
development.

REFERENCES

1. Brooks, Weatherston, Wilkinson, International Business Environment, Pearson, 2010.

2. Steiner & Steiner, Business, Government and Society: A Managerial Perspective,
McGraw-Hill, 2008.
3. Mohinder Kumar Sharma, Business Environment in India, South Asia Books.
4. Adhikary M, Economic Environment of Business, Sultan Chand & Sons.
5. Amarchand D, Government and Business, TMH.
6. Francis Cherunilam, Business Environment and Development, Himalaya Publishing
House, 2008.
7. Maheswari & Gupta, Government, Business and Society.
 32823- BUSINESS LAWS
Objectives:
 To understand the legal structure and provision for running a business
 To learn various acts, enactments and amendments of mercantile law
 To know the various aspects of Business law for legal process.

UNIT 1 Indian Contract Act 1872: Contract – Meaning – Essential elements – Nature
and formation of contract: Nature, elements, Classifications of Contracts on
the basis of Validity, Formation and Performance– offer and acceptance

UNIT 2 Offer and Acceptance: Introduction – Proposal – acceptance –

Communications of offer, Acceptance and Revocations – Offer and acceptance
by Post.

UNIT 3 Consideration: Definitions, Types of consideration – essentials of

Consideration – Privity of Contracts: Exceptions – Capacity: Consent –
Legality of object – Quasi contract Discharge of contract - Remedies for
breach of contract – Quasi contracts.

UNIT 4 Special Contracts: Contract of Indemnity and Guarantee – Bailment and

Pledge – Law of Agency-Definition – Rights of Surety -Discharge of Surety –
Bailment and Pledge: Introduction, Classifications, Duties and Rights of Bailer
and Bailee – termination of Bailment -

UNIT 5 Formation of contract under Sale of Goods Act, 1930: Contract of sale -
Conditions and Warranties - Transfer of property - Performance of the
contract: Essentials of valid tender performance, Performance reciprocal
promise- Rights of an unpaid seller.

UNIT 6 Laws on Carriage of Goods: Duties, Rights and Liabilities of Common

Carriers under: (i) The Carriers Act, 1865. (ii) The Railways Act, 1989, (iii)
The Carriage of Goods by Sea Act, 1925, (iv) The Carriage by Air Act, 1972
and (v) The Carriage By Road Act, 2007

UNIT 7 Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881: Negotiable Instruments: Features – Types-

Parties – Material alteration – Parties to negotiable instruments – Presentations
of negotiable instrument.

UNIT 8 Insurance: Definition and sources of Law – Judicial set up in India ––

Insurance as a contract -History of Insurance Legislation in India - Legal
principles - Fundamental Principles of Life Insurance Fire Insurance and
Marine Insurance.

UNIT 9 Indian Partnership Act, 1932: Meaning and test of partnership – registration of
firms Life Insurance Corporation Act 1956 – General Insurance Business
Nationalization Act 1973.

UNIT 10 Partners Relations: Introduction – Eligibility to be a partner – Registration of

change in partner – Limited Liabilities of partnership - Dissolution of firms -
 Characteristics – Kinds – Incorporation of Companies – Memorandum of
Association – Articles of Association

UNIT 11 Companies Act 1956: Nature and kinds of companies – Prospectus –

Disclosure Needs - Management and Administration – Director –
Appointment, Powers and Duties

UNIT 12 Formation of a Company : Introduction – process - Minutes and Resolutions –

E-Filling of documents under Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA) 21-
Management of companies –Meetings- Types- Requirements -AGM and EGM
– Board Meeting

UNIT 13 Law of Information Technology: Introduction – Rationale behind IT act 2000

– Information technology Act 2000: Scheme of the IT Act 2000: Digital
signature: attribution; Acknowledgement and dispatch of Electronics Record –
Regulation certifying authorities.

UNIT 14 Protection of minority interest: Introduction - Methods of Winding-up - The

Right to Information Act, 2005 Right to know, Salient features of the Act,
obligation of public Authority, Designation of Public Information officer,
Request for obtaining information,

REFERENCES

1. M.S.Pandit and ShobhaPandit, Business Law, Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai,

2010.
2. Pathak, Legal Aspects of Business, TMH, 2009.
3. N.D. Kapoor, Mercantile Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, New Delhi.
4. M.C. Shukla, Mercantile Law, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
5. Relevant Bare Acts.
6. Balachandran and Thothadri, business Law, TMH, 2010
 32824- MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM

Objectives:
 To learn the principles of Management Information System for organizations
 To understand the uses , function of application MIS in organization
 To analyze the scope of MIS for business organizations

UNIT 1 Foundations of Information System: Information system: Meaning, Role –

System concepts – Organization as a system – Components of Information
system – Various activities of IS and Types of IS

UNIT 2 Information System: Concepts of Information System and Management

information systems design and development-Implementation testing and
conversion- Evolution and element of MIS

UNIT 3 MIS : Definition – Characteristics and basic requirements of MIS – Structure

of MIS- Approaches to MIS development- Computerized MIS- Pre-requisites
of an effective MIS- Limitations of MIS.

UNIT 4 MIS and Decision support System (DSS): MIS Vs. data processing – MIS and
decision support system – MIS and information resource management – DSS
and AI – Overview of AI - DSS models and software.

UNIT 5 MIS and Operations Research- Executive information and Decision support
systems – Artificial intelligence and expert system – Merits and De Merits –
Pitfalls in MIS.

UNIT 6 MIS in Indian organizations – Recent developments in information technology

- Installation of Management Information & Control System in Indian
organization

UNIT 7 Computers and Communication: Information technology and Global

integration –On-line information services – Electronic bulletin board systems –
The internet, electronic mail, interactive video

UNIT 8 Communication Channels: Advantages disadvantages – Communication

networks – Local area networks – Wide area networks – Video conferencing-
Relevance to MIS- Usage in Business process.

UNIT 9 Functional Information systems: MIS for Research Production - MIS for
Marketing - MIS for Personnel - MIS for Finance - MIS for Inventory- MIS
for Logistics- MIS for Product Development- MIS for Market Development.

UNIT 10 Client/ Server Computing: Communication servers – Digital networks –

Electronic data interchange and its applications - Enterprise resource planning
systems (ERP Systems) – Inter-organizational information systems – Value
added networks – Networking.
 UNIT 11 Electronic Commerce and Internet: E-Commerce bases – E-Commerce and
Internet – M-Commerce- Electronic Data Inter-change (EDI) - Applications of
internet and website management - Types of Social Media - uses of social
media in business organization

UNIT 12 Computer System and Resources: Computers systems: Types and Types of
computer system processing - Secondary storage media and devices – Input
and output devices – Hardware standards – Other acquisition issues.

UNIT 13 Managing Information Technology: Managing Information Resources and

technologies – IS architecture and management - Centralized, Decentralized
and Distributed - EDI, Supply chain management & Global Information
technology Management.

UNIT 14 Security and Ethical Challenges: IS controls - facility control and procedural
control - Risks to online operations - Denial of service, spoofing - Ethics for IS
professional - Societal challenges of Information technology

REFERENCES

1. James O'Brien & George Marakas, Management Information Systems, McGraw Hill,
2011.
2. Kenneth Laudon & Jane Laudon, Essentials of MIS, Prentice Hall, 2010.
3. Lisa Miller, MIS Cases: Decision Making with Application Software, Prentice Hall,
2008.
4. David M. Kroenke, Experiencing MIS, Prentice Hall, 2011.
5. Kenneth C. Laudon, MIS: Managing the Digital Firm, Prentice Hall, 2005.
6. Sadogopan S, Management Information Systems, 2001PHI.
7. Murdie and Ross, Management Information Systems, Prentice Hall.
8. Henri C. Lucas, Information Systems Concepts for Management, McGraw Hill, 1994.
9. Stephen Haag, Management Information Systems, 2008.
 32825- HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Objective:

 To understand the concepts and methods and techniques of Human Resource

Management
 To know the Human resource management theories and real time practices
 To identify the contemporary issues in human resource management

UNIT 1: Introduction to Human Resource Management: Concept, Definition,

Objectives, Nature and Scope of HRM - Functions of HRM –
Evolution of human resource management - Role and structure of
Human Resource Function in organizations- Challenges in Human
Resource Management

UNIT 2 Human Resource Management Approaches: Phases of human

resource Management- The importance of the human factor –
Competitive challenges of HRM – HRM Models – Roles and
responsibilities of HR department.

UNIT 3 Human Resource Planning: Personnel Policy - Characteristics -

Role of human resource manager – Human resource policies –
Need, Scope and Process – Job analysis – Job description – Job
specification- Succession Planning.

UNIT 4 Recruitment and Selection Process: Employment planning and fore

casting Sources of recruitment- internal Vs. External; Domestic Vs.
Global sources- Selection process Building employee commitment :
Promotion from within - Sources, Developing and Using
application forms – IT and recruiting on the internet.

UNIT 5 Employee Testing & selection : Selection process, basic testing

concepts, types of test, work samples & simulation, selection
techniques, interview, common interviewing mistakes, Designing &
conducting the effective interview, small business applications,
computer aided interview.

UNIT 6 Training and Development: Orientation & Training: Orienting the

employees, the training process, need analysis, Training
techniques, special purpose training, Training via the internet. -
Need Assessment - Training methods for Operatives and
Supervisors

UNIT 7 Executive Development: Need and Programs - Computer

applications in human resource management – Human resource
accounting and audit. On-the - job and off-the-job Development
techniques using HR to build a responsive organization
 UNIT 8 Employee Compensation : Wages and Salary Administration
– Bonus – Incentives – Fringe Benefits –Flexi systems - and
Employee Benefits, Health and Social Security Measures

UNIT 9 Employee Retention: Need and Problems of Employees – various

retention methods– Implication of job change. The control process –
Importance – Methods – Employment retention strategies for
production and services industry

UNIT 10 Appraising and Improving Performance: Performance Appraisal

Programs, Processes and Methods, Job Evaluation, Managing
Compensation, Incentives Performance appraisal: Methods -
Problem and solutions - MBO approach - The appraisal interviews -
Performance appraisal in practice.

UNIT 11 Managing careers: Career planning and development - Managing

promotions and transfers - Sweat Equity- Job evaluation systems –
Promotion – Demotions – Transfers- Labour Attrition: Causes and
Consequences

UNIT 12 Employee Welfare, Separation: Welfare and safety – Accident

prevention – Employee Grievances and their Redressal – Industrial
Relations - Statutory benefits - non-statutory (voluntary) benefits –
Insurance benefits - retirement benefits and other welfare measures
to build employee commitment

UNIT 13 Industrial relations and collective bargaining: Trade unions –

Collective bargaining - future of trade unionism - Discipline
administration - grievances handling - managing dismissals and
workers Participation in Management- Separation: Need and
Methods.

UNIT 14Human Resource Information System- Personnel Records/ Reports-

e-Record on Employees – Personnel research and personnel audit –
Objectives – Scope and importance.
REFERENCES

1. Mathis and Jackson, Human Resource Management,South-WesternCollege,

2004.
2. Nkomo, Fottler and McAfee, Human Resource Management, South-
WesternCollege, 2007.
3. R. Wayne Mondy, Human Resource Management,Prentice Hall, 2011.
4. Venkataraman& Srivastava, Personnel Management & Human Resources
5. ArunMonappa, Industrial Relations
6. Yodder&Standohar, Personnel Management & Industrial Relations
7. Edwin B. Flippo, Personnel Management , McGraw-Hill, 1984
8. Pigors and Myers, Personnel Administration
9. R.S. Dwivedi, Manpower Management
10. Lynton &Pareek, Training and Development, Vistaar Publications, 1990.
 32831- MARKETING MANAGEMENT
Objectives:
 To help the learners understand markets, consumers and marketing principles.
 To understand the buyer behaviour and influencing factors
 To learn marketing plan, pricing, promotion and distribution in global context

UNIT 1 Introduction to Marketing: Meaning and Scope of Marketing;

Marketing Philosophies; Marketing Management Process-an
overview; Modern Marketing Concept: Social marketing concept –
Approaches to the study of marketing.

UNIT 2 Marketing segmentation: Meaning – Bases for segmentation,

benefits – Systems approach - Four Ps of Product and Seven Ps
Service marketing mix and Extensions- Targeting and Positioning -
meaning and importance.

UNIT 3 Marketing Environment: Internal and External and Demographic

factors – Adopting marketing to new liberalized and globalized
economy – Digitalization – Customization and E business settings.

UNIT 4 Consumer Behaviour : Meaning and importance – Consumer

buying process – Determinants and Theories of consumer behaviour
– Psychological, sociological determinants – Theories and their
relevance to marketing-

UNIT 5 Marketing Research: Procedure. Meaning – Objectives – Process-

Demand Forecasting- Marketing Information System – Strategic
marketing plan and organization – Changing marketing practices.

UNIT 6 Product Mix Management: Product planning and development –

Meaning and process – Test marketing – Product failures – Product
line management: Practices – Implications and Strategies for current
market condition.

UNIT 7 Product life cycles: Meaning and Stages – Strategies – Managing

PLC- Product-Market Integration: Strategies – Product positioning
– Diversification – Product line simplification – Planned
obsolescence – Branding Policies and Strategies – Packing.

UNIT 8 Price Mix Management: Pricing and pricing policies – Objectives –

Procedures – Bases for and Methods of price fixing. Cases for Free
Pricing, Administered and Regulated pricing – Pricing and product
life cycle

UNIT 9 Physical Distribution Mix: Types of physical Distribution -

Importance of Physical Distribution- Distribution channel policy –
Logistics Decisions – Methods – Strategic alliance for Logistic cost
reduction.
 UNIT 10 Marketing Channel system: Marketing channel decisions: Choice
considerations– Managing Conflict and Cooperation in channels –
Middlemen functions- Modern Trends in Retailing- Malls and
Online.

UNIT 11 Promotional Mix: Personal selling Vs. impersonal selling –

Personal selling – Process – Steps in selling – Management of sales
force – Recruitment and selection – Training – Compensation plans
– Evaluation of performance

UNIT 12 Integrated marketing communication Process: Advertising and sales

promotion – Online Sales promotional activities – Public
relationships – Direct marketing: Meaning, Nature, Growth and
Channels.

UNIT 13 Advertising: Importance – Objectives – Media planning and

selection – Factors influencing selection – Advertisement copy –
Layout – Evaluation of advertising – Advertising budget – Sales
promotion – Methods and practices.

UNIT 14 Competitor analyses: Identifying and analyzing the competitors –

Types of Competitors – Competitive strategies framing for leaders,
challengers, followers and nichers. Customer relationship
marketing: Customer data base, Data ware housing and data mining

REFERENCES

1. Etzel, Walker and Stanton, Fundamentals of Marketing, McGraw Hill,

2004
2. Philip Kotler & Gary Armstrong, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall,
2010.
3. Jerome Mccarthy, Basic Marketing, Richard D. Irwin.
4. Cundiff, Still &Govani, Fundamentals of Modern Marketing, Prentice
Hall.
5. Memoria & Joshi, Fundamental of Marketing.
6. Paul Peter and James Donnelly Jr, Marketing Management, McGraw-Hill,
2010.
7. William O. Bearden, Marketing: Principles & Perspectives, McGraw-Hill,
2006.
8. William Arens, et al, Contemporary Advertising, McGraw-Hill, 2008.
9. Perreault and McGarthy - Basic Marketing - Tata McGraw Hill, 2002\

10. Michael J Etzel, Bruce J Walker, William J Stanton and Ajay Pandit,
Marketing concepts and cases - TMH 13th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.
 32832 - FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Objectives:
 To help the students to know the basic concepts of financial management
 To understand capital structure, dividend policy and working capital
management.
 To learn the various concepts of financial management along with applications

UNIT 1 Introduction: Financial management: objectives - Concept,

nature, evaluation and significance – Finance Functions:
Managerial and operative – Role of Financial management in the
organization – Indian Financial system.

UNIT 2 Financial System: Legal and Regulatory frame work – Financial

Functions: Meaning and scope – Finance and Tax Management
Nexus- Tax Avoidance and Tax evasion- Tax incentive and
business decisions.

UNIT 3 Investment Function: Meaning and scope - Time value of Money

concepts and applications –Risk return relationship - Dividend
function – Risk return trade off – Management planning- Global
management environment

UNIT 4 Long-term Capital Resources: Equity and debt sources – Equity

share, preference shares – types of preference share - debentures
– types - sources of long-term capital.

UNIT 5 Capital Issues: Meaning, Nature, Purpose – Roles and

Guidelines of SEBI in capital issues- Bridge finance, loan
syndication, Book building – Borrowings from the term lending
institutions and International capital market- Tax considerations
in financing decision areas.

UNIT 6 Cost of Capital : Concept of cost of capital- Cost of debt, equity,

preference share capital, retaining earning - Weighted average
cost: EBIT –EPS Analysis- Tax, Capital structure and Value
nexus - Computation of overall cost of capital – Tax and cost of
capital.

UNIT 7 Capital structure: Determinates - Concept and Types- Optimum

capital structure – Theories of capital structure – Net income and
net operative income approach – M.M. Approach – Traditional
theory – Their assumptions – Significance and limitations –
Management leverage operating leverage – Combined leverage.

UNIT 8 Capital budgeting: Meaning, Nature and Types of Capital

Investment- Methods of appraisal under certainty conditions:
 PBP, ARR, IRR and NPV techniques - Basic and International
capital budgeting.

UNIT 9 Uncertainty and Risk models: Simulation Analysis- Sensitivity

analysis- Decision tree analysis- Certainty equivalent and risk-
adjusted return measures- Tax considerations in Investment
Decisions Cost of capital and Investment Decisions.
UNIT 10 Working Capital Management: Definitions and Objectives -
Concept and types – Determinants – Financing approaches –
Conservative approaches - Sources of working capital finance
Factors affecting working capital requirements- Working capital
financing by commercial banks – Types of assistance

UNIT 11 Inventories and receivables Management under conditions of

certainty and uncertainty – Operating cycle – Planning of funds
through the management of assets – Various techniques used.

UNIT 12 Cash and liquidity management: Credit Management and

evaluation alternative credit variables Methods and Functions-
Tax considerations in Remittances and Purchases.

UNIT 13 Dividend Theories: Valuation under Gordon and Walter theories

– Dividend irrelevance under M.M. Theory – Assumptions –
Limitations - Implications and contributions of theories in
financial decision making process.

UNIT 14 Dividend Policy: Types – Share valuation practices – Factors

affecting dividend decision – Tax considerations in dividend
decision when tax is levied at the hands of companies and
recipients.

REFERENCES

1. Brigham and Ehrhardt, Financial Management: Theory & Practice,

Thomson ONE, 2010
2. Brigham and Houston, Fundamentals of Financial Management,
Thomson ONE, 2009.
3. Van Horne: Fundamentals of Financial Management, Prentice Hall, 2008
4. Jeff Madura, International Financial Management,South-WesternCollege
Pub., 2010
5. Prasanna Chandra, Financial Management, McGraw Hill, 2008.
6. Khan and Jain, Financial Management ,Tata McGrawHill,2009
7. Pandey I M, Financial Management, Vikas Publishers,2009
8. Sheeba Kapil(2010), Financial Management, Pearson Education.
9. B J Camsey, Engene F.Brigham, “Introduction to Financial Management”,
The Gryden Press
 32833- INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS
Objectives:
 Compare alternative theories of international trade
 Analyze and test international trade models
 Evaluate the impact of tariffs and non-tariff barriers
 Estimate the impact of preferential trade arrangements
 Read and analyze the nation’s balance of payment
 Understand how a foreign exchange market operates
 Analyze international investment, banking, debt, and risk
 Explain financial crises in emerging economies, their causes and solutions

UNIT 1 Introduction: Important issues in international trade - History and present

state of world trade flows - Indian trade balance - History of the
development of trade theory

UNIT 2 Theories of International Trade: Absolute and comparative cost advantages

theories - Essentials: Ricardo and Comparative Advantage - The
Ricardian model of trade - Empirical evidence and policy results

UNIT 3 Factor Price Equalization and Trade: Hecksher-Ohlin model of trade -

Stolper-Samuelson effects - Rybczynski effects; Modern theories – Concepts
– principles – process and Different approaches- modern Vs Classical
theories – System approach – socio – technology approach and contingency/
situational approach

UNIT 4 BOT, BOP, Tariff & Non-Tariff: Balance of Trade - Balance of Payments -
Tariffs and Non-Tariff Barriers to Trade: Economics of Tariffs - Economics
of Quotas - Protection and Imperfect Competition.

UNIT 5 Who Wins and Who Loses from Trade? - The “Specific Factors” model of
trade - Redistribution aspect of trade policy - International experience; Terms
of trade: Concept- measures – Influencing factors – procedure and
techniques.

UNIT 6 Trade and development: Gains from trade – Trade as a substitute for growth
Theory of Immiserating growth – Free trade vs Protection – Trade Barriers.

UNIT 7 Market Imperfections and Trade: Imperfect Competition and trade -

Externalities and protectionism - Empirical evaluation of importance

UNIT 8 International Factor Movements: International Labor Mobility - International

Capital Flows - Multinational Firms and Direct Foreign Investment

UNIT 9 Government Intervention in Trade: Welfare arguments - Income Distribution

- Optimum Tariff; Exchange Rate: Determinants of Exchange Rate – Fixed
Rate Vs Floating Rate systems.

UNIT 10 International agency for trade and economics: International monetary system
 – IMF and International liquidity – World Bank and International Economics
Development

UNIT 11 Strategic Trade Policies: Technology and Externalities - Imperfect

Competition and Protection

UNIT 12 Development through Trade Policies - Import Substitution and Infant

Industry argument - Export-oriented development strategies - The East
Asian Miracle? Trade Blocks: NAFTA, ECM, and ASEAN.

UNIT 13 World Trade Organization & International trade negotiations: Preferential

Trading Arrangements, Custom Unions and Economic Integration - Free
trade agreements, customs unions - Trade creation vs trade diversion - Trade
policy in developing countries: import substitutions, export promotion -
International negotiations: GATT, WTO, Doha round.

UNIT 14 International Capital Flows: FDI and Portfolio Investments: Nature,

significance and trend – International Labour migration: types and factors
involved – Technology transfer: Need, Issues and Trend.

REFERENCES:
1. International Economics: Francis Cherunilam
2. The International Economy: P.T. Ellsworth
3. International economics: C.P. Kindlebergr&Bertil Ohlin
4. International and Interregional Trade: P.H. Lindert
5. The Theory of International Trade: G. Haberler
6. International Economics: J.Sidney Wells
7. International Economics: Ingo Walter
 32834- INTERNATIONAL MARKETING
Objectives
 To understand the concepts and function of marketing
 To gain a solid understanding of the theoretical and conceptual principles of
International marketing;
 To understand how to develop and manage a strategic international marketing
initiative.

UNIT 1 Introduction: Marketing Concept and Functions – Marketing Environment and system
– International dimensions of Marketing

UNIT 2 Marketing Concepts: Marketing Mix – Product Mix – Product strategies – New
Product Planning and Development - Market segmentation – Product positioning –
Product Life Cycle concept in global market context

UNIT 3 International Marketing Approaches: Ethno, Poly, Regio and Geo Centric ` approaches
- Scope and Challenge of International Marketing- Dynamic Environment of
International Trade Special issues on China & India

UNIT 4 Marketing Research: Emerging Markets - Market Behavior - Consumer Behavior –

Theories and Models - Consumer Behavior in the international context – Consumer
Decision making process.

UNIT 5 International Product Vs National Product: Product standardization Vs product

adaptation – National vs International Product – Marketing of services – Brand
decisions – Packaging

UNIT 6 Pricing for international marketing: Price mix – Pricing decisions – pricing strategies –
dumping - International transfer pricing – Countertrade – price quotation – financing
and payment.

UNIT 7 Planning for international marketing: Global Marketing Management - Planning and
Organization - Products and Services for Consumers

UNIT 8 Promotion: Promotion mix – Personal selling – publicity – sales promotion - Overseas
product exhibitions & trade fairs - Advertising – Advertising media – International
Advertising.

UNIT 9 Marketing Channel: International Marketing Channels - Distribution mix – Direct and
indirect channels – Types of intermediaries in the international market – Channel
Development – Channel Adaptation – Channel decisions. International

UNIT 10 MIS & Communication medium: Marketing Information System - Integrated

Marketing Communications and International Advertising

UNIT 11 Negotiation and sales: Personal Selling and Sales Management – Managing Sales force
– Negotiations in international business

UNIT 12 Competitor analysis: Michael porter model – analyzing competitor cost, price and
offers – Counter competitor strategy
UNIT 13 CRM: Function: Challenges – Scope – Significance - Marketing automation through
CRM – Geology technology or location based service

UNIT 14 Managing the total international marketing effort: Trends in company organization –
Marketing organization – Marketing Implementation – Evaluation and Control

REFERENCES:
1. International Marketing, Analysis & Strategy: SakOnkvisit& John J Shaw
2. Global Marketing Management: Keegan
3. Marketing Analysis, Planning & Control: Philip Kotler
4. Fundamentals of Marketing: Stanton
5. International Marketing: Philip R. Catero
 32835- EXPORT MANAGEMENT AND DOCUMENTATION
Objective:
 To Understand about Export Process and Procedure followed in India.
 To know the role of functions of export.
 To understand the framework and documentation of export management.

UNIT 1 Introduction: Export Documentation – Framework – Standardized Pre-

shipment Export Documents – Commercial and Regulatory Documents.

UNIT 2 Export credit instruments and Procedures: Mode of Payment – Export credits:
types – Documents required for export credit.

UNIT 3 Shipment of Export cargo: By sea, by air and by post – Procedure – and
Documents required for shipment of cargo

UNIT 4 Transport Documents – Financial Documents – Commercial Documents -

Procedure and documentation.

UNIT 5 Export incentives under EXIM Policy – EPCG scheme – Duty drawback –
Central excise and sales tax exemption

UNIT 6 Exemption of export profit from Income Tax – Procedure for availing export
incentives – Documents required for export incentives

UNIT 7 Direction of India’s exports: Thrust Products and destinations – Product

selection – Destination determination – Agents allocation

UNIT 8 Cargo insurance – Marine Insurance – Institute cargo clauses – specific

Policy – open policy – procedure for cargo insurance

UNIT 9 Risk covering Documents: Insurance Policy, Insurance Cover Note -

Procedure for marine insurance claims – Necessary documents for filing
claim.

UNIT 10 Export credit insurance – services of Export Credit and Guarantee

Corporation in export credit insurance

UNIT 11 Specific Policy and Small Exporters Policy – Guarantees – Procedure for
availing credit insurance and necessary documents.

UNIT 12 Role and functions of Export Promotion Councils, Commodity Boards,

Directorate of commercial Intelligence and Statistics

UNIT 13 Indian Trade Promotion Organization, Indian Institute of Foreign Trade and
Director General of Foreign Trade – Role of Export Processing Zones,
Special Economic zones and 100% Export Oriented units.

UNIT 14 Central Excise and Customs clearances of export cargo – Procedure and
documents – Export Promotion Schemes
REFERENCES:
1. IIFT Background Papers on “Export Procedures & Documentation”.
2. Exporters Encyclopaedia Dun &Bradstrect.N.Y.
3. Indian Carriage of Goods by Air Act
4. Foreign Exchange Manual, RBI
5. Quality Control and Pre-shipment Inspection for exports, S.Ramakrishna et-al., Exim
Bank Publications.
 32841- INTERNATIONAL MARKETING LOGISTICS
Objective:
 To know the basic concepts and scope of marketing logistics
 To understand the function and development in transportation in logistics
 To understand various international logistics modes and methods.

UNIT 1 Marketing Logistics System: Concept, objective and scope –Challenges –

Current issues and Cost approaches

UNIT 2 Marketing Logistics System: importance and relevance to export marketing

management – supply chain management.

UNIT 3 Transportation: In-land and Ocean transportation – characteristics of

shipping transport – liner operations and tramp operations

UNIT 4 Organization and functions of Tranchart - International supply chain

management and logistics - Transportation activity–internal transportation,
inter-state goods movement - Concept of customer service

UNIT 5 Conference system – freight structure and practice – Multi-model Transport

system – MTD Vs CTD.

UNIT 6 Role of intermediaries – Functions and services of clearing and forwarding

agents, freight brokers, stevedores, shipping agents and surveyors.

UNIT 7 Port – Types of Port – Structural and cargo handling facilities – Warehousing
and storage imports – Alternative Warehousing

UNIT 8 Demurrage – Definition – merits – scope - Characteristics loading and

unloading in warehouses

UNIT 9 Chartering principles and practices – Arrangement for shipment of Cargo –

Bill of Lading – Mate receipt

UNIT 10 Technological developments in ocean transportation – containerization –

Standards & Standardized Dimensions

UNIT 11 Concept – house stuffing – terminal stuffing and stripping – container

freight – types of containers

UNIT 12 Inland container depots – Problems and prospects; Inland container handling
technique – International container terminal service

UNIT 13 International Air Transport – international set up for air transport – standards
– certification – maintenance – safety and security systems – ATC

UNIT 14 IATA TACT rules – Air freight rates – Air transport problems and prospects
– Warehousing in airline transportation – tariff and exchange rate in airway
transportation
REFERENCES:
1. Shipping Cartels : Daniel Marx Jr.
2. Chartering Practice : J. Bes
3. Physical Distribution : Magee
4. Dictionary of Shipping & Chartering Terms : IIFT
 32842- FOREIGN EXCHANGE MANAGEMENT
Objective:
 To know the strategies and contracts of foreign exchange
 To understand the concept and significance of foreign exchange
 To understand the role of foreign exchange in trade negotiation

UNIT 1 Foreign Exchange: Concept and Significance – meaning – scope- nature – Challenges –
Legal aspects – Forex markets.

UNIT 2 Foreign change Rate: Direct and indirect quotations – Interbank and Merchant rates –
Spot rates and forward rates

UNIT 3 T.T. rates – Cross rates; Computation – Foreign exchange markets – Organisation of
forex market.

UNIT 4 Determination of Exchange Rate: Purchasing Power Parity theory – Interest rate parity
theory – Flow model – Asset market model

UNIT 5 Forecasting of exchange rates – Concepts of Nominal Effective Exchange Rate and Real
effective Exchange rate.

UNIT 6 Forward exchange contracts: Types – Forward exchange rate computation – Factors
affecting forward rates

UNIT 7 Forward contracts - Definition - Meaning -strategies – trading techniques - trading

members- Cancellation – Settlement – Contract conditions and scope.

UNIT 8 Options – Definition - Meaning -strategies – trading techniques - contracts: mechanism

and settlement- Types of options.

UNIT 9 Foreign exchange risk management: Transaction exposure risk: Internal Strategies – Risk
shifting, Risk sharing – Exposure netting and offsetting

UNIT 10 External Strategies: Foreign currency options – Forward and money market hedge –
Currency Swaps – Interest Rate Swaps.

UNIT 11 Risk management – Definition – measurement – hedging tools and techniques - - Types
of risk - Economic Exposure risk – Inflating and exchange risk

UNIT 12 Economic consequences of Exchange rate changes – managing economic exposure risk –
Tools for hedging against exchange rate variation

UNIT 13 Exchange management in India: Fixed and fling rates – Rupee convertibility –
NOSTRO, VOSTRO and LORO Accounts – Exchange control measures: Need and
Forms and relevance – Foreign Exchange Reserves

UNIT 14 India: Trend, composition and management – Impact on exchange Rate – Monetary and
fiscal policy initiatives for exchange rate management.
REFERENCES:
1. Multinational Financial Management : Alan C Shapiro
2. ABC of Foreign Exchange : Clare G. Gump
3. Guide to Foreign Exchange Regulations : Krishnamoorthy.S
4. Principles of Foreign Exchange: Chatterjee.A.K.
5. Foreign Exchange – Practice, Concepts and control: Jeevanadam.N.S.
6. Foreign Exchange Management : Rajwadi
7. Rupee Convertibility : BibekDebroi
 32843- MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES OF MNCs
Objective:
 To know the concept and factors are MNCs
 To distinguish functions and operations of MNCs over international and global business
 To understand the strategies and planning of MNCs

UNIT 1 Concepts of MNCs – Emergence and growth of MNCs – Process of internationalization

– Types of MNCs

UNIT 2 Factors behind growth of MNCs – Problems and benefits from MNCs – Special
Problems of MNCs.

UNIT 3 Strategic Management of MNCs – SWOT Analysis – components of Strategies – Levels

of Strategies

UNIT 4 Corporate level strategies - business level strategies - functional level strategies –
Operational level strategies

UNIT 5 Ownership Strategy of MNCs – International Joint Ventures – International Strategic

Alliances – Foreign subsidiary

UNIT 6 Mergers and acquisition. Concept, process, problems, prospects and patterns of each
form – Case Studies.

UNIT 7 Strategic Planning in MNCs – Concept of Strategic Planning – Need – Focus modes –
Planning for expansion

UNIT 8 Planning for competitive advantage and market leadership - Planning for core –
competence – Environmental scanning and planning – Case Studies.

UNIT 9 Organizational strategies of MNCs – Organizational theories applicable to MNCs –

Structure of MNCs

UNIT 10 American, European and Japanese organizational designs of MNCs – Designing

appropriate strategy

UNIT 11 Organizational aspects of Integration of subsidiaries – International, global business Vs

MNCs – Concept, Scope, Significance.

UNIT 12 Strategic adaptation to local conditions – MNC culture – Challenges among different
industries – Challenges within industries

UNIT 13 Business Ethics – Issues – international and domestic level – Implementation – law and
regulation - Social responsibility.

UNIT 14 Conflict in MNCs – Sources and types of conflicts – Role of International agency –
Ethical issues in MNCs business – Ethical decision making
REFERENCES:
1. International Business : S. Shiva Ramu
2. Management : Griffin
3. International Business : James H Taggart
4. Strategic Management – Strategy formulation and implementation : John A
Pearce II & Richard B Robinnson
5. Strategic Planning for Corporate Success : V.S. Ramasamy& S. Namakumari
6. Cases in Strategic Management : S.B. Budhiraja& M.B. Athreya.
 32844 - WTO – CONSTITUTION AND OPERATION
Objective:
 To know the frame work and trade on WTO
 To understand the concept of world trade organization
 To understand its functions and role in international trade

UNIT 1 WTO Frame Work: Principle of WTO Trading Systems – Overview of Trade Rounds &
decisions and agreement

UNIT 2 GATT – WTO: Establishment Agreement – Key subjects in WTO – WTO members and
privileges – Articles of WTO – Ministerial conferences.

UNIT 3 Trade in Goods: Basic Principles – Quantitative Restrictions – Tariff binding and
schedule of concession

UNIT 4 Regional trading agreements and WTO – Special and Differential Treatment for
Developing Countries.

UNIT 5 Agreement on Agriculture: Market Access – Sanitary and Phytosanitary (SPS) measures
– Tariff Binding – Trade Distorting subsidies – Export Subsidy – Technical Barriers to
Trade (TBT) – TBT Vs SPS – Agreement on SPS and TBT.

UNIT 6 Agreement on Subsidies and Countervailing Measures (SCM): Concept – Types of

subsidies – Articles of agreement on SCM – Agreement on Anti-dumping.

UNIT 7 Customs Valuation: Rules of customs valuation – Agreement on Pre-shipment Inspection

– Agreement on Rules of origin – Agreement on Import Licensing Procedure.

UNIT 8 Trade in Services: General Agreement on Trade in services (GATS) – GATT and GATS
– Services supply – General obligation – Articles of agreement.

UNIT 9 Trade Related Aspects if Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS): Scope of TRIPS – Basic
Principles – Minimum Standards – Enforcement and TRIPS – Agreement on TRIPS.

UNIT 10 Dispute Settlement System (DSS): Elements of DSS – Rules & Procedure – Dispute
settlement.

UNIT 11 Agreement on Trade Related Investment Measures (TRIMs): Scope of TRIMs – National
Treatment – permitted exceptions

UNIT 12 TRIMs disputes – Committee on TRIMs.- Exceptional provisions – Legal frame work –
TPRM – Agreement on TPRM

UNIT 13 Emerging Issue: Trade Labour – Movement of natural person – Trade & environment

UNIT 14 Trade facilitation – Govt. Procurement – Trade and Competition policy – Technology
transfer and trade.

REFERENCES
1. WTO in the Third Millennium : Arun Goyal
 32845 - MULTINATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Objective:
 To know the concept of multinational financial management
 To understand the cash operation management of Multinational firm
 To learn to estimate and evaluate Risk and return trade off.

UNIT 1 Concept of multinational financial management – Functions – Risk Return

trade off – Aspects of multinational financial environment and system

UNIT 2 Global financial markets. - Foreign Direct Investment by MNCs – Need,

strategy and opportunities – Economic and political risk

UNIT 3 Planning – operating policies to deal with risk. - Capital budgeting: Basics –
NPV – IRR – Increment Cash flows

UNIT 4 Parent Vs Project Cash flows Taxes – Exchange rate changes and inflation –
transfer Pricing – APV and CAPM.Working Capital Management of MNCs

UNIT 5 International Cash management: Objectives Functions – Techniques: Netting

– Leading and Lagging – Intercompany loans – Transfer pricing

UNIT 6 Working Capital Management - Cash Planning and budgeting – Management

of Short term Investment Portfolio

UNIT 7 Receivables Management: Credit policy variables: Standards – period –

Discount – Collection effort – Credit extension - Exchange rate implications

UNIT 8 Exposure of global financial markets - globalization of the economy - The

liberalization of international markets - national economic environment on
financial management of enterprises.

UNIT 9 Inventory management – Concepts and tools – Risk and Uncertainty Models
– Off shore production Vs Local Purchase.

UNIT 10 International financing: Long Term Financing: Equity Instruments:

International Depository Receipts and Direct equity participation

UNIT 11 Dept Instruments: Bonds Notes and Syndicated loans - Dividend policy of
the company - Financial risks and their moderation - Management of
business risk. Analysis, measurement and evaluation of business risk

UNIT 12 Short term financing: Sources – Euro notes and Euro commercial paper Inter
firm financing methods.

UNIT 13 Cost of Capital: Cost of equity – Cost of debt – Cost of back – to - back
financing - International flow of funds - International financial markets.

UNIT 14 Overall cost of Capital structure of MNC: Theory, Practice and determinants
– Debt Vs Equity Flow analysis.
REFERENCES:
1. Multinational Financial Management: Shapiro.A.C.
2. International financial Management : Rodrigule and Carter
3. International Business Finance : Wood.D, Byrne.J
4. International Capital Markets : Watson, Marwell
3. DURATION OF THE PROGRAMME

The course shall consist of two academic years divided into four semesters

4. Faculty and Support Staff Requirements

This programme requires the following faculty and supporting staffs

Staff Category Required

Core Faculty * 3
Faculty for Specialization* 2
Clerical Assistant 1

*At least Assistant Professor Level (Either permanent or part time)

5. Instructional Delivery Mechanism

Each semester there will be one contact programme of 80 hours duration in theory.
The SLM (Self Learning Material) will be supplied to the students in print form as
well as in CD form. The face to face contact sessions of the programme for theory
courses will be held at the head quarter/ learning centers. The conduct of end
semester examinations, evaluation and issuance of certificates will be done by
office of the Controller of examinations, Alagappa University, Karaikudi.

F) PROCEDURE FOR ADMISSION, CURRICULUM

TRANSACTION, AND EVALUATION

Procedure of Admission
A candidate who has passed any Bachelor Degree from a recognized University
in the Pattern of 10+2+3 shall be permitted to appear and qualify for the
programme.
Curriculum Transactions:

The class room teaching would be through conventional lecture, use of OHP, power
point presentation and novel innovative teaching ideas like television and computer
aided instruction. Student seminars would be arranged to improve their awareness
and communicative skill.
Face to face contact session will be conducted as given in below table.

Course Type Face to Face Contact

Session/semester (in Hours)

5 Theory courses with 4 credits 80

Total 80

Evaluation
The examinations shall be conducted for theory to assess the knowledge
acquired during the study. There shall be two systems of examinations viz., internal
and external examinations. In the case of theory courses, the internal evaluation
shall be conducted as Continuous Internal Assessment via. Student assignments
preparation. The internal assessment shall comprise of maximum 25 marks for each
course. The end semester examination shall be of three hours duration to each
course at the end of each semester. The end semester examinations shall comprise
of maximum of 75 marks for each course. The candidate failing in any course(s)
will be permitted to appear for each failed course(s) in the subsequent examination.
f. 3.2. Distribution of Marks in Continuous Internal Assessments:
The following procedure shall be followed for awarding internal marks for theory courses

Component Marks

Assignments(2) 25
(12.5+12.5)
Total 25

Question paper pattern (Theory)

 The question paper carries a maximum of 75 marks.

 The question paper consists of three sections namely Part-A, Part-B and Part-C.
 Part-A consists of 10 questions of 2 marks each (10 x 2 = 20 marks)
with no choice. The candidate should answer all questions.
 Part-B consists of 5 either or choice questions. Each question carries
5 marks (5 x 5=25 marks).
 Part-C consists of 5 questions. Each question carries 10 marks.
The candidate should Answer any three questions (10 x 3 = 30
marks).
Passing minimum

 There shall be no Passing Minimum for Internal.

 For External Examination, Passing Minimum shall be of 50% (Fifty

Percentage) of the maximum marks (75) prescribed for the paper.

 In the aggregate (External + Internal) the passing minimum shall be of 50

Mark for each Paper
 Grading shall be based on overall marks obtained (internal + external).

Candidate who does not obtain the required minimum marks for a pass in a course
shall be required to appear and pass the same at a subsequent appearance.

Marks and Grades:

The following table gives the marks, grade points, letter, grades and classification
to indicate the performance of the candidate.

Range of Marks Grade Points Letter Grade Description

90-100 9.0-10.0 O Outstanding

80-89 8.0-8.9 D+ Excellent
75-79 7.5-7.9 D Distinction
70-74 7.0-7.4 A+ Very Good
60-69 6.0-6.9 A Good
50-59 5.0-5.9 B Average
00-49 0.0 U Re-appear
ABSENT 0.0 AAA ABSENT

Ci = Credits earned for the course i in any semester

Gi = Grade Point obtained for course i in any semester.
n refers to the semester in which such courses were credited

For a semester;

Grade Point Average [GPA] = ∑iCiGi/ ∑i Ci

Grade Point Average = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of
the courses Sum of the credits of the courses in a
semester
For the entire programme;

Cumulative Grade Point Average [CGPA] = ∑n ∑iCniGni/ ∑n ∑iCni

CGPA = Sum of the multiplication of grade points by the credits of the entire

programme Sum of the credits of the courses for the entire

programme

CGPA Grad Classification of Final

Result

9.5-10.0 O+ First Class- Exemplary*

9.0 and above but below 9.5 O

8.5 and above but below 9.0 D++ First Class with
Distinction*
8.0 and above but below 8.5 D+
7.5 and above but below 8.0 D

7.0 and above but below 7.5 A++ First Class

6.5 and above but below 7.0 A+
6.0 and above but below 6.5 A

5.5 and above but below 6.0 B+ Second Class

5.0 and above but below 5.5 B

0.0 and above but below 5.0 U Re-appear

*The candidates who have passed in the first appearance and within the
prescribed semester of the PG Programme are eligible.

Maximum duration for completion of the course

The maximum duration for the programme shall not exceed five years after the completion
of the minimum duration of the programme.

Commencement of this regulation

These regulations shall come into effect from the academic year 2018-19 for
students who are admitted to the first year of the course during the academic year
2018-19.
Fee structure

Sl. No. Fees Detail Amount in Rs.

First Year Second Year

1 Admission Processing Fees 300.00 -

2 Course Fees 13200.00 13200.00

3 ICT Fees 150.00 150.00

TOTAL 13650.00 13350.00

G) REQUIREMENT OF THE LIBRARY

RESOURCES: LIBRARY RESOURCES

The Central Library is one of the important central facilities of Alagappa University. It has text
book, reference books, conference proceedings, back volumes, standards, and non-
book material such as CD-ROMs and audios. The central Library procured several
e-books in different areas. The library also subscribes to about 250 current
periodicals. The Directorate of Distance Education of Alagappa University has
adequate number of copies of books related to Management Programme.

COST ESTIMATE OF THE PROGRAMME AND THE PROVISIONS:

Sl. No. Nature of Expenditure Amount in Rs.

(Approx.)
1 Programme Development 10,00,000/-
2 Programme Delivery 20,00,000/-
3 Programme Maintenance 3,00,000/-

i) QUALITY ASSURANCE MECHANISM AND EXPECTED

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES

 The feedback from students on teaching will be collected every semester

using standard formats.
 Feedback on the curriculum will also be collected from the experiences of
the students which help teachers in fine tuning of deliverables in the
classroom.
 It helps in improving the standard of teaching as expected by the students.
 Exit survey feedback on various parameters to improve and quality of the
programme and support services like course material, library and
infrastructure.
 It helps to Strengthen the contents of the program to meet the requirements
of the employment market and keep the curriculum as a treasure of
knowledge.
 This programme provides opportunities for students to develop and
demonstrate knowledge and understanding, skills, qualities and other
attributes.

****